AlIS~MINn llVlS VlIHJIM (J~ _,w'iU - WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY The Me t ropolitan Adunrrtage Undergraduate Catalog 1999-2000 Wichita State University 1845 Fairmowlt Wichita, Kansas 67260 (316) 978-7000 www.wichita.edu Contents AcadeDlic CaJendar ....................................... ......... ........ ..... .......... .. ....................... .... .... .. . 4 General fnformation ..... ...................... ...... ..... ........... ............... .... ......... ............ .. ............. . 5 Academic Officers .............. ........ .................................. ... ............... .. ... ..... .... .. .... .. .. .... .... 5 University Profile .... ......... ...... ..................... ........ ... .. .. ..... ...... ....... ........ ....... ............... ... . 5 History .:................. ....... .... .. ............................................. ......... .... .. ..... .......... ................. 6 Admission to WichIta State ... .. .. ........... .. .............. ..................... ........ .. ............... ... ....... 11 AcatieDlic Advising .................. ............... .... .. ...... ...... .... ... ...... ........ ................... ............ 14 Universily Advising Center .............. .... .. .................... ... ............ .. .................. .......... 14 Academic !nfonnation ..... .. .. .. .... .... ..... ... ... ............................... ...................................... 15 Emory Lindquist Honors Program ............ .... ...... .. ... .. ........ .... ....... .. .. .. ... .. .............. 19 General Ed ucation Program ...... .......... .................... ..................... ......... ... ............... 23 Specia l Acad Dlic Areas ....... ... ........................ ............ .. ... .... ....... .................................. 27 Cooperative Education rogranl ....... .......................... ...... ......... ... .. .. ........... .......... 27 Graduate School ........ ...... .................... ... ....... ........... ............. ....... ........ ..................... 23 Financial [nfonnation ............ .. .... ....... ................ ........... ........ ................... .... ..... .... ........ 29 Endowment As odation .. ... ... ...... .. ... ........................... ........... .. .................................... 33 Student Affairs .................. ..... ... ........... .. .................................................. ........ ........ .... .. .. 37 Special Programs ..... ................... .. .. ....................................... ............... .. ........... .... .. ....... 38 Sp cial Facilities .. ...................... ....... .... .................. .. ........... ... ............. .................. .......... 42 Student Organizations .... ... .. ...... ............ ...... .. .... .............. ................... ....... .. .................. -l5 W. Frank Barton School of Business College Policies and Programs ............ .... ..... .. ............................................ .. ...... ...... ... . 4 College of Education College of Engineering College of Fine Axts Business Administration-GeneraI ........ ........ ..... .. .. ...... .. ... .. .. ..................................... 56 Executive Ma ter of Business Administration ....... .. .. .. .... .. ........ ...... ...... ................... 56 Accowltin .. ...... ...... ..... .. ...... .... .. ....... ....... ... ........ ... .... ... .. .... .... ........ .. ..... ............... .......... 56 Busilless Law .................. ............ ..... .... ..................... .. .. .... ... ..... .. .... .. ............ ............. ..... 57 Decision Sciences .. ........... ............ ..... ....... ... .. ...................................... ...... .............. .. ...... 58 Economics .......... .. ..................... .. ................ ...... ...... .. .... .. .......... ... ............. ................... .... 59 EntrepreneUTShip ..... .............. . ............. ............. .... ................ . .......... ....... ..... .......... . ... .... 6 Finance ... ... ........... ................... ....... .... ... .. ............... .. ....... ... ............ .. ................... .... ........ . 61 Human Resource Management ................. ...... ... .. ...... ............... .. ................... ..... ......... 62 lnt mational Business ... ............ .... ....... ............. .................................. .. .. .. ..... ....... ......... 63 Legal Assistant ............ ...... .. ....................... .. ............ .. ...... .... ......... .... .. .. ......................... . 63 Management ... .. .. ... ... .. ....... ...... ... ... .... ........................... ....................... .. .......... .. ........ ..... 64 Management [nfonnation Systems ........... ............... .... .. .......... .................................... 65 Marketing .............. . .................... .... ........ .. ... .... ... ... ... .. ...... ....... .. ... ... .................. ........ .. .... 65 Real Estate ................................ ... ...... ... ...... .. .. .. ..... ................. .... ............ .. .... .. ............. .. .. 66 College P tides and Programs ... ... .. ...... ..................... ... .. .. ... .. ...... .. ..... ........... .. ... .. . ...... 67 Administration, Counseling, Educational, and School Psychology ...................... 71 Commul1lcative Disorders and Sciences ....................... .. .. ......... ... ............................. 74 CUrriCuJun.1 and Instruction ..... .................. ...... .. ..... ... .. ........... .......... ... .. ..... ... ............. .. 79 Kinesiology and Sport Studies ... ...... ..... .............. ......... ........ .. .. .................................... 84 College Polict and Pr grams .................... ........................ .. ... ........ ..... .. .... ................. 89 Engineering--General Educali.on ............. .... ......................... .. ............. ............. .......... 91 Aer pace Engineering .. ..... ... .... ................................. .. ............. ................................... 91 Electrical and omputer Engineering ............ .. .. .. ....... .. .. ................. .. .... ....... .............. 94 Industrial and Manufacturing Engineering ........ .. ............. .. .................... .. .. ............. 97 Mechanical Engineering ............... .. .. .......... ............................. .. ......... ............ ........ ....... 101 C liege P !ides and Programs ........... ... ......... ......... ........ .... ... ... .. .. ......... ........ .. .. ........ .. 106 Fine Arts--General ........ .... .. ............... .. .... ...... ........................ .. .............................. ........ 107 School of Art and Design ... ....... ........ ... .. .. .. ..... .. .. ..... .. .. .. .. .... .... .......... .. ...... .. ................. 107 Art History .. ...... .. ..... ........ .................. ........ ..... .. . .......... ....... ...... ......... ............. ....... .. .. 109 raphic Design .......... .......... .... ............. ...... .. .. ........ ..... ....... .. ............. .. .. ... .. .. ............ . 110 Studio rt ................................................. ........ .. ........... .. .......... ....... .. .... .............. .... .. 112 Art Education ...... ....... .. ... .. ......... .. .. ............. ...... .. .... .. ........... ................... .. ... ..... ......... 115 School of Music ....... .. .......................................................... .. ............. .. ... ........................ 11 7 MUSIC Education .. ................ . ...................... ..................................................... .. .. ...... 121 Music Performance .. ...................... ............ ,............. ...... .. ........... . ...... ....... .. ..... .. ..... .. 123 Musicology omposition ..................... ............ .. ............................................ .. ... ..... 125 School of Performing Arts .... .. ... .. ...... . ...... ................... .. ........ ... .. ................... .. .. .. ......... 127 Dance ................................... ................... ................ .................. .... .. ........... ... ...... ........ 127 9009521Theatre ........ ...... .. .. ... ..... ................................. ........ ............. ..... .... .. .. ........... ... .... ....... .. 12 College of Health Professions College Policies and Programs .. ............... .. ... ......... ............................ .. ... ......... ... ... .... . 132 Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences Communication, Elliott School of ...... .. .. ...... ...... ....... ............. .. .... ..... ......... ......... ...... ... 1 Z Interdisciplinary Liberal Arts aIld Sciences .............. ........ .. .................... .. .. ....... ....... 19: University Faculty .. .... .... .. .. ............. .. ............. ............... .... ................ ........... .... .. ........... .. . 22' Degrees and Academic Majors .. .......... .... .... ........ ........................... .... ....... jnside back cover School of Health Sciences.......... ... .. .... ...................... ......... ...... .............. .................. .. ..... 133 Dental Hygiene .................... ...... ..... ... .............. .. .. ... .................... ..... ...... ....... .. .... ..... .. 134 Health Professions-General ...... ........... .. ...... .. .... .. ... ... .... ............. ............ ... .. ........ .. .. 135 Medical Technology .... .. ........ ...... ................... ... ......... ............. .......... ............ ............ 136 Physical Therapy .. .. ....... ...... .. ..... ......... .. ............. ..... .. ... ... ..... ................ .. ..... ............ .. 13 Physical Therapist Assistant .... .. .. .. .............. .. .......................... ....... . ..... .. ...... ..... . 138 Physician Assistant ..... .......... ..... .......... .. ..... .. ...... ........... ............ .. .. ....... ... .. ........ ....... 141 Public Health Sciences ..... .... .. .. .. ... ............ .. ......... .. .......... ...... ............ ..... .. ........ .... .... 144 Health Services Organization and Policy ....... .... ....... ............... ................. .. ...... 144 Basic Emergency Medical Care ..... ......... .. ...... ........ .... ..... ....... ..... ................. .. .. .. 148 Mobile Intensive Care Technicians ...... ............. ....... ............ .... .... .. .................... 148 School of Nursing .................... ........... ...... .... ............ ................ ... .. .............. .... ... ..... ....... 149 CoUege Policies and Programs .... ...... ...... .. ..... .. ............. . ..... .............. ..... ... .. .. ..... .......... 156 Anthropology .. .. ....... ................ .. .. ....... ........ ......... ........... .............. .. ..... .. ......... ... .... ........ 161 Biological Sciences .... ....... ... ....................... ....... .. .. .. .......... ..... ...... .......... ........ .... .... ...... .. 164 Chenlistry .......... .......... ....... ... ...... .. .. .... ... ... ... ...... ........ ......... ....... .. .... ..... .... ...... .. ..... ......... 168 Com pu ter Science .......... ............. .......... ............. ... ........... .... .. .......... ....... ....... .. ... ..... ... ... 177 Econontics ..... ... ........ .... ................. ..... ..... ...... ... .. ... .... .... .... .. .... ... ..... ... .. ... .. .. ........... ... ....... 181 EnglisJl Language and Literature ....... ..... ...... ................... .. .. ... .............. ......... ........ ..... 182 Geography ......... ....... .. ....... ..... ..... ................... ...... ......... .. ...... ... .. .. .................. .......... .. ..... 186 Geology........ .......... ........ ............ .... .... ....... .. .. .... ......... . ........ ......... ....... ........ ... .... .. ............ ]86 l-listory ......... ....... ... ........ .... .... ..... .. ........... ... ............. .................... ...... ...... .. ................... ... 190 Linguisti cs .. ......................... , ... ................... ......... .... ...... .. .. ...... ... ...... .. ...... .. ...... ..... .... .... .. 194 Mathematics and Statistics ..... ..................... ... .. ... .. .......... ........ ... ...... ...... ..... ............. ..... 195 Modem and Classical Languages and Literatures ........ .... ........ .. .............. .. ..... ......... 199 Philosophy ... .. .. ........ ...... .. .......... ......... .. ...... ........ ........... ... ...................... ........... ... ........... 203 PhYSics ............. ... . ............... .. .... .. ..... .. ...... .. ....... .... .. ....... .. .... ............. ........... ........ ......... ... 205 Political Science ... ... .. ................. .... .... ...... .... ............... .............. ............ .. .. .. ...... ... ........... 207 Psychology .......... . ......... . ............. ....... .... .. .... .. .... .............. .................. .... ....... ... ....... ..... ... 209 Religion ......... ........... .................. ... .... .. ................ ........ ............... ....... ............ ...... .. .... .. .... . 213 Sociology ......... ...... ........ ... .............. ... ...... ... .... .. ... ..... .. .............. ............................... .. ...... 215 Urban and Public Affairs, Hugo WaJI School oL ......... ........ .. ... .. ... .. ... .................. .. .. 21 7 Criminal Justice .. .......... .. ...... ..... ....... ... ......... ...... ......... .. ...... ..... .. .... .. ............. ...... ...... 218 Gerontology ..... .... .. ...... ......... .. .... ...... .. ............ .. ............ ............ .. ........... .. ............ .... .. 220 Minority Studies ................. .. .... .. . ........... ........... .. ........ ....... ................... .................... 222 Public Administration .. .. ............ ..... ... .......... ........ ........ .. .. ... .... ..... .. .... ... .......... ......... 223 Social Work ........ .. .... .. ...................... .. ...... ....... .. ......... .. .... ... .. ...... .................... ...... ..... 224 Women's Studies ......... ....... ......................... .... ... ... ...... ......... , ....... ... ................. ...... ... ..... 226 Key to Course Descriptions .... ......... . h............ .. .............. ........ .... ...... .... ....... .. ............. .... 241 Campus Map .... ........................... ...... .......... ........ .. ..... ....... .. .. ............... .............. ... ..... ... ..... 242 Index ........... .... .. ............ .... .... .. ........... .. ........... .......... ... ...... ... ...... ............. ................... ........ 244 Accreditation ... ............... ....... . ............ .... ....... ........... .... .......... .. ....... ...... .... ................. ...... .. 248 Undergraduate Catalog 1999-2000 This catalog is a guide for informa tion only and is not a contract. This catalog becomes effective Fall Semester 1999 and extends thr ough the Summer Session 2000. The official University address is Wichi ta State University, 1845 Fainnount, Wichita, Kansas 67260. The general University telephone number is (316) 978-3456. For admission information, call toll-free (800) 362-2594. The University's World Wide Web address is www.wichita.ed.u The Un iversilv reserves the right to change ....ny of the rules and regul.~tions of the Universily at any time, induding thDSt' relating to ndntisslon, instrudlon, and graduation . The right to withdraw curricula and spl>O.hc c"urses, ~It"r .Olil5f' content, dl,mgc the calendar. and impose Or increase fees simUnrly IS reserved. All ~'\Jch -.hanges aree£(ective ~ t ~urh lime:. as U, 4? p reper au thorities determine and may apply not only It) prospective tudellts but also to tho"" who already are enrolled in the University. Academic Calendar for 1999-2000 Fall Semester 1999 Aug. 16-21 ........ .. .. ........ .... ...... Fall semester registration Aug. 23 .. .... .... ......... .. ............... Weekday and evening classes begin Sept 6 ...................................... Labor Day, holiday Oct. lS.... ..................................Midterm point Oct. 29.................. .. .................. Final date for withdrawal with nonpenalty grades Nov. 19-Jan. 9 ................ ......... Telephone registration period for pring semester (exact dates published in the Schedule of Courses ) Nov. 24-28 .... .. ......... .. .. ........ ....Thanksgiving recess Dec. 9 ......... .. ... ... ....... ........... ....La t day of classes Dec. 10 .. ............................ ....... Study Day Dec. 11-17 ................................ Final examinations Dec. 18 ...................... .. ............. Fall semester ends Spring Semester 2000 Jan. 10-15 .. ........................... ... .5pring seme ter registration Jan. 17 ...................................... Martin Luther King, Jr. Day, holiday Jan . 18 .................................... ..Classes begin March 10 .. ............................... Midterm point March 20-26 ............................ Spring reee s March 31 ........................ ......... Final date for withdrawal with nonpenalty grades April 16-Aug. 5 .... ... .... .... ... .. ..Telephone registration period for fall semester (exact dates published in the Schedule of Courses) May 8....................................... Last day of classes May 9 ....................................... Study Day May 10-16 ................................ Final examinations May 14 ................ .... ................. Commencement May] 7 ............... ...................... Spring semester ends Summer Semester 2000 May 22-June 2 ......................... Presession and workshops May 29 ..... .. ............................. . Memorial Day, holiday May O-June 2 ... ...................... Summer Se sion registration June 5 ....................................... Classes begin, first four-week term and eight-week term June 30 ... .. .. ... .. ... .. .. .................. Last day of first four-week term Registration for second fOUI-week term July 3 ........................................ 0asse begin, second four-week term July 4 ........................................ Independence Day holiday July 28 ...................................... Summer Session ends Notice of Nondiscrimination Wich ita Stale University does not d iscriminate in its programs and activi ties on the basis of race, religion, color, national origin, sex, age, or disability. The following person has been designated to handle inquir ie regard ing nond iscrimination policies: Director, Office of Equal Emplo ment Opportunity, Wichita State Uni ersity, 1845 Fairmount, Wichita, Kansas 67260-0145; telephone (316) 978-3371. ProduC\.>d by the Offu:e of niversity Communications; Ellen Hom , editor; Amy Reid, designer. WTCHITA STATE UNIVERSITY /GENERAL INFORMATION 5 General Information 1998-99 University and Academic Officers Donald L. Beggs, President, effective la/wary 1999 Ted D. Ayres, Gel1eral Coli lisei and Associate to the President James J. Rhatigan, Senior Vice President Frederick Sudermann, Senior Advisor to ti le President Bobby R. Pa tton, Vice Presidenl for Academic Affairs Elizabetil H King, Vice PresideHt for Ullipersity Advancement oger O. Lowe, Vice Presidmt tor AdministratitJI / and Finance Anthony R. Ross, i/lterim Vice Presiden t for Stlllient Affair; Michael Vincent, Deall of the Grndllate Sciwoi Gerald H.. Graham, Dean of th.e W. Frank Barto li StllOa/ of BlIs i/less Jon M. Engelhard t, Denll of tile College of Edl/wtion William J. Wilhelm, Dean of the Col/ege of Eligi/1ecring Walter J. Myers, Dean of the College of Fine Arts eler A. Cohen, Dean of the College of Health Professions, effective January 1999 David C. Glenn-Lewin, Deml of Fairlllollllt College of Liberal Arts mId Scif?llces Jacqueline J. Snyder, Dean of Academic Outreacil Kathy A. Downes and Phibp C Howze, 111 tL'rim D(,(I11$ of Libmrics Bill Belknap, Director of In tercolleginte Atliletic A..<.socill tioll, inc. Board of Regents State of Kansas Clay Blair1Il, Missiol/ Hill. Harry W. Craig, Jr ., Topekll William R. Docking, Arknll.."llS City Tom E. Hammond, Wichita Kenneth C. Havner, Hays Murray O. Lull, Sm ith Center Sylvia L. Robinson, 1vI1lsI/s City Robert V. Ta lkington, lola Sidnev T. Warner, Cimarron Tom W. Bryant, Interim Executive Direc­ tor, Topeka Mission Statement In 1991 , the Kansas Board of Regents ap­ proved the following mission statement tor Wichita Sla te University: Widlita State University is commit­ ted to providing comprehensive edu­ cational opporhmities in an urban set­ ting. Through teaching, scholarship, and public service, the University seeks to equip both students and the large.r community WiUI the education­ al and cultural tools th ey need to thrive in a complex world, and to achieve both individual responsibility in their own lives and effective citi­ zenship in the local, na tional, and global community. High quality teaching and learning are fUlldamental goals in all under­ graduate, graduate, and continu ing education programs . Building on a strong trad ition in the a rts and sci­ ences, the University offers programs in business, education, engineering, fine arts, and hea lth professions, as well as in the liberal arts and sciellces. Degree programs range from the asso­ o.,te to the doctoral1evel and encom­ pass 75 fields of stud y; 110ndegree programs are designed to meet the specialized educationa l and training needs of indiv iduals and organiza ­ tions in south central Ka.nsas. Scholarship, including research, ere­ ti ve ac tivity, and artis ti c perfor­ mance, is designed to advance the University's goals of providing high quality instruction, making original co ntribu tio ns to knowledge and human understanding, and serving as an agent of community service. This activity is a basic expectation of all faculty members at Wichita State Uni ­ versity. Public and community service activ­ ities seek to foster the cultural, eco­ nomic, and social development of a diverse metropolitan community and of the state of Kansas. TIle Universi­ ty 's seTvice constituency includes artistic and cultural agencies, business and industry, and community educa­ tiona l, governmen tal, health, and labOT organizations. Wichita Sta te University pursues its m ission utilizing the human diversity of Wichita , the s ta te ' s largest m etropolitan community, and it many cultural, economic, aJld social resources. The University faculty and professional staff are committed to the highest ideals of teaching, scholar ­ ship, and public service, as the Uni­ versity strives to be a comprehensive, metropolitan universi ty of national stature. Wichita State University Profile Wichita State University is distinguished from other s tate-supported schools in Kansas by i ts urban setting. Wichi ta State ' s location in the largest city in Kansas enhances the traditional class­ room eX'Perience by providing students grea ter opportunities in resources, con­ tacts with business and government lead­ ers, employment, and internshjps. With an enrollment of some 15,0 Widlita State prides itself on specialized atten tion to each studellt. Although the Universi ty's students come from almost every state in the Union and 80 foreign countries, more than 87 percent are from Kansas representing every county in tile state. Because of its urban setting, Wichita State Universily has two student bodies­ traditional and nontradi tional. The aver­ age student ilge is 28, about one-third are married and 58 percent work full- or part­ time. A lthough the nontraditiona l stu­ dents are in tile majority, there are 7,000 traditional sLudents, ages 18 to 23, wIlD devote themselves full-time to school and campus activities. Wichita State UniverSity offers more than 60 undergraduate degree programs in more than 150 areas of study in s undergraduate colleges: W. Frank Barton School of Business, College of Education, College of Engineering, College of Fine Arts, College of Health Professions, aIld Fairmount College of Libera l Arts and Sciences. The Graduate School offers an extensive program including 43 masters degrees whicll offer study in more than 100 areas; specialist in education degrees; and doctoral degrees in applied mathe­ matics; chemistryi communicative disor­ ders and sciencesj human factors psychol­ ogy and community / clinicai pSydlOlogy; educational administration; and aero­ space, electrical, industrial, and mechani­ cal engineering. A listing of the program and degrees offered at Wichita State Uni­ versity is located on the inside back cover of the Cntalog . Committed to fulfilling the needs of each student, WSU offers the traditional fall and sprin g semesters; it has the largest number of evelling and summer COUTse offerings in the Kansas Board of Regents' system. The Summ er Session features a Oexible lime formal with a two­ week pre-session and two four-week ses­ 6 sions held concurrently with the regular ei h t-week session. During the traditional s ixteen-week semester, an increasing number of course is offered on an eight­ week, four-week, or shorter format. Although WSU's firs t commitment is to excellence in instruction, it has an equally strong commitmen t to excellence in research and p ublic service as integral parts oj its educa tional mission. An im portant r source to th Wic.hita area business comm unity, Wichita State supports busine s and industry through programs s uch 85 those offered by the Mid-America Manufacturing Technology Center. The corporate community utilizes programs o ffered by the University's Center for Management Development for continuing professional d evelopment. The Center for Ent re-preneurship and Small Busine s Management encourages development of smal l businesses, while the Hugo Wa ll enter for Urban and Pub­ lic Affair supports local and tate gov­ ernment activities. Th e 330-aere campu is modern and accessible and at the sa me time re tains the flavor of the Universi ty'S 103-year heritage. More than 60 pieces of sculpture by internationally known artis ts adorn the campus. PersormaJ(e5 QisemL , a col r­ fu l mural created by the great Spanish artist Joan Miro, is displayed On the wall of the Edwin A. Ulrich Museum of Art. During the past 20 years, Widtita Stat has more than d uble its instructional space, addi ng major buildings for art, en gin ering, health ciences, bio logical scien es , p hysica l education, mu ie, dane ,and liberal arts and sciences. More than 150 social and special inter­ est club provide opporLunities for stu­ dents to meet and work wi th others who share their in terests . ighl national sorori­ ties and 13 national fraternities are active on campus. WSU is a Divis ion I institution and fie lds teams in ten nis, cross-country, bas­ ketball, track, golf, rew, soccer, and bowling, men's baseball and women's volleyball and softball. History Wichita State began a Fa irmount Col­ lege, a Congrega tiona I insti tu tion, in 1895. The college also continued the col­ lege preparatory program of Fai.rmount Insti tute which began in 1892. Tn 1926, by a vote of the citizens f Wichita, the col­ lege became the Municipal University of Wich ita, the firs t municipal university west of the Mississippi. After 38 years as a municipal univer i­ ty, WS again changed its status July 1, 1964, when it officia lly en tered the state system of higher education. Now, Wichi­ ta State University is one of six state uni­ ersities governed by lhe Kansas Board of Regents. During its lO4-year history, the Univer­ sity has had twelve presidents. The men and their terms of office ilre Nathan J. Morrison, 1895-1907; Henry E. Thay~r, 1907-1914; Walter H . Rollins, 1914-1921; John Duncan Fin lays n, 1922 - 1927~ Harold W. Foght, 1927-1933; William M. Jardine, 1934-1949; Harry F. Corbin, 1949­ 1963; Em ry Lindquist, 1963-1968; Clark D. Ahlberg, 1968-1983; and Warren B. Armstron~, 1983-1993; and Eugene M . Hughes 199 -1998. Donald L Beggs took office in January 1999. Policies Human Relations Notice of nondiscriminatioll . Applicants for admission and employment, student, parents, and employee are hereby noti­ fied that Wichita State University does not d iscriminate on the basis of race, reli­ gion, color, national Origin, sex, age, or disability in admission or access Lo, or treatment or employment in, its programs and activiti s. Any person having inquiries concerning Wichita Stat Uni­ versity's compliance with the regulations implementing Title VI, TiUe IX, r Section 504 is directed t the Office o f Equal Employment Opportunity, Widlita State University, 1845 Fairmount, Wichita . Kan as 67260- 145. TIle Office of Affirma­ t i e Action has been designaLed by Wichita State to coordinate the institu­ tion's efforts to c mply with th regula­ Hons inlplementing TiUe VI, Title IX, Sec­ tion 504, and Americans ,-vith Disabilities Act. Any person also may contact the Assistant Secretary for Civil Rights, U.S. D partment f Education, regarding the institution's compliance with Ulese regu­ lations. The WSU Ciltnio,,? is available in other formats . Tnquiries sh uld be addressed to the Office of Disability Services. Student Responsibility Students a t Wichita State University have the following responsibilities: 1. To consult their advi ors on all mat­ ters ertaining to their academic careers, including changes in their programs 2. To observe all r gulation of their col­ lege and sel ct courses according t the requirements of that college . To attend all meetings of ead class in which they are enrolled instructors will announce at the beginning of the semester if they con ider attendance in computing final grades) 4 . To fulfill all r quirement f r graduation 5. To be personally resp nc;ible for fu l­ filling all requirements and ob rvin a.U regulations at Wichita State 6. To an wer promptly to all written notices from advis rs, faculty, deans, and other University officers 7. To file an Appljcation f r Degree card in the d an's office of the appropriate col­ lege at least two seme teTs before t h e expected date of graduation 8. To cnroll in nly those course for which the stated prereqwsiLc(s) (if there are anyl have been satisfactorily complet­ ed. Failure to comply with this procedure may result in administrative withdrawal. Students also sh uld comply with th' principles in the foU wing state.ment: Wichita State University rcaffim1S the princi.pl of intellectual freedom in scholarly actiVlty for University , tu­ dents, and it recognizes the full citi­ zenship rights of students in inquiry, discussion, and such actions as tiley mily cho e to take on publi issues. The rights and freed m of students involve concomitant respon 'ibilitie . Incumbent on all tudents, a on all citizen, is the responsibility to observe the University'S rul s at rd rly proceduret> nd the laws of the larger commun ity of which the UnIversity is a part. In th matter f actions on public Issues, to peak on's opinion, to petition, to distribute lIterature, to assemble peacefully and hold meeting, t u e the per 'uasion of Ideas and ther actions within the bounds of orderl and lawful proce­ dures are sanctioned b the Universi­ ty . But infringemenL on the right f other, acts or Uu eats of violence to persons, destruction of property, di~ ruption, r other interference with th normal runcLiomng of the University and its p'rsonnel and other disord rly anJ unlawful acts will not be c unte­ nanced . With in i sphere of responsibili ties the Univer-ity will afford tudcn ts proper procedural afeguard to r olve matters in dispute. Th e who \villfully violate University tandards must peet to face disciplinary acti n on the part of the institution, which WTCHITASTATE UNIVERSITY/ ACADEMlC HONESTY 7 TThly include reprimand, probation, or Stl!>pension, consistent with campus provisions for due process. The C:;tudent Code of Conduct provides gUh.lclines lor s tudents' behavior as weU as an overview of the discipline process. Tit!:' codl.' is pubUshed in the Stu liell t J[lim/hI/Ilk. which is available i.n the Office of Student Life, 105 Grace Wilkie Hall. It is a 1 5~1 a\ailable on the WSU web site (www.wichita.edu) under University Pol­ icy and Procedures Manual. Academic Honesty Opportunities for learning at Wichita ')(lty ; in addition, the manner or style used to acknowledge a source will vary amung uisdplines. Tn a particular course, student..'; must follow U,e plagiarism cus­ 10m.. and s tandards of the discipline Offeri ng the course and acknowledge Ollreeo; in tlle manner expected by tilat diSCipline. The respeclive college's Aca­ demic Conduct Committee is charged with articula ting such customs and stan­ dards, if any, and tJle instructor in any given course is respons ible for making thest! standards clear. 2. Ullallt/lOrizcd collaboratioll 011 Ollt-O/­ dass projectB. Students may not present work as individual when, in fact, the work was done with other students. 3. CI1I:afill& 071 exams, defined as the unauthodzed use of information gained from olher students and staff and/or with the assistance of notes, textbooks, etc. 1l is the responSibility of each i.nstruc­ tor to inform students which inform.ation aids, if any, may be used on exams. 4. Unalll1lori2ed access to f1rams ill advance 0/ lire examina tion. Srudents who in any una u thorized manner obtain exams in advance of the date and hour of the examination are committing an act of aca­ demic dishonesty. UnauUlorized access to an exam does nol include obta ining copies oi exams given in previous semesters and returned Lo students, but it does include a sharing of ulformation about an unreturned exam between a stu­ dent in an earlier section of a class and a student in a later section. 5. Fraudllian i altemtiolls of academic mate­ rinls . A student who alters documenls or other information (such as grade reports, course wi thdrawal slips, or research data) to provide undeserved credit or advan­ tage has comm itted an act of academic dishonesty. 6, Aiding (lnd/or abeHillg an academically dis/zol1cst Il11dertilking. A student is respon­ ible for ensuring thal his/her work is not misused by other students. Students are required to protect the mtegrity of their own work by, for example, not allowing, knowingly or through carelessn ess, anothe r s tudent to plagiarize a term paper or copy answers to an exam. 7. Sabotage of stlldent/facult y/University work or property. Sabotage is any act by il student which intentionally or recklessly damages and/or destroys others' work. For example, students who destroy com­ puter programs written by other persons are commi tting acts of sabotage. Students who steal, destroy, or mutilate library materials also commit sabotage. 8. Bribery, blackmni l, or Int i mido/ioll attempts. Academic misconduct is present in gaining an unfair advantage over other tudents by giving money or gifts to other students, faculty, staff, etc. by threatening in any way other students, faculty, staff, etc. with exposure of a personal or profes­ ional incident; by threatening other stu­ dents, faculty , staff, etc. wiLh bodily or oUler types of harm; or in any attempt to do any of U,ese things. Responsibility for Academic Integrity The fundamcnta l responsibility for the maintenance of the standards of honesty rests upon the student. It is each t;tudent' responsibility to be familiar with Univer­ sity policy on academic honesty lind to uphold standards of academic honesty al all times in aU situations. Faculty members are responsible for clarification to their classes of those stan­ dards of honesty for class assignmenh> or projects where such standards may be. unclear or when such standards vary from the accepled noml. Each faculty member shall also make clear to each class early Ul the semester the faculty member's own policy toward penalties he or she gives for breaches in academic integrity. In addJtion, it is anticipated that faculty members will be Ule persons who wiU discover most illStances of academic misconduct. Accordingly, faculty need to be aware of the possibility that academic misconduct might occur, watchful for any instances of misconduct, and diligent in addressing those who act dishonestly . [f a faculty member disciplines a student for academic misconduct. that information may be reported in writing to the chair of the faculty member's departmenl. A standard of honesty, fairly applied to iJll students. is essential to a learning environment. Students violating such standards must accept lhe consequences; penalties are assessed by appropriate classroom instructors or other designated people. Serious cases may resu lt in disci­ pline at the college or University level and may result in suspension Of dis­ missal. Dismissal from a college for aca­ demic dishonesty constitutes dismIssal from the UniverSity. Students accused of abridging a standard of honesty may pro­ tect themselves through established aca­ demic appeal procedures and are assuTed of due process and the right of appeal from accusa tions or penalties Celt to be unjust Access to Records (Privacy Law) The Family Educational Rights and Priva­ cy Act of 1974 (FERrA) is a Federal law which prOvides tllat the institution will main ta in the confidentiality of student education records. Wichita State Universlty accords all U\ rights under the law to students who are declared independent. Those rights are: 1) the right to jnspect and reVlew the stu­ dent's education records; 2) the right to request the amendment of U1C student'· I 8 J ducation records to ensure that they are nOl inaccurate, misleading, or othenvise in violati n of the student's privacy or olher rights; 3) the right to consent to dis­ closures of personally identifiable infor­ llli\tion contruned in the student' educa­ tion records, except to the extent that FERPA authorizes disclosure without consent; 4) the right to file with the U.S. Department or Education 11 complaint concerning alleged failures by Wichita State University to comply with the requirements of FERrA; and 5) the right to obtain a opy of Wichita State Univer­ sity's student records policy. You can obtain a copy of the policy from the Reg­ istTar's office. No one outside the institution shaU have acces to nor will the in titution dis­ close any information fr m students' edu­ catIOn records without the prior wriltltTl cOllsent of the student(s) except to person­ nel within the institution wh have a legitimate educational interest, to pers ns or orga nlzations providmg s tudents finanoal aid, to accrediting agencies car­ rying out their accreditation function, to per ons in compliance with a judicial order, and to persons in an emergency in order to protect the health or safety of students or other persons . All these exceptions are permitted under the Act. Within the Wichita State community, only those members, individually or col­ lectively, acting in the students' "legiti ­ mate educational interests" are allowed access to tudent education records. These members include personnel in the ffices of Admissions, Regish'ar, Con ­ troller, Computing Center, Dean of Stu­ dent, Financial Aid, Career Services, Cooperative Education, Planning, Test­ ing, Library, College deans, academic advisors, and other administrative and academic personncl within the limitation of their need-to-know. "Legitimate edu­ cational interests" means 1) the informa­ tion or record requested is(are) relevant and necessary to accomplishment of some task or determination; and 2) the task or determination is an employment respon­ sibillty for the inqUirer or is a properly assign d subject matter for the inquirer' employmen t responsibility. Social Security number and student sta­ tu data may be provided to other 'ta te agencies for use in detection of fraudulent or ill gaI claims against state monies. Public Notice Designating "Directory Information" At its discretion the institution may pro­ vide "Directory Information" to anyone in accordance with the provi ions of the Act. Wichita State Univer ity hereby deSig­ nates the following tudent information as public or "Directory Information." Name, addressees), telepholle Illlmber(s), dates of attcndanC/!, classificalion (freshman , sopilomorl.', etc.), course load (filiI-time, lIalf­ time, less III/Ill ltalf-time) class type (day , day/evening, weekelld 0/111/) prfWious institu­ tioll(s) attended, majoT jield(s) of study, awards . /rollors (includes Deal/ 'S list) , degree(s) conferred (illclllding dates), past tiM present pnTlicipatioTl ill officially recog­ Ilized sports alld activities, physical factors (heighl, weiglrt afalhletes) . Co.rrentlyenrolled tudents may with­ hold djscl08uJ'e of "Directory Informa­ tion" (on an all or none basis) to non­ institutional persons or organizations. You have an option to protect your priva­ cy and nol have such infomlation as your address and telephone number released. Forms requesting the withholding of this information are available in the RegiS­ trar 's Office, 117 Jardine Hall, and are returned to that office. Oth rwise, the University assumes that you approve of disclosure of that information. The com­ pleted form must be received at the Reg­ istrar's Office by the end of the second week of the Fall Semester if you do not wan t to be included in the Campus Direc­ tory, which is published each Fall and which is available to people outside WSU. Requests to withhold "Directory Information" must be filed aru1ually . Other lhan the Campus Directory, the Uni ­ versity does not give or sell lists of stu ­ dents to private companies. Family Educational Rights and Privacy Act 1. Definitions A. Consent: Consent hall be in writing and shall be signed and dated by the stu­ dent giving consent. It shall include: (a) specification of record to be released; (b) purpo es for such release; and (c) parties or class of parties to whom such records may be released . B. Directory Information: That infor­ mation des ribed in Sectioll 99.3 of the "Final Rule on Education Records, Priva­ cy Rights f Parents and Students." The information is defined by the code as: "Infonnation relating to a student: Name, current address, level and scllool, date of birth, major field of study, participation in officially recognized activities and sports, heigh! and weight of members of athletic leams, dates of attenda nce, degrees and award received, and the most recent previOUS educational in tih. tion attended by the student. The name(s and addres (es of the student's parent(s or guardian(s) may be disclosed wh ' used for an official University new' release about the student's r ceipt 0, degrees or awards or about participatiOi in officially recognized activities sports." C. Disclosure: Permitting access or lht release, transfer, or other communication of education records of the student or thti personally iden tifiable infonnation con· tained therein, orally, or in writing, or by, electronic means, or by any other means to any party. D. Education Record: Those records that are directly related to a student and that are maintained by the University OIl by a party acting for the University. Excluded from the category of "educa­ tion records" are the following and tOI which the law d es not guarantee the~ right of student access: (1) Records created by an ind ividual staH member that are not revealed to any other individual except to a person wh might substitute for, or replace, the origi­ naJ staff member. (2) Medical and psychological records that are maintained only in connection with proviSion of treatment to the student and that are not available to persons other than those providing treatment except that uch records may be personal­ ly reviewed by a phy ician or other appropriate professional of the student' choice and with the student's written con­ sent. (3) Records of the WSU Police Depart­ ment maintajned solely for law enforce­ ment purposes, which are maintained separately, and which are not discl sed to individuals other than law enforcement officials sharing the same territorial juris­ diction. (4) Records that contrun only infornla­ tion relating to a person after thaI person was no longer a student at the University. An example would be information col­ lected by the University or the Alumni Association pertaining to the accomplish ­ ments of its aJumni. (5) Employment records of any person if maintained in the normal course of business and u ed only for purposes relating to the employment, unless the person is employed at the University only because of her/his status as a tudent (that is, student hourly). In such cases, student employment records aTe educa­ tion records but are to be maintained sep ­ arately from other education records. WJCHIT A STATE UNIVERSITY /PRTVACY lAW E. L-egiUmate Educational Interests: The interests of University personnel who ha ve a demonstrably legitimate need to review records in order to fulfill their offi­ cia l professional responsibilities . Such responsibilities must involve the Univer­ ity in its primary educational and 5chol­ ariy funcLions and / or secondary adminis­ trative functions of maintaining property, disbursing funds, keeping records, pro­ viding hving accommodations and other CTvices, sponsoring activities, and pro­ tecting the heallh and safety of persons or properly in the University communily. If a question arises concerning the legitima­ cy of a request to review records, such question shall be referred to the vice pres­ idenl for student affairs. F. Parent: Indudes a parent, a guardian, or an individual acting as a parent of a .,;tuden[ in the absence of a parent or guardian. G. PersonaUy Identifiable Informa­ tion: Indudes the name of the student; the student' s parent or other family mem­ ber; the address of the student; personaJ identifiers, such as social security or stu­ dent numbers; personal chaTllcteristics or other information that would make the 'ludenl's identity easily traceable. H. School Official: FacuJty, staff, stu ­ dent employees or committees (when the members of the committee are appointed or elected to an officiaJly constiluted com­ mittee) thaI perform a function or task on behalf oi. and at the request of, the Uni­ verSity, its faculty, colleges. schools or divisions. L Student: For purposes of this policy, anyone who is or has been enrolled a t Wichita State University, with the follow­ mg exception: A person who has applied for admis­ sion to. but has nE','er been in attendance a t a component unit of the University (such as tlle various schooL~ and colleges 01 the University), even if that individual is or has been in attendance at another component unit of the UniverSity, is not considered to be a student with respect to the component to which an application tor admission has been made. J. Unit Custodian of Student Records: Except as otherwise designated in this policy, the head of each academic or administriltive unit is responsible for the education records within the unit. 2. Student Access to Education Records A, A student has the right and shall be accurded the opportunity to inspect, rev iew and / or recei ve copies of his or her educational record, except as provid­ ed for below. The University must com­ p ly with the student;s request within a reasonable period of time, not to exceed 45 days after the request. B. The student has the right to a reason­ ab le request for explanalion of the records and to copies of the records w here necessary to provide fujI inspec­ tion and review. Such copies will be pro­ vided at the student's request and expense; however, the charge to the stu­ dent for any such records may not exceed $.25 per page. The University may not charge a fee to search for or retrieve a record. If any question arises as to the identity of the requesting student, the stu­ dent shall be asked to provide his or her University 1.1. car and/ or other positive identification. D. The University is not required to afford inspection and review of the fol­ lOwing records: (1) Financial records of the student's parents submitted as part of the financial aid process; (2) Confidential letters and statements of recommendation that were placed in the student's education records prior to January 1, 1975, if such letters were sub­ mitted with an understanding of confi­ dentiality, and are used only for the pur­ pose for which they were specifically intended; (3) Confidential letters and statements of recommenda tion received after Jan­ uary 1, 1975, for which the student has signed a waiver of the right to access and which pertain to: (a) admission to this or any other educational institution or agen­ cy; (b) application for employment; or (c receipt of an. honor or honorary recogni­ tion so long as these letters are used sole­ ly for the purpose(s) for which they were pecifically intended. E. An individuaj who is an applicant for admission to the University, or to one of its component parts, or who is a student in attendance at the University, may waive his or her right to inspect and review confidential letters and confiden­ tia l statements of recommendation , except that the waiver may apply to con­ fidentialletters and statements only if: (1) The applicant or student is, upon request, notified of tile names of all indi­ viduals provid ing the letters or state­ ments; (2) The letters or statements are used only for the purpose for which they were originally intended; and (3) Such waiver is not required by the University as a condition of admission to or receipt of any other service or benefit from the University. All wa!vers under this paragraph must be executed by the individual, regardless of age. rather than by the parent of the individual. All waivers must be in writ­ ing and signed by the student. If an education record contalllS informa­ tion on more than one student, the stu­ dent may inspect only the information on himself or herself. 3. Waiver of Rights The Universi ty may request, but not require, students to waive rights under this policy; the waivers Olust be in writ­ ing and Signed by the student. Applicants for admission to the UniveIsity and eligi­ ble students Olay waive rights to review confidential letters of recommendation only if: (1) The applicant or student, upon request, is nolified of the names of all per­ sons providing leIters; (2) The letters are used only for the pur­ pose for which they were originally intended; (3) The waiver is not required ru; a con­ dition of adOlission or for any other ser­ vice or benefit of the University. Wajvers may be made with respect to specified classes of education records and/or persons or i..nstitutions. The student may revoke any waiver in writing, the revocation to apply only to documents received or entered into the record after the date of execution of the revocation. 4. Disclosure of "Personally Identifi­ abJe" and "Directory" lnfomlation The University shall obtain the written consent of the student before disclosing personally identifiable information frOUl the education records or a student, other than directory information, except as oth­ erwise provided in this policy. The University may, without the con ­ ent of the student, disclose directory information, as described earlier. [f a stu­ dent wishes to have such information wiLhheld, he/she must notify tl,e Office of the Registrar. U a student wishes to prevent the publication of such infomm­ tion in the University telephone directo­ ry, he/she must notify the Office of the Registrar. The University Olay disclose personally identifiable information without lhe con­ ent of the student to school officials within the institulion detennined to have legitimate educationa l ll1terests; to uthorilies to comply with a judicial order or subpoena, provided the Univer­ sity makes a reasonable effort to notify the student in advance of compliance; lo 10 financial aid personnel in conjunc 'on wIth an nppli 'anon for financia l assis­ tance; to orgnniz hea.ring officer shall make a .....Titlen recommenda­ tion to the vice pre ident fOJ student affairs or his/her d ' ignee together with written findings of act c n erning the WICHITA STATE UNlVERSITY / ADMISSION 11 !->tudcnl'S request. Within an additiona l fourleen (14) workmg days of receipt of the hearing officer's report, the vice presi­ dent for student affairs or his/he r designee shall notify U,e student in writ­ ing of the decision. The decision must include a summary 01 the evidence and lhe reasons for the decision. (1) In the vent the decision of lhe vice president for student affairs is adverse to the student's reques t, the sl'Udenl shall be notified l,f the opportunity to place wilh the education record 11 summary st[lte­ men! commenting upon the information in the records and/or setting forth any reason for disagreeing with the decision. If the questioned document is released to a third person, the student's summary slatcmenL shall accompany the release of any slich information . The summary information shall be maintained for a long as the contested record is main­ t...,ined . (2) H a student challenge 10 the content ( II ~ivell record is successful. the Uni­ versity shall amend the education record accordin~ly and so iDfom1 the student. Llrt1n the student's specific wrillen request to the vice pre.sidt'nt (or studenl affairs, the Universjty shal l make a rea­ sonable effort to contact student-desig­ nated third persons who have received copied of the previous record to inform them of the change which has been made. 11. Complaint Procedure U a student believes that the University is nol In compliance with the Privacy Act, he / she should check first with the office inV\1h'ed and/or the Office of the Vice Prcsidelll for Student Affairs. If a siudeni wishes to file a complainl with the federa l govemmellt concerning the University' s failure to comply with the Priv«cy Act, he/she must submit the complaint, in writing, to the Office of the Family Educational Right~ and Privacy Act, Department oj Health, Education and WelIctinn 1,19 .64 and folio\\'­ IIlg 01 the Privacy Act. Accident or Injury he State of Kansas and Wichi ta State University do no t insure against acci­ dents or injury to students which may occur during University-sponsored activi­ ties on or off campus. The University will make every reasonable attempl to advise students concerning potentia l danger of accident or injury. Studellts are expected to act responsibly by taking necessary precautions to prevent accidents. Stu­ dents also are advised to protect them­ selves from the financial burden of acci­ dent or injury through a personal insur­ ance policy. Admission to Wichita State Wichita State admits degree-bound col­ lege 1reshmen and transfer stu.dents a well as nondegree students w ho have special interests in college credit work but no immediate degree objectives at Wichi­ ta State University. All students elltering Wichita State for the first time must file an application for admission with the Office of Adm.issions, 111 Jardine Hall, and all but special open admission students (discussed later) must hiwe transcripts of all high school and/or college work sent to Wichita State. Failure to report aU schools attended wm result in dismissal. Students are encouraged to submit their appHcation, tee, and official transcrip ts of previous work to the admissions office on or before August 1 for fall registra tion and January 1 for spring registration . Applications and transcripts from high school students will be accepted anv time after theiT junior year_ Transcripts sent to the Office of Admis­ sions must be ma iled directly fro m the recording ins titu tion and 'w ill not be returned to the applicant. New students may begin their college study during tlle Summer Session, the full semester Of the spring semester. Prospec­ tive students are encouraged to visit Wichita State to discuss tJ,eir educational plans with an admissions officer and other University s taff members. Admission of a student to Wichita State University is independent of race, reli­ gion, color, national or igin, sex, age, or disability. Any person having inquiries concerning violations may contact the Office of Equal Employment Opportuni­ ty, Wichita Stale University, 1845 Fair­ mount, Wichita, Kansas 67260~0145. Degree-Bound Students Freshmen Students who will graduate from accred­ ited Kansas high schools and will no t attend another college before coming to Wichi ta State will be admitted to the Uni­ versity as freshmen after submitting an application, official high school transcript and a nonrefundable $20 applica tion fee. Scores lor the test battery of the American College Testing Program (ACT) must be submitted by students less than 21 years f age prior to enrollmen t. Application may be completed in one of three ways: 1. Students may apply on line at the WSU web site by completing the applica­ tion an d pri.nting and sending in the sig­ nature form along w ith the application fee. Transcripts must be sen t d irec tly froD1 all schools attended. 2. Students may apply by prinfu'g the appli cation off the WSU web site, com­ pleting it, and sending it along with the application fee. Transcripts must be sent directly from all schools attended. 3. Students also may apply by submit­ ting a standard university application for admission and a nonre.fundable applica­ tion fee and having a six-semester tran­ script sent to the University. ACT scores also must be submitted to the University before enrollment. Students whc) have already gradua ted frOIll accredited Kansas high schooL" and have not attended another college also will be admitted to the Umversity after submitting an applicatioll and applicahon fee and having their high school send an official transcript to Wichita State ' admissions ~)(fice . ACT scores also must be submitted before enrollmell t. Gradu­ ates of nonaccredited Kansas high schools must score at least 18 on the ACT or 870 on the SAT-T to be admitted to Wichita State. Out-of-state students who will be or have been graduated £rom a non-Kansas high school must also submit application, application fee, transcrip t and ACT or SAT test scores. To be eligible for admission, out-of-state students musl (1 ) rank in the upper one-half of their high school gradu­ ating class or (2) have a minimuDl ACT composite score of 21 or a minimum com­ bined SAT-J of 990 or (3) have high school grades of 2.000 or better on a 4.000 system. Exceptions may be made under special cir­ cumsLances when valid reasons prevail. Students who have not graduated from high sellOol but have an equivalency cer­ ti fi cate may ap pl y by submit ting an application for adrrrissioll, application fee and official scores from the General Edu­ cational Development test. Admission is based on the GED scores. AD' scores also are required if the studen t is admitted 12 a nd Jess than 21 year o f age be fore enrollment. Studen ts who have not taken the ACT must take ma th a nd English placement tests for da s position. Student w ho have declared an academ­ ic interest will be admitted in preprogram status within the allege of their choice. Students must meet all necessary require­ ments of the degree-granting college prior to ad mis ion to degree program status. The individua l college adm i sions requirements ar given at the beginning of each college's secbon in the Cntalog. Students who are stil l deciding on an academic maj r will b admitted to Fair­ mount College of Libera l Art and Sci­ ences for academic advising and car er counseling through the Umversity Advis­ ingCenter. Transfers Students who have b en enroll d in anoth­ er coUege or universlty may be admitted to undergraduate study at Wichita State Uni versity if they have a minimum overall collegiate grade point average of 2.000 on a 4.000 system, are eligible to return t the COllege r university Lhey la t attended , and are able to meet the required scholas­ tic standard of a college at Wichita State. Specific tandards are given in each col­ lege's section of the Clltalo . [f possible, transfer s tudents should apply at lea lone semester before the semester in whi h they plan to en ter Wi hita State in order to receive maxi­ mum con ideration for financial assis­ tance and registra tion p rograms. Transfer students are d ivided into two categories: (1) those wi th fewer than 24 coUege semester hours of credit o r an undeclared major or who have not com­ pleted the Basic kills component of the General Education Program and (2) those with dt'c1aIed majors and 24 or more col­ lege semester hours of credi t an d who have ompleted the Ba ic Skills compo­ nen t of the General Education Program. The Basi Skills include six h urs of English composition, three hours of com­ munication, t nd three hours of c lIege­ level mathematics. Students must submit to Wichita Sta te's Office of Admi ions an application, application fee and an official cran cript from ea h college or university attended. 1. Tmll sft'1' siudents with fewer than 24 co/­ lege . l?rI1l!ster II00ir af credit or an lIudec/al' d major or whu Itave rIot completed the Basic Skills component of tire Ge11eral Ed tlratioll Program will be considered for admis ion to pr p rogram studie . These sludents must a lso submi t an offi cial tran.scrip t from their last high school. Before enroll­ ment, students must submit cores from the ACT. 2. Transfer students who have decla /'ed a ml1jo?', have 24 or more allege semester hOllrs of credit alld /raut' omplded the Basic Skills component of the General Educa ion Program are eligible to apply for adm ission to one of the six undergrad uate degree-granting colleges. Official high school Lran cripta are requ ired of a tran fe r shJde.nt with more than 24 semester hours of credit only if they wish to receive financial aid. Students transferring from a two-year college must complete at least 60 hours of four-year college work and 40 hours of upper-divi ion work in order to qualify for graduation from Wichita State. In no ca e will work done in a two-year coUege be creclited as jun ior- or senior-level work a t Wichita State. (See requirements for graduation given in the Academic infor­ mation section.) Wichita State participates in the Trans­ fe r and Articula tion Agreement of the Kansas Public Community Colleges and Stale C lleges and n ivers ities . he agreement stipulates that: A student who completes an associ­ ate degree based on a bachelo s ori­ ented equence at a state and region­ ally accredited Kansas public commu­ ni ty co llege and whose program of studies has met the requirements of the Kan as Public Community Col­ lege and State College and Universi ty Transfer and Articulation Agreement will be accepted with junior standing and will have satisfied the lower-divi­ sion genera l education requirements of all Regents' insti tutions of the state (sub ject to poin ts o f clarifica tion agreed to by community colleges and state schools). In accep ring university-level courses from other recognized colleges and uni­ versitie for transfer credit, Wichita State relies on p ractices ou tlined in Transfer Credit Pmctict!s of Selected EdllCilhonal [n ti­ httiol1s, published by the American Asso­ cialion o f Collegia te Registr ars nd Admissions Officers . While the cred it practices publication does not con b tute accreditation, it does p rOVide hel pful information for general credit acceptance. More specifically, the tra nsferabili ty or transfer COlU'Se equivalency is determined by the appropriate Wichita State depart­ ment for each course from another institu­ tion. Internationa l students may obtain iniorm tion on transfer credit from for­ eign colleges and un i ersities from the Office of rnternational AdmIssions, In ten­ sive English Language Center. As a minimum graduation requiremen t each student must complete each basic skills course in the Basic Skil ls compon nt of the General Educa tion Program with a grade of C or better. This reqUiremen t applies to bas ic skills courses taken a t Wichita State or tr n ferred for cre it from other institutions, including Kansas pu bli com mu n ity college and slate universities. Wichita State degree-bound students shou ld speak with an advisor before enrolling in c ur es at another institution. Credit hours and credit pints accepted by Wichita State are compuled with cred­ i t ho urs and credit point ea rned a t Wichita State in calculating the student's overall grade point average. The distribubon of tra nsfer urses tha t may fu lfill either a majo r r minor re ui rement must be approved by the chairperson of the department concerned. Depar tment chairpersons mily require addi tional work for a major, regardless of the credit granted to th student. International Students Wichita State University demonstrates its commitment to international ducati n through its om e of fn temational Educa­ tion, which comprises three smaller Ul'li ts: the Office of In ternational Admissions, the Intensive English La nguage Center, and the Offi ce of Internationa.l Programs. These units work together to assist inter­ national students with ultuml acclima­ tion, immigra tion coun eling, English ­ language instruction, and admi 'sion to the University. The niversity welcomes students of every national, rad aL religious, ethnic, an d cultural background . dmissio n decisions are based s lely on the academ­ ic qualifications of applicants. English requiremen ts. All interna tional undergraduate students at Wicl,ita State Unjversity are requited to demonstrate proficiency in English before beginning full-tome academic study. Students, how­ ever, re not required to submit proof of English prof iciency, s uch as TOEFL results, with their application for admis­ sion . The UniverS ity wil l con ider all undergraduate applicants for admission without proof of English proficie ncy. English p ficiency may be demonstrated in the fo llowing ways: 1. Obta in a TOEFL sc re* of 530 0 r higher on the paper-based TOEFL. 2. Obtain a TOEFL score' of 197 r higher on the compu ter-based TOEFL. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY / ADMISSION 13 · Obtain an ffiLTS overall band score of 6.5 or higher. 4. Obtain a satisfactory score on the WSU English Proficiency Examination. 5. Complete the highest level of WSU's Intensive English Language Center. 6. Com plete at least 30 t rans ferable semester-credit hours at a U.S. college or university. -All TOEFL scores must be sent direcUy fram the TOEFL office in Princeton, New Jersey Applicat ioll injormaljol1 . In order to app ly, (1 )] international undergraduate students must submit the following: 1. A completed In ternationa l Under­ graduate Application form . 2. US$ 50 nonrefundable app lica tion fee. 3. Offici al cop ies-in English-of all transcripts from all secondary schools, colleges, or universities attended . N(III -degree siai lis. Some students wish to study for one or more semesters with­ (lut earnmg a degree. Nondcgree appli­ cants must subm it all of the required application materials aJld will receive the samt:' consideration as degree candidates. Dtll£'/' requiremEnfs . All international stu­ dents are requ ired to have a medical insurance policy before enrollment. If needed, medical insurallce may be pur­ chased at Ole UniverSi ty . Al l new st u­ den ts are req uired to have a tu berculin kin test after their arrival i ll Wichita. GmrilJate sludelltS. Graduate students should consult the Graduate Bulletin for more information. For more information, write: Office of International Education Wiellita State University Wich ita, Kansas 67260-0122 USA TeJephone: (310) 978-3232 Fax: (316) 978-3777 E-mail: intadm@twsuvm.uc.twsu.edu In ternet: www.wichita.edu Graduate Students Bllth Jegree and non-degree categories of admiSSion to Wichita State University Graduate School are available. Students seeking a graduate degree must have at leaSl a bachelor's degree from a regional­ ly accredited institution based OIl credit comparable to those allowed toward a degree by Wich ita State, a minimum grade point average of 2 .750 (on a 4.000 scale) in their las t 60 hours of academic work and simila r performance in their major field work, 811d no more than nine hours of background defjciencies in the IUa Jor field of stud y. lndividual depart­ ments and p rograms may require higher admission standards and addi tional sup­ porting information. Students desiring to take work fOT grad ua te cred it but not desiring to pursue a graduate degree may apply for nondegree admission. Specific requirements for either degree or nonde­ gree admission and for all graduate pro­ grams are listed in the Wichita State Ulli­ versify Graduate Bu17ct ill. Application for admissjon to gradua te standing must be rued with the Graduate School three weeks before registration and must be supported by two complete and official transcripts of all coJJege work (and other credentials required by tile specific program desired) unless the stu­ dent is a graduate of Wichita State Uni­ versity, in which case the Gradua te ellool personnel will obtain transcripts of the student's work completed at WSU. Only students formally admitted to an appropriate status in the Graduate School are permitted to enroll in courses num­ bered 800 through 999, and no official sta­ tus is given by the Graduate Sellool until a student's application and transcripts are on fi le and the transcripts have been eval­ uated by the major department and the Graduate School. St l/ den ts who w ish to receive gradwlle credit for work iakel'! !Ilusl bl.' admitted to the Graduate 5cllool prior to the lilllc of mrollmen l. For further information about gradua te programs or to obtain graduate applica­ tion materials , contac t the Gradua te School Office, 107 Jard ine Hall, Wichita State UniverSity, Wichita, Kansas 67260­ 0004, (316) 978-3095. Nondegree-bound Students Wichita State encourages students to pur­ sue their educational goals. People wish­ ing to continue their education with no immediate degree plans should apply aJld send copies of all college transcripts, or high school transcript if no college has been attended, to Wichita State's Office of Admissions. Students seeking graduate credit should WTHe or caU the Graduate School, 1G7 Jardine Hall, Wichita State UniverSity, Wichita, Kansas 67260-0004 (316) 978-3095. Open Admission Students To expedite admission for adult students who have not participated in formal edu­ cation for some time, ilie Office of Admis­ sions provides a simplified admission procedUIe. Students will be ad mitted to the nondegree program as special open admission students: 1 . 1£ they ha V I.'! grad ua ted from an accredited high school, or have complet­ ed <1 GED, and have not a ttended any school for two years or 2. If they bave not graduated from high school or completed a GEO, are al least 21 years of age, and have not attended any school for at least two years or 3. If they are currently on active mili­ tary duty or 4. If they hold a bac.helor's or higher degree. Stud en ts ad mit ted un der the open admission policy need only submH a n ppLication for admission and the appli­ cation fee. Test scores and transcripts are 110trequired. Students admitted as open admission s tudents will be considered non degree bound for their first 15 semester hours. In ord er to pu rsue work beyond the semester In whiel, the 15th hour is com­ pleted, students will be required to apply to continue as a regu lar non-degree stu ­ dent or as a degree bound student. Guest Students Students attending ano ther co llege or university w ho wish to attend Wichi.ta State on a temporary b3.!tis in the Summer Session should submit an application and applic.a lion fee to the Office of Admis­ sions. Students applying for college guest admission in the fall or spring semester also must submi t an offic ia l transcript howing a 2.000 grade point average from theiI home insti tution. Guest admission is granted for a total of 15 hours . Students who p lan to continue a t Wichita State beyond that limit must submit complete credentials. Students fTOm other universi­ ties are usually enrolled as nondegree students. High school seniors who attend Wichita State before graduation from high school are a lso considered guest students. To be onsidered for admission as a high school guest, students who have completed their junior year should submit an application and an officia l high school transcript and obtain their counselor's permiSSion to take college courses while still in hi~h school. Younger students who wish to enroll for college work w ill be considered on an individual basis. High school guest admis­ sion must be renewed each sculester. luternational students on a student visa issued for another institu lion may be admitted as guest students at Wichita State providing they meet all criteria faT admission ou tli ned in the International Students section, u\cJuding the TOEFL requirement. 14 Exceptions Committee The Uni ver ity has an Exceptions Com­ mjttee to review peti tions from peopl seeking admission to the University who otherwise do n t qualify. The process of petitioning may begin with th Office of Admissions or with academic advisors in any of th undergraduate degree-grant­ ing colleges. Residence Defined The Kansas legislature, rather than Uni­ versity policy, determines the residence of students en tering Wichita Sta te. The legi lature has also granted the Kansas Boar o f Regents certai11 authority to adopt regulations and guidelines for the determination of residence, wi th in the broader state law. The law and regula­ tions are differe l1t than those th t govern residency for any other purpose. According to the law and regulations, II resident, f r tui tion purposes, is someone w ho has resided (been physically present) in Kansas for 12 consecutive months prior to enrollment/reenrollment and who has rlemOllsfraicd, during those 12 months, the intent to make Kansas their permanent home. l ntent i evalua ted in light of: (1) the person's s tatement abou t why they came to Kansas in the first p lace and (2) what the person has done since coming to Kansas (objective, veri.fiable facts). Many factors are considered when evaluating in tent. The Kansas Board of Regents' guidelines lis t nonconclusive factors or circumstances that could help support a claim fo r resident classification. The guidelines also pecify a qualifier. "Any such factor, to be given weight, m ust be of a t leas t one year's duration prior to enrollment/reenrollmenL" Residents of Kansas (for fee purposes) who leave the tate retain their residency as long as they return to Kansas perma­ nently within U month of departure. A person who comes to Kansas to go to school, and who enrolls full-time every seme ter aIter arriving, may not be able to d nstrate the inten t to remai n in Kansas permanently, as long as that pat­ tern continues. In contrast, certain specific exceptions are authorized by state law. The followin g p ople, and their pO/lses mId dependent children, are authorized to pay the equivalent of re.siden t fees immedi­ ately: (a) employees of the Univ rsity; (b) people on full-time active military d uty, s ta tio ned in Kansa ; (c) people dis­ cha rged r retired from active mili tary service wi thin the last thirty days under conditions other titan dishonorabl l? and wh served at lea t two yea in Kansas; (d) people w ho graduated from a Iour­ year program at an accredited Kansas high school wi thin 6 mon th o f their enrollment at a tate university, and who were Kansas residents for fee purpos s t, or within U months of, high school grad­ uation; and (el dependent students as long as at least one parent is a Kansas res­ iden for fee purposes; and (f) people who were re ruited to, or tran {erred t Ka nsas with in the last 12 mo nths for a full-time job, and their spouse and depen­ dent children. The details about each of these excep­ tions are critical and are not all n this page . Several require cerlificati on a a p propriate information on a pecial form. None of them is automatic. Contact the Regi trar' Office, 102 Jard ine HaU, for more information. Residency of new students enrolling for tI.e fir't time at Wichita State is d ter­ min d by the admissions office according to the above law I regulations. Such tu­ dents should address questions concern­ ing residency to Ute Admissions Office. Residency of new tudents enrolling for th first time at WSU is determined by lhe Admis i ns Office according the above law/regulations. Such s tudent should address questions concerning resi­ dency to the Admissions Office. When a continuing student, who was initially classified as a non-resident, th inks he l she meets these residency requirements, then he/she must apply for re idency using a form available (rom the Registrar' s Office. Lower fees d o not mean that som one has been clAssified as a resident-there a re no non-resident fees, for example, for Workshops or Off­ Campus Courses. The respon ibility of registering under proper re idence is placed on the stu ­ dents. l.f there is any possible question f residence classification, it is the duty of a student when registering and paying fees to raise the question with the Registrar's Office. Students who disagree with their residency classifica tion are entitled to an appea l, provided they file a written appeal with the registrar within 30 days from enrollment aJ1d pay the fees as origi­ nally assessed. A standard appeal form is provided by the Registrar's Office. If notice of the appeal is not given in writ­ ing within 30 days, the classification or reclassifica tion by the registrar becomes final. Appeals are reviewed and decided by the University Committee on Residen­ cy, and its decision is final. The commit­ tee is not empowered to make exceptions, 'ust to apply the law and regulation to individual circumstances. Students must report their correct address at the Lime f registration each ernester. The address given mu t be the tudent's actual place of residence, (nce it will b th on!:! to which all correspon­ dence from Wichita State is sen t Any change in res idence mu t be reported within three days to the Registr<1r's Offi ce. More complete information on the residence law and regulations an bE' ob tained from the Regi trar's Office. Academic Advising Wichita Stale University b,Lieves in the importance of qua lity acaJemi advising. Each student is paired with a kJ10wled e­ able advisor who care about the stu­ dent's personal and int llectual develop- = ment and academic and career. ucces . hrough the development of ongoing relat ionship, students are challenged ­ and encouraged by advi or to develop academic and career plans that will opti­ mize their unique abilities, goals, and aspirations. Students may expect their advi ors to Listen and re pond to their interests and concern ; to accept them i\ uniqu per­ ons; to be rea onably accessible; to know policies, procedures, and information sources; and to be a personal resource for academic, career, and life goals. In turn, students are expected to initiate and mailltain contact with their advisors; to di cuss information that may aHecl academic performance, such as work and family commitments; to learn basic Uni ­ verSity, college, and departmenta l re ­ quirements and to accept responsibility for them; and to seek assistance when needed . A good advising relationship promotes academic excellence, success, and achievement of dueational goals. University Advising Center Univer ity Advising Cent r faculty and staff advisors focus their a ttention on as isting degree-bou nd exploratory tu­ dents and nondegree-bound students to meet their unique goals, aspirations, and potential. The center's laif also serves as a primary g nera! information and refer­ ral resource within the University. Degree-bound Exploratory Students Academic planning for these studen ts requires remaining flexible while pursu ­ ing gene-ral ed ucation requirements 50 that they may tran fer to any co llege ithin WSU once a maj r is declared. WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY/ ACADEMlC TNFORMATION 15 Studt;mlS develop educationa l plalU1ing ~ki lls, remove high school deficiencies, develop effective coUege-level study skills LInd habits, choose an academic ma jllr, develop personalized academic and (Meer/ life plans, and complete part (I f the ~elleraJ education requirements. Each degree-bowld student is assigned an ilcademic advisor within the Universi­ tv Advising Center. When lhe s tudent ;eJecls a major fieJd of study, an immedi­ ale transfer occurs tu the colJege that sponsors that program and an advisor [roUl tile selected discipline is assigned . Exploratory s tudents should declare a major or degree preference within the first 48 hours of enrollment. Nondegree-bound Students University Advising Center faculty and t.lff prOVide nondegree-bound studellts services designed to be responsive to thelr unique needs and inlffests, respon­ sibilitil::'S, ilnd learning styles. These may invplve sel f-enrichmen l, job advance­ ment. career change, general updating. or professi(Jnal certification. Programs, poli­ cies, and procedures emphasize ease of access to WSU and its resources. College and high school guest students and higll school concurrent enrollment students fa ll in this category . The University dvising Center will connect a non­ degree-bound student with an appropri­ ale advisor upon request. TIlose sludents considering the possibility of transferring to degree programs at a later date should connect with specific college advising ser­ VICes as early as possibJe to assure deveJ­ opment of the best possible educational foundation _ Additional Services Provided by the University AdVising Center 1. COl lrses that promote academic suc­ cess and connections to the University. These include introduction to the Univer­ sity, career exploration, and returning adult seminars. 2. Specia l programs that target the unique needs of WSU populations. These include returning adults, first-year students, stu­ dents of COIOf, student alhletes, non­ native speakers of English, exploratory studen t.::, and s tudents admitted with special conditions. 3. Outreacil sen/ices that support con­ ltituen ts of the University in the larger metropolitan area. These Include business and industry visits and fairs, liaison with I-.nnsas community colleges, the Wichita Area Technical Col lege, and concurrent enroUment services for area high schools. Where To Go For Academic Advising Academic advising is available through inclividua l offices listed beiow for 1) degree-b,)und studenh who have decided to pursue a major or program in a specif.ic college; 2) degree-bound exploratorv stud~nts who have not yet decided on a major; 3) nondegree-bound studen ts who are enrolled in Jn~ses for pur­ poses other than completing a degree; and 4) graduate students. Degree-Bound-Major Decided Business W. Frank Barton School of Business 114 Oinlon HaJJ (316) WSU­324S www.twsu.edu/-bsbwww/ Education College of Edllcation 10'7 Corbin Education Center (316) WSU-3300 education.twsu.edu/ Engineering CoU~e of Engineering 100 WalJace ]fall (316) WSU·3400 www.engr.twsu.edll/ Degree-Bound-Exploratory and Nondegree-Bound University Advising Center 115 Grace WilkieHall (316) WSU-3700 www.mrc.twsu.edu/uac / "meArts College of Fine Arts 415 Jardine HaJJ (316) WSU-3389 finearts.twsu.edu / fineartsl Health CoUege of I-leal lh ProfessIOns Professions 4Q2 Ahlberg Hall (316) WSU-3600 wwwfeist.com/-wsucofhp! Liberal Arts Fainnount College of and Sciences Uberal Arts and Sciences 200 L.tndquist Hall (316) WSU-31 00 WIVW. wichita.edulonlinc/liberal.asp Graduate Students Graduate School 107 Jardine Hall (316) WSU-3095 www.wichila.edu/-aclmgll'ww/ 4. Publications alld workshops tha t pro­ mote advisor and student development 5. Rt:ferral services that connect s tudents with fac uity, staff, and other campus resources. Academic Information Orientation Orientation and educational planning programs help new studen ts become a part of the learning community and teacll the requirements, expectations, and pro­ cedures of that community. At orienta ­ tion, students meet with academic advi­ sors, register for classes, obtain a student 10 card, learn about campus life opportu­ nities, obtain iniormation regard ing career deveJopment and cooperative edu­ cation, and make importan t cOlU1ections with WSU faculty, staff, current students, and other new students. Specia lly selected student orientation leaders and faculty members are carefully trained to work with new students in small groups during orientation. Degree-bound Studen ts: Because orienta­ tion and educational plan ning are not preludes to education, but rather are a part of college education itself, new stu­ denb; entering directly from high school alld all fiJ'q t-semester degree-bound slu­ dents with fewer lhan 24 transfer hours are required to attend orientation. OriEo!l1­ tation programs specifically designed for each student population are scheduled in advance of the fall and spring semester and Summer Session. information about orientation and registration is sent by the Office of Admissions to all students wh have been ad..rrtitted to the University Nondegree-boull d Stlldents: Orientation programs are available, and recommend­ ed, for nondegree-bound students. LAS 1 lOOA, Returning Adult Seminar, CI class designed for adults who have been Qut of school for one year or more, alsu is avail­ able as all enrollment option. Parts of the course serve as un ongoing orientation and the class is offered fall and spring semesters. Contact the University Advis­ ing Center for more information. For more information about orientation, contact the Office of Admissions-Orienta­ tion, (316) 978-5686. Registration Specific information regarding rt'gistra­ tion is given ill the Wichita Slatl' Ulli'l'L'rsity 16 Schedule of Courses published each semester and Summer Session. Students may not register after the first week of classes. Falsification of information or with­ holding information pertinent to the rec rds of the University is grounds for dismissal. Academic Forgiveness Students who have accumulated a grade point average of less than 2.000 may peti­ tion the dean of his or her college and the college Committee on Admis ion and Excepti ns to be admitted Lo a degre program with no college credil and no grade point average. To qualify, petitioners must be at least 25 years old, must have been out of a degree program of college tudies for at least four years, and must demonstrate ability to progress in college work. U the petition is approved, all prior col­ lege courses and grade are recorded on the transcript, tIle notation "admitted with ut credits or grades by committee action" is made. The policy may be apphed to Wichita State University enrollment as well as to work at oUler colleges. When implement­ ed, the policy waives all previous credits and grades except in the case f credits and grades earned in the special non de­ gree-bound tatu under th open admis­ sion policy. Exceptions Committee The University has an Exceptions Com­ mittee to review petitions from people seeking ad mission to Ule University who alhen-vise do not qualify. The committee a Iso considers petitions from students eeking exceptions to specific academic rules and regulations . S tudents are advised to begin the petitioning proce s by consulting with academic advisors in their college of nrollment. Classification of Students Students are classified according to the following scheme: Freshmen: less than 30 semester hours earned Sophomore : 30 to 59 semes ter hours earned Juniors: 00 tu R9 semester hours earned Seniors: 90 semester hours or more earned. As a general rule, a studen t taking 12 hours during the fall or spnng semester i consid ed a full-time student For gradu­ ate s tudents, nine graduate credit hours are considered a ful1load. (Graduate stu­ dents who are half-time tea bing as is­ tants are considered full time if they take i or more hours. Graduate students tak­ ing all or a majority of courses \ hich carry undergraduate credit must meet th 12-hour requirement to be certified as full-time students.) During the Summer Scs ion, six hour are ful l time for both undergraduate and graduate students, with graduate teach­ ing assistants fuJI lime with three hours. In order to graduate with a bachelor's degree in eight semesters, a tudent must ta ke an average of 16 credit hou r per semester. Meaning of Course Numbers COUTS'S numbered 99 or below do not count toward a bachelor's degree pro­ gram. Courses n umbered 100 to 29 are de igned primarily for freshmen and sophomor s, but students from other classes may be admitted for lower-divi­ sion credit. Graduate students may not take these courses for graduate credit. ourses numbered 300 to 499 are taught primarily for juniors and seniors. Fresh­ men and sophomores also may be admit­ ted if they satisfy the course prerequisites given in the Wichita Stat~ Ullitltrsily Cnta­ loX. Graduate students may not take these courses for graduate credit. Courses numbered SOO to 699 are aimed primarily at juniors and seniors, but grad­ uate students may aJ a receive graduate credit for these courses. Courses numbered 700 to 799 are struc­ tured primarily for graduate students, bU l upper-division undergraduate stu­ dents may be admitted if they meet course prereqwsites. Curses numbered 800 to 9Q9 are designed for graduate students only and no students may be admitted to these courses unless they have been admitted to the Graduate School. (See the Catl1log section on graduate credit for seniors for special conditions under which seniors may be admitted to graduate courses. CreditINo Credit Courses Cour es numbered below 100 do not carry credit toward a Wichita State degree and are graded Creclit/No Credit (CrINCr). All credit hours in such courses are parentheSized on the student' tran­ script and lhe credit hours are excluded from credit toward graduation . Such courses are excluded from the calculation of the grade point average. In addition, certain credit courses are graded only CrINCr. Any department in the University may offer curses un a CrlNCr bast!. This de ignation is includ­ ed in the course de cription of such cour es in the WichIta Stale U//iversity Catalog. H stud nts withdraw from a CrINer course before U,e end of the tenth week of the emestcr (or the fifth week of the eight-week Summer Se sion), a grade of Wi recorded. If they withdraw fr m such a course after the Lenth week [a semester (fifth week of the eight-week Summer Sessi n), they receive a grade of NCr, subject 0 the right of petition to th'-" University's ConunitLee on Admi ions and Exceptions. CrlNCr may also be granted to a Ere h­ man for the first semester of work during the transition emester, a discu' ed 111 the Transition Semester ection of the Cattlfog. Transfers Within the University Students may Lran fer from any under­ graduate degree-granting coUege to another prOVided they meet, as a mini­ mum, the admission requirements of th econd c liege. Since some departments have space problem , they are forced to iropo e ome limitation on the number of transfer students they accept. Such lim­ itations must be approved by the dean of the college concerned and the vice presi­ d nt {or academic affairs. For specific infonnation about proba­ tion standards and admis 'ion require­ ments of individual degree-grnnting col­ lege, refer to the individual college sec­ tions of the Cntnlo~. Examinations The examination policy in each course is established by the department and the faculty of record and will be outlined with the course r quirements. Reexami­ nations shaU be permitted only with the consent of the faculty when reexamina­ tion is deemed to ontribute to the aca­ demic objectives of the course. Students cannot be required to take more than two final examinations per day . Arrangements for rescheduling the examination must be made by the student prior to the scheduled exammation. Special examinations, when requested, will be given only with the consent f the dean of the college involved. Student with di abilities hould onta t the Direc­ tor of Disability Services for a si lance with special examlnatiorul. Students who miss an assigned exami ­ nation sh uld arrange with their instruc­ lor to lake a make-up examination. Deans WlGIITA STATE UNIVERSITY /GRADING SYSTEM 17 of Lhe collep;e will serve liS 11 rbitrll tors only wh~'n deemed necessary. Auditor SttJdenls are permHled in credit courses n a noncredit basis with appropriate approvnl under an auditor classification. To be enr~l11ed as auditors, students must enroll in the same manner and pay the same fees ..5 for credit courses at the Unj­ versily . Auditors may take advantage of tht' same privileges of class participation and instructor evaluation that students enrolled for credit have. Auditors are expected to llltend class regularly. The audited course will appear on the rran­ scripl with the grade notation of Au. Grading System. Wichita State grades include A, B, C, D, F, W, All, Cr, NCr, S, U, I, R, and CrE. A Distinguished achievement. Credit given, lour credit points per se­ nlester hour. S Superior aclUevement. Credit given; three credit points per semester hour. e Average aclUevement. Credit given; two credit points per semester hour. D Below average achievement. Credit given: one credit point per semester hour. F Failing work. No credit hours earned toward graduation; zero credit pOints per semester hour. 'ounted C1!> a course attempted and Lompleted and included in compu­ tation of grade point average. I'll Withdrawal from course. No credit given; no credit points. Does not affect grnde point average. All Audit. No credit given; no credit points. Does not affect grade point average. Auditors may take advan­ tage of the same privileges of class participation and instructor evalua­ tion afforded studl!Ilts enrolled for crediL C, Credit (A, B, or C). Used only in the transition semester ond for courses defined as CrlNCr in the Catolog . :'redi t given; no credit points. See tbe Catnlog section on credit/no credit courses. NCr No Credit (D or n Used only in the transltlOn semester and for course. definl"d as CrlNCr in the Cotalog No credit given; no credit points. See the Cnta/Ilg ~ection on credit/no crcdi l courses. s atisfac tory (A , 8 , or C). Credit , given; no credit points assigned. Unsatisfactory (D or F). No credit givCI1; no credit points assigned. Incomplete. Temporarily recorded as a grade when a student is granted an extension of time to complete course work. Credit is postponed and the course is Dot included ill th tudent's grade point average until it is completed and a regular letter grade is assigned. An incomplete course must be satisfactorily com­ pleted by the end of the next semester in which the studen t enrolls, summer excluded, or the I reverts automatically to an F. Stu­ dents may not enroll in the COUTse in which they rece ived the I unless they do not enroll at WSU for on calendar year. The following conditions govern incompletes: 1. If students do not enroll at Wichita State within one calendar year following an incomplete and if their work is not completed within that calendar year, they must enroll In that course as a repeat during their next semester of enrollment or the grade wiU be cl1anged to F. If they do enTolJ in the course again, the 1 is changed to Wand the grade earned during the repeat seml"ster becomes the grade of record. (ll the course is not offered when they resume academic work, they must request that an exception be made by the chairperson of the depart­ men t offering the course. The de­ partment chairperson mlly authorize a substitute course, postpone involving grades assigned more thJ.n one year prior t the time of appeal. In cases where failing grades have been recorded because a tudent was unable to withdraw officially, the studen t may peti­ tion lhe dean of the c lIeg for a retroac­ tive withdrawal from all course in the semester in question . TIle studenl must provide verifiable evidence of the causes for fai ling to withdraw properly. If the petiti n i granted, the gra es are changed to W th rough the usual with­ drawal procedure. If a s tudent requests a ha nge more than year after the original grades were po ted, the s tudent's petition also must be approved by th University's Commit­ te on Admissions an Exceptions. The poUcy applies to aU ourses in a sem ster and can be in oked only for Wichita State Uruversity courses. This change of grade policy may not b applied after g raduat ion to courses ( ttempted prior to graduation. Thansition Semester To accommodate students in their adjust­ ment to college standards, they mny be eli­ gible for a special transition semester. The transition semester is a student's firsl reg­ ular emester at Wichita State regardless of the number f hours attempted (Sum­ mer Session excluded). However, stu­ dents who have enrolled at another i.nsti­ tution of higher learrung in a regular term (summer term excluded) before enrolling at Wichita State are not enti tled to a tran­ sition semester aL the University. When studen ts ree ive thei r gr ded reports (A, B, C, D, or F) and if tlley have b Iowa 2 .000 GPA, they ma J fi le a request with the dean of the student's col­ lege that all work in the transition semester be traJ1sIated into Credit/No Credit (CrINCr) on th ir official records, with C,. applying to letter grades A , B, and C, and NCr applying to letter grades D andF. To have letter grades tTanslated in to riNCr, the Transiti n Semester Request Form must be filed by the student with the dean of the student's college between the posting of the semest r grades and the student's next enrollment, including Summer Session. Students who file fo r transi tion senlester will be placed on pro­ bation and will be required to meet the follow ing criteria: 1. Students are limited t a maximum of 12 semester hours (or a proporti ona l enrollment during Summer Session) or less during their next enroilment period . 2. Students must complete at least six (6) graded hours during their next enroll­ ment (ex Luding Summer Session) before eligibility will be reviewed. his does n t iJ1.clude en r 11ment in courses taken for Credit, Audit, or Satisfactory. 3. Students must receive at least a 2.00 GPA. Students wh fail to me t thl!S€ requir ' ments will not be awarded tran itlOll semester and will be subject to the approl priate probation or disnllSsal tandard . Credit by Examination Advanced s tanding redi t mav b obtained by examlnati n. The credit-by~ examination program al Wi li ta State i designed to en able those wh hav~ acl1ieved coUege-level education U1rou h independent tudy, correspondence, tele­ vi-' ion ins truction, pa l experiencl:!, or other traditional or nontradi tional mean~ to demon trate their levd of a hievement. The test reswts may be used to gain col­ lege credit in u ndergraduate course . Credit by examination will not b award­ ed for duplica tion of credit or to replace course grades. Students hou ld check with their academic adVisor befo e ttempting any test. There arc four means by which such credit may be earned: 1. Cred it may be earned through an Advanced Placement (AP) examinati n a mini. tered by the College Entrance Examination Board (CEEBl through {1e student's high s hool. The AP program i ~ adminis tered by CEES in ooperation with participating high sch Is. The test- re grad d u nder the superv ision of CEEB and the cores, which range from a high f five to a low of one, are sent to the college or univer ity cl,osen by the stu­ dent. Credit by AP examinati n is award­ ed al Wichita State in lhe areas of biologi­ cal sciences, chemiStry, English, French, Germ an, history, Latin , mathematic , physics, Russian, and Spanish. Under the AP program, credit at Wichita State is granted for specific courses . The titles llf the sp cific cour es for which credit i . granted and the scores necessary for such credit are available from the Wichita State admissions office. 2. Credit may be eam ed by examination through the Co llege Board' Collegl!­ Level Examinat ion Program (C EP J. C LEP examination are administered lhrough the Wichita State Counseling and Testing Center. General CLEP examina­ ti ns are intended for entering freshmen; a tudent with di isional cred.i t "'ill not receive additional hours by taking gener­ al CLEF examinations Information About the dates and times at which CLEP exam­ inations ilre giVeJl is ava Llable fr m the Counseling and Testing Center. 3. Credi t for certain pecified gen ral education course may be earned throuIYh examinations administered by the Wich i­ WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY / HONORS PROGRAM 19 til 'Hale Counseling and Testing Center. In(ormation concerning the specific courses for which lhese tests are available and the standards applied in gra.nting cr~dit are avajJable from Ihe Counseling and T csling Center. 4 IndivIduals admmed to Wichita State may earn credit by departmental exanti­ nation. In genera l, sludents may earn credit by examination for any undergrad­ ual~ c()ur~e noL covered in the areas given i1bove. Students shouJd apply directly to the chairperson of the department offer­ ing the course and consuJ I with the Coun­ seling ilnd Testing Center before taking the e\am. The chairperson will make the e\lIminalion aVllilable, unJess the course has l:>ecn exempted from credit by exami­ na ti on by the University's Academic St,mdards and Practices Committee. The chairper~on will be responsible for ensur­ Ing that students al'e informed of the cope of the course, the tex t used, and other relevant information. bct'pt for specia l deparLmental exams d iscussed in the next paragraph, the grade recorded for credit earned by ~xamina l ion is erE and it is recorded on a shldcnl's transcript a fter enrollment in the University. Students may not take a (J'cdit-by-examination test for credit in a ur"e in which they have previously LlnroHed unless they received a W for the course. They may not retake any such examination . Studet' ts may not request an ellamin illio n for course credit in a COUT"C [or which Lhey do not have the stated preret]uisile credit. Credjt earned by ex"mination is treated exactly like that eaml.'!d by ela:;~ enrollment for internal purposes at Wichita State (class stamiing, completi on of course prerequisites, col­ l~e rC~luirements, etc.). It b possible to show letter grades on thE' ITilnqcript for departmental credit by ;'iilminiltwn if approval for letter grades IS wanted by the University'S Committee on Academic Standards and Practices . ppr')\al is granted If the department dl'monslra tes to the committee that the teshn~ procedure for credit by examina­ ~ H1 n l S equivalent tu the testing procedure l~ the corresponding credit class. The C(jmmitt~~ On Academic Standards and Practices asks for periodic review of this te~hng procedure. For example, the num­ bt>r of hours of testi ng tilTO ugh both the oed !! class and the credH examInation should be .b . approx1mately the same, and la OTiltory C()urses need to include labora­ tory experiences as a pari of tht' credit ~~;lIninat' Whlon . en le t ter grades a re awarded f . or credit by examination, a • notation identifying the credit as credit by examination will be included on the LTan­ script along with a statement explalll lllg tha t cred it earned by exammabon repr~ sents equivalency with the examination experience and performance for the regu­ larly graded course. When students take credj t by examination for letter grades, the following additional policies apply: a. Students are allowed to withdraw from any credi t-by-examination tes t aL any time prior to its evaluation . Prior to taking the exam, students must be informed of tIle option not to submit the exam for the recording of a grade. Once the exam is graded by the instructor, Ihe grade earned is recorded on th lTanscripL b . If the department has received approval of the Ulllversity's Committee on Academic Standards and Practices to assign letter grades for departmenta l examinations and If the department has prepared separate tests for erE and grad­ ed credit, students must select which test they want to take. If the department has prepared only the examination for graded credit, students have the option to have their Lest evalua ted either for graded credit or erE crcdit, provided that the cho ice is declared to the depar tment before the test is taken. Fces are assessed to cover the costs of administering examinations and must be paid before the examinations are taken. A schedule of fees for the various exanuna­ lions is avai lable from the Counseling and Testing Center. All credit by examination is subject to University polioes and will be reviewed by the Registrar before being placed on the tra nscript. Credit awarded by exa mj natio n is detennined by the department offering the course in consultation with the Uni­ versity' s Committee on Academic Stan­ dards and Practices. In the case of credit earned by departmental examination, the department has sole jurisdiction. Credit by examination from an accredit­ ed institutions of higher education is evaluated in the same manner as regular­ ly graded course work from these institu­ tions . The credit awarded is adjusted to the credit -by-examination policies of Wichita Stale. Every attempt is flU1de to ensure that credit by examination applies to both a student's degree program and University requirements for graduation . However, in no case maya transfer stu­ dent receive more credit than that avail­ able to students at Wichita State. Exemptions for Superior Achievement Students who have completed a mini­ m u m of 12 hours at Wichita State and have a cumulative grade poin t average of at least 3.250 and a grade point average of at least 3.000 tIle previous semester may be granted several priVileges: 1. They may be exempt from regu la­ tions governing the maximum number of hours aUowed students during a semester. 2. They also may be exempt from col­ lege regula tiOllS, if a ny I governing the maximum number of hours students may take during a semester in one depa rt­ ment. However, no student shall enroll in more than 21 hours without the permis­ sion of their college dean. 3. They may have permission to have course prerequisites waived with the con­ sent of the instructor of the course and the head of the department III which the course is taken. Graduate Credit for Seniors (Senior Rule) Seniors at Wichita State University or neighboring bachelor's degree-granting institutions who have an overaU grade point average of 3.000 or above in their major field and in upper-division courses and who are within ten hours of complet­ ing tile bachelor's degree may take work for graduate credit under the Selllor Rule. This work must go beyond the requir~ ments for the undergraduate degree and the degree must be completed within the semester in w hich a student takes the graduate courses. Students also must be admitted to the Graduate School. Appli­ cation for the Senior Ru le is made to the Graduate School and must be approved by a student's major advisor, chairperson for the department in which the course . taken, u ndergraduate dean, and the dean of the Graduate School before any cours­ es can be taken for grad uate credi t. Emory Lindquist Honors Program The Emory Lindquist Honors Program provides an enriched university experi­ ence to outstanding students. It welcomes students who are highly motivated and well-prepared The program offers semi­ nars, honors colloquia, and honors sec­ tions of regularly scheduled courses. Each course is limited. to 25 or fewer students. The program also extends opportunities for independent study a.nd sponsors aca­ demic enrichment activities SUell as lec­ tures, fie ld trips, and participation in 20 regional nd national h nors rganiza­ tions. The program promotes academic excel­ lence at the undet:graduate level by offer­ ing a challenging honors track within the University' General Education Program, opportunitie to eam academic distinc­ tion in a tudent's departmental maior, and various upport services. The honors curriculum features small classes, experi­ enced, highly committed faculty, and an approach to -tudy tha t emphasizes par­ ticipatory over passive learning. Support ervices provided by the program include academic advising and counseling and fa dlHie where students can study, meet with friends, or just relax. The student-led Emory Lindquist Honors Society pon­ sors a variety of academic and n n-aca­ demic activities. Broad pr gram policy IS established by lhe Faculty Honors Committee and is subject to approval by the vice president for academic affairs. The honoTS director, in conjunction with the tudent Honors Executive Council, makes policy recom­ mendation and ponsors student activi­ ties. Generally, freshmen are admitted t the program if their composite score on the Enhanced American College Test (ACT) is 26 r high r, or if their h igh school grade point average is 3.500 or higher as certified by the University. Transfer and con ti nuing s tudents may enter the pro­ gram if they have ach ieved a minimum grade point average of 3.250 in universi­ ty-level tudies and if they satisfy other trans fer and admission criteria estab­ lished by the program. Students who sat­ isfy the minimum grade point average requirements but who are not member of the program may enroll i ll honors courses if they have the permisSion of the honors director To be admitted to the progranl, a student needs to ubmit an Honors Program Application and meet with a program representative. Students in the Emory Lindquist Hon­ ors Program are exp ete tu remain in good standing by maintaining at lea t a 3.25 grade point av rage overall, it 3.000 rade point average in ho nors course work, a.nd by making regular progress toward completion of the honors curricu­ lum. Student whose performance falls below these e pectation wi U be plae d n probation with the honors program Probation A ludenl who e overa ll or honors grade p int average fall!; below rogram requirements will be put on robation for the next serne t . of enrollment. A tudent will be removed from proba­ tion if grade point requirements are satis­ fied for wo rk taken d uring th nex t semester of enrollment. In the semester fo llowing that, the stu­ dent's overall and h nor grade poin t averages need to satisfy program require­ m nt or the tudent will be dismis ed from the program. Students may appeal dismissal to the Faculty Honors Commit­ tee by demonsh'ating compelling reasons why they should be permitted to contin­ ue as an honors student. Normal Progress ormal progre s towards completion of lhe honor curriculum is defined as fol­ low: • c mpiete one seminar w ithin the first 15 credit hours at WSU • complete two seminars within the first 10 cred it h urs at WSU • complete three seminar wi thin the first 45 credit hour at WSU • submit a Senior Project Study Propos­ al approved by the major department after ach.ieving s nior status. Graduation Requirements To graduate with the notation "H nors Program Graduate" on hi or her tran­ script, 105. Seminar 1: Humanities. (3- 4). General education illtrod uctory course. Topics var Prerequisite: Beginning honors student or per­ miSSion of honors director. >106. Seminar I: Social and Behavioral Sci­ ences. (3- 4).General education introductory ( OUI!>C Topics vary . Prerequisite; Begin ning honors student OT permission of honors direc­ tor. >107. Seminar I: Mathematics and Natural Sciences. (3- 5). 1-3R; l-lL. General education intmductory course. Topics vary. Prerequisite: Beginni ng honors studen t or pennission of honors director. >150. Semina.r IT: Fine Arts. (3- 4) . General ed uca tion in troduct<>ry course. Topic~ vary. Prerequis ites Hnrs. 104 and six ad ditional (red it hours, or permission of honors director. >151. Seminar n: Humanities. (3- 4). General "u uca tion introductory course. Topics vary. Prer~q\lisites: Hnrs . 105 and s ix additi onal credi t hours, or permission of honors di.ector. >152. Semin.ar IJ: Social and Behavioral Sci­ ences. (3- 41.GeneraJ ed ucation introductory L'ilillse. Tqpics vary. Prerequisites: HIlrs. 106 and six additional credit hOl-Irs, or permission of honors direct'llr. >153. Semma.r Il; Mathematics and Natural Sciences. (;J- 5). 1-3R; l-2l. General educatiou iniToduclOFY course. Topics vary . Prl'requ i­ siles: Hnrs. 107 and six additionol credit hours, or permission (I{ honors director. Upper-Division Courses >204. Seminar Ill: Fine Arts. (3- 4.). General ~d ucatit.m issues and perspectives course. Top­ ics vary. Prerequisites: HnTS. 104 and 150 and twelve add itional credit hours, or permission of hnnllTS director. >205. Seminar 1Il: Humanities. (3- 4). General education issues and perspectives course. Top­ ics vary. Prerequisites: Hnrs. 105 and 151 a.nd tweh , .. additional credit hours, or permission of honors director . >206. Seminar m: Social and Behavioral Sci­ ences. (3- 4). General education issues and per­ spectives course. Topics vary . Prerequioites: Hn l"- . 106 and 152 and twelve additional credit hou rs, or permission of honors director. >207. Seminar m: Mathematics and Natural Sdences. (3- 51. 1-3R; l-lL. General education issues and perspectives course. Topics vary. Prerequisite:;: Hnrs. 107 a nd 153 and twelve additiona l credi t hours, or permisSion of hon­ Urs di re<:lor - 310. Honol'S Tutorial (t). Repeatable to a max­ imum of three hours of credit. >400. Honors Semjnar. (1-4). General ed uca­ tion further study course. 410. Independent Study. (1 ..·t). Repeatable to a maximum of six hours of credit. >420Q. Seminar in Humanities. (3-4). General educati011 issues and perspectives course. Top­ ics vary. Prerequisites: Hnrs. 205 or permission of honors director. >430Q. Seminar in Social and Behavioral Sci­ ences. (3-4). General education issues and per­ spectives course. TopiCS vary . Prerequisites: Htlrs. 206 or pemlission of honors director. >440Q. SemjnaI in Natural Sciences and Mathematics. (3-5). General education isSUI and perspectives course. Topics vary. Prerequj ­ sites: Hnrs. 207 or permission of honors direc­ tor. >450Q. Seminar in Fine Arts. (3 ..4). General educatio11 issues and perspectives course. Top­ ics vary. Prerequisites: Hnrs. 204 or permission of honors director. Honors Mentor Program Much of the excitement of college leam­ ing comes through informal discussions with facul ty and other st'lIdents . Honors 310, Honors Tutorial: Selected Readings offers jus t su ch an opportu nity. Th is cour~e fea tu res informal d i.scussion between groups of five or six studen ts and a faculty mentor. While four or five books arc read and discussed during the semester, the p rimary pu r pose of the course is to personalize the educational experience and give students an opportu­ nity to talk about other education con­ cerns they may have. Independent Study Leading to a Degree With Departmental Honors Outstanding students may enroll in the junior or senior yea rs in independen t st udy w hich lea ds to a d egree with departmental honors iJ the work is satis­ factorily completed. Students with junior standing and a cumula ti ve grade poin t average of 3.250 are eligible to conduct projects in their major area of study. A student considering such a project should begin planning the work well in advance of the semester during which the work is to be done. in order to emoil in Honors 410, Independent Study, the student must consult wi th the honors d irec tor a nd obtain tbe approval of the instr uctor in the student's major departn\t~l' t who will be the advisor for the project. The written application must then be approved by the chairp erson of depar tmen t and by th dean of the student's college. The com­ pleted application form must be filed with the honors director no later than the sec­ ond week of the semester during which the student desires credit for the work. An independent study pToject should ons ist of original research or crea ti ve work. To be gradua ted wi th departmen­ tal honors, a student must complete th independent study project and write th results accordi ng to specifications estab­ lished by the honors director. The student must be examined on their project and other aspects of the major field of study. A three-member facu lty committee con­ ducts the examination and determines the student's eligibility for graduation with departmental honors. Students failing t secure such a degree either because of failu.re to complete their projects or fail­ ure in the examination will receive aca­ demic credit toward the regular degree for the credit hours comp leted, with the grade determined by the instructor under whom the work was performed . In no case may any student receive more than six hours of credit for independent study. Academic Recognition In all colleges, honors criteria are estab­ lished for Wichita State students by the University aJld apply equally to all stu­ den ts, whether or not they are in the Emory Lindquist Honors Program. A U honors are based on WSU grade point average. The Dea n's Honor Roll is p ublished each semester and is composed of stu­ d ents enrolled in 12 or more semester hours of graded work w ho achieve a grade point average of 3.500 or higher for a semester. Students enrolled in six through eleven hours of graded work per semester who acrueve a grade point average of 3.500 or higher wiil receive Academic Commen­ dation. The list of such students wi11 be published each semester. Degrees are conferred with dlstinction upon studen ts who have shown excel­ lence in scholarship . TIle minimum stan­ dard for graduating SIIII IIIUl cum Im/.de is a cumulative and Wichita State grade point average of 3.900. The minimum standard for grad ua ti n g mngtlO cli m Inude is a cumulative and Wichita Sta te grade point average of 3.550. The minimum standard for graduating ClJm laude is a cumulative mId Wichi ta State grade point average of 3.250. Withdrawal Voluntary Withdrawal Students encountering specia l problems dUIing a semes ter may protect thei r 22 record lhrough volun tary acade m ic withdrawal based on the followinp; procedures. Student may withdraw volu.ntaTlly fr many r all course· through the tenth we k of a sem'ster or the fifth week of the eight-week Summer Session and have a Wrecorded for th course( l. After the tenth week of a semester or the fifth week of the eight-week Summer Se ion, tuden ts may withdraw from ne or more courses with a W only if they petition the dean of their college and if the Universitys Committee on Admis­ si ns and Exceptions approves their peti­ tion. The a lternative to a W is an F. ) When tudents wish to withdraw, they mu t consult an advisor, obtain drop slip(s) for every course (line number), and have their advisor sign in the appropriate place. They must then take the drop slip(s) to the in tructor of each dropped course and obtain the in tructor's signa­ ture. After receiving the instruc r'. Sig­ nature for each droppe course, tudents must take the drop slip(s) to the office of the dean of th appropriate college for the dean's signature and final approva l. The completed drop sLip(s) must then be taken to the Registrar' office in Jardine Hall. Refund , if any, will be made accord­ ing to the schedule published in the Wichita SIal' Ulliaersit y Schedu le of Cuurses. Complete withdrawal from Wichita State mu st be made in writing to the dean's office of the appropriate college. Administrative Withdrawal Administrative withdrawal may b initi­ ated by the dean's office of the college in which student is enrolled, the business ffice, Division of Student Affairs, or other appropriate Un.iversity ffices for the following reasons: 1. The student's dass attendance is so p or that in the instructor's opinion full 'n fit cannot be derived from the course 1... The student fails to c mpJete success­ fully all prerequisites for th e courses in which the student is enrolled 3. The student violates the provisions f the student's responsibilities tatem ~tJ in the University Catawg. (See the Student Resp nsibilily section of the Caln/og. ) 4. The tudent does not comply with the t rm of a provisional admission S. TI,e student has unmet financial obli ­ gations to the University. Thl' office initiating adm ini striltive withdrawnl WIll notify the dean f the collt!ge in which lhe student is enroll1.'!d when withdrilwal pro t.'t!dings are imtiat­ ed . The student ~ then notified by the dean' office that h or he may be with­ drawn admini tratively so lhal the stu ­ de nt may explain his or her p ition bef re final action i taken. If official notices from the dean's office are ignored or returned because the address iven by the studen t at the time f enrollment is incorrect, administrative withdrawal will lake place lS de ys after the initial notice. A grade f W or F will be officially recorded on the tud ent' permanent record for a course or rour es fr m which the student i adm inistratively with­ drawn. Th grade of F will b recorded only if the ad ministrative withdrawal is for academic rea ons. Academic Progress Reports Reports on a student's progress ar given in several way . Midterm Dow/l Reports. At midsemester, a D wn Report may be sent to students doing below avera e work, and to their acad mic advisor, as an ind ication that their grades need to be improved. Stu­ dents should meet with their instructor a nd lor college advisor to discu the problem. Absence Letters. Facul ty members who make regular attendance checks may in.form the dean of a s tudent's college when the student ili absen t e ce sively. Th dean may either process an adminis­ trative withdrawal or request that the stu­ dent initiate an offidal withdrawal or make arrangements with the instructor to compI.ete the course. Students failing to take either course of action will receive an F at the end of the semester. Illforlllal Wanrirlg . Students with an overall grade point average above the level required by U,eir college for gradua­ tion but below this level for one semester may receive a letter from the dean of their coUege warning of the con 'equences of ontinued substandard perf rmance. Such warnings do not appear on a stu­ dent's transcript. Academic Probation and Dismissal Standards Specific rl'gWahons governing probation and dismissal standards are established by each college at Wichita Stilte and are given in the introductory statements in the individual college sections of the Cat­ I110g. Students should consult the appro­ priate section of the Catalog for these stan­ dard. Since 2.000 (a grade f C) is the mini­ mum grc de pOint average requ ired for graduaU n from Wichita State, tudents are formally placed ( r continu ed on probation at the oncJusiol1 f every semester in whic.h their overall WSU grade point average falls below 2.000, excepl a noted below. If the call ge in which students are enrolled has a higher graduation requirement, students may be placed on probatioll whenever their WSU grad pOint average falls below the col­ lege's specified level. Students adm itted in good standing will be placed on probation when they have attempted six hour and their WSU grad e pint aveTage falls below 2.000. Attempted hours are defined as a ll hours , ppearing on the tean 'cript ",rjth a grade of A , B, ,D, F, W, Cr, NCr, I , 5, OT U. Transfer students admitted on proba­ tion must complete at least 12 emester hours at Wichitl State with a 2.000 aver­ age b fore probation may be removed . A student n academic proba ti 11 is lim­ ited to a maximum of ]2 semester hours in the fal l and spring semester. Dismissal standards are sel by the vari­ ous colleges of Wichita State in confor­ mance with the followi ng policy, Students will n t be dismi ed if ei ther their WSU grade point averag or their last semesters grade point average equals the minimum gradua tion level of their ollege. They will remain on probation as long as their WSU graLie point average is below the mmimum University or co LI ge graduation standard and their emester grade point average meets the minimum c liege or division tandard. Students wi ll b dismissed at th end of the semester in whi h Lh y accumulate 12 attempted credit hours with a emester and WSU grade point average below the minimum required after being placed on probation. Students are not acadenucaUy di missed at the end of a cmester unless they bega n that semester on aead >mic probation. Dismi sal from a co llege because of poor academic performance consti tutes dismissal from the University. onethe­ less, a student who e grade point average qualifies him or her for admiss ion to another college may apply t lhe Com­ mittee on Admissions and Exceptions of that college. Court of Student Academic Appeals The faculty at Wich ita Stale ha e tab­ lished a procedure to resolve disputes arising out of the classroom through the Court of Student Academi Appeals. The court hears appeal from students who believe they have been treated unfairly in WlOIITA STATE UNIVERSITY/GENERAL EDUCATION PROGRAM 23 graJing or In nn instructor's charges of rl.:lgiaTi~m, chci'ltmg, or simi lar offenses. n,e court is designed to help resolve dif­ ierences that cannut be settled In lhe Jram~wMk of the sludent-filculty rela­ tionship and ofC~s an important safe­ guard for students. The <;tudent must fiJe an appeal within pne semester after the grade is assigned (exclud ing summer). The court reserves tlw ri~hl, in exceptional circumstances, to 5uspt'nu Illis rule. A11)' SLtJdent may use the appeal proce­ dure. FOID1S arc available in the Division of Student Affair:), 105 Grace Wilki~ Hall. The general procedure is explained to student:. when they pick up the form . General Education Program The General Educalion Program seeks to provide each student with B body of knowledge that is both a broad founda­ tion for his or her major field of study, and illso the beginning of what is neces­ ar)' to become a genuinely educated per­ SOI1. The GeneraJ Educatiun T'rogram pro­ "ides the opportunity for all students to ~row in t.heir knowledge and apprecia­ lilm of tilE! rich variety of Inunan achieve­ m~ls in t.he arts, humanities, and sci­ ences. 1 he goals for general education are as foJlow~. 1) to understand till' humaniLies Jnd hnw they explore the complexity of IhL' human e..xperience; 2) to understand and appreciate various art forms; 3) to understond human functioning and bchil\ior in individuals, groups, institu­ lion~, and societies; 4) to understand the l1alurnl sciences, lheir flpplication in tech­ nological innovation and development, clnd their impact on society; 5) to study ,md apply basic mathematical principles; .,nd 6) to study and apply pnnciples of wrillcil clnd oral communication. The program combines required courses in the BaSIC Skills (composition, oral com­ muniGlHon, and mathematics) wilh Intro­ ductlll)' courses in the discip lines , Fur­ lher Stull ies cou rses in the disciplines, and Issues dnd Perspectives courses. Faculty and advisors at WSU believe Ulat il "';cll plnnned General Education Program will help ilIJ students accom­ plish llw following: • com rnunicale clearly and effedively; • ,malyze and ass~s information utiliz­ ing a vanely of informaticlil and people resources; Tuhlem solve and make cxct.'llent deCIsions in personal, career, and COIn­ mullily.Ul!lUlS; • General Education Requirements Basic Skills 10 bl' completlod \\fith nCor better (12 hours minimwn) English Composition I.and TI OralCommunication Contemporary Mathematics, College Algebra, Precalculus MMhematics or another maUl class for which one of Ulese IS a prCrt'tjUlSltc Fine Arts and Humanities (12 hours minimum) ne Introductory course: Arl History, Dance, Musicology-{:omposilion and Theater TwulntroduclOry courses, one chOl.en from each of two of the following disciplines: Commumcation', English', History, linguistics, Modern and Classical Languages and Literature, Philosophy, Religion, Women's Studics One Further Studies course' ill either rUle Arts or Humanities or An Issues and Perspecllves" course 10 Fine Arts or Humanities. Social dnd Behavioral Sciences (9 hours minimum) T\\'(1 introductory rouISeI>, one cho~en from each of two of the following disciplines: Anthropology, Economics, Geography, Mmori!} Studies, PoliticalScience, Psychology, Sociology One flurthet Studies roun,e- in one of the Soda] and Behavioral Sciences aT An Issues and P~tives" course in the Social and Behavioral5ciences MalhelllatiL'S and Natural Sciences (9 hours minimum) Two Introductory cour.:.es, one chosen from eacll of two of the following disciplines: Biology, Chemi~tty, Compuler Science·, Geology, MaUlemBtics/Statisbcs', Physics. (Atl~ast one of these courses must be chosen from Biology, Chemistry, Geology or Physics.) One Further Studies course· in one of the Mathenlatics/NaturnJ Sciences disdplin (1r An Issues ,\nd Perspecti ves"" course in the Mathematics/Natural Sciences • Nonpro~onal CIlUr;cs limy, Dnd exclmling Basic Skills. .. Sludent3 mu,t take one lssu(') and Perspectives course; no more than two Issues;md Per,pectives I:OUfSCS will counl for geneTal education credil • motivate people and develop collabo­ rative work environments; • articulate issues, options, and conse-­ quences of decisions; • uti lize technology to solve problems and facilitate tilsks; • function by examined ethical stan ­ dard!; and principles; • appredate and apply understandings of the fine arts, humanities, social sci­ ences, natural sciences, and mathematics to life, career, and community challenges; • understand diverse cultures and relate well wilh individuals from these cultures; and • actively engage in the betterment of the community in whjch they live Significant development of oral and written communication, mathematical, and library research skilJs is expected of all Wicluta State UniverSJty graduates. Students transferrin!!; to Wichita State University under the Transfer and Articu­ lation Agreement of the Kansas Public Community Colleges and State Universi­ ties are cons idered to have met the requirements of Wichila State University General Education Program as deter­ mined by transcript evaluation. Thi refers only to lltudents with previous col­ lege credit and is not applicable 10 enter­ ing freshmen. Students entering the University in or after the Fall Semester of 1994 must satis­ fy the following requirements: I. Four Basic Skills courses (to be com­ pleted during the first 4.'3 college hours with a grade of C or better). A. English 100 or 101, and 102 B. Communication 111 C. Mathematics 111, 112, 131 or another matIl class for which one of th~t:! is a pre-­ requisite Students wiU, deficiencies in the Basic Ski ll s may be required to take back­ ground work or refresber courses. n. Seven InlTOduclory courses in the d!-s­ dplines, to include A. One course chosen from one of the following Fine Arts discipline~: Art History, Dance, Musicology­ Composition, and Thealer. B. Two courses, one chosen trom eadl of two of the following Humanities disciplines: 24 Communication·, Engli h", History, Linguistics, Modem and Classical Languages and Literature, Philosophy, Religion, and Women's Studies. C. Two courses, one chosen from each of two of the following Social and Behavioral Science disciplines: Anthropology, Economics, Geography, Minority Studies, Political Science, Psychology, and Sociology. D. Two courses, on chosen from each of two of the foil wing MathematicslNatural Sciences discipHnes: Biology, Chemistry, Computer Science", Geology, Mathematics/Statistics", and Physics. A1 least one of these courses TIII/st be dlOsenfrom Biology, ClremistnJ, Geology, or Physics. III. Three Further Studies courses, distributed as follows: A. A Further Studies (but not lntroductory) course" in one of either the Fine Arts or th Hurnanitie disciplines chosen for an Introductory course: or An Issues and Perspectives.... course in the Fine Arts or the Humanities. B. A Further Studies (but noL Introductory) course" in one of eilher the Social and Behavioral Sciences diSciplines chosen for an Tntroductory course: or An I sues and Perspectives"" course in the Social and Behavioral Sciences. C. A Further Studies (but not Introductory) course" in one of either the MathematicslNatural Sciences disciplines chosen for an Introductory COUTSe: or An Issues and Perspectives.... course in the MatbematicslNarural Sciences. • No n·profession.1 courses only, and excluding Basic Skills. •• Students C1ust GIll" ne Issues and Perspectives course; no more than two 1 ue ,'nd Pe.,pecUves courses will m unt f r general education credit. Genera l education courses must be at least three credit h urs and from the approved general education course list. All courses which qualify tor general education credit have a caret (» prefi in th Catalog. Courses wiLhin a student's major department shall not count in fulfilling general education requirements. (This resmcti n applies only to one major. For students with a double major, COUl· es in the second major could count in fulfilling their requirements.) Introductory Courses Introductory course in the disciplines which qualify for general education cr d it are identi­ fied with a caret (» prefix in the course listing for departments/programs/di cipHnes in lhe UndergmduQte Catalog. Pine Arts Courses Art H. 121G, Survey of Western Art Ancient ArL H. 122G, Survey of Western Art: Rena is 'ance and Baroque Art H. 124, Survey of Westem Art: Modem Dance 140, Art of the Dance Hnr .104, Seminar I: Fine Arts Hnrs. 104A, Li tening to Jazz Mus. C. 16OG, Heritage of Wt!Stem Music Mus. C. 162C, World Music Then. 143G, Art of the Theater Humallities Courses Comm. 190G, Introduction to Human Communica tion Engl. 220G, The Literary Heritage: English Masterpiece Engl. 230G, Exploring Literature Eng!. 232C, Themes in American Literature Fren. 210Q, Intermediate French (P) G rID . 220Q, Continuing German (P) Greek 223, Intermediate Greek (1)) Hist. lOOG, World Ovilization since 1500 Hist. l OIG, Western Ovilization t ]648 Hist. 10lG, Western Ovilization crom 1648 Hist. 131Q, History of the USA: Colonial Period to 1877 Hist. 1320., History of the US : 1 77 to Present Hnrs. ]05, Seminar [: Humanities HnTS. 105A, Plato and The Republic Hnrs. 1058, City in Cinema Latin 223, tntermediate Latin (P Ling. 151 G, The Nature of Language Phil. 1 ~OG, Meaning of Philosophy Phil. 1250., fntroductory Logic Phil. 144Q Moral fssues Rei. 1100., Old Testament Rei. 115Q, New Testament Russ. 21OQ, Intermediate Russian (P) Span. 210Q, Intermediate Spanish CP) Worn. S. 190G, The American Woman Worn. S. 2870., Women in Society: Social Issues Socialalld Behnvioraf Sciences Courses Anthr. lOOC, nthropology of Modem {American) Life Anthr. 1010., Biological Anthropology Anthr. 1020., Introduction to Cultural Anthropology Anthr. 103, Introdu tion to Archaeology ECOll. 2010, Principles of Macro-Economics Geog. 125Q, Principles of Human Geography Geog. 2100., World Geography Hnrs. 106,Semina.r 1: Social and Behavioral Sciences furs. 106A, City Politics HnTS. 1066, Architecture of the Ancient City Min. 5. 100Q, Introduction to Minority Studies Min. S. 21OQ, Fundamentals of Cross-Cuitural Communication Pol. 5. 101G, Who Ge What Pol. 5.1210., American P lilies Pol. S. 226Q Comparative Politic Psy. 1110, General Psychology Soc. 111Q, Introduction to Sociology Mathematics lIl/d Natural Sciellces CalifS Biol. 1040, Introducing Bi logy BioI. to C, The Human Organism BioI. 107G, The Human Organism Lab ratory BioI. 203Q, Introduction to Organi mal Biology Chern. tOlG, The Science of Chemistry Chern. 103Q, General Chemistry Chem. 111Q General Chemistry CS 105, Introduction to Computers CS 210, Introduction to Computer Science Geog. 201, Physical Geography Ceol. 102, Earth Science and the Environm nt Ceo!. 1] 10, General Geology Hnrs. 107, Seminar I: Mathematics and Natural Sciences Hnrs. 107A, Frontiers in Biomedical Sciences Math. 144, Busine s Calculus (P) Math. 242Q, Calculus f (P) Phys. IllQ, Introductory Physics Phys. 131, fntroductory Physics (for Health Science. ) Phys. 195G, Introduction to Modern Astronomy Phys. 2130, General College Physies Q, Studies in Popular Litera ture Eng!. 29OQ, The Bible as Literature - EngL 315, Introduction to English Linguistics EngL 320Q, The Nature of Drama Eng!. 330Q The Nature of Fiction Eng!. 34OQ, Major Plays of Shakespeare EngL 345, Studies in Comparative Literature EngL 360, Major British Writers T EngL 361, Major British Writers II EngL 362Q American Writers of the 19th Century Eng!. 365, African-American Uterature EngL 4OOG, TIle Literary Imagination Fren. 223, Intermediate French Readings J(P) Fren. 300, Intermediate French Readings IT (P Germ.. 223, Intermediate German T (P) Germ. 344Q, Intermediate German II (P) Greek 224. lnternlediate Greek (P) Hist. 311, History of Latin America J Hist. 312, History of Latin America 11 Hist. 313, English History I Hist. 314, English History II Hist. 317, The Holocaust liist. 320, Russian History Survey I-list. 32], The VIet Nam Conflict Hjst. 332, Ethnic America. ea 1500-1924 Hist. 333, Ethnic America in the 20th Century Hist. 340, World War 11 Hist. 357, Women in the Ancient World Hist. 359, The Greek World Rist. 362. The Roman World Hist. 501, The American Colonies Hist. 502, The American Revolution and Early Republic l-Iist 503, The Age of Jefferson and Jackson Hist. 504, Civil War and Reconstruction Hist. 505, America's Gilded Age FUsl. 507, U.S. History: 1900 to 1945 Hist. 508, U.S. History: 1945 to present Hist. 51 1, Women in Early America Hist. 512, Women and Reform in America Hist. 516, History of American Business Hist. 517, U.S. ConstitutionaJ History I Hist. 518, U.s. Constitutional History IJ His!. 521 , U.S. Diplomatic History I HisL 522, U.S. Diplomatic I-listory n Rist. 525, American Military History Hist. 528, The History of Wichita Hist. 530, American Women in History Hist. 531, American Environmental History Hist. 532, Women in Ethnic America Rist. 533, The American City Hist. 534, History of the Old South Rist. 535Q, liistory of Kansa Risl. 536, Survey of American lndian History Hist. 537, TIle Trans-Mississippi West Hist. 538, The American West in the 20th Century Hist. 541, Modern France Hist. 545Q, The World Since 1945 Hist. 553, History of Mexico Hist. 558, The Ancient Near East Hist. 559Q, Greek History I Hist. 560, Greek History II Rist. 562, Roman History I llist. 563, Roman History II Hist. 566, Medieval History I Hist 567, Medieval History n Hisl. 575, The Italian Renaissance Hist. 576, The Reformation Hist. 581, Europe 1815-1870 Rist. 582, Europe 1870-1945 Hist. 583, Europe 1914-1945 l-lisl. 592, History of the Soviet Union His!. 593, The Former Soviet Union Rist. 613, European Diplomatic History Latin 224, Intermediate Latin (P) Phil. 301, Language and Philosophy Phil. 303Q, 19lh Century Philosophy Pltil308, Philosophy of Economics Phil. 31lQ, Philosophy of Law Phil. 313Q Political Philosophy PIU L 315, Late Modem Philosophy Phi!. 320, Philosophy of Science Phil. 322Q. Early Modern Philosophy Phil. 327, Philosophy of Health Care Phil. 331Q Ancient Greek Philosophy Phil. 338, Philosophy of Feminism Phil. 346Q Philosophy of Religion Phil 354, Ethics and Computers Phil . 360, Ethical Theory (P) Phil. 375, Philosophy of the Arts ReI. 131G, Traditional Religion and the Modern World Russ. 224, Intermediate Russian (Pl Russ. 300. Intermediate Russian Readings (P) Span. 223, Selected Spanish Readings (P) Span. 300. Intermediate Spanish Readings (P) Wom. S. 361, Women and Work Wom. S. 387Q, Women in Society: Cultural Images Worn. S. 391, Women's Globallssues Worn. S. 511, Women in Early America, 1600-1830 Worn. S. 512. Women and Reform in America, 1830 to present Worn. S. 532, Women in Ethnic America Socm/ and Behavioral Sciellces COlll'ses Anthr. 200, Intercultural Relations Anthr. 213, American Popular Culture Anthr. 303Q World Cultures (P) Anthr. 305Q, World Archaeology Anthr. 307, Peoples of Africa AntilL 312, Asia Pacific Cultures Anthr. 313, Archaeology of East Asia Anthr. 318, Psychological Anthropology Anthr. 327, Magic, Witchcraft, and Religion 20 Al1lhr. 335, Archaeology f l' rth America Anlhr. 344, Ecological Anthropology Antllr. 356, Human Variability and Adapta tion (P) Anthr. 361, Law, Politics, and Society Anth r. 388, Cognitive Anthropology Anth r. 506, Peoples of the Pacific Anthr. 508Q, And n l Civilizations of the Americas (P) Antllr 51 1, The Indians of North America (P) Anthr. 514, Anthropology of Aging (P Anthr. 515Q, China Anthr. 516Q, Japan: People and Culture Anthr. 519, Applying Anthrop logy (P) Anthr. 522Q, Art and CuUure (P) Anthr. 526, Socia l Organization (P) Anthr. 528, Medical Anthropology Anthr. 542, Wom en in Otll r Cultures Anthr. 555, Paleoanthr p logy and Human Paleontology (P) Anthr 556, Biology of Human Populations (P) Anthr. 61 I, Southwe 'tern Archaeology (P) An lhr. 72, Intern hlp in Anthropology (P) CJ 351Q, The Victim In Criminal Justic q 35~ . Special Populations in lhe Criminal Justi e System CJ 394, Courts and Judicial Systems CJ 453, Crime Prev n tion q 93, riminal C usation and Crimmal Justice CJ 2, Juvenile Ju tlCC and Socia l Pohcy Econ 202Q, Principles of Micro-ec nomics Geog. 235, Meteorology (P) Geog. 530, Geography of Latin America Geog. 542, Geography of Eurape Min. S. JOOQ, Introduction to Minority Stud ies Min. S. 210, Fundamen tals of Cross­ Culfural Communications Min. S. 24OQ, Minority W men in America Min. S. 251Q, Women and Min tities in the Criminal Justice Sy tern Min. S. 260, Prominent Minorities in the Maki.ng of America Min. S. 330, Elhnic America, c 1500-1924 Min. S. 331, The Blad.. Fami.!y Min. S. 332, The Native American Min. S. 333, (s ues in the Chicano Community Min. S. 334, Ethnic America in the 20th Cenrury Mm. S. 350D, Dealing with Diversity Min. S. 350F, Und~rstanding Africa \-1in S. 350L, Osage Cu ltura l Worksh p Min. S. 390, Asian-American Contemporary Issues Min. S. 410, The African American Male Min. S. 512, Is ues in Minority Aging Min. S. 532, Women in Ethnic America Min S. 54 ,Re arch in Minority Communities Pol. S. 315. The PreSIdency Pol. S. 316Q, The Congress Pol. S. 317, Urban Polibcs Pol. S. 318, Political Parties Pol. S. 319, State Government Pol. S. 320, Polilics o( D veloping Area:. Pol. S. 335Q, International Politics and Instituti ns Pol. S. 336, International Politics and Institu ti011 Pol. S. 337, Force and Interve.ntion Pol. S. 345, Cla lcal Medieval Political Theory Pol. S. 358Q, AmcTlcan Political Thought Pol. S. 390, Special Topics in Political . Science Pol. S. 444, Modern Political Theory Pol. S. 523Q, Government and Politics in latin America Pol. S. 524, Politi of Modem China Pol. S. 533, Police Dc elopment In Foreign R 'lations Pol. S. 534, Problems in Foreign Policy Pol. S. 547, Contemporary POlili al Theory Pol. S. 551, Public Law Pol. S. 552Q, Civil Liberties Psy. 302, Psycho! gy of Learning (p) P y. 30-t.Q, Soci.1l P ychology (P) Psy. 316, Indu trial P ychology (P) Psy. 322, Cognitive Psychology (P) Psy. 3240,. Psychology of Personality (P) Psy. 332, Psychol gy of Perception (P) P y.334Q, Developmental Psychology (P) P y. 336, Ale hoi Use and Abuse (P) Psy. 342Q, Psychology of Motivation (P) Psy. 402, P ychology of Con ciousnc (P Psy. 404, Psychology of Aging (P) P Y 4{) ,Introduction to Commwlity Psych logy (P) Psy. 414, Child Psychology (P) Psy 512, Primatology (P) Psy. 516, Drug and Human Behavior (P) Psy. 522, Biological P ychology (P) P y. 532, Psycholinguistics (P) Soc. 301 , Computer and Society Soc. 315Q, Courtship and Marriage So . 32 Q, Contemporary So iaJ Problems Soc. 322, D vinnl Behavior (P) Soc. 325, Parenting Soc. 330Q, Social rne'luahty (P Soc. 334, Sociology f the Community (P) Soc. 338Q Health and Lifestyle (P Soc. 350, Social Interaction (P) Soc. 513, Sociology of Aging (P) Soc. 515, SOCiology of the Fam11y $70,000 $6.00 $J.56.00 Reserved spaces $15.00 90.00 Department Co t-Recovery Fees AU departmental charges or specific go ds and services (i.e ., photocopy. optional instructional materials, placement oifi e user fe ,building use fees, ptional attendance summer orientation ses ions, a ademic transcri pts, tc. l not .xplici tl y iden tifi d herein will be priced at an amount that approximates actual co ta. Period of Payment All sen1ester fees, including laboratory fees, must be paid in full at registration. Unpaid Fees Students wh leave Wichita Statt! Univer­ ity with ut meeting their financial obli­ gations to tIl nlversity may have their records Impounded by Ih egi trar. Their transcripts or diplomas will not b issued unless their account is cleared and Lh y may not enroll for a new term unless all ~ es are paj . Students who are eligible to graduate but who still have unpaid tui ti on b, I · ances will not graduate until those fees are paid. - --- WICHITA STATE UN1VERSffi / FINANOAL INFORMATION 31 Assessment and Collection he L niversily Controller is responsible iDf tlw i15!'essment and collection of fees. The C(mlrullcr, the associate dean of the C(l\lcge of Engineering, a faculty member from the W. Fran.k Barton School of Busi­ n('S5, and the Vice President for Student Affair.. (('Inslitute the Board of Appeals tor studen ts who believe their residency st,ltu~ has been incorrectly assessed. The deo!>ion of this committee is final. Forms to iniliate this process are available in the Regi5tror'S office. Housing and Residence Life Fees HllUSing riltes at Wichita State University vorv with the cllOice of facility and meal pl~. Housinf; costs for Fairmount Tow­ ers, Brennan HalL and Wheatshocker Apartments are listed below. The listed ril t\."»; dll nol include a $35 nonrefundable applicaLion fee for non-continuous con­ tractor!>. An installment payment plan is avallablt for Bre.nnan Hall and Fairmount Towers for an additional fee of $5 per pilYlnenl ($40 (or the year). Wheatshocker Apartmenls have monthly payments . A :1>10 late fee will be charged if an install­ ment or Dlonlhly payment is no! received by the fifth day after the due date. Rates incllllle aU utilities (water, gas, electrid­ t) ), local telephone service, basic cable TV :scrvlce, and an activity fee. All facilities Jre air conditioned . Stu Qents ""ho cancel their contracts ail(;r Ju ly 1 (December 1 for spring semester only contracts) are subject to penally. They may forfeit their prepay­ men! /depol;it, Students who cancel their ron tracts aftcr occupancy are assessed a cancellation fee of $150 plus 50% of the remai ni ng balance of Ule con tract. The cancellation fee is subject to appeal. See the contlLlct for deta.ils. Ra tes are for fiscal year 2000. Rates may be changed by the Kansas Board of Regents. Faimlount Towers" Double Single 19-max m eal plan $4,160 $5,840 1 5'm~\ meal plan $4,070 $5,750 1 O- TI\dX mea1 plan $3,970 $5,650 VLh~sic meal plan $4,060 ~,740 15-basic meal plan $3,970 $5,650 'A SH~I prepil)'TTlenf is due upon SIgning the contrnct. 1 h~ rr"pavment l.S pari of the con tra ct amount, it gu~ t 8· week classes End of 3rd d,IY . . .. ... 100"­ End of 5th day . . ... 80% End of 8th day . . . . 60'7< End of 13th day . . . . . . 40% 4-week classes End of 1st class day.... . . . . 100% End of 3rd day . . .... . .... . . 8O'h End of 4th day . . . . . .. . .. . 60% End of 6th day . . . . . . . . . . . 40'" 2-week classes End of the lsi da.ss day . . . lOU% End of the 2nd day . . . . . .. 00% End of thdrd day. .. . . .. . 40'7, 1· week classes End of the 1st dass day . . JOO% End of the 2nd day ........ .4070 Less than l ·week class End of the 1sL dass day . .. IUD.,., In short-term classes, the student will have the first class period to detem1i.ne if the class is suited for them. Students who register late or fail to attend the first clas period in short term classes will not be 32 eligible for 100% refunds according to lhe policy. If a short-term clas begins on Fri­ day night, Saturday, or Sunday, the stu­ dent will have until the end of the first busines day to drop the course. In order to rec~ve a 100% refund for the class, the student must provide documentation that he/ he did not attend more than four hours of the class. For classe that begin at times other than the regular term semester, th "first class day" refers to lite first day the class meets; thereaIter, the "day" refers to the business day. No one other than the Controller's Office in 201 Jardine Hall or the Tuition Refund Board of Appeals is authorized to determine the amount of tuition refund a student will receive. Students who, because of extenuating circumstances, seek a higher refund than is avaiJable by policy, must etition the Tuition Refund Board of App ills. Peti­ tion forms are available in the Con ­ tr ller's Office. The petition, complete with appropriate documentation, must be filed in the Controller'S Office within the semester the course wa taken Students who may have received approval from the University Exceptions Committee for a late withdrawal from a previOUS semester are not eligible by poli­ cy for il Muon refund. These ilre separate issues and d ci ions. Federal regulations may require stu­ dents attending the UniverSity for the first tim and receiving student finanCla l aid (grants, loans, r work aS5istance) under Tille IV r whose parent(s) receives a loan under TiUe IV n behalf of the stu­ dents who withdraw fully from the Uni­ ersity will be subject to a different refund policy. Contact the Controller's Office for details. Tuition Waiver for Kansas Teacher of tlle Year The Kan as Teacher of the Year recipient is allowed to enroll tuition free in up to nine credit hours annually provided the individual is aClively pursuing a leaching career in Kansas. To be eligible, a p rson must be 1 a past or pr sent recipient of (he Kansas Teacher i the Year Award under the program administered by the Kansas Department of Educati n, and 2) employed as a teacller in an educational institution accredited by the Kansas D partment of Education. A list of per­ son eligible for this tuition waiver is on file in Ule Board of Education office. Student Fee Waivers Student fees shall be waived for all Wichita State University employees who have fuU-time appointments. Student f es shall be waived f r adjun faculty mem­ b rs, lecturers, and benefit -eligible employees who do not have full-time appointments and are not carr ing full­ time loads (undergraduates, 12 hours; graduates, 9 hours) . These Univer ity employees must have an appointment for the emester in which the student fee waiver is applicable. Student fees shall be waived for ~nroUed students who are workil1g their ooperative education job or wh are p r­ forming a reqlLir d clinical rotation or internship off the WSU campu (defined as the City of Wichita and its contiguous industriaJ sties) for the entire semester. Student employees and graduate assis­ tants are not eligible for tudent fee waivers. Drop/Add Fee Policy Students who drop credits and do not add credits will be charged the propor­ tional percentage b< ed n lhe week they drop the credits. Thi remains the same as reflected in the Schedule of Courses. Students who drop and add credits will not be requi red Lo pay additional tuition! fees if the following conditions are met: n. The drop and add occurs in one transaction b. There is an equal number of credit holJ.Ib add as are being dropped. c. Th credits being added are Laken durin the same period of the semester as the credits being dropped. Credit hours from work- hops and other irregular courses cannol be off et against regular seme ter courses r vice Versa. Military Refund Policy Students serving in the National Guard or Reserves who are called to active duty during an academi tenn are entitled to receive a full refund of tuition and fees. Students who ar drafted and rnu t report for active duty during an academic term are entitled to receive a full refund of tuition and fees. All refunds are subject to presentation of official documentation. Students who volwlleer for military ser­ vice will be subject to the University's nonmili tary refund policy. Room and board charges will be prorated to the extent that services have been provided. Student Health Service Fees Certain fee f r lab ratory te;lb, ioo..:u13­ tions, pre cripti ns, -rays, phy ical examinations, and oth pr cedures are charged to u ers of Student Health S 'c­ vices. Th~e fees reflect direct charges to the University and every attempt is made to keep Ulenl bel w market cost. Senior Citizen Fee Waiver In accordance with the Kansas Board of Regents' policy, students who are 60 years of age or older may enroll as aud i­ tors (noncredit) in regular lecture or cer­ tain group activity courses- in whidl there is space is available and f r which they have the prerequisltes-\·... ilhout paying tuition and student fe . Parking fees will be assessed at the regular stu­ dent credit hour charge. Senior citizens must prese.nt a Medicare card or driver' license to validate age. A pedal seni r citizen registration i!: held after the Ei I day of classes (see the Schedule of Courses) . Senior citizens desiring college credit or the assurance of pace in specific courses may enrolJ and pay full fees during regu­ lar registration. Senior citizens who have not enrolled at WSU before must com­ plete an Application for Admission i'tnd pay the $20 application fee before regis­ tering. Financial Assistance Wichita State offers financial assistanc~ through scholarships, federally support ­ ed programs, and ~ployment. Students interested in any type of financial assis­ tanc should contact the University's Office of Financia1 Aid, 203 Jardine Hall. to see what a istance is available for their specific needs. MO ' I finMoal as is­ lance is based on family need, but somt! scholarships are awarded without consid­ eration of financial need. ScholarS/lips . The Board of Trustees f the Univer ity, in cooperation w1th the Kansas Board of R gents, administers a large number of scholarships ilnd 10an5 coming from endowed property an funds of the University . Federal Grallts and /.00115. Students may receive a sistance through several federal prograols: Supplemental Educationtll Opportunity Grants, PeU Gran , P kins Loan , Stafford Lo ns, Unsubsidize Stafford Loans, and Parental Loans {of Undergraduate Student. Employment . Stud nts enrolled in at lea 1 three h urs may be eligible foc part- time emp! yment at the University. Fed, eral w rk study employment is ba ed 0 11 WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY /ENDOWMENT ASSOCIATION 33 en ro ll ment in Gt least six hours and demonstrated financial need. Students ay find employment as academic assis­ tants, clencal assistants, technica l assis­ tants, custodial or food service assistants, or lib rary assistants. For information about student employment contact the Hire of Career Services, 203 Grace Wilkie Hall. Veterans Services The Office of Student Affairs provides ser­ \iccs to veterans and active duty people. The :,en'ices span the entire range of bene­ fits and include certification for benefits to e VA, tutorial assistance, finandal assis­ nce information, and work-study for vet­ erans Wichita State University is designated a Serviceman's Opportunity CoUege. Endowment Association The Endowment Association of Wichita State University is the appropriate chan­ nel for fund raising at the UniverSity. The Cl)Ordmation of all fund raising activities is condUded through the Endowment Association (Development Office) under the d irectIon of the Executive Director of Development. All investments and bookkeeping responsibilities WIth regard to gifts to the n lversity are handled through the Fnd(lwment Association. A computerized system provides comprehensive record~ inl! of all gifts. Endowed Scholarships and Grants Wichita State University has been fortu­ nate to receive donations submitted in the name:. of the following individuals. Many are paSI grad uates, faculty, friends, and administrators of the University who wish to assist future graduates in financ­ . g their yeaIS at Wichita State Universi­ ty. The ~cholarships listed have a mini­ mum principle of $2,500, are funded through the proceeds of the gifts from the:.e mdivlduals, and playa vital role in the University's attempt to meet the full needs of students requiring financial assistance. Recipients must meet the specific reljuircments of the scholarships each ernester. In addition, all reCipients of de~ignated scholarships are encouraged to writ e an appropriate letter of accep­ ance tt' the donor. Endowed scholarships are funded from ea rn ings on donor endo'v\'ll\ent funds. The principal of these funds aTe never expended, therefore scholarship funding is available in perpetuity. Endowed scholarships and respective deparbnents include: Athletics AIFAM, athletics Leland R. Anderson, baseball Anderson Walk~n, athletics Beech Employees Club, athletics Harry Corbin David Dearmore, athletics Anna, Emily, and Isabel Drummond, women's tennis Floyd Farmer, athletics Natasha Fife, women's golf Sam. Gardner, golf Golf Memorial, golf Max E. and Lois J. Hubbard Cheese Johnson, basketball Albert and Marion Kalzenmeier, athletic Marquerite Keeley, women's basketball Dr. Sam and Jacque Kouri, men's basketball Susan M. Kraft, athletics Morris and Flossie Krouse, athletics AI and Donna Littleton, golf Bob Long/Vince Lombardi, athletics Ralph Miller, men's basketball Carl Nath, baseball Marge Page, golf Jack G. Paulsen, track Kern Purves, golf Thomas Reeves, athletics Fritz Snodgrass, track Dave Stallworth, basketball Dr. Ronald Summers, athletics Delorace Tincher, women's golf Jake and Flossie Krouse Waller, baseball Hazel Walpole, athletics C. Howard Wilkins, Sr., softball C. Howard Wilkins, Sr., women's basketbaIl Ben and Helen Wilson Football Memorial, athletics Business Jerry and Jan Aaron, business Air Capital Alumni, Alpha Kappa Psi Fred and Mary Aley, business Allen Family, business Jack Austin, busines Donna Jabara Baker, entrepreneurship W. Frank Barton, business W. Frank Barton, entrepreneurship Walter H . and Olive Ann Beech, business V. Jerry Blue, entrepreneurship Byron W. Boothe Memorial, entrepreneurship Thomas Borden Branson Memorial Beverly and Daniel Carney, entrepreneurship Mike Cheesman, busines James Chubb, economics Rick P. Clinton, business Leland F. Cox, business Paul T. and Mary Jane Curry, entrepreneurship Urban Denker, real estate Cecil W. and Helen J. Dorman, business Olarles S. Evensoll, busin Howard Frazier Memorial, bu.<;ines Gene Friedman, business/entrepreneur­ ship Gerald Graham, entrepreneurship David F. and Mary I. Gunter Peter B. Hoidale, entrepreneurship Richard H. Homburger Award for Excellence, business Charles and Nina Kirby Jones, liberal arts / busines Marvin B. Kaufman MemOrial, business Curtis D. and Kay P. LaGree Herbert P. Lindsley Memorial, busines Anita Lusk, business Marcus Family, entrepreneurship Russell W. Meyer W.A. Michaelis, Jr. Frank H. Miller, accounting Frank A. Neff Memorial Award, busin Nightingale Kenneth Northcutt Memorial, business Overstreet, business Marilyn and Kenneth Pauly John N. Payne, business Petroleum Accountants Society of Kansas, accounting Geraldine Rathbone, business Richard and Jean Reidenbaugh, en treprenew-ship Austin and Arline Rising, aviation management Glarles Rossdulcher, accounting Robert Ryan, economi Fred J. Soper, accounting Walter L Stauffer, nml estate Nora S. Stosz Memorial, business Nestur R. Weigand and Hobart C. Brady, real estate Wichita Oil Secretaries Association, busines J. Roscoe Williams, business Frances O. Woodard, economics Ira Dean and Dixie Worden, business Education Dale and Leona Alley, curriculum and instruction Archie G. and Gladys A. Anderson, education James E. Anderson, Sr., education Robert E. Anderson-Leonard M. Chaffee, education Josephine BroWIl, education Curriculum & Instruction Faculty & Alumni, education Sid Fillres Mem.oriaL educabon Floyd M. Farmer, education Josephine Fugate, educa tion Kenneth and Nadine Gleason, education Grand Army of the Republic, logopedics David F. and Mary 1. Gunter Herbert J.. Hannam, education Dr. R bert Hoimer, education Elinor Wells Kessling Vera M. Unn, education Cllarles and Amy Mahin, English/ education Margaret Craig Meek Memorial Nancy C. Minett, education Sid F. Moore, teacher education Ruth and C. Henry Nathan John M. and Nelda Nickel, education O. Carron and Nelle Noel Memorial, curriculum and in truction Nygaard Family Scholarship, physical therapy I education Robert T. Pate, education Physical Education Alumni Geraldine Rathb ne, education Linwood Sexton, elementary education Sam and R semary Sherr, com municative disorders F. Yvonne Slingerland, physical education Gladys Taggart, physical education Helen J. Throckm rton, English Andrea lJIeberg, educati n Bill Umphrey, physical education David Wainwright Memorial, ROTC J. Martyn Walsh, English education Vernon and Marjorie Williams, physica l education Fern Worden and Frederick Wieland, education Engineering Ric Abboll, aeronautical engineering Dr. Wayne Becker Memorial, engineering Walter H. Beech, aerospace engineering Walter H. Beech and Olive Ann Beech, engineering Verda Colaw Memorial, engineering Claude A. Fol tz, aero pace engineering Don Id L. Hommertzheim MemOrial, industrial engineering Earl R. Hutton, engineering John C. and MaudeJames, engineering Bruce and Connie Peterman Ale and Genevieve Petroff Memorial, aero pace engineering Edgar Stewart engineering H.W. Sullivan Award, engineering James Ray Trapp Memorial, engineering Richa rd and Bettye Tumlinson, engineering Harold J. Varhanik, engineering Dwane and Velma Wallace, engineering Women's Aeronautical Assodation, engineering Fine Arts Mildred "Mickey" McCoy Armstrong, fine arts Earl Richard Backus, music James Kerr Bandsman, music Walter H. and Olive Ann Beech. music Lloyd R B J Memorial, music Merrill Bosworth, music Melba Cornwell Budge, piano Raymond LeClair Budge, art B tty Vall Arsdale Bums, fine arts Marjorie Calkins Memorial, music Vincent Canzoneri, music James Ceasar, music Blean r Doty Clair C ramer FWld for Art, art Walter]. Duerksen, music Howard E. Ellis, music Gordon W . Evans Instrumental, music George and Brenda Farha Endowed Scholarship in Opera . Louise Findlay, music Martha Fleming, dance Morris and Mary Garvin, mu ic Sarah Shirkey Gietzen, pern Larry Gile Memorial, violin Henry and Helen Golt, music Roger A. and Patricia K. Hart, music Larry Hartmann, music Heriford Seh larsmp, fine arts Max E. and Lois J. Hubb rd, n,usic Frank and Margaret Kessler, mu ic Robert M. Kiskadden, art James W. and Mildred S. Kod, music Jay and Lillian Kornfeld, mu ic June M. Lair Endowment for the Arts, fine arts Martha Nevling Langlois Endowed Violin Scholarship, fine arts Thurlow lieurance, music Marcus Family Endowed Scholar hip for Excellence Ronald D. Mason Scholarship, French hom Juliaen ne Weaver Masters, theatre Audrey Needles, performing arts Henry J. and Tina Nickel, fine arts Wallace H. Paddock, art and design Adrian P uliot, music Ruth Ann Reagan, music Mark Rindt Mem rial, band James P. Robertson, music Sawallis A ward for E ceHence, fine arts John Sdmeider, music Sigma Alpha Iota, music Elizabeth Parrott Skaer, music Billie SmIth, choral music Clayton Staples, art Kim Stephens Memorial, exc .Ienre i11 dance Mary Jane Teall, theatre Gordon B. Terwilliger, fine arts Thursday Afternoon Music Oubl Holman Flute Scholarshi Thursday Afternoon Music Club/Mabel and Milo Wright, fine arts o al Performance Majors, music corge Wilner, drama Brner and labcl Worthington, music Paul R Wunsch , music General Oark and Rowena Ahlberg, g neral Alumni Awards, general A.J. and Jean Bachas, general Hazel M. Barfoot Memorial Big Brothers-Big Sisters of Sedgwick County, general Margaret F. Gillespie Brehm, general J . W. a nd Hazel Br wn Memorial, general Marvin G. Brown Football Memorial, general Louisa Byington, general Van Dilla Chapell, general Mr. Vernon OlaS!? Endowed Memorial Donald G. Christian Football Memoria l, general Christmas Card Sch larship, general Class of 1927, general Daisy Stever and Lisle Stephan Congdon, general Coun '1 of University Women Edith and Harry Darby Foundation, general Constance Louise ROUtll Decker- Kansas Society Daughters of the American Revolution, general John W. Duren Football Memorial, general Paul V. Elliott, general Virginja Murphy Engel Memorial, general Helen Johnson Frank, general Friends of Delta Upsilon, general len Gardner, general Jeanne Bro ks Gart Mabel Fay Gillespie, general R.L. Gillespie, general Jacob and Molly Glickntan, general I larry Gore, genera I Charles and Helen Grave , general Benjamin F . Hammond, general Eva C. Hangen Delta Gamma, general Francis and Dorothy Hannon Martin E. Harrison Pootball MemOrial, general Deborah G. Haynes and R. Larry Beamer Jack and Jeri Hinkle Evelyn A. Hinton, general Myrrl Houck, general Frank C. l.sely, general Col. Jame J. Jabara, general ] .R. and lnez Jay, general icolasa S. Jimenez Mem rial, general Ronald G. J hnson Footba ll Memorial, genera l Kansas Regents Hon r Academy, geneml Randall B. Keisau Football Memorial, general WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY / ENDOWMENT ASSOClATION 35 John F. Kennedy Memorial, general . Mallory W. Kimmel Football Memonal, general Carl R. Krueger Football Memorial, eneral La~'rence A. and Alma A. Pray Lallement and Maurice l. Lallement Robert and Dorothy Langenwalter, general L' il Egie, general George David Lodge William O. Long, general Sam and Milly Marcus, general Estella Martinez Lenora N . McGregor, general Veta McMahan Memorial Men of Webster, general Pearl J. Milburn, general Sophia Berman Molk Scholarship, general Stephen A. Moore Football Memofial, general NationsBank, general Olive Baker Nease, general Thomas B. Owen, Jr., Football Memorial, general John W. Page, general Mabel A. Putnam, genera l J. Dean Rickman, general Nettie and J.W. Rickman, general Eugene Robinson Football Memorial, general Vera Hutton Seamans, general Linwood Sexton Thomas T. Sheddan Football Memorial, general Soroptimist of Wichita, general Sorosis Alumni Award, generaJ Richard N. Stines Football Memorial, general Swett Prize, generaJ John R. Taylor Football Memorial, general Mike Taylor Jilck R. Vetter FootbaU Memorial, general Western Resomces Minority Grace Wilkie Women's Scholarship, general J.A. and Mildred Wood Nancy Joh nson Wright, business Health Professions Christopher Benn, medicine, science/ engineering ~. Mary Blood, health professions \ Icky S. Brookh ouser Memorial Hazel and Ed ward R. Brookings, health Edith A. Garlock, health Harold P. Gates Memorial, physician assIstant program Allene Nelson Henderson nursingA ' rthur and Annabelle Johnson, heal th Kansas Dental HY"'enists' Association Ch ' o·D nstopher R. Knapp Memorial , health r. Susan F. Kruger School of Nursing FaCUlty Development Dr. Robert F. and Judilh Malone, heallh John G. and Barbara McCune, health Nygaard Family Scholarship, physical therapy/ education Physician Assistant Sludent Society, health ala Osborn Piper, health Geney and Cramer Reed Zona Richardson Paul Christopher and John Timothy Rose, health ay W. Rose Memorial Harold and Ruth Van Noy Scholarship, premed Mary Varhanik, health Kenneth O. Welk, physical therapy Wesley Foundation Women' Association, maternal/child nursing Wesley Foundation Women' Association, nursing LiberaJ Arts and Sciences E.W. "Pete" Armstrong, chemistry Douglas Bendell, liberal arts Joan Beren, Master of Arts in Liberal Studies Joseph G. Berkely / High Plain Journal, comm wlications Biological Science, biology Dr. Leslie Blake, speech Marguerite Bliss and Isabel Ford, liberal arts and sciences Luella Bosworth, English Hazel Branch, biology War O. and Agnes Brooks, biology Virginia "Gingy" Buck, LAS unrestricted Charles M. Buess, chemistry Anna V. and Robert V. Christian, chemistry Roberl V. Christian, Jr., Puebla, classical languages and literature Harry E. Christopher Award, math Flora Gough, English/li terature Jerry Cohlmia, chemistry Sara Hyde Corbin, poli tical science Lee Cornell, geology Wayne Coulson, prelaw AI Cress, German Helen M. and A.G. Crockett, returning student Laura McMullen Cross Honorary, liberal arts E.K. Edmist011, geology Kathlien R. Edmiston, political science Betty Elliott, communication Dr. John L. Evans, premed George and S. Jim Farha, premed Charlaine and Lynette Furley, liberal arts Paul H. Gerling Public Affairs Internship, political science William M. Glenn Harold and Eva Weiner Grafton, English Marie Graluun, hIstOry John L. and Carrie L. Halfman Memorial, English Geraldjne Hammond, libera l arts Donald R. Harbour, ad ministration of justice Chandler B. Hatfield Mary Haymaker, English Herman-Fellers, minori ty students Arthur J. Hoare, mathematics Angel.ika R. Howard , conversational languages Grace Howell, journalism Sam C. Hutchins011, liberal arts Anita and Larry Jones, liberal arts Charles and Nina.Kirby Jones, speech communicabon Charles and Nina Kirby Jones, liberal ar ts / business Lee and Helen Kamen Scholarship in History Lee and Helen Kamen, political science Vernon Keel Founders Award , conununications Grant F. Kenyon Memorial, psychology Dr. Amy C. King, math Martin Luther King Endowed Scholarship, minority studies Douglas A. Knight Memorial George Lewis, psychology Brandy M . Long Memorial, liberal arts O,arles and Amy Mahin, English/ education Frank A., Jr., and Frank Gifford Malone Memorial, chemistry Henry and Marjorie Malone Memorial, liberal arts Dr. Robert F. and Judith Malone, health c.R. Mayfield, geology R. Wesley McCarty, political science Earl and Alice McCaslin, liberal arts John G. a.nd Barbara McCune, premed Clinton C. McDonald, science Marjorie McMal10n, math Detective Terry Wayne McNett, administration of justice Dr. Daniel F. Merriam, geology Marvi]1 Munsell, anthropology Craig Murphy, English C. Henry and Ruth Nathan, journalism/ speech Conroy G. O'Brien, administration of justice 'f. Henry and Minnie Onsgard, history B. Lloyd and Eleanor B. Parker, chemistry Robert N. and Priscilla Partridge, poli tical cience Charles G. Pearson, joumalism Don Phillips, geology Pi Mu Epsilon , ma th Dr. Jackson O. and Jane Powell, psychology Henry and Gerry Allbritten Pronko, liberal arts Charlotte E. Rennert, German 36 Charles E. Rickman, general Larry D. Ricks, geology F.e. Sauer, zoology Eugene Savaiano, liberal arts Terry and DJ Scanlon, p litical science Diana Scott, geology Ralph and Ina Shenk, physical sciences Vera and Skip Skelton, liberal arts and science Shelley Skillman, minority studies Josephine A. Stabler, liberal ar ts Steve Steffy, speech Harold Steincamp, geology Paul Tasch, geology John and Mary Tatlock, geology Helen J. Throckmorton Endowed English Teacher Edward H. TutUe, social work Jean and Henry Unruh, Jr., physics Anna Elizabeth Wal h, humani ties Anna Kathleen Walsh, English Richard G. Webster Walter A. Ver Wiebe, geal gy Wichita Gem and Mineral Society, geology Lynn W. Winget, Puebla, classical languages and li terature Mary Witten bach, psychology Jack R. and Barbara J. Worden, liberal arts Mack W. and Grace M. Worden, Iiberal arts Other Alpha Gamma Gamma Marti Farha Ammar Craig Barton Outstanding Greek Sophomore John Blazek, WuShock Sidney J. Brick, bowling Roy L. and Letha E. Cobb Memorial J Cornejo/Cornejo & Sons, operation succes Phillip F. and Gloria E. Farha Marion Hicks Eunice Jones lsely, senior honor women William H. Isely, senior honor men KB[ Foundation Scholarship, continuing education Kappa Kappa Gamma, handicapped services Bernice and Jack Rees Scholarship Eleanor Rudd Shocker Auction, all colleges Dr. Ciuistine Thelen, operation success Wichita State University Centennial WSU Alumni Ass ciation WSUDames Other Endowments To improve its fisca l stability, Wichi ta State University has developed a perma­ nent endowment fund to provide ongo ­ ing income support for University pro­ grams and activities. Endowment fund are invested in stocks, bonds, and other financial instru· ments. Five percent of the fund ba lance is distributed annually for University pro­ grams according to the donor's intended purpose. Unspent amings are reinvested as principal to protect the value of the endowment against erosion by inflation. Every donor autom atically becomes a member of a University gift club: Friends $1-$499 Harvest Club $500-$1,999 President's Oub $2,000 annual $50,000 life $100,000 deferred Fairmow1t Society $20,000 annual $200,000 life $500,000 deferred Donor who contribute an irrevocable deferred gift are eligible for life m mber­ ship in the President's Oub or Fairmount Society at age 62. Current Sc.holarships Current scholarship dollars are contribut­ ed annually by donors. Funds to support these scholarships come from annual gifts rather than earning and therefor(> all of the scholarships listed nay not be avai l­ able every year. Current scholarships and re pective departments include: Business Alumni of Arthur Andersen and Co. Boeing Scholar hip John H. and Mary Ann Bomgardner Joseph H . and Marvelyn R. Burnett, accounting Business-Alumn i Business-CMD Scholar Jane A. Deterding Gertrud W. Devlin Farm Credit Services and Federal La nd Bank Anita Frey, real estate Goldsmi th' s Scholarships Grant Thornton Greater Wichita Area Construction Financial Management Association Heskett SdlOlarship Peter B. Hoidale Current, entrepreneurship Institute of Real Estate Management (Wichita Chapter) Kansa Bankers Association Fred e. Koch, entrepreneurship Lindburg and Vogel F. Lynn Markel Alvin M. Marcus Over treel Scholarship Alan and Robyn Reicllert Society for Human Resource Management (SHRM) Kay Wall. Foundati n Education Coli ge fEd ucation Project Grow Your Own Teachers (GYOD Faneta Fitchett Memorial Engineering OHve Ann Beech/Pratt & Whitn y Canada, aerospace . Boeing Scholarship J.L Case Cessna Foundation Sch Jarships Delmar D. Klocke SPE State of Kansas Vulcan Materials Company Fine Arts Olive Ann Beedl Walid Gholmieh, mu ic James L. Hardy, music Hayter-Davis, voice MaryR. Koch Forrest Latbler, orchestra Lee Southwell Naftzger Brett Neff Mem rial Ross FOlmdation, trings Phyllis Shattuck, vocal Jacki Smith Southard Endowment Wichita Symphony Society General Augusta Christian Church Boyer Education Karol and Earl Callison Charitable Foundati n, Inc. Gilbert U. Combs Memorial Glen W. Dickinson Farmers Insurance Group of Companies Aid to Education Program William L. Graham Helen Leifert Memorial William O. Long NationsBank Presidential Sch iarship Del Roskam University Dames Doug Unruh-Doreen Womack Wichita Scottish Rit~Herman Shorb Heallh Profe sions Helen Halstead, nursing Mary Klocke, nursing Lies and Moxley, dental hygiene The Skillbuilders Fund Liberal Arts and Sciences Air Products and Chemicals Company BG Products Elf Atochem Science Olympiad Fletcher-McKinl y, chemistry wrCHffA STATE UNIVERSITY /STUDENT AFFAIRS 37 Victor JVlurdock, journalism pueblo Summer Program foseph K. Stafford Memorial SymbioS Logic, computer science uJcan Chem.ical5cience Olympiad orma Wingert Memorial, philosophy Other international Student Union Metropolitan Life, handicapped Trio Program Student Affairs The Vice President for Student Affairs is responsib le for the coordination and supervision of the Div ision of Student Hairs. Issues involving enrollment ser­ vices, s tud en t life, developmen t, pro ­ grams, problems, and acti vities on the Wichi ta State Universi ty campus are addressed by the staff of lhe d ivis.ion . The Office of Enrollm en t Services incl udes undergraduate ad m issions, fina ncial aid, and scholarships. The Office of Stud ent Life, 105 Grace Wilkie Hall, is responsible for services for people with disabil ities, fraterni ties and sororities, student organizations and stu­ den t lI1vo lvemen t p rograms, the child development center, women's resource cen ter, resjden ce halls, career services, student health, campus recreation, volun­ teer opportuni ties, counsel ing center, and for encouraging scholastic achievement. The 5hared mission of these many offices and programs is to enhance U,e quali ty of campus life at WSU. An assistant vice president is responsi­ ble for Operation Success, Project Discov­ er}" Upward Bound, th e Ronald E. McNair Postbaccalaureate Achievement Program, and Upward Bound Regional ath-Science, the federal TRIO programs for students. Career Services The Career Services office provides ser­ vices to students and alumni/alumnae seeki ng career advice or employm ent­ re la ted assista nce. IndiVidual career counseling is avail ­ able to assist s tudents and alumni/alum­ nile Witll p lanning and decision making. Assessml;'nt instruments, includ ing the Strong In terest Inventory, dre offered for self-assessment. Wo rkshops, presenta­ ti ons , and class room instruction are oifered to enable people to learn about th\;' responsibi lit ies of various career fields, to prepare job resumes and letters of app licat ion, to conduct e ff ectiv e empl oyment in terviews, and to make informl::d decisions. .. Occupational and career informa tion, em ployer directories, in formation on employmen t trends, employer recruiting litera ture, annual salary survey reports and informa tion on graduate and profes­ sional school opportunities are available in the Career Resource Center (CRe) . The CRC also houses a lab which pro­ vides computers for students to prepare job search documents such as resumes an d cover letters. The computers a lso provide access to the World Wide Web for career research, as well as for on-line registration and interview sign-up. Degree candidate and alumni/alumnae job sea rch services include computerized resume referra l to career employmen t vacancies; on-campus interviews wifh employer representatives; and an employment listing bulletin. Employme nt ser vices a lso include part-time and summ er em pl oymen t opportunities. Counseling and Testing The Counseli ng and Tesbng Center pro­ vides psychological services and counsel­ ing for personal and career/ life planning issues. Professional counseling is avail­ able on a cost-shared basis to all members of the University community- students, their families, faculty, and staff. individu­ a l, couple, fami ly, ilnd group counselin are aspects of the professional counseling services. Testing services also are part of the center's function . The credit by exam program and the National Testing pro­ gram are adm inistered directly by the Counseling and Testing Center. The ational Testing program includes certi­ fication tests for community profession­ als, CLEP tests, 311d entrance exams for colleges and graduate schools. Disability Services The Office of Disability Services provides supportive services fo r stu d en ts who experience physical or mental disabilities. Students qualified for this service can receive a handbook of services by con­ tacting the office: Office of Disability Services Wichita State University 1845 Fairmount Wichita, Kansas 67260-0132 (3]6) 978-3309 Services are designed on an individual basis and may include the following: note taking, assistance to class, Hbrary assis­ tance, tes t proctors, assistance typing papers, and brailling notes. Some aUld!­ iary aids are available for students to use. Textbooks also can be recorded on tape when requested. Disability Services encourages student to be as independent as possible on cam­ pus and to use those services which help maximize learning. Housing and Residence Life On-campus housing is available for more lhan 1,000 students in Fairmount Towers, Brennan Hall, and Whea tshocker Apart­ ments. Housing options include an honors hall, a fine arts floor, smoke-free floors, coed floors , suite-style residence hall rooms, and a variety of apartment units. Because research nationwide has repeat­ edly shown that freshmen w ho li ve on campus are more successful academica lly than freshmen w ho do not live on cam­ pus, and because Wichita State University is committed to students and student suc­ cess, WSU requires all incoming fresh­ men to live on campus in designated University housing. Freshmen live their first two semesters in our traditional resi­ dence hall, Fairmount Towers, unless they qualify to live in the Honors Hall in Bren­ nan or are exempted from living 011 cam­ pus. All other students may choose their wn accommodations; however, Universi­ ty housing is highly recommended. Except ions to the f reshmell res ide'lcy reqll irement are made for freshmell who are: 1. 21 years old or older 2. Married 3. Livillg wit h a parellt , legal guardia ll , gra lJ dpareuf, 1I/1c1e, or all11t ill Sedgw ick County 4. Livillg in official Greek hOl/slIlg All freshmen who would like to be exempted from the residency require ­ ment- including those who fall into one of the above ca tegories-are required to complete and subm it a Fresh man E-rcmp­ tion Forlll . Exemptions w ill be rev iewed by Housing and Residence Life and a ri tten reply will be sen t to those who requested an exemption. Admission to Wichi ta State does not mean automatic room reservation. Each student admitted w ill receive infom1ation concerning housing from Housing and Reside nce Life. Students need to com ­ plete a contract and an applica lion card and pay an application fee and prepay­ ment/ deposit to reserve a room or apart­ ment. Students are encouraged to apply early since space is limited. For more infoTm.ation, contact Housing and Residence Life Wichita State University 1845 Fairmount Wichita, Kansas 67260-0141 (316) 978-3693 38 Wichita State Unive r ity reserves the right to mal< policy adjustments where the situation demands and to change the residence of any student or deny r can­ c residence accommodations of any s tu­ den t i n cases w here such action is deemed desirable. Office of International Programs lnternational Programs, 303 Grace Wilkie Hall, serves the special needs of approxi­ mately 1.400 intem ati nal students from more than 90 countries enrolled at Wichi­ ta Slate. (For intem ational student admis­ sion requirements, see the Admi sion to Wichita State section of the Catl/log .) An orientation program sp cially design d for new internationaJ students prepares them for ntrance into the American aca­ demic ystem and way of li fe. In ternational Programs also sp nsors the Friendship Family Program, the Glob­ al ducation Program, and other activi­ ties that promote mter ction between American and international students. Ul addit i n, In tern ational Program houses a Study Abroad Reference Center which provides information to American s tud ents on study, wo rk, and trave l opportunities abroad . Infonnation con­ cerning Fulbright-Hays grants may be obtained from tills center. Student Development and Multicultura1 Affairs Th e admin ist rative office of Studen t Development and Multicultural Affairs is in 105 Grace Wilkie Hall, (31 6) 978- 078. The Center for Student Leadership is in 008 Rhatigan Student Center, (316) 978­ 3022, nd the Multi-Cultural Resource Center is in Brennan Hall I at 17th Street and Yale, (316) 978-3034. The nderlying theme f the services and programs of Student Development and Multi.cultural Aff-a ir is to develop and / or enhance the lifelong skills of tu­ den ts. We fo ter an environment that pro­ moles mul ticu lturalism and encourage tudents to become inv Ived in campus life and comm unity service to develop the skills and training necessa ry to become eff chve and successful leaders. Stu ent Development and Multicul tural Programs include: Greek affairs-f rmal rush, greek lead­ ership retreat, and gre ' convocation; MaJticultural affairs-Cinc de Mayo celebration, :ultural theme-month pro­ grammln and pre-Kwanzaa elebration; Student involvement-student organi­ za tiona l support, tuden t organiza tion registration, and leadership insti tutes; V ol un teeri m-alterna tive ·pring break, Bu il ding p Dream in Urba n Youth (BUDUY) student mentoring pro­ gram, and "Into the Str ets"; and Women's programming and resources - women' Brown Bag Lecture and Film Series. Student Health Services Sludent Health Service, located in 209 Ahlberg Hall, is the on-campus health care facilI ty for student. Ambulatory health care is provided for s tudents with hea lth concern, medical probl ms, ill­ nesse , and injuries. Health services and health education are provided by a taff of professional nurses and physicians from the local community. The ervices of reg­ istered nurses and nurse practi tioners are available during office hours and physi­ cians may be seen by appointment during their scheduled cli nic lours. Physicians specializing in derma tology; gynecology; internal medicine; ear, nose, and tlnoat; and family practice are available. Special services of adult/ travel immu­ niza tions, confidential HN testing, tuber­ culin skin testing, family planning infor­ ma tion and services, physical examina­ tions reqUi red by academic programs, nutriti n and diet counseling, and health screening are offered. A group plan for accident and sickness insura n ce coverage fo r tudent and dependents is availahl . Opportuniti to enr II in th program are offered a t the beginning of each regular semester. [nfor­ mation is available at Student Health Ser­ vices and the Office of Student U fe. Student Heal th Services welcomes all stu ents regardless of insurance coverage or n insurance coverage. The goal is to provide students with appropriate health care to enable them to function at their optimum level of wellness. Undergraduate Studies and Student Services The Office of Undergraduate Studies and Student Services is available to assist stu­ dents w ho have personal or academic dif­ ficulty while at the University. The goa] of this office is to help students meet their durati nal career goals . Students who need assistance in locating campus or ommuruty resource are advised to make an appointment. The fice maintain an inventory 0 campu programs and ser­ vi es availabl to help students succeed. Legal referrals, emergency loans, academ­ ic appeals, and di ffi cultie Ln the class­ room ar examples of the activities in this office. For more in formation, call (316) 978- 295 or send an e-mai l tOI wuline@twsuvm.lIc.twsu.edu. WSU Child Development Center The WSU Ch ' d Development Center i ~ I rated at 026 East 21st Street North, at the NW comer of Hillside and 21st Street It is a licensed child care center for chil­ dren of WSU stud nts, faculty, taf( and! community. A diverse taff of degreedl teachers and student assis tan ts facilitate developmentally appropriate activities­ art, languag , musi , science, and litera­ ture--in an international nvironment.. The dtild ca re center i pen Monday through rriday from 7 a.m. t 6 p .m . (excluding University holidays for chil-· dren six weeks t ix years old. Full- and part-time care IS avai lable in addition to drop-in ale on a space available basis. Child care assi tance is available for WSU student parents who demonstrate finan­ cial need; applications are nvailable in the Financial Aid Office. For more information, call (316) 978-31 0'1. Special Programs Center for Economic Development and Business Research The Cen ter for Economic Development and Business Re earch, a service of the W. Frank Barton School of Busin , engages in business and ecnomic r ·earth for a wide variety of clients in both pnva te and public sectors. The center collects, ana ­ lyzes, and disseminates information to uppor activities of government, educa­ tion, business, and economic develop ­ ment organizatioru. The center maintains il comprehensive database f economic indicators includ ­ ing population, personal income, employ­ ment, cons truction, and census data. Activities focus on issues rated to the economic health of the region. The center publishes the Kansl/s Ecollomic Report and a supplemental monthly, Ivmsas Economic llldjcator~ . Center for Entrepreneurship Housed in DevL n Hall, the Center f r Entrepreneurship is part of the W. Frank Barton School of Business. 11 encourages entrepreneurial thinking and activitie through quality education, research, and community involvement to better serve its customers and slakeholders. The cen­ ter provides a comprehensive curri ulum in ntrepreneuria I studies a t b tb the undergraduate and graduate level. WICHITA STATE UNJVERSITY j SPECLA.t PROGRAMS 39 Con!'-istently recognized as one of the top ten schoo.~ for entrepreneurship, the enter offers a Bachelor of Business ~dlTI l ni st r ation in Entrepreneursh ip through the Barlon School's Department of Marketing and Entrepreneurship. The entrepreneurshlp ma jor offers students challel1g in~ and exciting courses empha­ sizing th~ formal study of entrepreneur­ ship. The degree program requires com­ pletion L1{ lhe University's general educa­ tion cour:;es and business core courses as well as courses specifically required for the entrepreneurship major. The business core courses include meaningful expo­ sure to accounting, finance, economics, management, and marketing. The major .lbo requires the student to research and wri te an involved business pla n and to understand risk analysis, problem solv­ ing, and how to develop a business strate­ g) {or a new or growing venture. In addi­ ti on , graduale students may select enlrepreneurship courses in both the MBA and Master of Science in Business degree program!;. Scholarshjps are avail­ ahle for both undergraduate and gradu­ ate ~tudv. Additiona l programming includes workshops/seminars, a visiti ng lecture ser ies, co-sponsorship of the Metro Award~, a high school conferen ce, the Kansas Family Business Forum, and tw o student organizations, the Association of ol1e~iatt· Entrepreneurs (ACE) and Stu­ den ts in Fr~ Enterprise (SIFE). Center for Management Development The Center for Managemen t Develop­ ment (CMD), through the Barton School of Business. orfers noncredit management de\'dopmcnl seminars to Wichita and the surrou nding area. Th \; CMD seminars and workshops have been "cclajmed for their wefulness to practicing bu:.iness people and other profeSsionals in a wide variety of organi­ zations. The ce.nter offers a broad range of management education and development pp,)rtunities to the growth-oriented SUP:r" lsor manager, or professional spe­ oallst in business, industry, government, and "U1er public or private organizations. Center for Women's Studies The Center for Women's Studies coordi­ nates scholarly and CUIricular activities rel ated to the study of gender and cul­ ture. AlthOllgh wHhin Fairmount COllege t Liberal Arts ilnd Sciences, the center arhcipatf!l> in course offerings, research projects and other educational acUvities WiUl many other academ ic units both within and beyond Fairm ount College.. The center is responsible for administer· ing the BA in women' s studies, as well as the minor and the certificate, and super­ vises the work of students pursu ing a concentration In women's studies in vari­ ous undergraduate and graduate areas, particularly the Master of Arts in Liberal Studies. In addition, the center serves as an informational resource for University students, faculty, and the greater Wichita community. Conferences and Noncredit Programs The Office of University Conferences and on credit Programs provides noncredit continuing education opportun ities by developing conferences which dissemi­ nate current research, technology trans­ fer, and effective teaching stra tegies to statewide, regional, and national audi­ ces for colleges within t11e University. Other conferences are organized in response to the expressed needs of off­ campus organizations. These educational events are developed to provide profes­ sional accreditation as well as public ser­ vice education. The three major functions of the Office of niversity Conferences are to administer the University Conference Policy; to serve as the reporting liaison between the Uni­ versity, the Board of Regents, and other Regen ts' institutions for a ll noncredit activi ties conducted throughoUl the Uni­ versity; and to administer the Marcus Cen­ ter for Continuing Education which serves as the University's conference center and provides a program of noncredit personal growth and development courses. Cooperative Education Program Cooperative educa tion is an academic program for undergradua te and graduate students who wish to combine classroom studies w ith academically related paid employment. Coopera tive education p laces stu den ts both loca lly and nationally . By utili.zing off-campus resources and expertise, cooperative education places students in business, government, indus­ try, and social agenCies . ProgranU! are individually designed, enabling students to work directly with profeSSionals in their fi eld while expanding upon knowl­ edge learned in the classroom. Opportu­ nities may occur for students to refine research methods, apply theories in. actu­ al fiel d sett ings, work with advanced technology, and design original projects and research . Students hired in coopera tive education positions must enroll in specia lly desig­ nated co-op courses and work with a fac­ ulty advisor from within the appropriate departments. Each placement is assessed by tile faculty advisor for its potential t provide learning experience relevant to the student's professional and education­ al goals. Academic credit may be earned through co-op p lacements as determined by the student's faculty advisor. During the work period, students are expected to meet project requirements aSSIgned by their advisor. Academic credit gener­ a lly counts toward Univer sity degree req uirements. Cooperative education offers boU, alter­ nating and paralleJ placements. Students who select the alternating option must complete a semester of full -time enroll­ men t in course work before entering a second alternating position. Alternaling placements carry the sLatus of full-time students and enjoy the accompanying privileges. Studen ts selecting the parallel option are required to carry a minimum of six hours of course work in addition to their co-op course. Students may enroll in par­ allel co-op positions during consecutive semesters so long as faculty sponsors determine that meaningflllleamiJ1g expe­ riences exist. Requirements for co-op particlpaUon vary with in the different colleges and departments. Requirements for admis­ sion to the co-op program generaUy include completion of 24 credit hours and satisfactory acaden1k standing. Interested students should contact the Cooperativ Education Office in 125 McKinley Han or phone (316) 978 -3688 Students ar required to complete an app]jca ti on for admission, attend orientation, and sched· ule an interview with the appropriate co­ op coordinator. French Student Exchange Program WSU is among the 100 colleges and uni­ versities in the United States that parlici­ pate in the annual student exchange orga­ nized by the French Ministry of Educa­ tion. One individual from WSlI spends the academic year in France as 0 salaried assistant in English, and a student from France is attaclled to the WSU Depart­ ment of Modern and Oassical Languages and Literatures as a salaried assistant in Frendl. Majors and minors in French who have graduated within one year prior to departure date are eligible to apply. 40 National Institute for Aviation Research Aviation research at the University dates Crom 1928, when aeronautical engineer­ ing students and Professor Alexander Petroii con tructed the first wind tunnel, spurred by a 1,000 donation by Clyde Cessna. In 1951, the Walter Beech Memo­ rial Wind Tunncl, financed in part by a $100,00 gran t from Mr'. Olive Ann Be ch, wa dedicated. The Nationallnsti­ lute for Aviation Resear h (NlAR) was organized at WSU in 1985, and has become a valuable resource to the world­ wide aviation industry, which is 0 important to the Kansas economy. Cur­ rent NlAR facilities encompass more than 74,000 squme feet, and the 16 laboratories and a socia ted equipment are valued at more than $20 miUion. The mission of lAR-To COl/duct rc cardl, transfer tech ­ nology, and cH/ra11ce educatio!l for the pur­ pose ofadvancing fire !latiol/'s aviatioll indus­ tries-reflects continuation of historic emphasis on linking research, technology application, and education. The institute serves the needs of indus­ try and government and supports educa­ tional programs of the UniverSity, pro­ viding a site and facilities for both faculty and student research in supporL of the College of Engineering and Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences. As a Kansas Technology Enterprise Corpora­ tion (KTEO designated Center of Excel­ lence, NIAR emphasizes the progres of new technologies from laboratory to com­ mer 'al application. The institute is organized into 16 labo­ ratories operating a variety of programs to fulfill its mission. Virtually every new airplane designed within the past decade by Wichita-based aircraft manufacturers has research roots which emanate from lAR laboratories. The Acr dynamiC Laboratories have research capabilities for basic aerodynam­ ics, confirmation testing of current and advanced de igns, flow Visualization, and development {advanced deicing meth­ ods. The largest wind tunnel, the Walter H. Beech Memorial Wind Tunnel, is capa­ ble of speeds up to 160 mph-with a 7 x 10 foot test s ction-and features state- f­ the art U1Strumentation and data process­ ing capabilities. Be ides traditional air­ plane studies, nontraditional research such as testing of buildings, land-speed­ record mOLorcycles, an Olympic hopeful bicyclist, and futuristic large wind tur­ bines for electric power generation have been conducted in this facility. In addi­ tion, a 2 x 3-foot flow visualization water tunnel, a 3 x 4-£oot low-speed tunnel, and Mach 2 and Mach 4 supersonic tunnels are available. The Computatwnal Fluid Dynamic find Acoustics Laborntory provides computa­ Lional expertise and software and hard­ ware Lo solve complex fluid dynamics flow and aerodynamic noise problems and to complement experimental re­ search. The Crash Dy/lamics Laboratory, with a 75-foot long crash sled capable of 52-g peak load testing, conducts aircraft seat certification testing to FAA standards. The entire crash impact occurs in one-quarter second, during which time thousands of measurements are recorded and analyzed. The Composites and Advanced Materials and Structures Laboratories have received nationa l recognition for experti e in determining the structural properties of new lightweight composi te materials through the NASA-Industry AGATE gen­ eral aviation program. Thi laboratory features a large, high-pressure, high-tem­ perature autoclave, ovens, pultrusion, braiding, fUament winding and resin­ transfer-molding capabilities, as well as extensive monitoring and measurement instruments . The Structures Laboratory is well equipped to conduct mechanical proper­ ties testing, including environmental effects on new composite materials. Pro­ jects include aircraft and bicycle compo­ nents, engine inlets, and Aladdin," aU complete quarte ....scale research airplane designed by a statewide student team which won a NASA General Aviation Award. The Airframe Design arId AlUllysis Labora­ tory works with computer models of air­ craft structures, aircraft eats, and biody­ namic data (simulations of the human body) to improve seat and restraint (safe­ ty belt) systems. The Center for Technology Application (eTA) provides support for manufacturers in the application of technologies to reduce costs and maintain world-class competitiveness. The CAD/ CAM Com­ puter Aided Design/ Computer Assisted Manufacturing) group conducts training workshop in both CADAM and CA TIA software. CTA also operates the Wichita regional office of the Mid-America Manu­ facturing Technology Center (MAMTC), a state and federaUy supported technology transfer program which helps small and m dium size manufacturers become and remain comp titive. Other units of NLAR include Humal. Facfor$-Ergonomics, Aircraft Icing, Illformal tioll Systems, Mec/mtrotlics find Syst/!1Il ~ Integration, Propulsion, Matltlfachlring Pro' cesscs Simulation, and Research MachiH6 Shop Shtdent Support. All NlAR laboratories are utilized for academic in truction fOI undergraduate and graduate students in addition to being used for government and industry research projects, Studenij research assis tants gain valuable real­ world research and development experi­ e ce to complement their academic class­ room studies, and receive pay to assist inl meeting the expenses of education. M re~ than 60 undergraduate student assistants I and 50 graduate re earch assistants are ' supported annually Many graduate stu­ dents utilize NIAR laboratorie and equipment to conduct their the is and dissertation research. Studellt Awards. Undergraduale stu­ dents have received national awards for their partiCipation in NASA's General Aviation Airplane Design competition. A statewide team of students from Kansas won first place in 1995, second place in 1996, and first place in 1997. This team won the first "Design It, Build It, Fly It" national competition in 1998, sponsored by NASA, FAA, EAA, AOPA, and the U.S. Air Force . The deSign , dubbed "Aladdin," is on display in the NlAR lobby . Many student projects from the NlAR wind tunnels have received awards at regional American Institute for Aeronautics and Astronautics (AlAA ) com petitions. Cooperative Research RelationS/lips. NIAR has many cooperative relationships. It is one of five Kansas Technology Enterprise Corpora tion (KTEC) university-based Centers of Excellence. NIAR ha gained a reputation as a Leader in creating and sus­ taining new partnership with academic institutions, industry, and state and feder­ al agencies to enhance research and devel­ opment goa ls through cooperative research. NlAR is a member of the FAA Center of Excellence for Airworthiness Assurance in partner hip with six other major W1iversities. NIAR has a key role in NASA ' s Advanced General Aviati n Transport Experiment (AGATE), a multi­ year program in partnership wi th compa­ nies which design and build single-engine and busine s jet airpla nes. The Aircraft Design and Manufacturing Research Cen­ ter (ADMRC) was formed in partnership with ansal' aviation companies, KTEc' Kansas State University, the University of WICHITA STATE UNIVBRSITY ISPECIAL PROGRAMS 4] Kansas, and Piltsburg State UniversHy. Recently a new Manufacturing Lnnovation and Development (MIND) partnership was formed wit1l several Wichita aviation industries to speed innovation in manu­ facturing prOcesses. NlAR is a member of the Kansas Industry-Universlty-Govern­ ment Engineering Education Consortium. Student Support Services, Project Discovery, McNair Scholars Program, Upward BoundIWichita Prep, UpwaId Bound/GaJaxy Experience Student Support Services, Project Discov­ ery, McNair Sc.holars Program, and Upward Bound's Wich ita Prep and Regional Math-Science Center /The Gal­ ax y Experience are special program de~ignect to help students prepare for University life and successfully complete their courses of study. Student Support Services, a federally funded p rogram, prOV ides limi ted inw me and first generiltion college stu­ den ts with a mult iplicity of academic support services which assist students to persist and graduate from WSU. The pro­ gram has three components which pro­ vide comprehensive, one-on-one tutorial assistance and an Interconnected series of support services: academic and personal counseling, financial aid assistance, career guidance, assistance in the devel­ opment of study skills, a text book usage program and free access to computers and typewriters. The program serves 250 students each year and has been in opera­ tion at WSU since 1970. Project Discoverl/, a federally funded Tal­ ent Sea rch Prog~am, was e~tablished at Wichita State University in July 1977. The project assists apprOximately 1,500 limit­ ed-income individuals in gaining admis ­ SlOn to postsecondary i nstitutions throughou t the nation and preparing for secondary school The program provides assistance to middle school students, high school students, and dropouts from sec­ ondary and postsecondary schools . Spe­ ~lfIc help is provided with admission torms, financia l forms, and registration for ACT (SAT assessment examinations. Tutorial aSsistance and instruction to mid­ dle school students also is prOVided. The proJect' s two offices at Wichita State and Labette County Community College serve ~Iddle (WSU only) and high schools and ~ommunity agencies in Wichita and nine CouT~ ti eg in southeast Kansas. A e ROI lald E. McNair Postbaccalaureate c/lievement Program encourages qualified coll ege juniors and seniors to pursue graduate studies. Named in honor of Challenger space shuttle crew member Ronald E. McNair, the program provides services which prepare students for post­ baccalaureate study, including assistance in locating finallcial aid, preparation for the Graduate Record Examination (GRE), and opportunities to attend and present papers at national conferences and to write for scholarly publicatiOns. Scholars participate in research conducted by Uni­ versity faculty, alld loca l and national symposiums provide an opportunity for students to present their resear ch . In addition, regular workshops encourage students' serious consideration of doctor­ al study. The Up-ward Bound programs are feder­ ally funded programs that have been at WSU since ]966 (Wichita Prep) and 1991 (The Galaxy Experience). Wichita Prep assists high school students from limited­ income backgrounds and who are first­ generation university students with aca­ demic potential but who may have inade­ quate secondary school preparatioll. The Wichita-area hlgh school students partici­ pate in an intensive six- to eight-week summer and nine-month academic year schedule to im prove academk and social skills. Services include tutorial assistance; academic, career, and personal counsel­ ing; postsecondary admission; and aca ­ demic classes and workshops. The pro­ gram serves 55 students each year. The six-week residential program for students returning to high school assists them in the completion of secondary require­ ments and gives them exposure to colJege life. An eight-week residential program fOT students who will enroll in university classes in the fall provides them their first experience with college course work. The mission of th e Upward Bourld Reg{onol Mal h-Science Center/Tile Galaxy ExperieJIce, is to stimulate and advance interest in matJlematics, science, and computer technology; challenge students to perform; provide a unique residential, academic, exploratory, hands-on experi ­ ence; and encourage high school students to realistical1y consider attaining a post­ secondary degree in mathematics or th sciences. The program offers high school tudents f.rom limi ted-income back ­ grounds and first generation wuversity students the opportunity to interact with a highly qualified staff and faculty, as well as industry and peer mentors. Fifty participants are drawn from public and private high schools in a four-state area- Kansas, Missouri, Nebraska, and Iowa. Ten of tile 50 participants spend a week in the Future Astronaut Space Camp in Hutchinson, Kansas. The program focus ­ es on four themes important in the disci ­ pline of science: Space Science-emphasizes how and why this country puts both human being and machine into outer space. Aerodynamics- investigates the won­ ders of flight wilhin eartJ1'S atmosphere. Environmental Concerns-examines conservation and pol1ution issues in the nation and in immediate surroundings. Human Health Issues--focuses inter­ ests in biolOgical science on issues most pertinent to students. Research Administration The Office of Research Administration assists the faculty in developing research, training. and service proposals for exter­ nal funding. The office collects, maintains, and provides information regarding the programs, interests, and needs of govern­ ment agencies, private foundations, and businesses; faCilitates communication between the faculty and prospective spon ­ sors; coordinates the preparation and sub­ mission of pro ject proposals; provides general administration support for grants and contracts received; and monitors compliance wilh federal, state, Regents' , and University regulations and policies. Small Business Development Center The Small Business Development Center (SEDC) was established in October 1983. The SEDC provides free one-on-one man­ agement assistance, resource referrals and business information, and low-cost train­ ing to small business owners, including potential business owners and inventors. The WSU SBDC serves 13 counties 0 south-central Kansas. University Press of Kansas The University Press is operated jointly by six state Kansas universities: the Uni­ versity of Kansas, Kansas State Umversi­ ty, Wichita State University, Emporia State Unjversity, Fort Hays State Univer­ sity, and Pittsburg State University . Founded July 1, 1967, it was the firsl UlU­ versity press in the United States to func ­ tion 0[1 a statewide level under specific sponsorship of al1 of the state's universi­ ties. Offices are located on the campus of the University of Kansas. 42 Hugo Wall School of Urban and Public Affairs The Hugo Wall School of Urban and Pub­ lie Affairs was created in 1993 to enhance the urban mission of Wichita State Uni ­ ver ity a articu lated by the Board of Regents. The school conducts instructio n, research, and service pr grams, integrat­ ing these three essential University func­ tions in responding to the needs ot stu­ dents and the urban environment. Aca­ demic programs in crimin al ju tice, gerontology, minority s tudies, public administration, and social work make up the academic core of the Hugo Wa ll Sch L The school's service programs include professional development train­ ing for area law enforcement personnel, elected officials, and public managerial personnel; ertilicatiol1 training for city clerks and municipal finance officers of Kan a ; anJ various continuing educa­ tiun seminars / workshops for board members, employees, and vo luntee rs with community agencies. The sch ol's research and commuruty 'ervice pr grams include the Kansas Pub­ lic Fmance Center, Midw t Criminal Jus­ tic Inst it ute, Kansas and Nebraska Regional Community PoliCing raining nstitute, and the Center for Urban Stud­ ies Kansas Public Finance Center The mission of the Kansas Public Finance Center i to deve10p and help implement public strategies that will promote eco­ nomic vi tality in Kansas and to advance the s tudy of a pplied public scholarly research on the theory and practice of public finance, including public budget­ ing, financial management, and economic development; to strengthen the ability of WSU faculty to provide specific advice to private and public policy-makers about economic vitality and public finance; and to develop and disseminate finan cial analysi methodologies and tech niques appropriate for the public sector based, in part, n private sector practices. Midwest Criminal Justice Institute The Midwest Criminal Justice Institute (MCJl) was created in the Hugo Wal l School in 1997 to provide specialized education and training to regional crimi­ nal justice profes i nals. Eight-hour sen,i ­ nars are offered monthly by nationally renown instructors who teach on substan­ tive t pics such as cdme prevention through environmental design, geograph­ ic criminal profiling, restorative justice, and other contemporary crintinal justice innovations. In addition to a substantive focu , the MCJI features day-long interac­ tive seminars for criminal justice execu­ tives, and a one-week executive leader­ ship seminar each summer. WSU stu­ dents are permilted to apply MCn semi­ nar attendance toward elective criminal justice college credit although additi nat fees (and some restrictions) are required . Regional Community Policing Training Institute The Kansas and Nebraska Regional Com­ munity Policing Training Institute was created under a cooperative agreement between the Office of Community Orient­ ed Policing Services, U.S. Deparlment of Justice, and WSU . This twelve-month renewable project provides community policing tr aining, tec.hnic.al a sistance, and access to updated researcll and poli­ cy in formati n Lo policy agenc ie in Kansas and Nebraska. While the primary focus is on rural agencies, resources and services are available to all agencies with­ in the region . Project partners are the Wichita Police Department, Kansas Asso­ ciation of Chiefs of Police, and Wichita Crime Commission. Center for Urban Studies The Center for Urban Studie performs training, research, and policy analysis for government and community institutions. Faculty and profeSSional staff develop, manage, and teach workshops and short courses for certification of professionals, continuing education, and development of leadership and governance skills. Edu­ cational and nalytical activi ti es a t the center promote exc lence in government and community improvem en l. To the extent possible, the center deve10p paral ­ lel products for academic, professiona!, and community application. WSU Center for Energy Studies The WSU Center for Energy Studies con­ ducts energy-related research with emphasis on applications within the state of Kansas . Currently, the major focus of the research conducted in the center is r elated to variolls aspects of electr ic pow r and energy. However, research related to alternate and fossil energy sources is also within the scope of the center' activi.ties. The indu try-support­ ed Power Electronics and Power Quality Research Laboratory is also a part of the Center for Energy Studies. The center is housed in the WSU Department of Elec­ trical and Computer Engineering. Special Facilities Instructional faolities on the 330-ac.re Wichita State campus are used for 'duca­ tional purp 5es more hours per day than at any ther Kansas college or university. Many f the University's special facilities are described on the following pages. Ablah Library Through a wide range of ma terials, facili ­ ties, and servkes, the Umversity Libraries support teaching and research at WSU. The growing collections of more than three million items include b oks and periodicals, microforms , government publication , corporate annual reports, scores, videotapes, audi0 recordings, and CD-ROMS. In 1991, Ab1ah Library became an ofticial United States Patent and Trademark Depository Library, the only such depository in Kansas_ Library facilities include an open stack arrangement, seating for mor than 800 people, group and faculty study carrel, electronic carrel ontaining listening and viewing equipment, microform reading and printing equipment, and photo ­ copiers, and typewriters. Additiona lly, computer terminal and printers are pro­ vided to access lhe library's online cata­ log and electronic databases. The University's libraries offer a variety of services, including convenient hours as well as dial-in access to the online catalog and a number (the library's periodical indexes. Reference librarians are available to help students and faculty locate infor­ mation and use the computerized sys­ tems. These librarians also perform litera­ ture searches in numerous remote com­ puterized databases. When materials are not owned, interlibrary loan services will locate and b rrow materials from other institu tions. The Department of Specia l Collections houses the University Archive, rare books, historica l Kan as maps, and a rapidly growing manuscript collection of more than 700,000 documents. This col ­ lection includes pape of the abolitionist William lloyd Garrison the Kantor Col­ lection of the Civil War Sanitary Commi ­ sion, and local history collections. Cable Television Wichita State Un iversity operates WSU­ TV, whicll is carried by area cable televi­ sion system on channel 28 in Wichita, Bel Aire, Eastbor ugh, Kechi, McConne.ll, and Park City. In most other outlying areas, WSU-TV can be seen on channel 40. Programming is provided by The WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITYISPEOAL FACTI..JTTE5 43 Bloomberg Report, a 24-hour news and information chann el with particulaI emphasis on business/ financial reports. WI th its unique multi-screen format , newe, i& avai lable virtually on demand. The upper right-hand two-thirds of the creell features video of an anchor giving news reports and the rest of the screen shows text reports that are updated con­ bJ1Ually. Additional programnung consists of 18 to 21 telecourses per semester, offered. for academic credit by the various colleges at WSU Local programming is also pro­ duced, fea turing a monthly arts maga ­ zine, facully profiles, distinguished guest speakers, and other campus events. In addition to full-time staff, approxi­ mately 15 students are involved in the operation of Ule channel and the produc­ lion of programs. FaciHties are located in (he Media Resources Center. Computing Center The University Computing and Telecom­ munications Services organization serves the students, faculty, and staff of the Uni­ versity by providing contemporary com­ puting and telecommunications resource for instruction, research, and administra­ Iwe information systems. These services are supported by a campus high speed fi ber optic network that connects every building 011 campus to the central com­ puting facility located in Jabara Hall. mpus resources are available over the 'ampus network and access to the Inter­ net network is available free to all stu­ dents and facuJty from the campus net­ work. Residence halls are equipped wtth campus network connections for each tudent for campus and Tnternet access. A remote dial-in access service, ShockNet2, is also available for a nominal charge for students not living on campus. Jabara linll, Lhe science laboratory and classroom building, provides state-of-the­ art facilities for computing at Wichita tate and al10ws open computer access t students i.l5 well as faculty . he central computing facility, located In the north portion of the building, occu­ pies three fl oors, two of which are acces­ ;ible to the public. The first floor houses twa open computer labs with more than ocontemporary networked computer systems, a central print room, user ser­ Vi ces, and the academic support aIeas. The hours for the computer labs are: MOnday-TI,ursdav, 7 a.m.-midnight; Fri­ day, 7 ~.m.-8 p.~.; Saturday, 10 a.m.-8 p.m.; and Sunday, 1-8 p.m. Room 122 is ekctronlcally monitored and is open all night Monday through Thursday . The labs have computer consultants available dunng most of the open hours for micro­ computer software, ma.inframe resources, and Internet access help. The labs provide free draft printing from every worksta ­ tion. High resolution document scanners are also provided free for student use. Laser high quality printing and color printing services aIe available for a small fee. The second floor contains Lhe admin­ istrative offices, microcomputer repair, and microcomputer networking and soft­ ware offices, as we ll as a technology training room for faculty and staff devel­ opment. The third floor houses the Uni­ versity 'S mainframe, network servers, and technical support offices. The computing faci lities support a n mM mainframe computer system that is primarily used for administrative sys­ tems. The campus network supports Fast Ethernet between buildings and switched Ethernet within the buildings to the desk­ top. The campus has more than 4,000 net­ worked microcomputer systems for cam­ pus classrooms, laboratories, and offices. Additional information concerning COUl­ puting and technology is available on the University's website (www.wichita.edu); follow the links under Admjnistrative Resources for Computing and Telecom­ munications Services. Harvey D. Grace Memorial Chapel Harvey D. Grace Memorial Chapel, locat­ ed in the heart of the campus near Morri ­ son Hall and the Rhatigan Student Cen­ ter, was built in 1963 and dedicated [ 0 erve all creeds and races. The chapel is available to students for group or indi­ vidua .l worship and meditation and is a frequent location for student weddings. Heskett Center The Heskett Center, a multipu rpose, dance, physical education, and recreation complex, is named in honor of the par­ ents of H. Dene Heskett, a 1935 alumnus and benefactor of WSU. The 166,000 squaIe foot complex con ­ tains instructional, research, and recre­ ational aIeas as well as the equipment necessary to support activities. Activity areas consist of a weight room, circuit training room, combatives room, 25-meter indoor swimming pool wi th sep­ arate diving well, seven handball-racquet­ ball courts, indoor climbing wall, and a 200-meter indoor jogging track which sur­ rounds five basketball courts. The outdoor area contains a six-court lighted tennis complex and four large lighted play fields. These activity areas are designed to facilita te an extensive cam pus recreation program. tudents must show a current Shocker ID card to use the activity areas for recre­ ation or for classes. Eugene M. Hughes Metropolitan Complex The Eugene M. Hughes Melropolitan Complex was acquired by the University ill 1997 and named in Hughes' honor in 1999. Located at 501 5 East 29th Street North, the 75,000-square-foot building serves the University and the community as a meeting, classroom, and rental facili­ ty . The Hughes Metropolitan Complex Ofike, the Office of University Confer­ ences and Non-Credit Programs, Small Business Administration, and two class­ rooms presently are housed in the build ­ ing. The Speech and Hearing Oinic, Fine Arts "Black Box Theater," and Wichita Radio Reading Service will move in. in 1999. The H ughes MetropOlitan Complex fea ­ tures the Roger D. Lowe Audilorium which sea ts 1,754, the Frederick Suder­ mann Commons, the Richard Welsbacher Theatre, and three other meeting rooms. All are available for rent. Call (316) 978­ 3258 for further information. KMUW Radio Station KMUW Radio broadcasts at 89.1 FM The lOO,OOO-watt station is one of nearly 600 member stations of the Lhe National Pub­ lic Radio (NPR) network. KMUW is also affiliated with Public Radio International (PRl) and Kansas Public Radio (KPR). KMUW's mission is to provide high qual ­ ity cultural and informational broadcast services to the greater Wichi ta area as part of the university's urban mission of community service. KMUW also provides training and profeSSional experience for WSU students. Learning Resource Center Wichita State offers students a variety of academic success resources through the programs of the Learning Resource Cen­ ter (LRC). Courses are offered to help stu­ den ts improve their reading comprehen­ sion and speed, critical thinking skills, library research skills, study strategies, and standardized test-taking skills. Com­ plete descriptions of courses offered a l the center are included under "Academic Resources for Success" in the College of Education section of the Undergraduate Catalog. ... 44 [n addition t forma l COllT e work, the Le rning Resource Center offers free worksh ps and media programs to WSU students, wcluding tudy kills work ­ shop::;; video tap s for study skill· and for algebra review; and computer preparation programs fur the Grad uate Recor Exam and the Pre-Pr fes ional Skills Tests. The LRC may b contacted for informa­ tion about other no st pr grams off red for specia l student popu lations, such as on-call tudy kills advisor , vocabulary preparation \"mrksh ps, and conversation gr up for students wh( need to increase their English peaking kills. Marcus Center for Continuing Education Many educational services are offered at the Marcus Center for Continuing Educa­ tion, n adult ducation fa cility at 4201 East 21 t Street. Speciali2ed ourses for b usiness and industry, governmental agencies and th profes ions; special con­ fer n e for the genera l public; and a wide variety of personal enrichment pr ­ grams are offered in the center. The cen­ ter also is available as a r ntal facili ty. Media Resources Center The Media Resour - s Center (MRC) is a comprehensive med ia and video commu­ nicat.ions organiz ti n servLng the inst ru tional, research, and e rvi -e a pect of Wichita State. Th ce t r is housed in , 20,000 square foo t, state-of­ the-art facility, and perates WSU-TV, the University' cable television station. Faciliti and resources include an inter­ acti e television (lTV classroom, instruc­ Lional design consulting and production, a multimedia lab, complete photographic darkr am laboratories, a graphic design s tudio, a profe ional tel vision produc­ tion ~tudio, satellite onferenc down­ links, mpressed video and desktop videoconferencing facilities, and the cam­ pus cable TV network. The MRC has de igned and installed and maintaLn 2S minLmaUy equipped cia srooms and 12 fully equipped master cia rooms. More master dassro ms are being installed each semester. w ide array of media equipment sys­ tems i avaLiable for classroom u e by stu­ dents and faculty . The e include ideo recording systems and projection equip­ ment. A c !lection of 1,000 videotapes is ava ·labl as well. Institute for Rehabilitation Research and Service TIle Institute for ehabllitation Research and Service (TRRS) was established in 1995 t promote a spirit f interdisc i­ plinary ooperation mong WSU faculty with rehabilitation-orientt!d interests. It is committed t Lmprove the quality of liJe of persons with disabilities through basic and applied research, and servi e deliv­ ery program enhan ement in concert with Wichita rehabilitation agencies. Rhatigan Student Center The Rhatigan Student Center (RSc) is the community cent r for Wichita State Uni­ versity. Through its facilities and se ices, the student center serv tudents, facul ­ ty, staff, alumni, and guests of the Uni­ versity. The RSC has everal dining areas to pro­ vide a variety of atmospheres and menus as well as a catering department to meet special needs. The Univ ity Bookstore, on the first floor of the RSC, stocks all required tex t oaks, computer software and hardware a t educational prices, art supplies, general reading material, Hall­ mark® cards, Shocker souvenirs, and gifts . Th RSC has a ecreation Center on the lower level for leisure use. It includes pinball, video games, b wling, billiards, snacks, locker renta l, i c jukebox, an engraving shop, laminating ervice , and a barber/beauty shop . The Recreation Center also is the home of the nationally ranked WSU varsity bowling teams. Additionally, the RSC has a 'lS0-seat the­ ater and a variety of rooms th t can be schedul d for meetings, special events, and conferences. The Reservation Office chedul s the use f all facilities in the RSC as well as most University facilitie for out-of-class­ ro m use. Additionally, th Reserva tions Office manages the niversity Informa ­ tion Center (UTC) on the first floor f the RSC. Call the UIC at (316) 978-lNFO (4636) for any information about WSU. Through the Student Activities C uncil (SAC), students are provided an opportu­ nity t learn and develop leadership skills while planning a variety of programs for the campus. The Student Activi ties Coun­ cil IS the main programming body on cam­ pUSi it organizes mor than on hundred events annually, mc1uding Shockt b fest and Hippodrom . The RSC is Iso home for the Stu ent Government Association, Student Ombudsman, Ecumenical Chris­ tian Ministries, and the Center for Student Le dership. The RSC is supported through revenues generated fr m within the operation and student f es. Satellite and Video Conferences Seven sa tellite television antennas are used I receive ideo and audi ignals from c mmunication sa tell ites serving North Amer ica . Satellite television resourc _ furnish p rogramming for WS 's cable television stan n, enable the Uni versity to participate in nationa l ate!­ li te conferences, and provide -tuden s studying for .gn languages with televi ­ sion programs produced for French and Spani It speaking audien e . Receiving antennas are located to the sou thea t of the Media Resources Centt>r. The MRC al 0 offers two-way com ­ pressed vid 0 ervices for instructional and adminis trative purposes to more than 0 site in Kansas, including all six Regents' insbtutions. Out- f- state video­ confer nce als are posstble with suffi ­ cient n tice. D sktop video c nferencing faci lit ies are also available a part of th Reg nts' Telenet 2 program. Social Science Research Laboratory TIle Socia l Science Research Laboratory houses 19 terminals, an NCS optical bub­ ble scanner, tw li ne printers connected to the W U mainframes, and TWS BBS (The Wichita State niver ity Bulletin Board Sy tern). The lab offers sever I services: Test Grading Services. They grade exams or instructors who wi h t use bubble sheets as answ r sheets for their exams. Differential item weigh tin and up t three different forms of the tesl are up­ ported. Results for eacl1 studen t, inclu ­ ing the items ach tudent m · sed, a raw score, a percent score, and other tatisti s, are generated for the in tructor. dd i­ tiona ll y, a complete item a nalysis nd o rall stan tical information about the exam are availabJe for the instructor. Other Scanning erv;ces. They also pro­ vide service and consultation fo r th se usLng bubble sh ets for data collection in their researc1l projects. SPIT. The lab organizes, administers, and scores the Studen t Perceptio n of Teaching Effect t eness. The in tru tor is p rovide a profile of students' percep­ tions o f their teach ing skills . Upon requ t, consultation is offered regarding the profile analysis. Termil1a ls. The terminals are avaiJable for both student and faculty use. TWSU BBS . This computer bulletin b ard is for WSU faculty, staff, tuden , and anyone else interested in bulletin WTCHITA STATE UNIVERSITY ISPEClAL FACIUTIES 45 boa rd s . Th e purpose o f TWSU BBS, amo ng o ther things, is to (a) provide information about Wichita State Universi­ ty, including scheduleb, the University Calendar, special events, a.nd other infor­ mation; (b) direct people to individuals who can answer questions abouL WSU; (c) provide shareware and public domain software; and (d) provide a wide varielv of network conferences and oU,er e-ma ~ services. Speech-Language-Hearing Oinic Wichita Sta te University Speech-Lan­ guage-Hearing Oinic, 104 Hubbard Hall, provide;; di ag nosiS and treatment of speech, language, and hearing problems, including hearing aid fittings . Services are available on a fee-for-service basis t people in Wichita and the surrounding communities and to University students, staff, and facuIty. The clinic is open 8 a.1I1.-5 p.m. Monday through Friday for scheduled appointments; call 978-3289. Upper division students, graduate stu­ den ts, cl inical staff, il nd faculty il1 th Department of Communicative Disorders and Sciences provide services. All work is provided or supervised by departmental sta ff and faculty who hold appropriate licensure and certification. Sports and Recreation Sports and recreation filcilities for stu­ dents at Wicl1ita State include a regulation 18-hoJc golf course; the 10,429-seat Henry Levi tt Arena which is used for intercolle­ giate basketball games, volleyball match­ es, and major entertainment events; Cess­ na Stadium; the 5,665 seat Eck Stadium­ Tyler Field , home to the Shocker baseball progra m, which ranks among the finest college baseba ll facilities in tl1e cOW1try; the Sheldon Coleman Tenn is Complex with eight lighted courts, home to WSU' men's and women's intercollegiate tennis p rogramj and the new 802-seat C. Howard WIlkins Softball Complex for intercollegiate softball for women. Wichita State is a member of the Mis­ sOUTi Valley Conference and consistently ranks nationally in baseball and bowling. The campus recreation program-fea­ turing the mu ltipurpose complex, the Heskett Center-is designed to provide acti vities fo r all students, faculty , and staff. In addition to intramurals and open recreation time, offerings include sport lubs; special even ts; programs and eXcursions for children of WSU students, faculty, and staff; a family program; mini­ classes and workshops; outdoor recre­ atIon, and aquatics. Edwin A. Ulrich Museum of Art The Edwin A. ULrich Museum of Art is recognized among Ul1iversity museums for its outdoor sculpture collection and for the quality of its exhibition program. In addition to galleries w hich hold exhibi­ tions from the museum's collection, the museum hosts seven speciaJ exhibitions a year, eacll of which runs for approximate­ ly six wee-ks. Call (316) 978-3664 for infor­ mation on current exhibitions. The museum is named in hOllor of Edwin A. Ulrich, a retired businessman w ho contributed funds to the University designa ted for the construction of the museum building. Ulricl1 also gave a col­ lection of ar twork by the American marine painter, Frederick Judd Waugh 0 861-1940). The museum opened in 1974 and over the years has developed an active exl'libi­ tion program . As a visual laboratory for the students of the University as well as the commW1ity, the exhibition program p resents a blend of traditional artwork, often hom the museum collection, with more experimental work. Exhi bi tions have featured artists such as David Hock­ ney, Romare Bearden, Morris Lou is , Isabel Bish op , David Salle, Sandy Skoglund, Jesus Moroles, Faith Ringgold, and Elizabeth Murray, along with collec­ lions of electronic and neon artis ts and Kansas naive artists. In cooperation with the faculty of the College of Fine Arts the museum is the setting for concerts, lec­ tures, and demonstrations by v isiting artists as well as WSU faculty. he art collection, owned by Wichita State University Endowment Assorution and managed by the professional s taff of the museum, now numbers more than 7,000 objects. Nineteenth and 20th centu­ ry European and American art, paintings, drawings, sculpture, and prints form the core of the collection. TIle museum orga­ nizes traveling exhibitions of work hom the coUection. Sole exhibitions by Freder­ ick Waugh and Ernest Trova and theme exhibitions such as Twentieth Century American sculpture have traveled to museums both in this country and abroad. A major aspect of the collection is the 58 piece outdoor installation of the Martin H. Bush Sculpture Collection, named in honor of lhe founding director of the museum, The collection contains a cross­ section of 19th and 20th century sculp ­ tures by artis ts such as Auguste Rodin , Henry Moore, Louise Nevelson, George Rickey , Lynn Chadwick, a nd Luis Jimen ez, among o thers. The centerpiece of this outdoor collection is the mura l, Persammges Oiseflux, by the Spanish artist Joan Mir6, located on the face of Lhe museum building. Consisting of nearly one million pieces of Venetian glass and marble, the mural depicts whimsica l bird characters that inhabit tl1e imagination of the artist. Wichita Radio Reading Service Operating on a subcarrier frequency of KMUW, the Wichita Radio Reading Ser­ vice (WRRS) programs readings of prin t­ ed material to more than 2,000 prin t-dis­ abled individuals. More Ulan 100 volun­ teers supply U1e readings, with additional programming from the In-Touch Net­ work, NationaJ Public Radio, and Public Radio Intemational. Wiedemann Hall Wiedemann Halt houses the first organ bu ilt in North America by the world­ renowned firm of MarCUSSel1 and Son, Denmark. The hall, which was dedicated in 1986, is the ideal acoustical setting for the organ . In addition to the haU's main auditorium; the building has four faculty Hices; an organ s tudio; and rooms to accommodate broadcasting, recordin g, and televising. The build ing is named for the late com­ munity philanthropist and music-lover Gladys H.G. Wiedemann who in 1983, a president of the K.T. Wiedemann POW1­ dation, Inc., donated the grea t Marcussen organ. Bloomfield Foyer, a gift of the Sam aJ1d. Rie Bloomfi eld FoundaUon, lnc., grace the entrance to Wiedemaru1 Hall. Tn WSU's prestigious Rie Bloom fi eld Organ Series, world -renowned organ recitalists perfonu on the internat.ionally recognized Marcussen Organ. Student Organizations Registration Student organizations may be granted the privileges of Ufl iversity recogn ition i they are registered wi th the Center for Student Leadership and approved by the Student Government Association (SGA). To be approved, each organization musl provide a completed WSU Student Orga­ niza tion form , ILsts of officers with addresses, copies of constitutions and bylaws, and advisor's name and addres to the Center for Studen t Leadership. Once an orga l'lization has provided all necessary information, it may be granted 46 official recognition by seA which means it may use Wichi ta State in its name, use University rooms or grotlnds or meet­ ings, post announcements n University bulletin boards, request funds fro m tu­ dent fees in accordance with established proced u res and guideli nes of SGA statutes, and be listed as a WSU organiza­ tion in the Undergrnduat CDfalog, Campus Directory, and other Uni\'er ity p ublica­ tions. Records of recogn ized orga niza­ tions are main tained in the Center for Student Leader hip. For more infonnation regarding student orga nization registra tion, contac t the Center for Student Leadership, 008 Rhati ­ gan Student Center, (31 ) 978-3022. Student Government Association Wichita State believes that one of its pri­ mary tasks is preparing tudents for the responsibilities of citizenship in a demo­ cratic society. With this in mind, the Uni­ versity places an increasing emphasis on the role the Studen t Government Associa ­ tion plays on campus. The legislative, executive, and judicial responsibilities of seA are ve ted in the Student Senate, th e Executive OHi ers and Cabinet, and the University Supreme Court. The senat appoints student to many University and Faculty Senate com­ mittees, recognizes and fu nds more than. 150 student organizati ns, and allocates approximately $5.5 milli n a nnually in studen t fees to campus agencies ranging from the Heskett Center, Rhatigan Stu­ den t Center, and Student Health Services. seA also provides opportunities ro fund you r ed u cation thr u gh the Rhatiga n Leadership Scholarship and provides fi nancial assistance for child care through the Child Care Scholarship Program. The cabinet executes the decisions of the sen­ ate and the officers. The supreme court issues opinions on constitu tional ques ­ tions and also serves as an appellate court for traffic and academic appeals. Each of these entities a lso participates in the determination of Universi ty policy. ach student is automatically a member of SGA and is eligible to vote in the annu­ al elections in April. Throughout the ear, openings exist on the Student Senate, as well as in many of the University commit­ tees. Al] students are encouraged to par­ ticipa te in student government thT ugh the many opportlmities SGA offers. For mor information contact the Stu ­ dent Government Association, Room 202, Rh atigan Student Center, Wicl1ita Sta te Universi.ty, (316) 978-3480. Student Rates Special rates for students are available for some ampus activiti s. The following offices have ticket and price information: Rhatigan Studenl Center- n-campus D10vie ; Duerksen F ine Art Cen ter School of Music)- Wichita Symphony Orchestra and on-campus events; Wilner Auditorium- niversity Theatre; Henry Lev itt Arena- athletic events; campus golf cours~ tudent golf rates. Organizations Academic Aerospace Design Gub Alpha P i Mu (Indu trial engineering) American Institute of Aeronautics and Astronau tics American Marketing Associa tion AIDeri an Society of Mechanical Engineers Association of Collegiate Entrepreneurs (ACE) Association for Computing Machinery C llegiate Music Educators ational Conference Geology Club Health Careers Opportunity Club Promotions Human Factors and Ergonomics Society Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Institute of Industrial Engineers International Business and Studies Association Japanese Student Association Kansas Association of Nursing Students Legal Assistants Society Mini-Baja Team Philosophy Society Physician Assistant Student Society Pi Mu Epsilon PoUticalScience Club Potters' Guild Psi Chi (Psychology) Psychology Graduate Student Organization (PGSO) Russkii Kruzhok, The Russian Club Sculpture Guild Sigma Gamma Epsilon (Science) Society for Human Resource Management Society of Automotive gineers Society of Manuiacturing Engineers Sport Administration Student Gub Student Arl Education Association Student Music Teachers Asso 'ation Student of Fina.nce Association (SOFA Student Speech, Language, and Hearing Association The Arts Projects Student Committee Visual Artists Students AdviSOry Committee Visual Arts Guild Women's Studies S holars and Allies CulturallIntemational Association of Mor ccans in Wichita Chinese Student Friendship Association Hi panic American Leadership Organization (HALO) Indian Students Association In onesia Stud t Associa tion Inte.rnational Student Union Korean Student As ociation Latin American Asso 'ation (ALfAN5A) Multicultural Student Coalition Pakistani Students Association Sri Lanka Student Association Student A sociation of Bangladesh Taiwanese Student Association Turkish Student Association Vietnamese Student Association Goveming!Representative Councils Black Student Union Interfraternity Council National Pan-Hellenic Council Society of Women Engineers Student Government As ocia tion Wom n's Panhellenic Association WSU Engineeri.ng Council Greeks Juni .T Greek Council Fraternities Beta Theta Pi Kappa Ipha Psi Kappa Sigma Omega Psi Phi Phi Beta Sigma Phi Delta Theta Pi Kappa Alpha Sigma Alpha Epsilon Sigma Phi Epsilon Sororities Alpha K • .'1ppa Alpha Alpha Phi Delta Delta Delta Delta Gamma Delta Sigma Theta Gamma Phi Beta Sigma Gamm R11 Zeta Phi Beta Honorary Alpha Kappa Delta (Sociology) Alpha Psi Omega (Theatre) Emory Lindquist Honors Society (WSU Honors Program) Eta Kappa Nu (Electrical engineering) Golden Key National Ha n r Society (Top J5%, juniors and seni rs) Lambda Pi Eta (Communications) Mortar Board (Senior honor society) WICHITA STATE UNIVERSITY /5TIJDENT ORGANIZATIONS 47 Omicron Delta Kappa (Leadership) Phi Eta Sigma (Freshmen) Pi Della Phi (French) Pi Sigma Alpha (Government) Pi Tau Sigma (Mechanical engineering) [li nnade (Non-traditional students) Senior Honor Men and Women Tau Beta Pi (Engineering) political WSU CoUege Republicans Residence Hall ,rennan Community Associalion f ainnowlt Towers Activities Council Residential Housing Association Recreation/Sports Club AiIJdoOub l)wlingTeam ChessOub FlylngClub WeguardOub Vovma01 Club Women's Soccer Oub WSU Swing and Ballroom Dance Club Religious Campus Crusade for Christ Christian Challenge First Baptist International Intervarsity Christian Fellowship St. Paul Parish/Newman Center University Lutheran MiniStry WSU Humamst and Freethought Society SpeciallnterestlSociai/ Community Service/Other Academic Quiz Team (5 1) e.S. Le....rjs Socratic Society Eagle Forum Collegians of WSU Hajime Anime Club of W5U (51) Middle Ages Re-enactment Society (51) Native American Student Association (51 on-Traditional Student Association Pay Back Society (CS) Student Activities Counell (0) Student Advertising Federation (51) Student Ambassador Society (51) Student Heal th AdvisOry Council (5n Student in Free Enterprise (CS) Student Organization of Social Work (SI) Student Physical Therapy Association (0) Ten Percent (5) Tutoring Association Young Gay Professionals League (0) 4 W. Frank Barton School of Business Gerald H. Graham, PhD, Dean 114 Ginton Hall • (316) WSU-3245 www.twsu.edu/-bsbwww/ The mis ion of the W . Frank Barton School of Business is to add value to stu­ dent and to advance the practice of busi­ ness through: • offering undergraduate and graduate programs, • conducting basic, applied, and instruc­ tional research, • perfonning service that facilitates eco­ nomic and personal development, and • capitalizing n our melropolitan loca­ tion The vision of the W. Frank Barton School of Business is to be a preferred source for recruiters of high quality busi­ nes.c; ch I graduates in this region. Can istent with the University' role as the Regents' urban institution, the Barton School aggressively pursues regional and national prominence for its academic and profe sional programs. This mission is influenced by the loca­ tion of the school in the largest ec nomic and cultural center in the State f Kansas. As an integral part of the state's d ignat­ ed urban univ rsity, the faculty of the Barton School of Busine are committed to programs and ctivitie that will help sustain the contribution that thi urban center makes to the economic, proCe sion­ ai, and cultural health of the state and nation. Wlthin this context, the faculty of the school have adopted the following educa­ tional goals of the Barton School which are li ted below under the headings of Student, Faculty, Programs. For each grouping, a preamble tales the basic val­ ues of the Barlon School faculty . Students: Stud nts are th reason for the Barton School's existence. It is the fac­ ulty's re pon ibility to create programs and a learning environment that ensure the ultimate success of students. We, the faculty, want our studE.1ts to evaluate positively their Barton School experi ­ ences, both while enrolled in courses and afterwards. G aIs: T ensure that students complet­ ing Barlon Schoo] programs possess skills that make them competitive with tu­ den from the b I bu iness programs in the region. To increase quality and quan­ tity of students. Faculty: Faculty are the means by which the Uruversity creates a learning environ­ ment. The quality of the faculty and the opportunities provided to faculty for con­ tinuou improvement are of paramount importance to the success of the Barton SchooL Goal: To have faculty who are widely recognized for their commitmenl to stu­ dents and scholarship. Programs: The programs offered by the Barton School link it to its multiple con­ stituencies. The rich diversity of these , programs reflects the University' unique metropolitan mission. . Goal: To increase the recognition of the Barton School through programs that are relevant, competitive, and up-to-date. The school is a member of AACSB-the International Asso iation for Manage­ ment Education; its undergraduate and graduate programs are accredited by this organizati n. Degrees Offered Undergraduate Bachelor's The undergraduate curriculum of lhe Barton School of Business lea s to the Bachelor of Business Administration (BBA). Areas of emphasis or majors are offered in se eral field within the School of Accountancy and the following depart ­ ments: economics; finance, real estate, and decision sciences; management; and marketing and entrepreneurship. Students may obtain a second bache­ lor's degree in the Barton School of Busi­ ness if they: (1) complete a minimum of 30 hours in residence in the Barton School of Business (in addition to the work required for the first bachelor's degree) a nd (2) satisfy the chool's general requirements and empha i ! major requirements in effect at the time they embark on the program leading to a sec­ ond bachelor' degree. Associate of Science A two-year program in 1 gal assistant training, which leads to the Associate of Science, is available. The legal a sistant program is offered by the Department of Finance, Real E tate, and Decision Sciences. Graduate Master' degree programs in the school lead to the Executive Master of Business Administration (EMBA), Master of BUSi­ ness Administration (MBA), Master of Professional Accountancy (MPA), Ma ter of Science (MS) in bu iness, and the Mas­ ter of Arts (MA) in economics. For additional information on graduate programs, ee the Wichita State Ulliversity Graduate Bulletill ruld the Barton School of Business-Master of Professional Accountancy section of the Catalog. Business Emphases in Other University Programs Students in Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences may major in eco­ nomics. Students trom all colleges may minor in accounting, business adminis­ tration, economics, entrepreneurship, finance, management, and marketing. Students in the College of Education may minor in economics or accounting. A minor in business administration is not available to students pursuing a degree in the Barton School of Business. A field maj r in international studies is offered In coop ration with Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences for tudents intere ted in specializing in a foreign area of the world or in interna ­ tional business, economics, or affairs. The maJor prepares students for careers in internationa I organizations within the U.S. government and in business firms . Additionally, a cooperative chemistry! business program is offered in the Department of Chemistry. The Barton School of Business provides the organizational administration cour e work for the degree program in health care administration offered through the College of Health Professions. This pro­ gram prepares students to be qualified health care administrator in one of the many types of health faCllities. Policies Admission Degree-b und studen who elect a busi­ ness major are admitted to the Barton School of Business in program tatus. All students in the Barton School of Business mu t maintain a 2.25 grade point aver­ age. Students must complete six hours of English composition, three hours of com­ munication, and three hours of college algebra with a grade of C or etter in each within their first 24 hours of enrollment in the Barton School of Business. Failure to complete this requirement will bar a student from enrolling in business cours­ es. AdPllllced st.nlldillg in the Barton School of Business is available to shldents who have (1 ) completed 60 semester hours; (2) a cumulalive grade point average of 2.250; (3) completed six hoULs of elemen­ tary accounting, six haULs of elementary economics, business statistics, business calcu lus, and a business computer course; and (4.) declared a professional major in the school. For degree-seeking students in the Barton School of Business, advanced standing is a prerequisite for all uppt!T-division courses in the school. Trml5ft" students planning to transfer into the Barton School of Business from another two- or four-year institution to obtain the BBA are advised to complete as mudl of Wichlta State's general educa­ ti on requirements as possible before transfelTing. The follOwing course areas il re recommended for the firsl two year: of coll\?gc work: Mlllhematics College algebra (3 hours) Su rvey of calculus (3 hours) Communication Composition (6 hours) Speech (3 hours) Fine arts (3 hours) Humanities (9 hours) Social science Principles of economics (6 hours) PSYChology, sociology, anthropology, polilical science (3 hours) Busines Introdllctory accounting (6 hours) Business microcomputers (3110urs) Business statistics (3-4 hours) onbusiness electives (10 hours) Transfer students should be aware that 50 percent of their business course work mUSI be taken at Wichita State University. Probation and Dismissal Studenl r; are placed on probation at the end of any semester in which they do not hav(' a WSU cumulative grade point aver­ age of 2.250. Probation is removed when their WSU grade point average reache the 2.250 leveL Students remain on proba­ tion if (1) they earn a 2.000 or better grade point average in the semester during which they are on probation, ilnd (2) their WSU cumulahve grade point average doer; nol fall below 2.000. Students on probation because of a deficient cumula­ tive grade point average may not be aca­ demica lly dismissed until they accumu ­ late 12 or more attempted hours after being placed on probation. . Studenls on probation are dismissed trom Lhe Barton SchooL of Business if they ~ fail to meet the requirements of their pro­ bationary status. When dismissed, stu­ dents must apply to the Barton School of BUSiness Exceptions Comm ittee to be considered for readmittance on a final probationary status. Application should be made in the student records office, 106 Clinton Hall. Extension or Correspondence Work Not more than six hours of the last 30 hours or ten of the total number of hours required for graduation may be in exten­ sion or correspondence courses. Permis­ sion of the dean must be secured before a student may take such courses. No exten­ sion or correspondence courses are allowed that (1) duplicate courses required for any degree granted by the school, (2) are required for any emphasis within the school, or (3) are offered at the junior or senior level in the school. Limitations on Student Load Initially admitted Barton School of Busi­ ness students are limited to a maximum of 16 hours, to whlch may be added one hour of physical education. Students admitted to advanced standing in the col­ lege are limited to a maXimum of 18 hours, to which may be added one hour of physical education. All Barton School of Business students are limited to enrollment in one course d uring a summer presession, one course in any four-week summer session and two courses in any eight-week summer session. If a student is enrolled in both an e.ight-week and a four-week summer ses­ sion, Lhe maximum enrollment is two courses. Cooperative Education The Barton School of BUSiness partici ­ pates in the University Cooperative Edu­ cation program. The program is designed to provide relevant paid employment experiences that integrate, complement, and enhance the student's academic pro­ gram. Students are placed in co-op posi­ tions in a variety of business settings, including government agencies, financial institutions, social agencies, accounling firms, entrepreneurial companies, and many others. [ndividual academic proj­ ects are formulated in consultation with the student's faculty advisor. Co-op placements must be approved by the stu­ dent's faculty sponsor. Partidpation i.n the co-op program requires enrollment in designated courses having prerequisjtes. BARTON SCHOOL OF BUSINESS 49 More information is available from the business coordinator in the Cooperative Education oifice. Advising The focus of advising in the Barton School of Business is to help student progress toward their educational objec­ tives. TIle school' s advising system offers: J. Transcript evaluation for transfer stu ­ dents and continuous monitoring of degree progress for all students 2. Suggestions of specific courses to be selected in a given semester or summer session 3. Program planning designed to out­ line an entire course of study 4. Referral to appropriate University resources for studentg seeking caree.r guidance, per!lonal counseling, or other types of assistance. Advising is deSigned 10 provide assistance where desired and appropriate. Stu.dents, especially those Milring grarillotiLlII, are encouraged to //lake full /I~ of (he system. Types of Advising Assistance Available Tm/l5cript EVII/lllllio,1. Two aspects of tran ­ script evaluation alfect students: (1) the evaluation of course work to be lrans­ ferred to Wichita Stnte UOIversity for a degree, and (2) the continuing evaluation of completion of graduation requirt>­ ments. Evaluation of transfer work is initially accomplished by the University's office of admissions. Evaluation of business and economics course work is done by the school's student records office, 106 Chn­ ton Hall, working In conjunction With the dean's office and Ule various departments within the school. The student records office also keeps a current record of each shldent's progres at Wicllita State University. Many stu­ den ts will be able to take advantage of lhe school's automated degree audit sys­ tem. This on-lille system provides stu­ dents a personal copy of their academic record, including work in progres..<;. Schedule-Building. Schedule-building is the determination of specific courses Ii shldent should take in a given semester. Students should refer to the Wichita State University Sdredule of Courses and Cainlog in consultation with a faculty advisor or staff of Ihe school's advising center to determine a specific course of study Selection of specific sections and of times for courses is the student's responsibility . The tentative schedule must be approved by an advisor. 50 Progl'm/{ Plll/mlng. Students are en our­ aged to utline an entire Ian of study early in their academic career. This pro­ grillIl plalUling activit" is rovided by the advising- center and includes suggested model programs for each of the major ficld of study offered by the school. Counseling . Student seeking career guid nce, personal counseling, or other types f assistsumc Ihal nil students have completed the specific COurse.. listed lInd !!r rrc~hm411 Yrn ,lnd SOI'/lOlIIorr YrJJr !lhove. First·Year Course BA 190A, The Right Start: Becoming a Master Student, is a 3-credit-hour course spedfically designed for first-year busi­ nesc; students. Extensive research indi­ ca tes that students who take a course like this . 1. ma ke vital connections to university taculty and resources, 2. are more likely lo complete their degree, 3. do better academically, and 4. en joy lheir uni versity experiences tnore. A complete course descrip tion appears on page 52. MajoriMinor Areas Candidates for the BBA degree must sat­ isfy the additional requirements of one of the follOwing curricular majors. All stu­ dents may avail themselves of the indica t­ ed minors . The mi nimum grade point average for a minor field of Sludy shall be tile same as the minimum grade point average required for graduation with a major in the same field. School of Accountancy Two degree programs are offered by the School of Accountancy- the Master of Professional Accountancy (MPA) and the Bachelor of BlL'iiness Administration with an accounting major. In addition, a minor in accounting is available to students who are not accounting majors. For informa­ tion about the Master of Profess ional Accountancy degree, see the Barton School of Business-Master of Profession­ al Accountancy sectio n of the Catalog. Undergraduate students may begin work leading toward the MPA degree early in their academic career. MPA-Preprofessional Program Major For a descrip tion of the undergraduate course work in the preprofessional CQlIl ­ ponenl of the MPA degree program, see the Barton School of Business-Master of Professional Accountancy section of the Ca talog. BBA-Accounting Major Requirements for a major in accounting within the Bachelor of Business Admini"­ tration degree are as follows: Course Hrs. Acet. 310, Financial Accounting and Reporting: Assets .... .............. ......... ~ Acet. 320, Accounting for Decision Making and Control ......... .................. .. ..3 Acct. 410, Financial Accoun ting and Reporting: Equities ... ...... .. ..... .. ....... 3 Acct. 430, Introduction to Federal Income Tax ... ...... .... .... ... ... ........ ... ...... ... .... 3 Acct. 560, Accounting Information Systen1S....................... ...... .......... .......... ... . 3 Acct. 610, Financial Accoun ting and Reporting: Special Entities and Complex Issues ........ .... .. .. ....... ..... . .. 3 Acct. 620, Accounting for Strategic Support and Performance Evaluation ..... .... ....... .......... ...... .......... ...... 3 Acct. 630, Taxation of Business Entities ..3 AceL 640, Principles of Auditing _.. ......... 3 Vpper-truments, drafting lvills and pro­ bate instruments, drafting pleadings an interrogatories, filing papers, assisting in tr ial preparation, and numerous other matters of challenge and responsibility. The pro~am has been granted approval by thE' American Bar Association. Degree Program Admission Students seeking admission Lo Ole Legal Assistant Program must meet the general entrance requirements of WSU, the initial requirements of the Ba rton School of BU5ine"s, and the specia l requirements of the Legal Assistan t Program. lniHilI admission to the Barton School of Business requires (1) completion of 24 semester cred it hours, (2) a cumulative grade Pllint average of 2.250, and (3) com­ pletion uf six hours of English composi­ han, three hours of communication, and three hours of coUege algebra wi th a t least a grade of C in each course. Students may app ly for admission to the Legal Assistant Program during the semester that lhese requirements will be completed. Admission to the program involves these steps: (1) completion of an applica­ tiOT1 for admission, including documenta­ tion of the GP A and specific course work Listed above, and (2) completion of an admissions interview with the director or associate director of the program. In the event there are more applicants tha n the program can reasonably accommodate, the program reserves the right to set up admissions quo tas . In such circum­ stances, applicants will be evaluated on the basis of academic record. Thus far, this procedure has not been necessary . The associate director/advisor is avail ­ able to counsel beginning and advanced students to ensure their basic ski lls and general education course work progress toward the legal courses in a logical and meaningful way. Appointments for pre­ registration are recommended. Nondegree and Single Course Admission Students not pursuing the degree pro­ gram are required to complete a special admission form. TIle student must identi­ fy the particular course or courses, the reason for seeking admission and the background which is the basis for a request for waive.r of any stated prerequi­ sites. Such special admissions are evaluated against the folJowing criteria: (1) whether the purpose of the student conforms to the objectives of the p rogram, (2) whether the student has the background necessary to handle the course and not impede the class, and (3) if there is space available. Degree Requirements The degree requirements for the Associ ­ a te of Science In Legal Assistant an~ sum­ marized as follows: COllrse Hrs. I. General Education Requirements ... .. .. 30 Basic Skills ......... .............. .. ................... ... 12 Eng!. 101 and 102, College English 1and U .................. ...........6 Corum. 111, Public Speaking .........3 Math. 111, College Algebra .......... . 3 Humanities and Fine Arts ... .......... .. ..3-12 Social and Behavioral Sciences .. .. ... ..3-12 Mathematics and Natural Sciences .3-12 II P rofessional Curriculurn ................... ...34 A. Required Courses ... ...... .. .................. . 16 B. Law 130Q, Introduction to Law 3 Legal 230, Introduction to Paralegalism ........ .... ... ...... ...... .. 2 "Legal 231A, Legal Research and Writing J ................................ 3 "Legal 233, Litigation 1 .. ........... ..3 "'Legal 240, Substantive Law Torts ..............................................3 Acct. 210, Financial Accounting 1 ....... .......................... 3 B. Required Courses or Validated Eguivalents ......................6 Legal 238, Legal Assistant lnternship................. ..................... 2 Legal 244, Legal Assistant Computer Skills ................ .. .. ......3 Legal assistant internship is a reqtrlre­ ment for students who do not have the law-related work experience equivalent. Proficiency in utilization of a microcomputer is also a gradua­ tion requirement. Work experience in a law office may be validated to satisfy the in ternship requirenlent. Computer skills may be validated to satisfy the computer requirement. Academic credit will not be granted where these reqUirements are met by validation. C. Professional Electives ..................12-18 "Legal 232, Legal Aspects of Business Organizations ..........3 >tLegal234, Estate Administration 3 "Legal23S, Law Office Management and Technology ...3 "Legal 236, Litigation IT ................ .. 3 "Legal 237, Family Law .......... ........3 "Legal 239, Special Topics ......... ..... 3 -Legal 241, Legal Research alld Writing T1 ......... ...................... 3 "Legal 243, Property Law.. .. .... .... .. .3 B. Law 431, Legal Environment of Business .. ....................... .. .........3 B. Law 435, Law of Commercial Transactions.... ... .............. .... ......... 3 B. Law 436, Law of Business Associations .................................. 3 CJ 315, Criminal Law ......................3 q 320, Criminal Procedure ....... ...3 Acct. 260, In troduction to Information Processing Systems for Business ......... .........3 Mgml 360, Management and OrganiZa tional Bella vim ........... .. 3 D. The 34-hour professional curriculum must include a minimum of 18 hours of legal speciality courses. Legal spe· cialty courses are identified with an asterisk ("). Il l. Achieve a grade point average of 2.250 or better on (a) all college work, (b) all work taken at Wichita State, (c) al l business and economics courses, (d) a ll business and economics courses taken at Wichita State, (e) all cou rses counted as required courses and profes­ - ----------- --- -- - 56 ~ sional electives under lhe professional curricu la requirements, and (f) a ll courses counted as required courses and professional electives under the professional curricula requirements taken at Wichita State. Course Descriptions Bu iness courses numbered 100 to 299 are design d primarily fo r fre hmen and sophomores, but students from other classes may be admitted for lower-divi­ sion credit. Graduate studen ts may not take these courses for graduate credit Business courses numbered 300 to 499 are ava ilable only to juniors and seniors. Graduate students may not ta e these courses fo r graduate credit. Bu in • courses numbered 500 to 699 aT available to juniors and seniors, bu t graduate students may also receive grad­ uate credit for these courses. Business courses numbered 700 to 799 are structured primarily for graduate stu­ dents, but undergraduate, upper-division students may be admitted if they meet course prerequisites. Courses numbered 800 to 899 are designed for graduate students only, and tudents may not be admitted to these courses un less they have been admitted to the Graduat School. (See the Academ­ ic fnfoffi1ation section of the Catalog for pedal conditions under which seniors may be admitted to graduate courses.) Business Administration­ General Lower-Division Courses 190. Selected Topics. (1-3). Repeatable with departmental consent. 190A. The Right Start: Becoming a Master Student. (3). Specilic.ally fo r firs t-year busmess major . Helps students become master s tu­ dents. Provide an extend d exposme to the misSIOn, strategies, and programs of the Barton School of Business. Helps students prepare for SUCCI!. ~ in studying, working with other stu­ dents, interacting with faculty, and planning their reer. Students learn curren t business practice and interact with representatives of the busine community. Non-business stu­ dents may enroll on a space-available basis. Counts as a busines elective for any student enrolled in the Barton School o( Business. 290. Selected Topics. (1-3). Repeatable with departmenlal consent. Upper-Division Course 490. Selected Topics. (1-3). Repe table with departmental consent. Executive Master of Business Administration Graduate Studies in Business Courses for Graduate Student Only 800. Statistical Analysis and QuantitativI! Methods for Decision Making. (3). Introduces methods of statistical inference, emphasizing applicatioru; to administrative and manage­ ment deosion problems. Includes classical esti­ mation and hypothesis testing. regression, cor­ relation, analysis of variance, and nonparamet­ ric methods. Prerequisite: admission to £MBA program. 8al. Human Behavior a.Dd the Management of Organizations. (3). Examines leadership styles, power, authority, motivations, communica­ tions, and their impact on human behavior. Includes organizational learning, te.1m build­ ing, participative management, transforma­ tional leadership, managing diversity, conflict management, network organizatiOns, organi­ zational change, and re-engineering. Prereqw­ site: admission to £MBA program. 802. Marketing tor Executive Management. (3). Focuses on the analysis, planning, and implementation f marketing strategies from middle- and upper-management perspectives. Introduces key concepts and methods for the d evelopment of integrated marketing pro­ gra.au.. PrerequiSite: admission to Executive MBA program. 803. Economic Analysis for Managers. (3). Foc:uses on the behavior of the firm's product and labor markets; the onsequences of busi­ ness, regulatory and tax policie ; industry pric­ ing; research and d velopmen t trategies; transfer pricing; the effects of vertical and hori­ zonta l integration; leveraged buy-outs and principal-agent problems. Prer quisite: ad.mi. sion to Executive MBA program. 804. Operation Management. (2). Focuses on the processes by which goods and services are supplied, produced . and distributed in organ i­ zations Emphasizes ystenls for ana lyzing d!!5ign and operational p roblems in the PTo­ duction/operations function . Prerequisite: admission to Executive MBA program. 805. GlobaJ Business and Competitiveness. (2). Focuses on applications of economic analy­ is to in ternational business decisions, interna­ tional and macroeconomic components, under­ standing the implica tion ' f macro policies an developments fOT the firm's business envi­ ronment, expansions into foreign markets, for­ eign ilwestmen t and the relevance of global changes in technology and labor productivity, and foreign exchange, balance of payments, and trade policy i sues. Prer quisite: admis­ sion to Executive MBA program. 806. Using Accounting Infonnation to Under­ stand Financial penormance. (2). Focuses on the na ture and purpose of accounting, princi­ pal accounting instrument, and valuat ion problems. PrerequisLte: admission to Executive MBA program. 807. Corporate Finance. (3). Focuses on the strategic decision that an organization makes leading to capital spending. Also includes the risk eleml!nt in financial decision making and the financial instruments that have evolved to reailocate risk in the economy. Prerequisite: admission to Executive MBA program. 808. Using Accounting Information to lmprove Strategic and Operational Perfor­ mance. (3). Focuse on the use of fina ncia l information in management decision making. Includes internnJ reporting sy: terns, cost man­ agement "'Ystems, planning and budgeting, performance measurement issues, and activity­ based mnJ1~gemenL Prerequisite: admission to Executive MBA program. 809. lnfoDIllltion Technology. (3). Focuses on information as a resource and the li nks between busine ·tra tegy and information technology, the organizational implications of technology, and how to successfully incorpo­ rate information technology Into organizations l support management decision making · nd controL Prerequisite: admission to xecutive MBA program. 8]0. Managerial Investment Strategies. (2). Focuses on inve tInen t management, a set pricing models, factor models, performance assessment, option pricing, and other deriva­ tive securities_ Prerequisite; admi ion to Exec­ utive MBA program. 81L Managerial Strategy. (3). Integrates the other courses in the program by addressing the strategic management of an organization . Focuses on developing a strategic plan thaI maximizes shareholder value, generates com­ mitment and effective action from others in the organization for implementing the plan, and developing a strategy corunsten.t with the orga­ niza tion's re ources while increasing sha.re­ holder value by satisfying cu tamers better than do competitors. Prerequisite: admission to Executive MBA program. Accounting School of Accountancy Lower-Division COluses 190. Selected Topics. (1-3). Rep atable with departmental consent. 210. Financial Accounting. (3). The study of accounting as a means of communicating financial information about the activities of business enterprises. Emphasizes concepts and principle underlying the measurement f income and financial posi tion and how thIS information may be used to evaluate the progress of a firm. 220. Managerial Accounting. (3). The tudy of accounting in terms of management' . informa­ tion requirement!>. Emphas izes the use of accounting infomlation to assist managemen t in planning, an Iyzing, and implementing business decisi ns and activities Prerequisitl!: Acct. 210. 260. Introduction to Wormation Processing Sy terns for Bu iness. (3). Introduces the use of information processing systems in solvin business problems and meeting the inf rma­ lion needs of the modem business environ­ ment. Includes word processing, spreadsheet BARTON SCHOOL OF BUS1NFSS/ACCOUNTING 57 analysis and use, lIse of computerized data bases, and an introduction to the internet. Upper-Division Courses 310. Financial AccouDting and Reporting: Assets. (3). A thorough, in-depth study of con­ ceptual and techn ical aspects of financia l accounting- Emphasizes recognition and mea­ surement problems of Income determination and balance sheet presentation. Covers asset accounting in depth. Prerequisites; ju nior stanrljng, Math. 109 or 111, and Acct. 210 and 260. 320. Accounting for Decision Making and Control. (3). The use of accounting information to aJ'sist management in planning, analyzing, and implementing processes for decision mak­ ing and control Focus is operational control in contemporary bU5mess contexts. Prerequisites: junior standing, Math. 109 or ]I1, and Acct. 220 and 260. 390. Special Group Studies in Business. (1-3). Repeatable fo r cred it with School of Accoun­ tancy consent. 410. Financial Accounting and Reporting: Eq ui ties. (3). A conti nuation of Acct. 310. Emphasl7.es liabilities and equi ty. Prerequi­ sites : Accl. 260 and 310; Math. 109 or 111; junior standing. 430. Introduction to Federal Income Tax. (3). An overview of the federal tax law and those laws specifically applicabll' to individuals and sole proprietors. Also introduces tax research techniques. Prerequisites: Accl. 210; Math . 109 or 111; junior standmg. 481. Cooperative Education. (1-2). 491. Independent Study in Accounting. (1-3). Individua l study for CrINer only. Prerequi­ sites: 2.750 grade point average in accounting, junior stilnding and School o f Accoun tancy con<;en t. Courses for Graduate/Undergraduate Credit 560. Accounting Information Systems. (3). A stUdy of the content, design and controls of accounting systems, emphasizing tht! use of computers for processing financial data. Pre­ reqUISIte!...., Accl. 220 and 260; Math. 109 or 11 J ; senior ~tancJjng . 610. Financial Accounting and Reporting: Special Entities and Complex Issues. (3) . Examines accounting concepts and techniques reluted to consolidated statements, govern­ mental and not-for-profit entities, and partner­ Ships. Includes accounting for forcign curren­ cy, hedges, financiaJ instntments, and emerg­ Ing bsues in financial accounting and report­ Ing. Prerequisites: Acc!. 410 or equivalent; Math . 109 or tIl; seNor standing. 620. Accounting for Strategic Support and Performance Evaluation. (3). The use of accounting information to .l~sist management l~ developing and identifying superior strate­ gle5 to produce and sustain comparative and /or cOmpeti tive advantages. Focuses on goal-.congruen t strategies and incentives. Pre­ requlSlles: jW1ior standing; Math. 109 or 111; Acct. 2b0 ill'ld 320. 630. Taxation of Business Entities. (3) Studit! the federal tax law as it applies to corporations, partnerships, S corporati ons, and tax-exempt enti ti e~ . Exami.nes the effect of taxation on bUoiness decisions. Prerequisite: Accl. 430 or equivalent. 640. Principles of Auditing. (3). A study of the auditor's attest function , emphasizing auditing standards and procedures, independence, legal responsibilities, codes of ethical conduct and evaluation of accounting systems 3lld i,nternaJ con trol. Prerequisites: Acct. 260,410 , 560; Math . 109 or Ill; senior standing. 690. Seminar in Selected Topics. (1-3). Repeat­ able {or credit w i th School of Accou'Jltancy consent. 777. Review for Professional Examinations. (1-6). Preps students for professional certifica­ tion examinations in accounting, including the CPA, CMA, and CIA examinations. Enroll­ ments govern whether course is offered. Grad­ ed SIU and may be repeatEd for credit. Regis­ tration for up to 6 semester hours is permjtted. Credit for this course does not count for degree credit in the School of Accountancy or Barton School of Business. Prerequisite: permission of tbe School of Accounllmcy. Cowses for Graduate Students Only Where a course is indicated as a prerequi­ site to a second course, all prerequisites to the earlier course(s) also apply to the la ter course(s). 800. Financial Accounting. (3). A study of the basic structure of accounting, income determi­ nation, asset valuation, liability recognition, and accounting for ownership equlty. Includes the interpretation and analysis of financial statements. PrereqllJsite: no previous credit in accounting or permission of the School of Accountancy. 80L Managerial Accounting. (3). Examines the use of accounting infonnation to assist man­ agement in planning, analyzing, and imple­ men ting business decisions and activities. Focuses on strategic a.nd operational perfor­ mance analysis and evaluation. Prerequisite: Acct. 800 or equivalent. 802. The Effect of Taxation on Management Decisions. (3). Introduces tlle basic lax con­ cepts of income, deducHons, and credil!l that will enable managers to (l) understand the tax consequence5 of their business decisions and (2) commurucate effectively with tax profes­ sionals in structuring business transactions. PrE-requISites: graduate standing and Acct. 800 or equivalent, or permission of the School of Accountancy. 815. Financial Accounting and Reporting: Contemporary Issues. (3). Uses the case method to examine and analyze the applica­ tion of generally accepted accounting princi ­ ples to problems of measurement, presenta­ bon, and disclosure in financial statements. Focuses on contemporary topics of in terest in financial accolIll ting and reporting. Prerequi­ sites: graduate standin g and Acct. 610 or equivalent, or permiSSion of the School of Accountancy. 825. Management Control Systems. (3). Stud­ ies accounting in Ule context of management control systems. Focuses on how account ing in teracts with management in achieving an organization's strategic and operational objec­ tiVC9. Emphasizes contemporary cha llenges in accounting, related to broadening the types IJf information captured, measured, and reported. Prerequisites: graduate standing and Acct. 620 or 801 (or equlvulent), or permission of the School of Accountancy 831. Taxation of Estates and Trusl!l. (3). Stud­ ies the income taxa tion of trusts and estates, including the special cases of gran tor and spli t­ interest trusts. Examines the gift taxa tion of donors, the estate taxation of decedents, and the fundamentals of estate planning . Prerequi­ sites: grad uate s tanding and Acct. 430 (or equivalent), or permission of the School of Accountancy. 835. Tax Research and Selected Topics. (3). An in-depth study of trad itional and compu ter­ ized tax research and planning techniq ues, eth­ ical issues, tax practice issues, and an introduc­ tion to state, nlultistate, and international taxa­ tion . Prerequisi tes: grad ua te standing and Acct. 430 (or equlvalent), or permission of the School of Accountancy. 840. Advanced Principles of Auditing. (3). An advanced study of Buditing emphasizing EDP auditing sta tistical sampling and ethics. Pre­ requisites: graduate standing and Acct. 51 () and 640 (or equivalent'- or permission of Ule School of Accountancy. 860. Advanced Accounting .Infonnation Sys­ tems. (3). A study of the concepts of informa­ tion systems, thei r design and operation and the relationship of these concepts to the eco­ nomic information requirements, informaticm flows, decision criteria, and control mecha­ nisms in the business organization . Prerequi­ s ites: gradua te standing and Acct. 56(l (or equivalent) or permission of the School of Accountancy, 890. Seminar in Special Topics. (1-3). Repea t­ able with permiSSion of the School of AccolID­ tancy. 891. Directed Study in Accounting. (1-3). Pre­ tequisite: School of Accountancy consent. 899. Thesis Research. (1-3). Business Law Department of Finance, Real Estate, and Decision Sciences LoweIADivision Courses 130Q . Introduction to Law. (3). A basic in tro­ duction to law. Consjders the na ture and func­ tions of law, the structure of the American lega l system and legal processes and proce­ dures. Also surveys the maj()r areas of substan­ tive law. Open to students with a general inter­ est in law . Students interested in the Lega l Assistant Program should cn.rolJ concurrently in Legal 230. 190. Selected Topics. (1-3). Repeatable with departmental consent. ~ 58 Upper-Division Course 390. Special Group tudies in Business Law. (1-3). Repeata Ie with departmental consent. ~31 . legal Environment of Busines • (3). An mtroduction to the legal environment in which businesse operate. Considers the ins titutions and processes related to business law, and the major fruch areas iI production, di tribution, and finance. Includes linear, integer, go,d and dynamic pro­ gramming , tran.sporta tio n model, network models, queuing theory, and simulahon. Pte­ requisite: OS 350. 651. Design of Operations Sy terns. (3). Gives an In-depth view of the long-tenn design aspects of operations ystems. Includes proces anal. sis and design, production ontrol infoT­ mation systems, fadliti planning, materials handling system, job design, per onnel plan­ ning and scheduling, and curren.! issues. Pre-­ requisite: OS 350. 652. Operations Planning Systems. (3). Gives an in-depth < naly is of the hart-term or oper­ ational aspecl$ of goods- or service-producing systems. Includ ' forecasting methods, inven­ tory control models, materi.u requiremen ts planning, aggregate planning and seh duling, and current issues. Prerll'l.uisite: DS 350. 690. Seminar in S lectcd Topic . (l-S). Repeat­ ab le with depar tmental consent. Prerequisit(>· junior standing. 750. Workshop in Decision Sciences. (1-4). Prerequisite; junior standing. Courses for Graduate Students Only 850. Production and Operations Management.. (3). Conc pts for pl.:mning .:md cont I1ing the prod u tion of either goods or services. Topi in lude li near programmi ng, scheduling, quality can ITo\. inventory models, and wait­ ing-li ne models . ot open t students with credit in D5350. Prerequisites: calculu5 and statistiC'll. 851. Intermediate Production Management. (3) . TIwory of productive systems, decisl n making un.der uncertainty and advanced tech­ nological forecasting methods for busmess and indu try. Application of forecasting meth d and some peration~ research m dets to real ­ world productiv systems. Prerequisite: OS 350 or 850 871. Multivari.,te Statistical Methods. (3). A study f selected multivariate ~tatistic meLh­ ods used in support of modern decisi n mak· ing. [neludes mul tivariate hY!' the!,; testing, multiple regressi 11, correlation, analy IS of va riance and covariance, and d iscri minan t anaLysis. Prerequisile: Ec n 870 or Econ. 231. 872. Advanced Statistical Analysis. (3). Exam­ ines topics such as sclmple de!oign, chi square, variance analysis and correlati n, and regres­ sion analysis from conceptua l and d dJii n­ making points of \flew. Prert'quisite: D5 71 874. Management lruomlation Systems. (3). A study of the structure 1U\d the strategic organi­ zational role of omputer-ba d Inf nnalion systems in organizations. Covers transaction pr essing/accounting wi ormation systems, management reporttng.1l1d xecutive informa­ tion systems, dccisi n upport and xpert Sy ­ terns, and workllow in onnation syslCms. All inform.'Ition resource management perspective empha iZe5 is ues f building an information architecture, data integration and administr<1 ' tion, and managmg risk 111 infomlation sys­ tern~ developm nt efforts. 875. Management Science. (3) . Pmvid quat1­ h tative ba~es from which the student may develop analytical abilities for use as a decisic)!1 maker. Areas of studv induJe m thematical programming, game theory ec-..sting, queu­ ing the ry, and imulatiDn PrereqUISite: cal u­ Ius. 876. Advanced Managemecnt Scien~e. (3) An in-depth examination of selected managemel1t science models. Includt.!S adv, need inventory and quali t control topic , goal rogrammmg, and other current decisIOn making techruqulJs. Prerequisite: 0 875 or departmental nsen!. 884.. Database Planning and Management. t ). Prepare; students to deal with issl.le.~ in plan­ ning and man'lgi ng organization-wide int ­ grated databas(! . Emphasi..tes logical databa,e design and relatio nal database implem ta­ tion. Incl udes SQL, assuring dat.,base integrity, BARTON SCHOOL OF BUSINESS/ ECONOMICS 59 database conversion, database adm.iJlistra tion, and data management for computer in tegra t nl<1nuiact LJring. Prerequisite: OS 874 or instru,'­ tor"s consent. 890. Seminar in Special Topics. (1-3). Rcpeat­ ,1ble with departmental consent. 891. Directed Studies. (1-6). Prerequisi te: departmental consent. 893. Special Projed in Decision Sciences. (1­ 4). A special project inclu ding origina l case Tl!sea rch, supervised interns hips, or fie ld re.search . Prereq u isi te : approval of the MS Committee. Open only to M5 in bu.siness can­ didates. 895-896. Thesis. (2-2). Economics Departn,ent of Economics Courses in the economics department are offered in the followi ng s ubjec t areas . Since course descriptions are listed in numerical sequence, the following sum­ mary is presented to assist in locating courses by subject area. Economic pr inciples and theory-Eean. 201Q, 202Q, 203H, 204H , 301, 302, 304, 605, 800, 801,802, 804 Induslrial organization and regu lated industries- Bean. 614,615, 617 History a nd comp ara tive systems ­ Econ. 622, 625, 627 Sta tistics and econometrics- Heon. 23 1, 702, 731, 803, 831 Monetary and financial economics; money an d banking- Econ. 340, 740, 847 Public finance-Econ . 765, 865 Labor and manpower economics-Econ. 660,661,662,663,861 Economic growth and development; internatio nal economics-Beon. 671, 672, 674,870 Urban, environmental and regional eeo­ nomics- Econ. 688 Di rected s tudYi thesis- Eeon. 491, 692, 750, 891, 892. 896. Lower-Division Courses >,201Q. Principles of Macroeconomics. (3). Genera l education introductory course. An introducti(Jn to the determinants of income, outpul, ;lnd employment Emphasizes various macroeconllmic theories and related policies. Includ('s money, banking, and the m~croeco­ nomic effects of the global economy. >202Q . Principles of Microeconomics. (3). General roucation fu rther studies course. An introdUction to the behavior of markets and the ind ividual decision-makers in the econo­ my. Al'lO includes marke t structures and their perh1rma nce, contem po rary publi c poli cy IS,ues, anJ international economics. Prereq\1i­ sIte: Econ. 201Q. 204H. The Economics oj Public Issues. (3). A seminar Pll ~lected topics of current interest in .......... economics that ana lyzes major economic prob­ lems of the day as a guide 1'0 making public policy decisions. Includ ed are the. economics of environmen ta l con tr ol; externaJi ties, public goods, social costs and their effects in tbe maT­ ket system ; rela ted problems such as urban developmel1t and economic growth, infl ation, unemploy ment, con cen tration o i econonUc POWel, depletion of resources, poUution and conservation. Open only to honors s tudents. Prerequisite; Econ. 203H. 231. Introductory Business Statistics. (4). An intrOdUCtiOl' to statistical inference, es timation, an d hyplJtlles i, testin g. Includes summary measures, probability, random variables and their distribu tions, sampli ng distributions, ele­ men15 of Bayesian decision theory, linear regression and correlation, and time serjes analysis. Uses commercial statistical packages to perIoDIl statis tical data analysis . Prelequi­ ite: Math. 109, 111, or 1 12. >250. Entrepreneurship and Personal Enter­ prise. (3). General education issues and per­ spectives course . Demons tra tes that the ascribed attributes and personal quali.ties that tra ditio nally have characterized the entrepreneur (in itiative, investment, innova ­ tion, commitm ellt . and risk-taking ) can be leamro by anyone who seeks personal intellec­ t u a l fu lfillmen t a.nd/ or bus iness s uccess, K110wledge of entrep reneurial principles and processes are invaluable in any academic disci ­ p line as well as for Ulose tn quest of desired career goals. >280. Economics of Social Issues. (3). Genera.! education issues and perspectives course. Ana­ lyzes current social and public policy issues using the fundamental tools of economic theo­ ry. Issues covered depends partly on current eve.nts, bu t includes p ove,rty, environmental issues, government tax and spend.ing policies, international trade, and economic stability and growth. No prior stud)' of cconomics is neces­ sary. Prelequisi te.s: Math. 111, COUlDl. 111 and Eng!. ] 02. Upper-Division Courses 301. Intermediate Macroeconomics. (3). Intro­ duces the concepts of aggregate demand and aggregate supply. After developing theoretica l foundations for these, polley applica tions are disc ussed, including s ucl, policy issues ,H, u nem pl oyment, inflati on , governmen t and internat ional trade deficits and interest rates. Prerequisites: Econ. 201Q, 202Q an d junior standing. 302. Intermediate Microeconomics. (3). Theo­ ry of resou.rce allocation by means of price and markets. Economic choice, prod uction, cost, supply, demand and marke t struciw:e are d iscussed, as well as efficiency condi t'ions II con!'> um ption , production, d istribu t ion and excllange. Prerequisites: Econ. 201Q, 202Q a,nd jwuor standing. 304. Managerial Economics. (3). Applies con­ cepts from microeconomic theory to p roblems in bu.siness management and decision-making. Includes demand analysis, pricing, production costs, effects of market structure l)n business decision-making, aJld d eCision-making with risk. Prerequisites: &:on . 202Q and 231. 340. Money and Banking. (3). A study () f th" f.inancial sector oj lhe U.S. econom y, emphasiz­ ing the role of mOlley in detennining in.flalion, lllterest rate:., dnd the level of economic actIVi­ ty. In cludes the commercial banking and Fed­ eral Reserve systenls, credit markets. interest ra te theory, and monetary policy. Prerequi­ sites: fcan. 201 0 and junior standing. 403. Business and Economics Forecasting. (3). An applica tion ot statist Ical method to bu.si­ ness and econom ics forecasting using rea l world data . Indudes collection of data, sun'ey of business indicators, and application of fore­ casting techn.iques such as moving averages, sm oothing, regression, time series d.ecomposi ­ tion, and ARJMA. Prerequisites: Econ 201Q, 202Q, 231, and tunior standing. 481. Cooperative Education. (1-2). 491. Directed Study. (1-3). IndividuaJ study of various aspects and problems of economics. Repeatable for credlL CrlNCr only. rrerequi ­ sites: junior standi,ng, departmental con.sent, and 2.750 GPA in economics. Courses for Graduate/Undergraduate Credit 60S. History of Economic Thought. (3). A cri ti­ cal analysis of economic thought, the fadors tha t influence this tllougbt and its impact upon the soci.al and economi c development Qf (he mod ern world. Prerequisites: Econ . 201 Q, 202Q, or 800, and junior stnnrung. 614. Industrial Economics and Anlilru.sl Poli­ cy. (3). Examines the behavior of firms within in d ustries em p hasizing antitrust poliCY . Includes pricing behavior, distribu tion poli ­ cies, entry deterrence, a dvertiliing , and merg· ers. Prerequisites: Econ. 202Q and junior stand­ ing. 615. Economics of TLl.D.Sportation. (3). A study of how businesses can effectively use tranS ­ portation both nationally and internationally. Includes the physical and economic character­ istics l)f transpl)fta tion lllodes, basic concepts of logistics, and problems and policies rd.a!cd to transpor tation. Prerequisi tes: Econ. 201Q and 202Q, or Emn. BOO, and junior standing. 617. Economics of Regu.Jation. (3). A study of the theory and prac.tlce of regulation lndudl both the traditional regulation of public utili ­ ties and communications and the newer form" of regulation, suc.b as safety and envimnmeT1 ­ ta l re gula t ions. Pre reqUisites: EC() n. 20 1Q, 202Q, or BOO, ~U1d junior standing. 622. Comparative Economic Systems. (3). A comparative analysis of the evolutionary struc­ ture of capi talism, sociallsm, and communi.sm. Em phasizes differences in pricing resource allocation, distribution vi income, and econom­ ic planning. Prerequisites: Econ. 201Q, 202Q. or 800, and junior standing 625. EcollDmic History of Europe. (3). Oo:>!>­ listed as Hist. 614. An ana lysis of thE'develop­ ment of economic institutions; the rise of capi­ talil.'Il' a.nd its infiuenceon overseas expansion , technology, precious metals, poli tic. and War; changes in economic ideologies; and cultural effects o f ec onomic Cha nge. Prerequ i<:ites: Econ. 201Q and junior standing. 60 627. Economic History of the United Slates. (3). ro -listed as Hisl515. An analvsls of the b sic fa cto rs in economic grow th .' Explores agTicul ture, trade and C0rnmerce; ind ustrial d ey lopment; nd the changin role oE the government in econom ic activit . Prerequi­ sites: Eeon 101Q nd juni r sta nrung. 660. Labor Economics. (3). An introduction to labor econ mics surveying ba th theoretica l and empiric.l! resear-ch in this field. Includes la bor ma rke t , wage determ inati on. a nd hum an apital theo ry . Prerequi ites; E on. 201Q, 202Q, or 800, and junior standing. 661. Collective Bargaining and Wage Deter­ mination. (3). An examinatio n of eco nom ic and l 'gaJ aspects of collective bargaining and the major i sues and problems inherent in the bargaining process . Explores th manner in whi('h wages are determin d u nder arious insti tu tional relationships and the effects of coUective bargaining n wages, employment, ilnd prices. Prerequisites : Econ . 20lQ and 202Q, r Econ. 00, and junior standing. 662. Work and Pay. (3) . Investiga tion of the economi iI peets of work and pay ernpba 'iz­ in~ the nature f work WIder capitalism and the mann r in which wages are de termined . Covers quality of work life, labor for paro i­ pation and mobiUty, labor market discrimiH~­ hon, and labor marke t co ntracts a nd work incenti es. Prerequisit : Econ. 201Q a nd 2020, or Econ. 800, and junior standing. 663. Economic Insecurity. (3) . Cross-listed as Cen.m. 603 . er~onal econ mic insecurity, such a unemplo ment, old age, hea lth care, di ­ ablement, and I!IT tic economic fluctuations. Includes costs and bene fit. of go em m nt acti n to aid in me ting such insecUIities . Pre­ requisites; Eeon. 201Q, 2020, or 800, or instruc­ tor's onsent; junior standing. 671. Economic Gmwth and Development. (3). Survey of I ading growth theories, e.mphasiz­ ing the pro esses of development and capital formation in de.veloped and underdeveloped econo mi ' . Analyzes determina n ts o f rea l income, resource allocation, investment cri te­ ria, balance of paymen t prob lems, national policies, and related topics within th ' frame­ work. Prerequisite: Econ. 201Q, 202Q, or 800, and junior standing. 672. Inte.rnational Economics and Business. (3). A survey of the economic foundation of international trade, fi nance, and inve tment. lJlCludes foreign exchange markets, re ional integrati n, trade theories and instrument , U . . trade policie and tr ties, multinational ompani , iJ.nmigration, as well as differen es in cuJtur, I, po litical , and economic systems. Inclu des cu rrent even . Pre requ isi tes; Eron. 201Q, 2020, or 800, nd junior standing. t'74. Intemational Finance. (3). Cra s-Iisted as Fin . 625. A study of th!' in ternational financial ,1nd monetary system, emphasizi ng currency marke ts. Exami nes market instruments and techniques, includi-ng ynthetic and derivative securities and their application to management of curren y risk in in ternational tTade a nd finan e. Pr T quisites: Fin 340, Ec n . 201 Q, 202Q or 800, and junior standing. 688. Urban Economics. (3). Cross- listed as P Adm. 688. A 'urvey of the economic structur and pro blems o f u rba n areas on bo th the microecono mic: nd macroeCOfl mi levels. Stresses th application of regional ec nomic analysib in the s tudy ot urban areas as conom­ ic regions. Prerequisites; Econ. 201Q and 202Q or Econ. 800, and junior standin . 692. Group Studies in Economics. (1·31. Repea table for credit with departmental con­ sent. Prerequisite; junior standing. 702. Mathematical Methods in Economics. (3). Introduces mathematic.al tools that are spe­ cially useful in econornics, econometr ics, and finance. Includes a review of d ifferential and integral calculus , an introducti n to ma trix algebra, and various constraln~ optimization and econom i modeling techniques. Empha­ sizes co nomie applications and mod li ng. Prerequisite ; Econ. 201 Q, 202Q, or 800, and Math. 144 or equivalent, and junior stan ing. 731.. Applied Econometrics I. (3). A study of regression techniques including logit / pr bit analysis through busine 'S, finance, aod eco­ nornics exarnples. Reviews lhe fundamentals of statisti and co ers practica l mooel build­ ing, d ta c Ileetion, use of tatistical softwa re packages, interpreta tion of regression results, and various d iagnostic tesls. P r r qui sites : Econ. 231 and junior standing. 740. Monetary Pwblems and POlicy. (3). An examination of his torical and c(mtemporary monetary issues in th conte t of the global economy. Prerequisites: Econ. 201Q, 202Q, or 800; 340; and junior standing. 750. Workshop in Economics. (1-4). Prere<.lu i­ site: junior standing. 765. Public SectoI Economics. (3). Cross-listed as P. Ad m. 765. An analysiS of fi scal ins titu­ tions and decision rnaking in the public ectOT f he American economy, bud get planning and execution, taxati 11, debt, and fisca l policy. Prerequisite: Econ. 2010, 202Q, r 800, and junior staDding, or in truetor's consent. Courses for G.raduate Students Only 800. Analysis of Economic Theory. (3) . An intensive analysis of micro- and macroeconom­ ic principles. Not for graduate credit in the MA program in economics. PrereqUls it >: depart­ mental consent. 801. Macroeconomic Analysis. (3). An in­ dep th examination of contemporary macroeco­ nomic theories. lncludes econom ic g rowth, short run classi I and KeyneSian theories of fluctuati ns, Real-Business-Cyde theory, open e onomy models lnflation, and monetary poli ­ cy. PrereqUisite; Econ. 301. 802. Micmeconomic Analysis. (3). An analysi of the nsumer, the firm, and competi tive and noncompetitive markets using ma th matical models. Prerequisites; Econ. 302. 803. Analysis of Business Conditions and Forecasting. (3). An intensive s tudy of rese rch m thod ologies and fo recdting for rea l lif~ busines decision m, king. Covers formulati n of resear h ques tiOns, speCification of models, collection of time series and survey data, appli­ cations of forecasting techniques, and interpre­ t.a tion MId communication of the results . Pre­ requis it ; Econ . 800 or t!(1uivalent and One! semester of introductory statistics . 804. Manage.rial Economi&:s. (3) . A survey of lheorehcal and analyt i a l tools of e onomiesi that are useful in dec.ision m ing by man ­ agers. Prerequisites; Econ. 201Q 202Q or 800, and one courSe in calculus. 831. Applied Econometrics II . (3). I.n troduces th maximum likelihood estimntion and the mell1 ds of mom n ts e t:ialation technique. Over SUR, panel da ta, simul taneous equa­ tions , VAR, nnd ARCH / ARCH model. Em phaSiZes the ti m eri 5 model bui ld ing practic d in fin , nee, nd macroeconomics. Pre­ requisites; Eon. 731 and 702 or eqUivalent. 847. Speculative Markets. (3). Cross-listed as Fin. R22. Analysis of th.e mark ts for specula­ tive securities such as futures, p tions and comm difies . Evalu3t s underlying theories explaining speculative markets in which such securities are traded. Discus trading s tratc­ gie 5U h as hedging <)nd arbitrage. Prerequi­ site; Fin. 84U or equivalent 861. SeminilT in Contemporary Labor Issues. (3). An intensiv analy is of contemporary problems in the fi e ld of labor The sped fic nature of the problems is determined by the interest of those enrolled in the course. Repeat­ able fo r credit with departmental consent. Pre· requisite: instructor's consent. 865. State and local Government Finance. (3). Cross-Ii ted as Pol. S. 865 and P. Adm. 1)65. An analysis of state and local government expen­ diture and revenue system , with an intr duc­ Ii n to state and local financial administration. Prerequisites: Econ. 765 or instru tor'S consent. 870. International Finance and Investme nt. (3) . Cross-listed as Fin. 820. A case study of tile contemporary and busin S5 related issues of international fmance and in esbnent. Includes fo reign exchange markets, uropelln integra­ tion, In t m ational trade organiza ti ons and monetary sy terns, and emerging m, rkets. Pre­ requisite: one of tl1 follOwing course~: Eon. (,72 or 74, Mgmt. 561 , or Fin. 625. 891. Directed Study. (1-3). Lndividual study of various aspe ts < nd problems of economlCS. Repea table fo r crerut with departmental con­ sent. Prerequisi te; graduate s ta n lng and departmental onsent. 892 . Group Studks in Economics. (1-3 ). Repeatable fo r cred it. Prerequisite: departmen· tal consent. 896. Thesis. (1-2). Entrepreneurship Deparbnentof~aiketing and Entrepreneurship Lower-Division Courses 160Q. Introduction of Entrepreneurship. (3). An introd uctory course designed not only to fan1i1iarize the s tudent with the world of small busin ess bu t a lso to a na lyze the p rso nal s treng ths and wea knesse as they re late to launching an ntrcpren urial career. Consider' abl ililention is given to the elementary con­ cep ts of plannlllg , fin anci ng, s ta rtin", and managing new usin '. 0 BARTON SCHOOL OF BUSINESS/ ENlREPRENEURSHIP 61 250. E[\treprenew:ship and Personal Enter­ pri/;e. (3). Demons trates tha t th e ascri.bed attributes and personal qualI ties that tradih.on­ allv have characterized the t>n trepreneur (ini­ tiative, investment. innova tion, commitment, and risk-taking) can be learned by anyone who seeks personal inteUectual fu lfillmen t and/ or business success. Knowledge of entrepreneuri­ al principles and processes are invaluable in any academic discipline as wen as for those in quest of deSired career goals. Upper-Division Courses 320. Principles of Entrepreneurship. (3) . A fundamentals course which p rovides a brond overview (If the entrepTeneu.rship discipline. Includes entrepreneurial history, its U)eoretical iounda tlOns, p rinciples of venture creation, development, management, and final exit / hal­ vesti ng o f the firm. The s tart-u p process indudes pre-s tart-up research, de termination of ownership , and final preparation before the openi ng and inilial launch of the business . Individual processes explo red in clud e entrepreneurial mentality and attitudes ilnd nrgani zational behaviors SUCll ~ s managing innovation, dlange, and growth in a rapidly growing fi rm . Includes women and minority entrepreneurial issues, international entre­ preneurs hip, TQM, and family business issues. Prerequisi te: junior standing or insrructor's consent. 420. Developing a New Venture Marketing Plan. (3). Cross-listed as Mkt. 420. Emphasizes the tools u~ed in the identification of opportu­ nity and ~ubsequent development of the bus i­ ness concept by ei ther startll1g one's own busi­ ness or by purchasing an existing business or a iranchise. The business will be researched and developed to the point of la tmching the new venture. Develops a marketiIlg plan Lha t posi­ tions the ven ture to achieve a com petit ive advantage in the marke t place. Includes both primary and seconda ry research to estimate m,1rket potenti al, competi ti veness in a given geographical market place, analysis of indus­ try trend s, and e nvi.ronmental threats and opportunities. The analysis results in the cre­ ative strategy and tactics for the venture's launch. Prerequisites: Entre. 32U, Mkt. 300, or concurrent enrollment, or instructor's consent. 481. Cooperative Education. (1-2'. 491. Independent Study in EntreprenelUShip. (l-S). Offered CrINer only. Oosed to graduate credit. Prerequisi tes; junior standing and 2.750 GPA in entrepreneurship cOUJses . 492. In le01shjp in Entrepreneurship. (1-3). Oiiered CrINer only . Prerequisites : junior standing, 2.750 CPA in en t'repreneurship, and departmental consent. Courses f Ol GraduateJUndergraduate Credit 606. New Product Marketing. (3), Cross-listed d5 Mkt. 606. Addresses identifying, eval ua ting, developing, and commercializing new prod­ Ucts Within both sma ll er and larger firms. Explores the role of the product/brand manag­ er, it person w ho often acts as an in terna l entrepreneur. Prerequisite: Mkt. 300. 608. Selling and Sales force Managemenl. (31. ~ross-listeq all Mkt 608. An analysis of curren t ehavloral COncepts of personal selling and the problems and pol icies involved in mmagin g a sales force. Prerequisite: Mid. 300. 610. Short-Term Financial Management. (3). Cross-lisled as Fin. 610. An introduction to shor t-term financia l m allagement. Includes bank bala nces, compensatiDn and pilyment systems, casb management systcm~, rorporate liqu.idi ty, receivables and paya bles manaf'e­ ment, inventories, and international short-term finance. For entrepreneurship majOl'S. Prereq­ uisite: Fin. 340 and junior s tanding 620. Growing and Managing an Entre­ preneurial Firm. (3). Fowses on the organiza­ tion , operation, markelirlg, and financial man­ agement of an on-going entrepreneurinl Hrm. Emphasizes the strategic managl·m ent of growth associated with a rapidl y cllangin business, as distinguished from "sm wiili departmental consent. 432. Contempllrary Issues in Banking. (3) . A survey of contemporary issues facing the U.S. commercial banking system . Content varies according to the timeliness of various Issues. ot only for those planning a career in bank­ ing but for anyone interested in CUrTl!llt trend and i~ues in brmking. Prerequisilt!; Fill 340. 440. Financial Management 11. (3). A study of long- term fina ncing decisions and financial ... 62 planning. Also incl tldes working capital man­ agement, merger.; and acquisitions, and inter­ national fi nancial m,1Mgement. Prerequisites: Fin . 340. 481. Cooperative EducatioJl. (1-2). 49L Independent Study_ (1-6). Offered CrlNCr only. Closed to graduate credit. Prerequisites: junior standing and 2.750 GP A in finance. 492. Internship in Finance. (1-3). Offered CrlNCr only . Prereq Uisites: junior stilnding. 2.7 0 CPA in finance and departmental con­ sent. Courses for GraduatelUndergraduate Credit 610. Short-Tenn Financial Management. (3). Cross-Iiste a' Entre. 610. n !ntToduch n to shor t·term financia l management. In cl udes ba nk balances, compensation and paym n l sy tern , !'ash management systems, corporat ' li quid ity, receivables and payables manage­ ment, inventories, and international shor t-term finance. Pr r quisite: Fin. 340 and junior stand­ ing. 612. Capital Budgeting. (3). A ·tndy of th planning and c ntrol of capital expenditures. Explores th use f vannus decisi n ru l for maltiJlg accep t/ r ject decisions o n projects Includes the study of pr ject ca h flows ilnd analy is, mutually exclusive projects, and the choice of the disco unt ra t • ?rer quisite: In. 340 and junior standing. 620. {nvestments. (3). An 3.l.Hllysis of invest­ ment risks, financial in formation, and industry characteristics. Examines corporate, govern­ ment, mtmicipal, and fi nancial institution seru­ ritil..'s and other investment types. Present per­ sonal por tfolio construction, supervision, and management. Prerequisites: Fin. 340 and junior standlng. 621. Security Analysis and Portfolio Manage­ ment. (3). Comprehen ive ,;tudy o( m thod of analyzing miljor types of ecurities, including market behavior analysts. Explores the formu­ lation f investment objectives, the design of portfolios for classes of institutional and indi­ vidual investors and portfolio theory. Prereq­ u' ites: Fin. 340 nd junior stand ing. 622. Futures and Options Markets. (3). Pre­ sents an overvic of the future and options markets. Discusses basic theoretica l concept as well as the prac tical issues of hedging and spe ulating in these markets. PrerequiSites: Fin. 340 and junior l;tanding. 625. International Financia! Management. (3). Cross-listed as Econ. 674. A study of the inter­ national fin ncia l wd monetary system, emphasizin currenc markets. Also examines market in trumen and techniques, including synthetic and derivative securities and their appli tion tll managernc.n t of currenc risk in int na tional trade and finance. Prerequisites: Fin. 340; Eeon. 201Q, 202Q , or 800; and junior standing. 630. Financial Institutions. (3). A study 0 the managenl(~nt, structure, regulation, and opera­ tiolUi of fi rms in th financia l services industry a nd the marke t. in w hi h they l)perate. Includes in -dep th a na lysi of c mmercia l banks, savings and loans, credit UlUOns, mutu­ al unds, in urance companies, in ves tmen t companies, and other firms in this ind ll5try. Prerequisite: Fin. 340 and junior standing 631. Money and Capital Markets. (3). A study of domestic and inte rnational finanCIal mar­ kets , instrument , and institu tion - a nd the determiDants f the generoll vcl and tructure of mterest rates nd seCtlrity pr ices. Also cov­ ers IllBnagemen t of in terest rates and portfolio risk u ing a variety of techniques. Prereqtl i­ sites: Fin. 340 and JUllior stand ing. 632. Commercial Bank Management. (3). A study of bank asset and liability management. Also explores the III tern a] organization of m­ mercia! ban ,current problems and recent innovatioru; in commercial banking. Prerequi­ sites: Fin. 340 and junior standing. 660. Cases in Finance. (3). An exploration of the problems and operations tor which the financial officer i responsible, emphasizing controversial i!Spetts of financial analysis. This is the apstone course in the finance major and should be taken at the end of a finance pro­ gram Prerecluisites: Fin . 340, 440, six h un. of accoun ti ng, or departmental consent, and junior standing. 690. Seminar in Selected Topics. (1-6). Repeat­ able with departmental consent. Prerequisites: Fin. 340 and junior standing. 750. Workshop in Finance. (1-4). Prerequisites: Fin. 340 and jUJuor standing. Courses for Graduate Students Only 810. Short-term financial Management. (3). Pro ides state-of-the-art information in short­ term fin, n wi managemenL Discusses how cash moves across internationa l borders and within foreign eountrie and the influence of electron ic comm u nica tio ns on s hort-term financial management Prerequisite: Pi11. 840 or equivalent. 812. Capital Budgeting. (3). A tudy of the organiza tion and operation of thl'! capital bud­ geting system. Explores problems in par tial decentralizati n and in comparability of es ti­ mates of funds flow . In ludes contemporary methods of trea ting uncertainties and con­ 5train~ and the ap lication of programming techniques. Als " explain the determination of appropriate discoun t rales. Prerequisite: Fin. 840 or equivalent. 820. International Finance and Investment. (3). Cross-list d as Econ. 870. Case study of the ontempora ry and business-related issues of international finance and investm nt. lncl udes foreign exchange m rket , European in tegra­ ti on , i.nterna tiona l Lrade organizations 6 or instructor' s consent. 668. Compensation. (3) . Approaches to com­ pensation processes in (Jrganiza tions. Discuss­ ~ job eva luation techniques, wage level and wage structUTe detennination. individual per­ f"rlnan ce .lnalysib, individual wage rate deci ­ , ions. incentive plans. and benefits. Considers the ! eg~Constraints on compensation prac­ tices. l' >rt!lju igite: HRJvr 466 or ins tTuctor's CtlI1$ l'I1t. 669, Training and DeVelopment (3). Analyzes the trai ning !;mcnl. learning objectives. learning theo!)" instrucborol methods and techniques. Jnd evaluation of training effectiveness. Pre­ r~quis i tc: HRM 466 or instructor's consent. 690, Seminar in Selected Topics. (1-5). I{epeat­ ~ble with departmental consent Prerequisite: HRtv! 466 or instructor'S consent. 750. Workshop in Human Resou.rces. (l-4). PrueCjuisi te: junior standing, Courses (or Graduate Students DnJy S67. Seminar in Personnel Administration. (1): !\n in-depth study a.nd analysis of several ' rIt lcul und/or ma jor current problems in liUll1an resuurces nnd a review of significant k rature, The direction of the course C'Ould be r.::!etmin l:d by the in terests of the class . Pre­ uISlte: llRM -ib6. 868. Wage and Salary Administration. (3). A study (I f job ~va illation and other pToced ures that lead to the devcJopment of a sound wage and salary structure, Prerequisite: HRM 466 or instructor's consent. 890. Semina.. in Special Topics. (1-5). Repeat­ abJe wi th departmental consent. 891. Directed Studies. (1-5). Prerequ isi te ; departmen tal consent, 895-896. Thesis. (2-2J. International Business Department of Management Upper-Division COUl'Ses 390C. International Purchasing. (1-3). Cross­ listed as OS 39OC. Repeatable with departmen­ tal consent. 491. International Business Independent Study. (1-5). OfIered CrINCr only. Prerequi­ sites: junior standing and 2.750 CPA 492. International Business Internship. (1-3) . ffeTed CrINer only. Preregu isHes: junior standing. 2,750 GP A. COUJ'Se5 for GraduatelUndergraduate Credit 600. IntemalionaJ Management. (3). Studies manAgement concepts and pmctices applkable to business operations in an international set­ ting. Examines a wide range of problems asso­ ciated wilh business operations across national boundaries. Discw;ses cultural differences, lan­ guage barriers. nationalism. protectionism, technology transfer, and trade polides. Prereq­ uisites: Mgmt 360 or ~oncurren t enTollment and junior standing, 601. International Marketing. (3). Cross-listed as MkL 601 . Problems and procedures of mar­ keting ill foreign cou.ntries. Includes the effects of foreign cultures and marketin g systems on the design of marketing programs. Prerequi­ si tes: Mkt. 300 and junior st.mding Legal Assistant Department of Finance, Real Estate, and Decision Sciences Lower-Division Courses 230. Introduction to Paralegallilm. (2). The new role concept of the legal assistant in the practice of law. An inquiry into what paral gals do. types of paralegal employment, educa­ tion and licensure, profes~ionaJ ethics. autho­ rized and UIlauthorized practice of law, and an intToduction to paralegal skills. Prerequisite: B. Law IJOQ, co ncurrent enrollment or depart­ mental consent. 231A. Legal Research and Writing 1. (3). An introduction LO the tools and techn iques 01 legal research. emphasizing the basic analytical skills. In t.roduces the s tudent to the compo­ nents of a l aw library through a variety uf assigned problems, some of which culmil1ate in the writing of a research memorandum or b rief Prerequisite: admiss ion to the Lega l Assistant Program or departmental consent. 232. Legal Aspects of Business OrganwtioD~. (3). The law of business orHanizations empha­ sizing the practice aspects related to formlltion of operation ()f proprietorships, pa.rmerships and corpora tions. Includes draft ing aspects rela ted to em ployment agreements, partner- hip agreements. and corporate docuulents.. Prerequisite: admission to the Lega l Assistnnt Program or departmental consenl. 233. Litigation 1. (3). An introduction to the dvil litiga tian process emphasjzing the prac­ ti~e aspects associated w ith a civi l action . Includes CIvil procedure, preparation and use of pleadings. disco\'ery. law of l!vidence and appe~ls. Prerequisite: admission to the Legal Assistant Program or departmental consent. 234. Estate Administration. (3). The law intestate succession. wills. llate briefs. I'rllT quL~it : admi.s ion t the Leg-il A ismnt Pl"llgram or departmt!n­ ta l coment and Legal 231A. 243. Property Law. (3). An introduction to the principle nf pr pt!rty law emphasizing the practice aspects of rea l eslale transactions. Pr requisite: IIdmi . n to thc Legal As_ l<;tanl Pro­ gram or d.epartm ntal C rl!>tml. 244. legal Assistant Computer Skills. (3). An mtroduclion to uUlil.ati n of mJeroc mputer by IL!ga1 il.'Uistanh; Emphasize word p ess­ 109, litigation support, and computer-a.tded r eaTCh with Lexls or Westlaw, Prerequi ite: Leg ·tudents to current issues, concepts, and funClions of busln and its environment. 190. Selected Topics. (1-3). Repeattlbl wilh departmental ron 1!I'It. Upper-Oivi ion Courses 360. Management and Organizational13ehav­ ior. (3). An vervicw \)f ncept£" theorie~, and practices that apply to the management of work organiz.ations. lnc1udl!'i organizational goals, corpor Ie strategy, structure, d ision m. king, I adershlp, motivation, communica­ tion, group dynamiCS. organizatHlMI t hlUlge, Jnd lh inrelThlho[wJ Jimen ion of business. Prerequisite: junior ·tanding. 362. Managing People in Orgaruzalions. (3)_ 51udj why mdividuals behave the way they do in ofe,taniution . Di cu s concepts such as personality, motivation, group dynamics, conilict, leadership, !lnd organizationa l dynamic , ~mphasizing developing kill - to manage behavior for maximum organizational clIectiven(.'SS. Prerequisite: jUJIior standing. 390. Sp cial Group Studies In Management (1-3). Repealable with departmental consent. 430, Business, Governmenl, and Society. (3) . An examin tion of the environments in which business operates: economic. political, udal/cul lural. technological, IIltemaLional, ecological, and legal Inc1udi!!> business-gov­ ernment relations, l:ioda l re,,-ponsibili ty, busi­ ness ethiCS, go etnment regulation, legal rrameworJ.., and international business. Prtrreq­ uisitc: jUJIior sianding. Completion of Mkt. 300, Fm. 340, OS 350 and Mgml. 360 ill strongly rec­ ommended . 462_ Leading and Motivating. (3). A study o f theories oI human motivation and adaptation )f th • lbeari to prograrT15 in organizatioru.. Probes concepts of authority and delegation and analyzes leadership styles. Prerequl~ it : MgmL 360 r concurrent enrollment Mld junior tanding. 4 4. Communicating Effectively in Organiza­ lion. (3). An examiMtion o f the d esign of organizational communication sy tem • Includes an introductIOn to communication mud I and the analy:;' f th inrerperbonaI com munication procest;. Prerequisites: Mgmt. 360 r concurrent enrollment and juniur tand­ ing. 481. Cooperative Education, (1-2). 4.91. Independent Study. (1-5). Offered CrlNCr only. lased to graduate credit. Pr eq­ uisites: junior standing and 2.750 GPA in management. 492. IntemslUp in Management. (l-31. Offered CriNer only . Prer quisites: jWlior standing, 2.750 PA in managem.mt, and departmental consent. Courses for Graduate/Undergraduale Credit 561. Introduction to International Economics and Business. (3). Cross-listed as Econ. 672. A urvey of the economic fOUJIda ti os of interna­ tional trade and investment, Studies interna­ tiona l trade, theory, ilnd policy (the interna­ tional economy), then explores the operation ' f the multinational firm within that environ­ ment. Prerequisites: ECOT . 201Q and junior smnding. 660. Designing Effective Organizations. (3). Studies how w rk and workers can be tru ­ tured to best accomplish the goals of an organi­ zation. Explores th interplay of design, tech­ nology, trategy, and environment, and dis­ cusses frameworks that promote growth, mar­ ke t responsiveness, innovation , and global competitiven{'ss. Emphasizes skills necessary for managing hange for maximum effective­ ness f individuals, work &1'( ups, and the orga­ nization 5 a whole. Prerequisit s: Mgmt. 360 or concurrent enrollment And jUJIior standing, 661. Coaching, Developing, and Mentoring. (3) . Manager and leaders of all kinds are Judged not on what they do but upon ow well their subordinates perionn. Course d vel­ op po itive, supportive management skills for helping individuals and groups achieve their potential CllVets the impormnce (If identifying and hiring superior performers, orienting them t the group, coaching and developing subor­ dinates to their full -t,maintaining motivation at high levels, and merging individuals into a c hesive group. Prerequisites: Mgmt. 360 or concurrent enrollment and junior tnnding, 662. Managing Workplace Diversity. (3). Modem organization face the challenge of managing employees w ith diverse back­ groUJIds and talen to provide products and services to diverse cust mers. Cou rse exam­ ines work force diversily from the perspective oi maximizing its benefits to group and organi­ zational effectiveness, including developing skills 10 facilitate the" nstructive resolution of confilct, encouraging ooperation and leam­ work and enhancing identification with th work unit. Prerequisites: Mgmt. 360 or concur­ rent enrollment and juruor sl, and values, etc., rna'\, l>e analvzed in depth. Prerequisite: Mgmt. Soior departmental consent. 885. Advanced Strategic Management. (31. An ,'llillvsis 01 business problems from a strategic pCTtipectiye. Builds on prior course work to focus on a fi rm's abili ty to develop a sustain­ "bIt' l'ompetitive adva.ntage. Finns studied rep­ re5eni iI broad range of manufacturing and ser­ vice, gkll>aJ and domestic, entrepreneurial and matun.' issues. PrereqlJisite: to be taken during IJ ~ t semell!er of student's program, or depart­ mental Lun~ent . 886. Srminar in Research Methodology. (3). A , lud y of concepts and procedures in the design and perfl1rmance of research. 890. Seminar in Special Topics. (1-3). Repeat­ able with departmental consent. 891. Directed Studies. (1-5) . Prerequisite: departmenta l l:Onsent. 893. Special Project in ManagemenL (1-4). A Sp.:cilll project including original case research, , upcrvisl.'d internships or fie ld research. Pre­ reqUIsite: approval of the MS Committee. Open on ly to MS in business degree candJ­ datI'S. 895-896. Thesis. (2·2). Management Information Systems Department of Finance, Real Estate, and Decision Scien ces Lower-Division Course 200. Fundamentals of Programming and Pro­ gramming Languages. (3). Il1troduces comput­ er progra mm ing concepts, structured pro­ gramming techniques, and progranuning lan­ guages Starts with an overview of computer architl'c ture and introduces computer p ro­ grammtnE: In machine language, aloSembly lan­ guage, third generation languages (BASIC, P.Jscnl. C), and fourth generillion language (Vi' uil! BASIC, DELPHJ ) Programming pro­ Jects ~'lTl phasi7e modification (maintenance) of existing business application programs. Pre­ reguisilo!: Acct. 260 or CS 150. 250. rund ame n tals of Data Structures, Fi le Design, and Access. (3). Introduces data struc­ turing ~oncepts necessary for build ing busi­ 11 ~,;, application systems . Utilizes file design and access applications as the vchicle to teach trad itiol1 i1 i concepts of in-memory data struc­ hu-E><. PrClgrammmg projects employ third gcn­ eration languages. including COBOL, as well all fourth generation languages. Studies com­ pu ter file organizatiorL~ ranging from sequen­ tia l to Indexed seq uen tial. Prerequisite: MIS 200. Upper-Division Course 300. Data Communications and Computer Networks. (3). Ta kes a problem-solving approach to introducing data communications and computer networking concepts. Techn ical and manageria l issues In prOViding video con­ fenmcing, Electronic Data tnterchange (EDn, etting a bulletin board system, J world wide web site, a local area network (LAN), remote access to a LAN, and internet-working LANs vcr i.I wide area network provide the back­ drop for Introducing data commurucation con­ cepts (OSI), standards C)(.400, SNMP), proto­ cols (TCP/IP), and technologies (ATM). Pre­ requisite: MlS 250. 350, Systems Analysis and Design. (3). intro­ duces various methodologies for systems a.nal­ ysis, des'gn, and implementahon . ExamInes appUcation development in the context of the overall MIS Master Planning effort; examine techniques related to business process reengi­ neering. Uses a real-life project as the vehide to put into practice tc)ois and techniques relat­ ed to in terviewing, cost/benefit analysis, com­ puter-aided software engineering, software project management, and system documenta­ tion. Prerequisite: MIS 300. 4-81- Cooperative Education. (1-3). Offered CrlNCr only. Prerequbitt:s: 2.50 grad~ point average In MIS, junior slandmg, and depart­ mental consent. 491. Directed Study. (1-3). individual study for CrlNCr only. Prerequisites: 2.75 grade point average in MIS, junior standing, and depart­ mental consen L 492. Internship in MIS. (1-3). Offered Cr/NCr only. Prerequisites: 3.00 grade point average in MIS, senior standing, and departmental con­ sent. Courses for GraduatelUndergraduate Credit 600 . Da tabase Management Systems. (3l. Introduces various methodologies for concep­ tual data modeling including Entity-Relation­ ship Data Modeling and Objec t-Oriented Database Design. Covers relational database management systems, the SQL standurd, and data administration is!lues. Students obtain hands-on development with SQL server:; in a client/server environment In a reqlJired database programming project. Cover; elec­ tronic commerce LT.lrL'KIclion processing, data warehousing, data mining, and distributed database managemenl. Prerequisite: M1S 350. 650. Problem Solving, Decision Support, and Expert Systems. (3). InLToduces the design and implementation of decision support systetns (OSS). Emphasize!> problem solving .:md deci­ sion modeling techniques pertinent to repre­ sentative problems in different business func­ tional areas including accounting, finance, human resources, management, marketing, and productions. Studenl<; utillz~ various end­ user tools, including 4GLs, spreadsheets, sta­ tistical software, DSS generators, expert system shells, .md EIS software to undertake several DSS Implem entation projects. Prerequis ite : MIS 600. 696. Management of the IS funchOD. (3). Address(!.\< the issues of lDiUUlging lhe in forma­ tion systems (IS) functio n. IncludE!!> the role of IS il S a corporate entity, organizing the IS department, 15 personnel management, 15 pro­ ject management, and the role of IS as a user­ support entity. PrereqUIsite: M1S 65() Marketing Department of Marketing and Entrepreneurship Lower-Division Course 190. Selected Topics. (1-3). Repeatable with depil.rtml!l1taJ consent. Upper-Division Courses 300. Marketing. (3). A description and analysis of the U.s. marketing ~y~tcm and an inwstlga­ tion of the factors affecting management of th major policy areas o f marketing in the f inn Prercqui'ting business or a franchise. The business will be researched ilnd developed to the poin t of launching the ne~ venrure. Develops a mar­ keting plan that positions the \'enture to achie\'e a competitive advantage in the market place. Includes both pnmary and secondary 66 reseaTI"h to estimate markel potentiaL c:ompetl­ tivene!;:; In a given gJ2Oy;raphica1 market place, analysiS oilndustry tremls" nd environmental threats find opportunities. The analy is results in the creative trategy and tactics for the ven­ ture' s tauncil Prerequi ites; En tre. 320, Mkt. 300, aT concurrent en rollment, or instructor' cQnsent. 481. Cooperative Education. (1-2). 491 . tndependent Study. 1-5). Offere for Cr/Ner ooly. Clo d to graduate credit. Pre­ requisites: junior stand ing and 2,750 GPA In markeling. 492. lntemship in Marketing, (1-3). Offered for CrfNer only. rrerequisites: junior standing, 2750 GPA in marketing, ilnd departmental consent. Course for GraduatelUndergraduate Credit 601. lntemationaJ Marketing. (3). Cross-listed fB 601 . Problems and procedures of market­ ing in foreign countTles. lnc.ludes the effects of foreign cul tures and marketing systems n the design of marketlng pr gl'ilffiS. Prerequisites: Mkt. 300 and junior Btanding, 604. Di tribution Management. (3). Astudy of all areas involved 11'1111 the dis tribution of a firm ' product or t:fvices Pocuses on such i sues a!I lhe development of a firm's m,lTk t­ ing channels Jnd its relations h.ips willi whole­ ~alers and retailers as welJ as the management of the firm 's storage facilitie , inventory con­ trol. procedures, and sh Ipping faci lltics. Pre­ requ i~ite ; Mkl. 30n and junior standing. 606. New Produd Marketing. (3) . Cro s-listed Entre. 606. Addresses identifying, evalua t­ ing , devd oping, ,lnd commercialiZing new products within both smalJe.r and larger firms. Explores Ule role of lh product/brand mAnag­ er, J per o n whu often act a5 an internal entrepreneur. PrereqUIsite: Mkt. 300. 607. Promotion Management. (3). An analysis of all issues involved with the promotion of an o rganization and .i ts product OT services. Deals with the development of advert isin g campillgIlS, management of the personal sales force, develorm nl o f specia l promoti onal activities, and management of public rela ti,ms. Prerequisites: Mkt. 300 and iunior standing. 608. Selling and Sales Force Management. (3). Cross-listed as Entre. 608. An analysis of cur­ rent behavioral concepts of personal selling and the problems and policies involved. in managing a s. les force. Prerequisites: Mkt. 300. 609. Marketing Programs. (3). A study of all the aspect~ of the marketing mix thll t are inte­ grated to make an effective md coordinated marke ti ng program . Prerequi ites: Mkt. 300 and s ix additional hours of marketing 690. Seminar in Selected Topics. (1-5). Repeat­ able wi th departmental consent. Prerequjsite: Tunior standing. 750. Workshop in Marketing. (1-4). Prerequi­ site: jUnior standing. Courses for Graduate Students Only 800. Marketing System . (3). An internive ana­ lytica l introdueLion to the comblOation of ins ti­ tutions thdl I: mprise the overa ll ma rketing system. Also presen.ts the marketing function J major ub yst ll't withi n the individual business firm. 80L Marketing Management. (3). Develops an under ·tanding of the difference between cl s les/markehng department and a marketing orienta Lion Emphasizes the integral role 0 a marketing rientation throughout ~he modern organization. Prerequisite: Mkt. 800 or equiva­ lent. S03. Marketing Analysis. (3). The application ()f the scientific method t th.e ~olutlon of mar­ keti ng p roble ms. PrerequiSite: Mkt. 800 or equivalent 805. Consume r Decision Proce ses. (3). An examination of different aspects of the behav­ ior of consumers and of the factol"'l tha t help explain their behavior. lncludes an analysis of current cOnl:epts and modeb. Prerequisite' Mkt. 800 or departmental consent. 807. Services and Nonprofit Marketing. (3). Examines the characteristics of commercial and nonprotit ervices that pose unique marketing challenges for these types of organ izations. Prerequisite: Mkt. 800 or equjvalent. 612. Introduction to Total Quality Manage­ ment. 13). Cross-listed as Entre. 812 and Mgml. 12. rn troduce5 the p h ilo ophy M qua lity improvement and compares/ contrasts these views w ith traditional management thought. Also introduces the basic components of t.he quality impf()vemcnt prace Includes appli­ ca tion exercises in quality improvement teci1­ niques and experi nee with team concept. 890. Se.minar in Special Topics. (1-3). Repeat­ able with departmental consent 891. Directed Studies . (l-SI. Prerequisi te: departmental consent. 893. Special Project In Marketing. (1-4). A spe­ Cia l pro ject induding original. case research, supervised internships, or field research Pre­ requisite: ap mval of the MS Committee . Open only to MS in business degree candi­ dates . 695-896. Thesis. (2-2). Real Estate Department of Finance, ReaJ E tate, and Decision Sciences Lower-Division Course 190. Selected Topics. (1-3). Repeatable with departmental cornen!. Upper-Division Courses 310. Principles of Rea) E tate. (3). Economic, legal, and physical characteristics of rea l esta te, Ove.rview of real estate, including contracts, deeds, title a~ urance, market a naly i~, appraisal, brokera~e, mortgage f ina ncing. invesbn ent, and property management princi­ ples. Prerequisite: junior standing 390. Special Group Studies in Real Estate. (1­ 3). Repeatable with departm ntal consen t 4.38. Real E tate Law. (3). Laws and reguJa­ tjon affecting real estate ownfCrsh ip and use, indudins ownership iflterests, conveyancing, mortgages, ti t l a:>surance, iandl(lrd-t nan! relation lups, and public and private land-use controls. Prcrequi itc juniur standing 481. Cooperative. Education. (1-2). 491. I n dependent Study. (1-5). Offered CrINCr only, Closed to ~duate credlt l'reret"l­ uisites: junior tanding and 2750 GPA in real estate cours ' 492. Internsnlp in Renl Estate. (1-3). Offered CriNer only rerequi ites: juni or standing, 2.750 CPA in real ' tate, and departmen l' ~ l consent. Courses for Graduate/Undergraduate Credit 611. Real Estate Finance. (3). Real estate fi.nancmg i ns ~rumen ts, insotu tions, trad itiona l and ('rea tive iinanctng tech niqu s. Risk ilnaly­ sis, mor!gag~ financing and t nderwriting, pri­ mary and secl1ndary mortgage markets. Pre­ req UISIte: Fin. 340 RE majors should have compl ted RE 310. 614. Real E tate Appraisal. (3). Analysi.s f ac­ tors thill create real estate value. Cos t, sales .:omparison, and apit<\llzed income approach­ es to market value. Highest and best use analy­ sis, Prerequisite: E :nQ. 618. Rea! Estate lnve tme.nt Analysi . (3). Equity inve tor decision criteria, institution,lI and ownership entity investment constraints, fblandal leverage oppMtuni ties, cash flow analysis, and creative income ta strategic;; . Prerequisi te; Fin. 340. RE majors shou ld have completeJ RE3 1ll. 619. Urban Land Development. (3). A hancb­ on course t familiarize students with All aspects of land development, includIng supply and demand ,1nalysis, site election, feasibi li ty ana lysis , development finan cmg, cash-fl ow budgeting, and marketing stra tegies. rre.rE'qlli­ site; RE 310 or 611 or 618. 690. Seminar in Selected Topics. (1-5). Repeat­ able with departmenta l consent. Prerequisite: junior s tandrng. 750. Workshop in Real Estate. (1-4). PrereqW­ ite: junior standing. Courses for Graduate Students Only 810. Real Estate Feasibility Analysis. (3). Tlw­ ory and practice of analyzing the fea Ihll rty " f both new construction and redevelopmen t of income-produc ing project . Appro taken. For s tudents who entered tile University p rior to Fall 1994, courses in the Under­ gradllate Cata log and the Sci/Mu /e of Cours es identified by a G or Q suf.fix qualify for general education credit. These general education requirements are stipulated in previous Undergradulite Cnta/ogs. College of Education Specific Requirements In addition to or as part of the University general education requirements listed above, students applying for a degree from the College of Educa ti on or for teacher certification must have Psy. 111. Studen ts seeki ng teacher certiiication must also take Stat. 370 or any higher­ level math course. Professional Education Professional education requirements in areas of specialization and additiona l general educa ti on requirements in these areas are summarized on the following pages. Communicative Disorders and Science I. General Education Students majoTing in conmmnicative dis ­ orders and sciences are expected to Illeet all genera l education requireme nts. 1n Division B, courses must be taken in two different deprutments. At leas t si.'lC hours of psychology are required. II. Professional Education Preprofessional Block- COllrse H,·s. CI271, ultroduction to Professional Education .... .... ............ 2 CI 272, Field Experiences/ Preprofessional Block ... ....... ... ...... .. ... ... l CESP 728, Theories of Human Development ...... .. .. ... .. ........ ................ ..3 CI 702, Introduction to Exceptional Children ..... .. ... ...... ... ... .... .......... ............ ....3 0711, Multicultural Education ............... 3 In addi tion to the general education requirements and the professional educa ­ ti on sequence, students must complete the requiremen ts for the major. Sruden should work closely with a facu lty advi­ sor in the College of Education to be sure th ey meet cerWication and degree requirements. A checksheet of require­ ments is available in the College of Edu­ cation. Elementary Education l. General Education Students majoring in elementary educa ­ tion should meet all requiremen ts in the general educa tion program. In addi tion, three social science courses and Psycholo­ gy 111 are required in DivisIon B. In Divi­ sion C, a biological science and / or a physicaJ science are required (one must include a lab), along with Math. SOl. n. Professional Education Preprofessional Block ollrst: HI'S. 0271, InIToduction to Professional Education .. .. ... .... ... .... .. ....2 a 272, Field Experience/ Preprofessional Block ... .. .. .................... 1 Block I CESP 334, GrowLh and Devc.lopment ... 2 0430, Soaal/Multieultural Education .. 3 a 320, Introduction to Exceptional O lild ..... .. .......... .. .............. 2 0311 , Field Experience/Block 1... .. ..... .1 Blockn CESP 433, learning and Evaluation ....3 C] 328, Curriculum, Instruction, and Management ............ ............. .. .... ...5 a 3U, Field Experience/Block n........l 70 m. Elementary Specialization In addition to the general education requirements and the professional educa­ tion equence, tudents ma joring in ele­ mentary educanon must fulfill the teach­ ing specialty emphasis of the elementary program . Stud nts should work do ely w ith a facu lty advisor in the College of Ed ucation to be sure they meet certifica ­ tion and degree requirements . A check sheet of requi rements is available from the College of Education. Secondary Ed ucation 1. General Education Students majoring in secondary educa ­ tion should meet the requirements in the genera l education p rogra m as listed above. 11 Secondary Teaching Major Student must fuI£ill tile teaching special ­ ty emphasis of a program as peci£ied in the teaching held secbon that follows . Only those specialties Ii ted among the combined curricula and departmental m ajors and min ors in the majors and mi.nors section may be counted. m. Profes iona! Education The following courses are required: PreprofesSiona l Block C tJll rse Hrs. Cl271, Introduction to Professio nal Education ...... ............... .. ..2 CI 272, Field Experience/ Preprofessional Block ......... .... .. ... .. ... .... t For majors in foreign language, math, science, social studies, English Block I Course Hrs CESP 334, Growth and Developm nt ...2 Cl 4JO, Social!Multicultural Education ..3 CI 320, Introduction to Exceptional Child .. .. ... .... ..... .. .... .. ......2 C 311, Field Experience/ Block 1.... ...... 1 Block 11 CESP 433, Learning and Evaluation ..... 3 C1 328, Curriculum, Instruction, and Management ........... ... . .. ... ... .......... 5 CI 312, Field Experience/ Block 1 .... .. ..... 1 In addition to the genera l ed ucation requi rements, the profeSSional education sequence, and the requ iremen ts for th major, secondary students must complete the pre-student teaching and the student teaching requiremen ts. Students should work closely with a faculty advisor in the College of Education to be sure they meet certification and degree requ irements . A check sheet of requirements is available in the College of Education. Formajors in physical education, art, music Blockl Course HI'S. CESP 334, Growth and Development...2 a 430, Social/Multicultural Education ..3 o 320, Introduction t Exceptional a liId, or Art E. 518, Art for the Exceptional Child, or Mus. E. 611, Music for Special Educalion, or KSS 360, Adaptive PE.. .......... .. ........ .....2 a 311, Field Experienc /Block 1......... I Block II CESP 433, Learning and Evaluation ..... 3 a 328, Curriculum, rn tructi n, and Management .... ......................... ..5 a 312, Field Experience/Block IL ........ 1 In addition to the genera l education requirements, the professional education sequence, and th requirements for the major, secondary students must complete the pre-student teaching and the student teaching requirements. Students should work do ely \'lith a faculty advi or in the College of Education to be sure they meel certificati n and degree requirements. check sheet of requirements is available in the College of Education . For majors in music education For other requirements, ee Mu ic Educa­ tion, College of Fi.ne Arts. For majors in art education For other requirements, see Art Educa­ tion, College ot Fine rts. For majors in forejgn languages F r other requirements, see Modern and Classical Languages and Literatures, Fair­ mount College of Liberal Arts and Sci­ enC(~s. Secondary Teaching Fields The major is generally no fewer than 30 semester hours. (For sp cific excepti n see languages and the combined curricula programs.) Students may elect certain of the majors offered in Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences, lhe College of Fine Arts, or the onege of Education. Students meet the specific course require­ ments of the department in which the major is offered. For example, students may elect to major in foreign language b cause they wish to become high school foreign language teachers. To do so, they complete the foreign language major as p rescribed by the modern and classical languages and IiterJtures department in Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences. In addition, lhey complete the Univer ity's general education require­ men ts, the profe siona l educati n sequence, and other requirements for tile teacher' . certificate prior to graduation. Students should work closely willI a facldry advisor jJl tilt! OJI/cge of Erl rlCJItion to be lire they IIlCl't ccrlljiCJItloJl requiremellrs. A check sheet of requirements for each teaching field is available from the College of Edu­ cation. The election f teaching fields is made with an academic. advisor representi ng lite College of Education The leaching field or major hould be declared no later than the beginning of the junior y ar. Stu­ dents who plan to teach in econdary school may elect their major and minor from the fields given below. The minor will not qualify a studen t to teach unless specia l arrangements have been made in advance. Majors ilI ld MiTwrs Art· Engh h language and literature· Foreign language Fr nell Spani h Mathema lics Music" Physical education SCIence'" Chemistry Natural sciences-bioI gica! Natural sciences-physical Physics Millor' Dilly BiJmgual/multicultural education C mputer tudjes English as a second language Journalism Speech communication • eed~ no mmar. Combined Curricula The leaching assignment after graduation often involves a combination of relat d subjects. For this reas n inten ive study in the following combined disciplliles is ffered in lieu of a d partmenta l major an minor. Studen ls should work closely with ad visors to ensure proper course elec­ tion for certification and degree. A check heet of requirements for each teaching field is available from the College of Edu' cati 11 , atural Science-Biological This maj r requires a minimum of 50 hours. A teacher who qualifies under thi1i provision may teach cllClllistry and gen­ eral science as well as biology. Students als may make arrang ments to qualify to teach other scienc . COLLEGE OF EDUCAnON / ADMINISTRATION, COUNSELING, EDUCATIONAL, AND SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY 71 Natural Science--Physical This major requires a minimum of 50 hol.lr~. A teacher who completes this pro­ gram may teach chemistry, ~eneral sci­ ence, and physical science_Students also may ma ke arrangements 10 qualify to teach othl'r sciences. Administration, Counselin~ Educational and School Psychology The Departmen t of Adminis tration, Counseling, Educational and School Psy­ chology offers courses at the undergradu­ ,1t t> level taken by students both in and outs ide of the College of Education. In addi tion, the department offers programs leading to the Master of Education (MEd) in adminllitration, the MEd in counseling, the MEd in educationaj psychology, the :,pecia llst in Education (EdS) in school p,;;yd10JOgy, and the Doctorate of Educa­ tion (EdO) in educational administration. Counselin~ Educational and School Psychology l ower-Division Courses 150. Workshops in Education. (l-2). 152. Special Stud.ies in Education. (1-4). For undergradUdtes WIth an in terest in issues relat­ ed to counseling. guidance and ~tudent devel­ opmen t. DiHcrent preselected areal> may be ()01 phasized during a semester. Repeatable wi th ad\'is(lr'~ consent. Upper-Division Courses 333. Adolescent Development. (3). A study of th r growth and development of Ihe individuaJ during early, middle, and late adolescence; emphasizes the relationship among research, theory. and application. Prerequisite; Psy. l llQ or equivalent. 334.. Growlh and Development. (2). Examines dl'veh' pmental theories and pnnciples in t.he dime.n,joDs ll f physical, cogn itive. and psy­ ,'hosQcial growth Explores the social and cul ­ tural contexts In which growth and develop­ ment ,1C":u.r. Students demonstrate opennes and ObjectiVity towards issues and theories by inspecting their own biases. Prerequisites: Psy. 1ll Q, acceptance into teacher educ,ation pro­ gram, and concurrent enrollment in CI 31l, 430,601. 433. Learning and Evaluation. (3). Examine the natun! of learning and memory, learning strategies, individunl differences. and sodal t uctor~ inrIuencing learning. Also examines effective UlOC of measurement mslruments, ()bs~ations, questiorung strategles, and grad­ Ing l'bns. Students learn to apply pSydlOlogJ­ c<11 and C!valuatton principles t(l teaching and learning. Prereqllilii.les: CESP 334, 0 311,320, 430. 450. Workshops in Educalion. (1-4) . Accom­ modates a variety of topics related 10 counsel­ m~, guidance, and commwlication issues in helping relationships. May emphasize differ­ en t preselected topics during a semester . Repeatable for credlL 490. independent Studies. (1-3). COUI5es for Graduaterundergraduate Credit 681. Cooperative Education (1-8) . A work­ related placement that integrates theory with a planned and supervised profesSional experi­ ence designed to complement and enhance the student's academic program. PrerequiSites: graduate sta nd ing in the depa!lment and department chairperson approval. No more than 3 credit hours will be aJlowed in one Plan f Study. Repeatable f or credit. OUered CrINer. 701 . Introduction to Educational Research. (3) . AIl introduction to research in education . Includes (1) a survey of current edu cational research, (2 ) the nature uf research methodolo­ gy, (3) the preparation of research reports, and (4) criticism of current research. 704. Introduction to Educational Statistics. (3). An Introduction to statistics, including mea­ sures of central tendency, measures 01 variabil­ ity. correlation, dri square, median test, t test, correlated I test, and one way and two-way analYSl.6 of varilU1ce. 707. 01ild Abuse and Neglect. (1). Acquaints students with the etiological factors. potential indicators, consequences. reportin g proce­ dures, and treatment strategies associated with child abuse and neglect. 728. Theories of Human Development. (3). Describes what developmental theories are, what they do, where they come from , how they work, and how they are used to explain human nature. Uses theoreLic:al assumptions and related research to systematically evaluate developmental theories in terms of their scien­ tific worthiness and their ability to address characteristics of human development. Focu~ on those theories which helped shape lhe \-.:ay we currently view human development as well as signjficant new perspectives ""hid, may shape the way we view it in Ihe future. Prereq­ uisites: CESP 334, Psy. 334 or equivalent, and CESP 701 or equivalent, or instructor' s con­ sent. 732. Behavior Management. (3). Presentation and uWizati.on of psychological principles and techniques for dealing with developmental behavior and learning patterns. Emphasizes the preschool and elementary sch ool child. Prerequisite: CESP 334 or equivalent or depart­ mental consent. 750. Woushops. (1-4). 752. Special Studies in EduC4ltion. (1-5). For students with personnel and guidance inter­ ests . May emphasize. different preselected areas during a semester. Repeatable with advi­ sor' s consent. Prerequisite; instructor's con­ sent_ Courses for Graduale Students Only 802. lntroduction 10 Interaction Process. (1). SIU grade only. A laboratory approach to an exam ination of Ihe counselor's role in t.he counseling process. Helps the prospective counselor increase personal understandi ng or self as a variable in the counseling proces~. Prerequisite: counseling major or departmental consent. To be taken concurrently with CESP 804. May not be taken ~oncuTrently 'vith CESP 825. 803. Counseling Theory. (3). A study of select­ ed theories of counseling. Prerequ isite: CESP 804 or concurrent enrollment or admission to sc.\lool psychology program 804. Principles an.d Philosopby of Counsel­ ing. (3). The development of a guidance phi­ losophy, including a study of the helping Tela­ tionshjp and Lhe services that are part of school. agency, and other institutional setLings. Prerequ iSite: admission to counseling pro­ granl. 807. Counseling: Child Abuse and Neglect. (2) . The etiology, symptoms and indicators, treatment, and prevention i~sues of physical abuse an d neg lect, em otional abuse a n neglect, and sexual abuse. Prerequislles: CESP 701 , 704, 801. 803,804. 808. School Psychology Professional ISljues. (3). Examines ro les and functions of schoul psychologists within the context of historical founda tion s of the profession. Uses lecture, discussions, observations in schools, and pre­ sentations by field-based sd1001 psycholOgiSts to acquaint students with the kinds of prob­ lems \vith which school psychologists typically work, the methods they employ to deal wi th problems , socia l sys tems ill whicll these endeavors occur, and professiona l issues that hape and characterize the profession. 810. Elementary School Counseling. (3). The role oC the elementary counselor In providing individual .md group counseling, group guid­ ance, and consu.ltation in the school setting. Prerequisites: CESP 701, 704, 802, 803, 804 8ll . Educational Measurement and Evalua­ tion. (3). Issues and tech niques for measure­ ment and evaluatiun in the cognitive, aliective, and psychomotor domains. 815. Career Development. (3). For master' level students interested in assisting studenL~ and adul ts in career development and related oncc!ns. Covers (l ) career development of individuals acroSl, lifespan, (2) sources and orga nization of information, (3) assessment designs and career interven tion techniques. and (4) career decision-making/planning pro­ cesses. Includes hands-on experience wi th d variety of assessment methods and interven­ tion techniques and theory-based career ded­ Sian-making strategies for career interventions. Prerequisi tes; CF5P 701, 704, 802, 803, 804. 819. Social Psychology of Education. (3). A critical study of U,e indiv1.duaJ in social interac­ tion in a variety of educational sett ings. Appli­ cation of theory and research to school-relate issues and problems. 72 ------------~-~--------------~-- - 820. Learning Theory and Instruction. (3). Applications of some major leaming theories and leaming principles. Prerequisite: CESP 701 or departmental cons nt 821. MuWcultural Issue in Counseling. (2). A quaints tudents w ith beli f and behavior diffenmces which are often the source of con­ (]jcts among p ople of various cultures. Pre­ requ isite : CESP 701, 704, 802, 803, R04; r instructor's consent. 822. Psychometric Procedures in Counseling. (3). Survey and study ot standardized tests and their application in counseUng, emphasizing their selecti n, use, and interpretation. Studies the basic concepts pertaining to the interpreta­ tion of psychological tests and inventories, induding basic measurement theory and the factors involved in the selection of tests. Pre­ requi . les; CESP 701 and 704; counseling stu­ dents mw;t als have CESP 8()2, 803, 8()4 . 823. Experimental Design in Educational Research. (3). A consideration of sampling the­ ory, design for testing hypotheses about popu­ lations from samples, testing correlation coeffi ­ cients, means snd difference between mean , simple factorial deSigns, designs involving mat hed group, designs involving repeated measures of the same group, and analysis of COy riance. Prerequisite: CESP 704. 824. Techniques of Counseling. (3). Examines and practices techniques of counseling through simulated COW1.Seling situations and extensive examination of counseling case studies. Prereq­ uisites: CESP 728, 821, 822, Psy. 940, and coun­ seling major or departmental consent. 825. Group Counseling Techniques. (2). Examines different kinds of groups, group selection, communkatlOn /attems in groups ,and issues to be addresse in group settings. Prerequisites: CESP 821, 822, an d counseJing major or departmental consent. 830. Introduction to MaInage and Family Counseling. (3). A urvey course on marriage dlld family counseling including theory, tech­ niques, and research in the field. Prerequisite: CESP 803 or departmenta.! consent. 833. Secondary School Counseling. (3). Pro­ vides information and skills needed for coun­ seling in secondary schools. Prerequisite ; CESP 701, 704, 802, 803, 804. 837. Family I sue in Coun eling. (2). Teaches basic ianl iJy processes and how they unpact th growth and d velopment of children and adolescents. Covers famiJy systems theory, th family life cycle, cultural and social influence n families, healthy family functioning, the impact of substance abuse on the family, and the unique halJenges faced by single parent and blended fami lies. Presents basic family assessment and therapy techniques. Prerequi­ site; grad uate standing. 840. Psychology of ExceptionaJ Children. (3). Study of the conceptual and theoretical formu­ lation , empirical eVidence, and research con­ cerning behavioral characteristics of ception­ al children. 852. Special Studies. (1-4). Covers specific top­ ics id ntified by th department in consulta­ tion with institutions r groups of graduate students. Course procedures vary according to topic. Repeatabl . Prerequ ' ite: instructor's or departmental consent. 853. Law, Ethics, and Mu1ticultura.l Issues for School Psychologists. (3). For school psych lo­ gy student and practicing school psycholo­ gists. Covers issues o f legislation, litigation, professional etrucs, and cultural diversity that impact the practi e f school psychology. Pre­ requisite: admisSion to the choo! psychology program or instructor' consent. 855. lndividuaJ lntelligence Assessment. (3). Use of individual tests for appraisal of intelli­ gence, adaptive behavior, and learning styles. Considers research and clinical theory in a It.'c­ ture-discuss ion format, which includes some case simulation and practice activilies. Prereq­ uisites: CESP 822 and instructor's consent. 856. Counseling Practicnm. (3). Supervised practice in court eling. Requirements include at least 60 hours applied experience. Repeat­ able for credit. Prerequisites; CESP 824, 825, coordinator'S consent, and counseling major or departmental consent. Must be taken within one year of completion of CESP 824. 857. Professional and Ethical Issues. (2). Study of major ethical, legal, and professional issues in counseling. Prerequisites: CESP 824 and 825, or concurrent enrollment. 858. Diagnostic Testing. (3). Use of individual tests, rating procedures, and behavioral tech­ niques for the appraisa l of perceptual develop­ ment, cognitive development, c1assr (lm behavior, and academic skills. Co nsiders assessment theory and research relevant to these areas in a lecture discussion format which includes sOllIe case simulation and prac­ tice activities. Prerequisites: CF5P 822, 855, and instructor's consent. 859. School-Based Interventions. (3). Focuses on planning, implementing, monitoring, and evaluating interventions in the school etting with students who are experiencing academic and lor behavioral problems. Prerequisite: CESP 822 or departmental consent. 860. Seminar in Research Problems. (1). Development and presentation of rese.. rch proposals. Required of students enrolled in thesis programs. 862. Presentation of Research. (1·2). A project submitted in thesis manuscript form. Repeat­ able for a maximum of two hours of credit. Prerequisite: CESP 860. 866. Practicum in Guidance Services. (2-3). Supervised practice in administration , test interpretation, group counseling, and other activities of the departm ent. Prerequisit ; CESP 833 or 810 and instru tor's consent 867. Practicum in Group Guidanoe and Coun­ seling Methods. (3). Supervised practice in group guidance and counseling. R peatable for three hOUTS of additional credit. The second praclicum must be in a different area or have a differen t focu from that of th first . Prerequi­ sites: CES? 825, 856, and in tructor's consent. 875-876. MasteJ"s Thesis. (2-2). Prerequi 'ite: CESP860. 88L Seminar in School Psychology. (1). Exam­ ines current trends an issues within the area of school psychology. Also considers alterna­ tive role models for the school psychologi t from the t:andpoint of research and program devel pment in related areas uch as special education, general education, and professional psychology. Repeatable to a maximum of four hours. Prerequisite' CESP 804 or concurrent enrollment or irutructot's consent. 890. Special Problems. (1-.3). Directed. reading and re ea.rch under the supervision of a gradu­ at instructor Prerequisite; departmental con­ sent. 903. Counseling Theory IT. (3). In-depth criti­ cal review of research and applicabil ity of major theories to the evaluation and design of interpersonal intervention strategy. 914. Consultation Techniques. (3). Int n ive study of the literature in counseling, scho I psychology, social psychology, and adminiE­ tration that provides a basis for consultation techniques ill the interpersonal on text of school and work ttings. 915. Inte.rvention Design. (2). Gives the stu­ den t further experience and skill in utilizing theones of interpersonal relations in crealing macro- and micro-learning experience designs for individWlls or groups experiencing dys­ functional situations. Stresses individual and organizational effectiveness asses8IIlent skills. 926. Seminar: Selected Topics. (2). Intensive study of current issues, techniques, research, and application of the elected topic. Repeat­ able for different topics for a maximum of eight hours. Prerequisite; 15 hoUl'S of related gradllilte course work. 928. Seminar: Postsecondary Student Ser­ vices. (2). Tntensive study of issues, theories, approaches, and research in topics related Lo postsecondary student services. Repeatable f r dilierent topics for a maximum of eight hours. 930. Marriage and Family COWlseling n. (3). An advanced course on marriage and family counseling, including theory, techniques, and re earch in the field. Prerequisite; CESP 80 , 830,30 graduate hours or instructor's consent. 934. Personality Assessment. (3). Focuses on theory and interpretation of instruments repre­ senting three maJ r approaches to personality assessment projectiv techniques, behavioral techniques, and personality inventori s . Includes alternative personal ity assessment approaches and reviews of personality theory and psychopathology. Includes supervised experience. Prerequisites: CFSP 822, 855, post­ master's standing or last six hours of maEter's program, and instructor's consent. 946. Practicum in School Psychology. (3 or 6). Supervi ed practice in prOviding school psy­ chological services to children in school, clim­ cal, or community agency settings. Requires at COLLEGE OF EDUCATION/ADMlNISTRAnON, COUNSEUNG, £OUCA nONAL, AND SCHOOL PSYCHOLOGY 73 least 300 hourS applied experience per three hour:. of credit. Repeatable for a maximUID of six hOUTS. Prerequisite: departmental consent. 947. Internship in Counseling: Internal or Externa l. (2). The Internal Internship is nor­ mally a full-time placement, appropriate to Glfeef objectives in a position within an ageI' ­ cy institution, or school. The External intern­ ship i5 normally a series of planned placement intervention experiences in a variety of seltings designed to develop expertise in interpersonal consulting. Repeatable up to 6 hours of credit. 948. Practicum in Maniage and Family Coun­ seling. (3). Prerequisite: CESP 930, graduate­ stude.n t status, or depar1lnental consent. 977. In ternship in School Psychology. (2) . Supervis~'Ii experience as a school psycholOgist in a school or agency setting. Requires at least 600 hoUTS of applied experience. Repeatable fo r a maximum of four hours. Prerequisites: CESP 946 and departmental consent. 990. Special Problems in COlIl\seling and School Psyehology. (1-3). Directed problems in research (or EdS stude.nts under supervision of a graduate instructor. Prerequis.itE!$~ CESP 701 and instroctor's consent. Ed ucational Administration and Supervision Courses for Graduate/Undergraduate Credit 681 . Cooperative Education. (1-8). A work­ related placemeot that integrates theory with a planned and superVised professional experi­ ence designed 10 complement and enhance the stu dent's academic program. Preretluisite: 2.5 GPA . Repeatable Cor credit. Offered CriNer, 750. Experienced Administrator's Workshop. 0-2). Offers a variety of administrative topics. 752. Special Studies in Educational Adminis­ tration and Supervision. (1-3) . Group study in a preselected specialized area of educabonal adminiolTation and supervision. Repeatable for credit with departmental consent. Prerequisite: departmental consent. Courses for Graduate Students Only 803. Seminar: Professional Self-Assessment and Inquiry (3). Participants engage in self­ assessment and readiness for becoming a school adnunistrator. Includes discussing and learning issues and techniques for measure­ mellt in th e cognitive, affective, and psy­ chomot()r domains. Also reviews the basics of edUcatIOnal research, the nature of research :nethodologies, and methods for the prepara­ ,Ion of research reports. 805. Practicum: School Opening 1. (1). Partici­ pants engage in preparing to open their school for the fall semester with their principal/men­ tor; partIci pate in an inquiry project in their loca l school; and read and critique curren t research li terature an d analyze how that r~arch can i1ssisl in their school. Prerel:(uisite: ad ITUssion to the MEd in educational adminis­ tration or instructor's consent. 813. Seminar: Introduction to Educational leadership and School Finance. (3). Discuss educational philosophy, personal goal-setting, an d ed ucational administration models . ln cluLies (a) an examination of educationa l foundations and the major theories of adminis­ tration and application to specific problems, and (b) an overview of adrrtin islTation of the school district, especi..1lly problems involving the community and staff. Examine theoretical concepts rela ted to financial planning and building resources. Review knowledge nece. sary to plan and organize work groups, pro­ jects, and the resources necessary to carry out day-to-day functional activities of school. Pre­ requisite: admission to the MEd in educational administration or instructor's consent. 815. Practicum: Introduction to Educational Leadership and School Finance. (3). Spend time in schools identifying how major theories of administration apply to specific problems in the school and how the school interacts with the district and the community. Apply £inan­ cial planning cOllcepts to the school setting and manage the day-to-day financlal and other resources allocation to schools. Prerequisite: admission to the MEd in educational adminis­ tration or instructor's consent. 823. Seminar: InterpersonaJ Relations and Supervision. (3). Examine the theoretical con­ cepts related to clinically oriented superviSOry models and explicit teaching approaches . Sh.ldy formative evaluation concepts focusing on performance issues related to actual teach­ ing sih.lations and the teacher's guided ilnaly­ sis of these issues. Review the responsibility of the supervisor for planning and organizing staff development activities. Examine process­ es involved in the development ()f interperson­ al skiilB. Engage in sim ulated exercises to acquire interpersomtl skills desirable for group collaboration and communication. PrereqUi­ site: admission to the MEd in educational administration or instructor's consent. 825. P.racticum: Interpersonal Relations and Supervision. (3). Apply the concepts of clinical superv isory models and specific teaching approaches, emphasizing formative evaluation trategies whlch focus on performance issues generated from actual teaching s.ituations and the teacher's guided analysiS of these issues. Cover preparation of the supervisor's role in planning and organizing staff devciopment actiVities. Apply concepts of formative evalua­ tion and staH development using interpersonal and group process skills. Observe, analyze, and reflect upon supervisory techniques and interpersonal skills in the school setting. Pre­ requisite: admission to the MEd in educational administration or instructor's consent. 830. Practicum: School Closing. (1). Engage in closing the school year with a principal/men­ tor. Prerequisite: admission to the MEd in edu­ cational adminis tration or instructor's consent. 831. Seminar: Human Development and Man­ aging the Learning Envlromnent. (3). Examine developmentally appropriate practices in the classroom for sh.ldent learning and behavior management. Includes discussion of develop­ mental psychology sufficient to interpret huma n developmental patterns and their behavioral implications. Prerequisite: adm is­ $ion to the MEd in educational administration or instructor's consent . SS2. Pncticwn: School Opening 2. (1). For a second time, prepare to open a school for the fall semester wi th a principal/nleJ1tut, and pat­ tidpate i.n an inquiry projec t in the local chool. Read and critique CUITen t rcsearcll lit­ erature and analyze how that research ca n assist in the school. Prerequisite: admission to the MEd in educal iona l administration or instructor's consen t. 833. Seminar: School Law and PeT50nnei Management (3). Examme concepts related to staffing issues, including selection and recruit­ ment, certification, orientation, staff develop­ ment, evaluation, transfer and dismissa l, and retirement. Cover general concepts of law , interpretations of statutes and court decisions affecting education, and the legal responsibili­ ties of school personnel and profesSional neg('l­ tiations. PrerequJsite: admissioJl to the MEd in educational ad.mlllistration or instructor's con­ sent. 835. Practicum: School Law and Pe.rsonnel Management. (3). Apply the concepts related to the selection, recruitment, certifjcation, ori­ entation, staff development evalualion, trans­ fer, dismissal , and retirement. Apply general legal concepts and statutes to various situa­ tions and personal/professional liability. Pre­ requisite~ admission to the MEd in educational administration or instructor's consent. 842. Sehool Law. (3). General concepts of law, interpretations of stah.ltes and court decisions affecting education, and legal responsibilities of school personnel. 843. Seminar. Curriculum and Learning Theo­ ry (3). Examine theoretical concepts rel.ated to curriculum philosophles and developmental prQCesses. Examine recent programs and pro­ posals as well as curriculum development at th.e building and school system levels. Review techniques of progTllll1 evaluation and major learning theories and principles. Prerequisite: admission to lhe MEd in educational adminis­ tration or instructor's consent. 845. Practicum: Curriculum and Learning Theory (3). Apply the concepts of curriculum theories and development, emphasizing skills necessary to propose, implement, and evaluate various building programs. Address applica­ tions of prevailing major learning lheodes and prindpl\!s as they relate to academic and behavioral aspects of the classroom Prerequi­ site: admission to the MEd in educational administration or instructor's consent. 852. Special Sh.ldies in Edt.cational Adminis­ tration and Supervision. (1-3). Group sh.ldies in new materials, new researcl, OT innovations in advanced educational administration a.nd supervision areas for practicing administratOIS or advanced students. Repeatable for credit w ith departmenta l consent. Prereq uisite: departmental consent 854. Finance and Facilities Management (31. Designed for those preparing to become administrators at the school-building level Focuses upon the kn('wledge and &kills neces­ sary to plan and organize work groups, Dro­ 74 j cts, and the resources necessary to carry out day-to-day function;)l activitie of schools. 860. Re earch Seminar in Educational Admin­ istration and Supervision. (3). Designed r studen ts i n advanced study . Emphasizes development f research propo als and stud­ i,;!:;. Prerequisite: completion at master's degree or advisor's conSfml 862. Presentation of Re eatch. (1-2). A project mbmUled in thesis manuscript form. Repeat­ able for a maximum two hours of credit. Pre­ requisite: EAS 860. 875- 76. Master' Thesis. (2-2). 884. School Plant and Facilities. (3) . Planning new educationa l facili ties based upon educa­ tional programs. Includes the evaluation of e 'isting schools, remodeling, and op eration alld maintenance 0 present school plant. Pre­ requL'iite: master's degree or instructor' con­ sent 890. Special Problems in Administration. (1­ 4). Directed problems in resea rch for masWs stud nls primarily under s upervision of d graduate instructor. Prerequisite: instructor's consent. 953 . Fi nancial Support of Education. (3). Focus~ n the financial support of education at local, tate, and national levels. Ernph"sizes methods of taxation, budget preparatl n, and eltlcienl expenditures. 955. Field Project in Administration and Supervision. (2-6). Field projects are planned to meet a legitimate need in an ed ucational set­ ling in which the student, under profes ional guidance, can become directly invoJ ed. The prOject mL y fu lfill a community need.. depart­ mental con ern, or a needed inve tig tion or inquiry. Acceptable projects are developmental or must include an ap propriate r esearch design. A usefu l. well-documented report of Ihe project is requi red, with th~ plan, format, and style approved by the tuden t's commit­ tee . Prerequisite: comp letion of master ' s degree. 963. Politics and Power in Education. (3). An examinati n of the interaction of society and the school as it felates to adminislrativ~ pro­ cesses. Studies ystems of ontrol, social dass, power structur , human relations, and group dynamics. Prerequisite: instructor's consenl 969. Technologie for Academic: Writing In EducationaJ Administration. (3). Allows prac­ ticing admmistrators to gain knowledge of the do t raj program process thr ugh the use of various software packages u:;ed to collect and analyze data in Educational Adm inistration and Supervision. Also introduces expectations f T academk writing at the doctora l level. Stu­ dents must own a Macintosh computer (prefer­ ab l ~ a Powerbook) and be reasonably familiar with the Macintosh opera tin g system, Microsoft xcci, EndNote Plus, and Mlcrosoft Word. Prerequisite; admission to the EdD pro­ gremin EAS. 970. Advanced Administrative Theory Semi­ nar. (5). Examines the relationsh ip between theory and practice in educational administra­ hon. Participants consider variau theoretical frameworks for empirical s tudie!>, progra m designs, and organizational i.mpLementalion eff rts, and take iru tial steps toward an inte­ gration 0 those frameworks. Class activi ties require the application or Ihe constructs and propo ition!> considered to an on-going ,maly­ sis of school-related problems and the concep­ tualizati n of action programs for addres ing such problem5. Prerequisite: admission to EdD program in liAS. 971. Decision-Making and Problem-Solving Seminar. (5). Focuses all approaches to identi­ fying, clarifying, and \lIving various problems in elementary and secondary education. Deci­ sion-making and problem-solving models are reviewed, crit iqued, and applied. Pre.requi­ sites; admission to EdD program; BAS 970 and 981, concurrent enrollment in EAS 982 972. Administrative Leadership Seminar. (5). D igned to facilitate in-depth inve ' tigations of research relevant to leadership theory and practice. Activitie incl ude clarifying and devel ping personal Jeadership skills; identify­ ing, foster ing, and supporting the leadership skills of otners; and. conducting observations of leaders in action. Prerequisites; admission to HdD program; EAS 970 and 971, and concur­ rent enrollment in EAS 986. 98L Applied Inquiry Seminar L (3). Provides doctoral students with an introduction to Ield based inquiry / probl m-solving s Ir, tegies; begins the d velopment of field -based prob­ lems /issues; and provides practice in fie ld research design, implementation, and report­ ing. Prerequisite: admission to EdD program in EAS. 982. Applied Inquiry Seminar n. (3). Contin­ ues EAS 981 and provide oppor~unjtie for more ophisticated and complex fie ld-based studies. Prerequisite: admis ion to EdD pro­ gram inEAS. 983. Applied Inquiry Seminar fiL (3) . Contin­ ues EAS 981 and EAS 982 . Focuses on th development of individualized research plans leading to small group o r individual fie ld­ based experience in the second year of dodor­ al study. Prerequisite: admission to EdD pro­ gram inEAS. 986. Field-Based Research I. (3). This is the finit in a equence (Fall, Spring, Summer) that provides opportunities for field work leading to EdD dissertation proposal. Prerequisites: admission to EdD program; EAS 981, 982, 983, and concurrent enrollment in !:AS 972.. 987. Field-Based Research II. (3). Follows EAS 986 and continues field-based research activi­ ties and development of dis ' ertation propos­ als. Prerequisite : admission to EdD program, EAS 986. 988. Field-Based Research Ill. (1). Follows EAS 91>6 and 987 and culmin ates this fle ld­ ba ed sequence. Prerequisi tes: admission to EdD program; EAS 986 and 987. 990. Special Problems in Administration. (1­ 4). Directed problems in resea.rch for pecialist and doctoral degree stud_ents under supervi ­ sion of a grad ua te instructor. Prerequisite; instructor' ·onsent. 99L Practicum in Educational Administration and Supervision. (1-2) . Designed f r peeso who have been employed in th it first admln­ lstrative posltion and are seeking rLocertifica­ tion in Kan ' . Course u. indlvidualJy de~igned by an EAS faculty member with thl! tudent and his/her SChllOl dl lrict upervisor_Ad­ ruess(''S tbe needs of the student and of the dis-­ trict. Thru I i. 10 as ist the tudent t extend basic skills relevant to a particular adrninistra­ bye assignment. The student must register for three h urs of redit iI1 EAS 99] to meet reee,­ tification requirements. S/U grading only. Pre­ requisites compleliun of mnster' degree. and departmental consent. 992. Supel'intendencyllntemship. (6) . Two­ "emeste course deslgncd primarily for indi­ vid uab who are ompleting cour e work to obtam erufi alion us d d i triel-level adm lnis­ tratm . Focuses 011 the role expectations of dIS­ trict-level admlruSlrators, and includes field experiences designed to emph ize knowledg' and skill in administrative pUlctices and proce­ dures. Work is de igned for ea h student'. projected administrattve interes t. Studen ts m ust file an pplica t ion for thi termina l course. 999. DissCJ'talion Research. (1-6). Taken con­ curnmtly with EAS 91>6,987, and 988, and ioe ix credits ach semester during the laat year of enrollment. Provides students with disserta­ tiM proposal and dissertalilln ~dvisemen t and may be taken fur one to six credihi per term for a maximum I)f 24 credits. Up to 17 cred its mav be counted t ward program completion. Pre­ requisites: admission to EdD program in EAS and required doctoral l:ourse w rk. Communicative Disorders and Sciences The Department of Communicative Dis­ orders and Sciences provides academic and clinical educatio n for students a t Wichita State Univer ity who wi ' h to work w ith commun icativ Iy handi ­ capped children and adults. The under­ graduate program offers broa~ compre­ hensive, and preprofessional preparation for specialized training, which i ' offered 011 the graduate level. Graduate work, culmina t ing in a masLer' degree, i5 required to obtain professional ertiiicD­ tion as a pee h-Ianguage pathologist or aud iologi l in the public schools, hospi­ talsl or rehabilitation centers, or to engage in private practic . With an undergradu­ a te, preprofessional major, stud nts com­ pleting the master's program will be eligi­ ble to apply for certification by the Amer­ ican Speech-Language-H aring Associa­ lion an Kansas public schools, and for Kansas licensure. The PhD in commu­ nicative disorders and sciences prepares individuals to function professionally a independent clinicians, as teacher-smol­ COLLEGE OF EDUCATION/COMMUNICATIVE DISORDERS AND SCIENCES 75 aI'S in an academic setting, OT as program ad ministra tors. Undergraduate Major The preprofessional, undergraduate major places primary emphasis on lhe general area of communicative sdence. and disorders and beginning specialized emphasis on speech and language pathol­ ngy or audiology. Supervised practicum courses are required as part of the euuca­ tiL1!1al program. tudents should make formal applica­ tion for pracncum courses one semes ter prior to enrollment. Evaluation of the stu­ dent's speech. language, and hearing pro­ fi ciency will be conducted . Significant deviations in any area must be corrected to maximum ability before enrollment in praclica courses or student teaching. In addition, medical clearance is required for all observation and practica classes. Ad mission to a major in CDS does no t com. ti tute assurance of automatic en­ trance in to lhe practica or student leach­ ing sequence. Undergraduate students may major in communicative disorders and sciences in eIther the ColIl!ge of Education or Fair­ moun t CoUege of Liberal Arts and Sci­ enet'S. Mosl students take Lhe program in the College of Education, but those wish­ ing to emphasize applied language study ma y enroll in the communicative disor­ ders and sciences major in Fairmount College of Uberal Arts and Sciences. In ei ther case, all students must satisfy the genera l education requirements e)f the Un iversity . Students in the College of Ed u l~ation must select certain courses from Ule general education program that will salisfy teacher cerlification require­ ments. These ,He stated under generaJ requirements at the beginning of the Col­ lege (If Education section of the Call/log. Speech-Language Pathology The major will, emphasis in speech-lan­ guage pathology consists of a minimum of 42 hours. Students should work closely With advisors to ensure proper CQurse sel!?ctic)n for certification and degree. A check sheel of requirements is available tram the College of Education and the department office, 113 Hubbard Hall. AUdiology The major with emphasis in audiology con !>ists of a minimum of 4] hours. Stu­ dents should work closely with advisors :Cl ensure proper COUTSe selection for cer­ Ihc.ation and dCgTee. A check sheel of reqUirements is available from the Col- I· lege of Educa tion and the department office, 113 Hubbard Hall. Applied Language Study in Fainnounl CoUege of LiberaJ Arts and Sciences The major with emphasis in applied lan­ guage study consists of a minimum of 36 hours. Students should work closely wiU. advisors in the College of Education and Liberal ArlS and Sciences to ensure prop­ er course selection for the degree. A check sheet of requirements is available from the College of Education and from Fair­ mount College of Liberal Arts and Sci­ ences. Teacher Education Certification One full semester of practicum in the public schools is required at the graduate level for all students working toward cer­ lification as speech-language pathologists or audiologists in an educational setting. Students must apply for practicum in an educational setting a t l east one semester in advance of practicum work. They must have a minimum overall grade point average of 3.000; a 3.000 aver­ age in the major field; a grade of C or bet­ ter in English 101 and 102 and in Com­ munication 111 , or their equivalents; and the recommendation of the major depart­ ment. Clinical Certification The communicative disorders and sci­ ences undergraduate preprofessional major may be applied toward certifica­ hon by the American Speech-Language­ Hearing Association. This certifica tion requires a master's degree, with major emphasis in speech-language pathology or in audiology. Undergraduate Minor A minor in cOmDmnic.1tive disorders and sciences consists of 18 hours and may b eamed in either the CoUege of Education or Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences. The following courses are rec­ ommended for a minor unless other arrangements are made: CDS 11 lQ, 232, 300, 304, 306, and 501 . Arrangements for the minor should be made in consultation with the Deparlment of Communicative Disorders and Sciences. Other Requirements Participation in the department's clinical practica courses requires lhat a student obtain medical clearance prior to the start of Ule course. This requirement is indicat­ ed in the individual course descriptions. Procedures to be followed may be obtained from the departmen t' s office. Also, students who participa te in ac ti.v clinical p racti ce during the year m ust purchase pro£essionaliiability insuran ce for the University in the amount of not less than $1,000,000/ $3,000,000. This must be done on a yearly basis, when appropriate. CDS 770, Communicative Development and Disorders, is a general survey course and may not be used as part of ei ther a major or minor in conununicative disor­ ders and sciences at the w ldergraduate or graduate level without departmental con­ sent. Clinical Services Clinical services for members of the com­ munity with speech, language, or hearing disorders, as well as students enrolled at Wichita State, may be arranged with the Speech-Language-Hearing Clinic. Fees are charged for Ulese services. General Admission to courses is possible with a rn ini­ mwn grade of C in each stated prerequisite or its judged equivalent, or w ith departmental con:;ent, un.less otherwise speci fi ed in the ourse description. Lower-Division Courses 260. Signing Exact English J. (1) . 2R. Introdue· tiou to the theory and use of Signing Exact English (SEE) as a rneans of collm, unicaHon with the hearing impaired. Independent out­ side prachce is necessary to faci li tate skill. 281. Cooperative Education. (1-8). Allows stu­ dents to participate in the cooperative educa­ tion program. OfLered CrINer only. Upper-Division Courses 360. Signing Exact English II . (1). 2R. An advanced class in the theory and use of Sign­ ing Exacl English (SEE) as a means of conunu· nication with the hearing impaired . Empha­ sizes vocabulary and in terpreting skills. Pre­ requisite: CDS 260. 365. Inuoduction to American Sign Language. (3). Focuses on the use of American Sign lan­ guage as used by lhe American deaf communi­ ty Develtlpment- of basic commw,ic:ation skills Jeads to basic conversational skills in ASL. 465. Conversational American Sign Lan­ guage. (3). Increases vocabulary and speed of the use of ASL. Focuses on a greater fluency in expressive and receptive skills. Develops inter~ mediate conversa tional skills. Prerequisite: CDS 365. 481. Cooperative Education. (1-8). See CDS 281 . 490. Directed Study in Speech and Language Pathology or Audiology. (l~3). Individua l 76 studY or research on specifi~ problems. Repeat­ able. Instructor' consent must be obta ined ri r to enrollment. Courses for Graduate/Undergraduate Credit 570. foreign Accent and Dialect Modification. (3) . Primarily for the nonnative peaker of American English wanting 10 improve p(onun­ dation. Studies problem of foreign accent and Ameri n Eng)j~h dialect redu tion Analyzes ~lJe h patterns and designs an individual pro­ gram in dja lect redu-tion . Provides intensive practice. Not for th student wh.o is beginning the study of English. 676. Teaching English as a Second Laoguage (Methods). (3). Discusses curr nt methuds I)f teaching EngH h to nonnative speakers. tu­ dellts learn to analyze inter language patterns and to design appropriate teaching unils for ci a and language laboratory use 681. Cooperative Education (1-8). A work­ related placement that integrates theory with a planned and supervised professional p~ri­ ence designed to complement and enhance the student's academic program. PrereqUisite; 2.5 GPA. Repeatable f r credit. Offered Cr/NC,. 740. Selected Topics m Communicative Dis­ orders and Sciences. (1..J).lnd ividual or group tudy in specialized area of <,;ommuni or advanced master' --Ievel studenls. Repeatable. 990. Advanced Independent Study in Speech and Language Pathology, Audiology, or Speech Scien~e . (1-3). Arranged individua l, directed study in specialized ontent areas in speech and la.nguage pathology, audiology. or sp ech sciences . Repeatable. Preceq u ' ites: advanced standing and instructor's consent_ 992. Advanced Presentation of Research. (1.3). A directed research project for doct ra l stu­ dents ~ujminaling in a manusoipl appropriate for publication. 994. Seminar in Clinical Research. (3). Pr en­ tation of advanced modeb in research deslgn applicable to the investigation of commtmica­ tive disorders in a clinical setting. Prerequi­ ~ ites; ~I?S 800 or equivalent and competency m stahstics. 995. Research Pro eminar. (1). A weekJy emi­ nar of informal discussion and formal presen­ tation of ongoing or planned researcl1 by the CDS facu lty and doctoral graduate students. Goal is to provide CDS doctoral 5tudents with new and val ua ble kn wledge and in 'ights r garding how real world research is per­ fotmed. Prerequisit ; d ctoral student tand­ ing. 999. Doctoral Dissertation. \1-18). Repealable. Speech and Language Pathology Admission to courses is possible with a mini­ mum grade of C in ach tated prerequisit Or its judged equivalent, or with departmental consent, unless otherwise specified 11\ the course description. Lower-Division Courses ll1Q. Di. orders of Human Communication. (3). An orientation t ) disorders of human m­ Dlwlication, communicative and p ychosocia l problems commonly encmmtered, and general approaches to habili lion. 232. Introduction to Clinical Practices in Communicative Disorders. (3). An overview of clinical assessment and treatm nt proce­ dures for communicative d tsorders. ReqUires observation of a essment and treatment tech­ niques for speech-language-hearing disorders. Guides studen t ob ervati n f therapy and assessment in the speech-language-hearing link and facilitates understanding t behav­ ioral and des ipl lve goals, ob jectives, and tt!chniques ltsed In tr"atment ()f communi ­ tive disorde . Fu lfills the ASHA requirement of 25 ubse.rvation hours prior to beginning din­ lcal practicum. Prerequisites: prior or conCUJ­ rent enrollment il1 CDS 111 Q and med ical clearance. Upper-Division Courses 300. Anatomy and Phy iology of the Speech and Hearing MechanislIIli. (3). A study of Lhe prenatal development anu basic alUllomy of th.e sy lems necess.ary for speecll and hearing Discusses the respIratory, pllOnatory, articula­ tory, and auditory mecllitnism - (r m a func­ tional point of view. r rerequi ita; CDS 11IQ. 304. language I: Normal Acquisition. (3). Cross-Ii ted , . Ling. 1U4 . The study of til acquisition of language in the child from birth to six years qf age. Evalua tion llf van us a.cqui ­ .ition theories in th' light of current psycho­ logica l and linguistic thought. Empbaslzes the development of phonolugy, morphology, syn­ ta.x, semanhcs, and pragmatics. Prerequi ite' CDS 300 or concurrent enrollment. 306. Phonetic; Theory and ApplicatioD. (3). Cross-listed as Ling. 30 . Introduction to the Intemational Phonetic Alphabet and its use i.n transcribing th 'ounds of AmericiUl English with .emphasis on the major dialects . Study ot' phYSIOlogtc,1I tic, and perceptual pecifica­ ticn f,,-peech sounds and a survey of current phonetic theory and applications to speech improvement. Extensiv practice in transcrip­ tIon of peech. Prerequi:>ites: prior or concur­ rent enroUment in CDS i J LQ. 416. Language II: Introduction to Disorders. (3).lntroductiorl to language disorders of foml, c ntent, and use. Include basic assessmen t COLLEGE OF EDUCATION/COMMUNICATlVE DISORDERS AND SCIENCES 77 and remedia tion procedures. Requires obser­ vatioJl of clinical procedures. Prerequisite: CDS 304 419. Genetic and Organic Syndromes. (3). Introuuces human genetics and the impact chromosomnl and structuraJ anomalies uf com­ !l1 urucati(~n disorders. Assessment and remedi­ ation of cleft palate speech. Prerequisill!: COS: 300 490. Directed Study in Speech and Language pathology or Audiology. (1-3). Individual study or research on specific problems. Repeat­ able lor credH. In.structor's consent must be obtained pr ior to enrollment. Courses for GraduatelUnde.rgraduate Credit 501. Speech and Hearing Science. (3). Exami­ nation uf dements il, the chair! of events that lead tll human communiGltion. Studies speech produc tion and perception at physio logical and ,lrou6tical levels, emphasizing acoustics. Prerequisite: COS 111Q. 510. Language m: Introduction to Diagnos­ tic~. (3). Provides the principles w1derlying basic diagnos ti c proresses for speeLh/lan­ guage disorders across the life span. Teaches observation tt'chniques, how to take case histo­ ries, h<.>ginning interview techniques, and how to administer and interpret formal and infor­ mal assessment measures. Requires observa­ tion of diagnostic procedures in thc speech­ language-hearing clinic. Prercquisites: CDS 41 (, and 514. 514. Speech-Sound Disorde.r5. (3). Basic meth­ ods and procedure~ of identifying, assessing, analv-Ling, and remedialing speech-soLlnd dis· orders. Practice in p honetic lranscriptJon of highly unintelligib le sp~ samples. PrereqUi­ site: CDS 306. 516. Language IV: [ntroduction to Assessment and lnl.ervention-Birth to 8. (3). Discussion 01 current language intervention strategies and progra rru. for infan ts, toddlers, and preschool­ ers, Jnd school-age children, birth to 8 yea Examiniltion of the development of individual and family plans. Discussion of the multidi­ mensional na ture of language and cu lturally diiierenl language patterns. ReqUires observa­ tion of dlni.cal intervention and a laborn tory experience. Prerequisites: CDS 416 and 51 O. 60S. Neurology of Speech and Language T: Basic Processes. (4) . A consideration of basic neuroanatQmy and neuruph)'siology necessary tor nbt~ j ning an understanding of tile repre­ sentiltion of speech and language in the huma n central nl!rvpus system a nd of cond j ti'ln~ resul ting from neuro.logical impairment. Pre­ reqUisite' at least senior standing. 625. Clinical Methods in Speech and Lan­ guage. (1). Techniques and methods for deVel­ opmen t of cli ni ca l skills in il supe rvised practicum setting. Children with language and ;peech Sound disorders provide the primary :'xu., . Developmen t of 11 philosophy of the dInlcal PTl)('t!ss includes clinical procedw'l'5 for therapy, writi ng beh aviora l objectives and frogress report.." and conducting parent con­ etences. Pr~!.?qulsites: 25 clock htJun. of obser­ vation; grade of C or better in CDS 304, 30(', 416, 510 (can be concurren t), and 514; and a minimum GJ'A of 2.750 cumula tive and 3.000 . , the major. 635. Clinical Methods in Speech and Lan­ guage. (1) . Supervised prilcticum of clinical assignments in the WSU Speech-La nguage­ Hearing Chnic. Prerequisi tes: prior or concur­ rent enrollment in CDS 625, instructor's COD­ sent one semester prior to enroilment, medical clearance, and insurance. 717. Voice Disorders. (3). Review of current knowledge on the symptomatology and etiolo­ gy of commonly encountered voice disorders in children and adults. Presentation of proce­ dures for differential diagnosiS and clinical intervention, based un a working knowledge of the anatomy and physiology of normal oice production . Considers mu lticu ltura l issues. Prerequisites: al least senior standing and CDS 300, 510. 718. Fluency Disorders. (3). A review of cur­ rent t11eories on the etiology and development of the disorder. Considers behavioralJy based iagnostic procedures for children and adults, as well as methods for clinical intervention, indudmg procedurel> for parent interviewing and counseling, and multicultural concerns. Provides opport unities for observation, one focus bein g demonstration of in tervention methods . PrerequJsites : senior standing an CDS 300, 510. 780. Communication Disorders in Education­ al Settings. (31. Organization, administration, and professional relationships in public school speech and language management programs on the elementary and secondary school levels. Emphasizes procedures and materials for sur­ veying, scheduling, writing IEP's; therapeutic managem ent, record keeping, and util iza tion f various instruc tional medill . Shoul d be taken prior to student teaching, CDS 781 and 782. Prerequisi te: prior or concu.rrent enroll­ ment in CDS 51lJ . Courses for Graduate Students Only 801. Advanced Speech .llId Hearing Science. (3). Advan ced study of speech and hearing processes, p rima rily in the ir normal aspects. Attention to current unders tanding of speecl\ generation, the speech siSJlal, ilnd the nonnal function of heari.ng . Attention also to tech­ niques of investigation of these processes. Pre­ requisite: CDS 501 or equivalent or departmen­ tal consent. 810. Neurology of Speech and Language II: Motor Speech Disorders. (3). Studies speech disorders resulting from upper and lower motor neuron lesions in the central nervous system and emphasizes evaluatio.n and treat­ men t strategies for intervention. Prerequisite: CDS 605 8U. Neurology of Speech and Language ill: Aphasia and Head Trauma, (3) . Language aSSessment and treatmen t stra tegies in adult aphasia, closed head mjury, and right hemi­ p heTe communication impairment. Incl udes medical aspects of stroke rehabilitation, trans­ diSCiplinary intervention, and con temporary and future proCcssional i.ssues in clinical apha­ siulogy. Prere.quisi t-e; CDS 605. 813. Communication Disorders in Medical Settings. (3). Provides the principles Ullder ly­ ing a tTa nsdisciplinary team ing approach, mpha si.z.ing differential diagnosis and tteat­ ment of complex disorders found in medica l settings. Discusses the fund amenta ls of private practice and legal issues in the pract ice of speech-language pathology. Pre.requisites. CDS 8]0 and 812. 814. Pbonological Disorders. (2-3). Analysis of unintelligible children's phonological sy~t!!lTl Development of individualized remediation plans for expediting intelligJbility gains. Criti ­ caJ review and discussion of dinica] and devel­ opmental phonology research and phonologi­ GIl theories. Prerequisite: CDS 4]4. 816. Language DisabiIJties in Children and Adolescents. (3). Examina tion o f vario u approaches to working with children and ado­ lescents with language abilities. Practical appJi­ lalion of langu age assessment procedures, individualized planning, and la.nguage inter­ vention s trategies. Language in the classroom for schOOl-age children and adolescents and collaborative strategies. Multicultural lih~rac:y and the multidimensional nature of language in the classroom . Prerequisite: CDS 41 6 and 516 or departm.entnl censent. 820. Graduate Metl10ds in Speech and lan­ guage Evaluation. (1). Clinical methods for evaluation and diagnosiS o f ch ildren and adults presenting with speech and language disorders. Prerequisites: CDS 510 and concur­ rent enrollment in CDS 830 821. Graduate Methods in Educ.ational Set­ tings. (2). Discussion and evalua tion of s tudent tead\ing experiences in public schools, demon­ strations of 'lpplied clinicnl skills, cUl.Olse!illg on the elementary and secondary school levels. Prereq uisite: t n be taken con curren tly wi th CDS 781. 822. Beginning Graduate Methods. (1). Lec­ ture and class discussions covering various types of com munication disorders and man ­ agl!/J\ent techniques/ rnethods. Relates theories and methods to students' cli nic and p racticum assignments. Designed for students with 20 or more practkum clock hourq . Prerequ isi tes: CDS 625, 635, and concurrent enrollment in CDS 835. 823. Graduate Methods in Medical Settings. (1). Cass discussions cover various topiCS per­ taining to hospitaJ and adult care practicum experiences. Rela tes theory and methods to student's pra cticu m aSSignmen ts. PrereqUi­ sites: CDS 813 and concurrent enr()lIment in CDS 83J . 825. Graduate Methods in Communicative Disorders. (1). Lecture and d iscussions cover various types \.I f communication disorders and managenlent techniques/methods. Relates the­ ories and methods to students' cUni r and practirum aSSignments. PrereqUIsite: concur­ rent enroHment in CDS 835. 826. Graduate Methods in Language. (J) . Lec­ ture and class discussions cover various types of language disorders. Relates tl,eories anJ methods to students' clinic a nd practicum assignments. Prerequ isites: CDS 516, 635, 822 78 concurrent en rollment in 836, medical clear­ ance, and insura n e. 827. Graduate Methods in Voice. (1). Clini",1 methods for the diagno is and treatment of children and adults prese.nting 1'01 e di orders. Prereq i ites: CDS 717 and concurrent enroll­ ment in DS 837. 828. Graduate Method in Fluency. (1). Clini­ cal methods for the diagnosis and treatment of chi ldren and adults pr enting fluency disor­ ders. P rerequisites: CDS 712 and concurrent enrollment in CDS 838. 829. Graduate Methods in Accent Modifica­ tion. (1). ecture and di5(.'USSi n of techniques f r foreign accent and dialect modification. Relates teChniques to student' practicum experience in CDS 570, Altendan e in CDS 570 required , Prerequisites: CDS 625,822, and n­ curren t enrollment In CDS 83 . 830. Advanced Methods in Speech and lan­ guage Evaluation. (1-3) , Provides the tudent with i.nf rma tion regarding spe h and lan­ uage ev lu tion processes and roct!dures. Prer ui ites: c ncurrent enrollment in CDS 820. 83L Evaluation Proces es (4-6). Half-time par­ ticipation in a public school speech and lan­ guage management program under th<.' guid­ ance of a cerhiied clinician and a University upervi or. Pr r quisite : graduate standing, CDS 780 and 816, concurrent rollment in CDS 1321, instruc tor's consent one semester prior to enroJl ment, medi al clearance, and insurance. 833. Advanced Method in Hospital/Adult Care. (4-6). Full-time or part-time parbC'ipabon in a m cl ieal setting under the guidelines of a certified cl inician and a University supervisor. Prerequ i ites: graduate standing, DS 813, concurrent en llment in CDS 823, instructor's consent (Jne year prior to enr IIment, medical clearanre, and in urance. 834. Advanced Methods for Phonological Disorders. (1). Proc d ure for evaluation and remediation of children's highly Imilltelligible ut teran . Discus ion of clients' indIvidual need . Prerequisites: prior or concurrent r gis­ tration in CDS 714, concurrent enr llment in CDS 836, instructor's con ent. 835. Graduate Practicum in Communicative Disorders. (l-3), Repeatable. Supervised appU­ c ti n of diagnosti a nd/or cIlnicaJ manage­ ment techniques with indlVidual presenting communi ative disorders. Prerequisite: CDS 635, concurrent enrollment in CDS 822 or 82 , medical clearance, and in urance. 836. Graduate Practicum in language Group. (2). Exposes studen ts to a variety of early childhood language disorders. Prerequisites: co ncurrent enrollment In CDS 826, medical c1e rance, and Insuran e. 837. Advanced Methods in Language. (1-2). O inical practicum in the diagn is d treat­ ment of children and adults with voice disor­ der .. Prerequisites: DS 717, concurrent nroU­ ment in DS 827, medical clearance, and insur· ance. 838. Graduate Practicum in Fluency. (1-2). Clinical practicum lor the diagnosi. and treat­ ment of children and adults presenting fluency di orders. Prerequisites: CD 7Ul, concurrent enrollm nt in CDS 828, m !clical learan e, and insurance. 839. Graduate Practicum in Accent Modifica­ tion. 11). Practic tecl1niqu in foreign accent and dialect modification. tudent clin ician work directly with students In CDS 570. Atten­ dance in CDS 570 required. Prerequisites: con­ current enrollment in CDS 829, medical clear­ ance, and insurance. 900, Speech Acoustics. (3). A detailed an.-uy is of th acousti of speech Studies the various th ories of peech sound production along w ith the instrumenta l analysis 1>( peech sounds and ends with an examination of vari­ ous speech disorders from the point of view of acoustics. PrereqUisite: CDS SOL 903. Speech Perception. (3). A criti 1 re\riew of th\! Lheories and empirical research address­ ing the perception of speech, specie -speclfi communication, and peech recognition sys­ tems tilr ugh artificial intelligence, Discusses both unimodal and bimodal models oi percep­ tion. Prerequisite: DS 900, 904. Speech Physiology. (3). critical review f pertinent research concerning tl,e phy iolog­ ka I bases of speech. mpha ' izes understand­ ing th instrum ntal techniques utilized m such studies. Prerequisite: CDS 801. Audiology Admi sion to ourses is possible with a milli­ mum grade of C in each stated prerequisite or its judg d equivalent, or with departmental con ent. unless otherwise specified l[l the course description. Lower-Division Course 250_Introduction to Audiology. (3). 3R; lL Introduces the etlol gy, nature, and sympto­ mology of auditory disorders and patholOgies. DISCUSSes basic principles of audiogram it ter· pretation, surgical pr toeak, and modeb of aural habilitation mdudmg amplilication. Pre­ requisite: CDS 11 lQ. Upper-Division Courses 350. Auditory Disorders. (3). History and scope of the field. Studies basic aspects oi nor­ mal hearing function and surveys audiology testing procedures, including audIometric screening. Also introduces the use of hearing aids, auditory training, lip reading, and reha­ bilitative counseling. Prerequisite: CDS 250. 450, Educational Audiology. (2). Evaluation f historical approach and current trends in the ed ucational management of hearing impair children . Prese nta tion of tcchniqu and resource materials t e tablish and maintain program for hearing-impaired children in reg­ u lar ed uca tional settings. Prerequi ite: CDS 350. 451. Clinical Methods in Audiology. (1). Tech­ nique and method for development of audill ­ metric c1 inicaJ skills in a supervised practicum setting. PreTe in the University Audiology lin ie Requir es 2-4 h urs f supervbed audiometric practicum per week. Prerequi ites: CD 350, m ieal learanee, instructor's consent, seni r standing, 25 h urs of b ervation, concurrent enroUment in CDS 451 . Course for Graduate/Undergraduale Credit 550. Senior Seminar in Audiology. (2). An xploratio n of theories, p rin iples, prac tice , and pitfaUs f audiology emphasizing creating dynamic models or research interpretation, clinical interaction, and PI' fess i nal manage­ m nt. Examines the current educational, pro· fessional, and. thical issues 1tI clinical audiolo­ gy and hearing science. Prerequisite: CDS 450 or senior sta.nding. 655. Methods in Auditory Asses ment·SLP. (1). M thods in a udi logic evaluation for peech and language palh logy tudents. Dis­ cusses procedures for diagnostic evaluation of a broad range of audi tory d i orders in infant·, children, and adults in weekly class meetings, along with procedures for hearing scree.rung, hearing aid maintenance and fitting, Cl)w1'el­ ing, and others as appropriate. Prerequisite '. CDS 250, 350, and concurrent enrollment in CDS 656. 656. Practicum in Auditory A3 essment-SLP (1). Spe hand langu, gc pathology students engage i.n racbcum expenences in audio logic screening and assessment as arranged. Pr req­ ui ites: concurrent enrollment in CDS 686, medical clearance, and insurance. 751. Oinical Audiology I. (3). 3R; IL. T ch­ nique and procedure for administering the ba ic auditory test battery and the interpret ­ tion of audiometric re ull5. Prerequisi : grad­ uate student statu . 752. Clinical Audiology II . (3). 3R; lL. Diag­ nostic and rehabilitative proced ur in the audiology elilli Techniques and procedures for the administration and interpretation o f special auditory tests induding tests for p u­ dohyp acousis, predictive acous tic reflexes , tests f r central auditory pathology, and cali ­ bration. Prerequisite: CDS 75l. 764. Aural RehabiJjtation. (3). Psychologica l, 'ocial, educational. and occupational impact of heari ng Loss In ch ildren and ad ults. The ry nd procedures for habili tation/rehabili tation of children and adults WI th hea ring loss. Pre­ requ15ites: CDS 250 and 450. 765. Graduate Methods in Aural Rehabilita­ tion. (2). Discu ses topics pertaining to the pro­ vision of aural rehabilitation servi es for chil­ dren and adul . lncludes current practices in aural r habilitation for chtldren, adults, and th elderly; procedures and material for tho servic ; an current therapy by student clim­ d ans enrolled in pTacticu m. Repeatable. P re­ COLLEGE OF EDUCATION /CURRJC M AND INSTRUCTION 7 rt'qu i~ile~: CDS 764, graduate standing, and concurrent \!l1roJlm~:n 1 in CDS 766. 766. Graduate Practicum in Aural Rehabilita­ tion. 0 ). Provides methods for the habiJi ta­ tiun /rehilbililation of hearing-Impdired chil­ J ren .lOd adultt.. Prerequisites: CDS 764, con­ (urnmt enrollment in CDS 765, medical clear­ ance, ~ nd insurance. Courses for Graduate Students Only 802. Anil\omy and Physiology of the Auditory s ystem. (2). Examines in detail anatomy and function of the auditory system ill light of cur­ rent rest'ilrch knowledge. Studies the normal S\·"tem as a basis for understanding the patho­ l ~gi(a J system. Prerequisites; CDS 250, SOL 803. introduction to Psychoacoustics. (2). 2&; 10. Basic pnnciples underlying the perceptual h~aring process, emphasizing the interdepen­ dend6 between 'oWld s timuli and s\lbjective iludl tt)ry ~>xperience as related to comDlUruca­ tion behDvior. Prerequisite; CDS B02. 851. Medical Audiology. (2). Many hearing di surders req uire evaluatiun/treatmen t by both the ,mdiology and medical pTofessions. Rev i"w~ lh l: audio logical and physiolog­ icaJ / ml:dical a;'-peets of the more common of these conditions fOUl,d in ch ildren and adults. Prerequisites: CDS 250, 802, or mstructor's con­ ,;ent. 85-1. Community and Industrial Audiology. (2). Reviews recent developments and research with "lteni.lon t['l industrial audiology, federal and ~talc rcgu11tions, and enviTonmental noise problems. Prereqtlisite: CDS 75 1. 855. Pediatric Audiology. (3) . Audi lory devel­ opment ilnJ effects of auditory pathology in lI1 i1:mb und ,hildren Early identification strategies, diagnostic .ludiologicn l evaluation proto..:ob, of the audi­ tory system, mcluding electrocodlJ eography ([COg). auditory brain stem response (ABR), and tlw later occurring cottical evoked poten­ lta.ls (MLF, LAEP, and P300). Prerequisites: CD~ 605, 802, 851. 859. I:1L'Clronystagmography. (2). Techniques and procl!dures for clinical evaluation of the fUnctional status of the penpheral (inner ear) and cen tral nervous system portions of th l'eslibu1lr or balance sy!.tem.I'r.:!requisitt!: CDS S58. 860. Amplification I. (3) . 3Ri 2L. The history and funLtian of hearing aids, auditory trainers, and a s~i~live listening device5. The measure­ IlIent and signifIcance of the electroacoustic hilracteri;.tics. The principles and procedures f?r (he ,~Iection and recommendation of ~­ ctfJc amplification svstems for individual he(lT­ Ing losses. rrerequisite; CDS 751. 861 . AmpLJ ficatioD Il. (3). Review of recent eVclopmenls in research involving the mt!ll­ 6uremenl of rea l eaT inser tion response and real ear effects of plwnbing modification . description and discussion of the performance f digital and analog/digital hybrid amplifica· tion systl'mS. A detailed evaluation of require­ men ts for amplifica tion d ispensing. Counsel­ ing techniques rela ted to hearing aid fi t ring. Prerequisite: CDS 860. 885. Advanced Methods in AuditoI)' Assess­ menl-Aud. (1). Methods in Dudiologi.c evalua· bon for audiology students. Discusses proce­ d ures for diagnostic evaluation of a broad range of auditory disorders in in fants, chil­ dren, and adults in weekly class meetings, aJong with procedures for hearing aid evaJua­ tion and fitting, counse Lin g, a nd others as appropriate. Prerequisite: audiology faculty's consent. 886. Advanced Practicum in Auditory Assess­ ment-Aud. (1). Practicum experiences encom­ passing diagnostil evaluations covering a full range of aucLtory disorders and type:. of evnlu­ awns in infants, children, and adults, includ­ ing standard audiologic batteries, masking, site-of-Jesion t4:sting, electrophysiologic mea­ surements, hearing aid fitting ,lnd dispensing, p~li en t fo llow-up, and counseling. Prerequi­ sites: audiology Jarulty's consent. Curriculum and Instruction Undergraduate teacher education in cur­ riculum and instruction i.s il five-stage competency-based program beginning with an introduction to teaching and con­ cluding with reflections on an extended student teaching experience. Through intensive academic and field experience combined wiU, systematic student reflec­ tion, the goal of this program is to pro­ duce effectiVe, in formed, and reilective teachers, capable of independent practice and continued profesSional growth. Students enter the set of course work for the teacher education program when U,ey are in their 35th hour with the Pre­ professional Block taking 0 271 and 272 concurrently . Each block thereafter con­ tains two to four classes which must be taken concurrently. The courses in each of the blocks must be taken together and completed before entering Lhe next set of course work Lower-Division Courses 201. The Computer as a Learning Tool I. (l). Provides computing skills necessary to bUCCeed in t11c academic envirorunent. Learn how to use computers and software to organiZe course work. outline and plan papers, write and edit text , search for information, compile and repor t data, and integrate data with text Apply the course content in a com puter lab under the supervision of the instl'Uctor. 271. Introduction to Professional Education. (2). Students examine the career in education, characteristics or good tea citing, the nature of teacher educ~tion programs, basic h istorical al)d ph.i.1o~oph ical founda ti ol' s of education, and employment options. They analyze their own personali ties, personal stren gths and weaknesses, and values and beliefs abou t leaching, and reach an informed dO!cision regarding their own suitabi li t)' for leaching, Prerequisites: C ur better in Engli!.h I Dnd ll, Communication, and Colkge Algebra; sopho­ more standing; 2.75U GPA; in the 35th hour; and concurrent enrollment in 0 'l72. 272. Preprofessional Field Experience. (ll . Intended primarily to give prospective teach­ ers the opportunity to consider seriously their suitability for a career in education. In add i­ tion , &tudents begin to develop skill in obSt'TV­ ing educational situations and settings wruch help them develop a teacher perspective, see­ ing schools ~s prospective workplaces ~J,d teachers ~s colleagues. Gr,1ded stu only. Pre· requisites: C or better in English 1 and n, Com­ munication, and College Algebra; sophomore standi.ng; 2.750 GPA; in the 35th houri omd con­ curren t enrollment in 0271.. 290. Directed Study. (2-3). Upper-Division Courses 303. Clinical Field ElCperience: English as a Second Language (ESL) l. (1-4). Students work with an ESL specialist to team hands-on Iotrat gies for teaching students whose native lan­ guage is not English. lllcludes observing the interre1alioniliip betw\!eI1 language and cu l ­ ture, how to use multi-level leaching strate­ gies, how to adapt materials, how to ass\!ss and grade D variety of language proficiency levels, and how to best ut ili l.l: ava il able peo ple resources (bilingual paraprofe,siona!s, parents, etc.) Lo maxlmize successful performance among this popula tion Prerequlsite..~: i:l I.:CCp­ tance into the Teacher Education Program and a Professional Development Site Prosram. 304. Clinical Field Experience: English as a Second Language (ESU U. (1-4) . An extenSion of Cl 303. Prerequisites: acceptance into the Teacher Educa tion Program and a f'rofcs:;ional Development Sit-e Program. 305. Clinical Field Experience: Special Educa­ tion I. (1-4). Students learn how speciaJ educa­ tion services are delivered 10 publlc schools; gain practical experience interncting with pub­ lie school students with variou!> labels, abili­ lies, and exceplionalities in a variety of set­ tings; and become familiar w ith related termi­ nology (PIT, lEP, SCSE, ADHD, EMR, Child Study Team, etc.), the steps used to eVllluate and place students wi th specinl needs, and approaches that work to maximize the succe:;s of all students. Prerequisites: acceptance into th.e Teadler Education Program and a Pro{e..~­ sional Development Site Program 306. Clinical Field Experience: Special Educa­ tion U. (1-4). An extension Ilf 0 305. PrerC<.lui­ sites: acceptance into the Teacher Education Program and a ProfeSSional Development Site Program. 307. Clinical Field Experience: Technology I. (1-4). Students work with teachers using tech­ 1101('gy as a teaching, learning, and/or man­ agement tool; gain h;mdo-on experience with omputers (management systems, word pTO­ cessing, internel/e-mail, graphics); become 80 familIar wilh basic t rmino)ogy; and gain expenen e in the election Bnd use of appro­ priate commerc:idl SOfhltl.lJ"t> to enh. nce the reg­ ular curriculum. Prercquisit~: aCcL'Ptancc into the Teacher Education Program and J Profes­ Slonal D vclupment Site Program 30S. Oinical Field Experience: T chnology n. (1-4). An c tension of CJ 307 Prerequisites' acceptance into the Teacher Education Pro­ gram .lnci a Professional Development Site Program 309. Oinical Field Experience: Developmen­ tally Appropriate Practices I. (1-4). Students work with teacher d '!ivering Developmental­ ly Appropnate Practices in a classroom setting: gai n experience in n sessmg developmental I vels. personalizing inslrucLi.on (devpJoping centers, using le.1ming c ntracts, tnlcturing mulb-levellessonsl. and designing and imple­ menting appropriat irtstructiolt for each level Prerequisites: acceptallCi! into the Teacher Edu­ cation Program and a Professional Develop­ ment Site Program. 3ID. Clinical field Experience: Developmen­ tally Appropriate Practice U. (1-4). An exten­ sion of Cl 309. PrereqlJisites; acceptance into the Teacher Education Program and a Profes­ sional Development Site Progmm 311. Block 1 Field Experience. (1). Provides student wit h experie.l1ceJi in socio-cultural chool and classroom ob ervations, observa­ tIons of and work in special education settings, alternative school and tutoria l work with individuals or small group settings. Graded stu onl . Prerequisite:;; acceptnnce into teach­ er educati n, cr 3ul and 302 and concurrent enrollment in CJ 320 and 430 nd CESP 334. 312. Block 2 Field Experience. (11. Focuses on pupils' learning bellaviors, n, ethods of assess­ ment, measurement, grading. curriculum goaLs and content as they influence classroom teach­ ing, and tea leTS' methods of classroom man­ agement and instruction. Graded Stu only PrerequiSites: acceptance into teacher educa­ tion, cr 3 1'1 , 320 and 430, CESP 334 nd con­ curn!!lt enr IIment in CESP 433 and a 328. 316. allJdren's literature. (3). Students exam­ ine literature !;uilable for u with children in the preschool and elementary grades. Includes reading and examination oi il wide selection ut ch ildren' literature in all ~nre . Stud~t develop evaluative techniques for identifying materials and practice In Ule use 01 selection aids. Prerequisite: acceptance into teacher edu­ cation . 320. The Exceptional Child. (2). Surveys the characteristics of exceptional learners includ­ ing; mental retardation, learnIng disabilities, emotional distu.rbances, phy ieal chalhmges, hearing/visual impairm nts, and gifted . AlEo exploTes the effect of cultural difference and humn.n development on dis bilib , Present service delivery models and current special educahon practices. Prerequisites: admissi n to teacher eJucation; a 271 and 272i concur­ n'nt enrc,llnlenL in 0 311 . 322. lrutruclionai Strategies In Language Arts and Reading: Elementary Scl1ool. (5). tu­ dents examine the c uten! and methods of inslru tion in the Ibject iU'CIlS of hngw "arts Blld reading and practice teach their subj -ts in a variety of sc tllngs. Prerequisi res: accepta nce into teacher education. CT 311 , 3 6,320, 430; CESP 334; c mpletion of or oncurrent enroU­ ment in CI 328 and CESP 433; eoncurrenl en­ rollment in a 4]3 for pracHcum e perienc:e. 32S. Curriculum, In truction and Manage­ ment. (5). rodents examine tile nature, pur­ po, and development ()( curricululII in edu­ cationa l settings They develop a knowledge and understanding of various curricul um models and how these models influence iMtruction al'ld the work f teadlers. Student!; acquire a knowledge and under­ standing of in truetiol1: tbe decisions and pro­ cesses by which teachers translate goals and objectives into classroom realities. Students become fanuliar with a wide range of practical strat~ies and t ' chniques associated wi th vari­ ous models of teaching, and learn to apply these strategies and techniques in actual and s imulated teac.hing situations. Students also acquirlo! practica l knowledge of and experience with the development and use of B wide range of iJlStrllcliunnl Illt:din aI/if tcc1muio8Y, including the use o[ computers. Stud 'nts examine nd learn to use various classroom ma1111gt'1lleltl strategies in order to maintain contTol, promote iI positive learn.ing cl imate, and facilitate the achievement of instructional objectives. Prerequisites: accep­ tance into teacher educati n; 03] 1,320, 430; CESP 334; concurrent enrollment in CESP 433 and a 312. 402. Instructional Strategies in Math and Sci­ ence: Elementary School (5). Students exam­ ine the content and methodB of instruction in their ~ubjec t .:rrea and teach their subject in a variety of elentenlary schoo! settings. Prerequj­ sites: a 312 and 328, CESP 433, Math. 501, and a physical and/or bioI glcal ience class. 406. lru.tructional Strategies in Social Studies: Elementary Scllool. (3). Studen ts examine objectives, methods of teachmg, eqU ipment and resources, and evaluation and measure­ ment in the s )cial tudjes in the elementary school. Slresses the unit method of instruction ReqUire a 15 clock hour (class l1me) field experience in the schools during normal ' ho I hoUflj. Prerequisites: acceptance into teacher educatiun and CI311 . 413. Prestudent Teaching. (1-3). Thi field experience aUow students to spend an extend ­ ed lenglh o f time in an appropriate classToom working wi~h a cooperAting teacher to p lal'l and Lmplement in truction designed to t ach dIstinct objectives and evaluat-e Learning ont­ comes. They also evaluate their own in~truc­ tion. noting strengths and weaknesse and pl3lU1ing for improvement. Graded stu only. Prerequisites: acceptance int" teacher educa­ tion; a 3U and 328 and CESP 433, or concur­ rent enrollment in these courses. 427. Philo ophy and History of Education. (2). Pr sents the major contemporary educational philo ophi • th development of American educalion, and the h ' Ioncal influences on the structure of sdlOols today. Some emphasis on the rodents' amlnation of their own educa­ tional philosophy. Prerequ is ite: entrance into teadler education, a 271 and 272. 430. Social/Multicultural Education. (3). E.xamines the sociaJ and multicultural founda­ tions of education and ch ols in a changing society In add ition students develop an appre­ ciat ion for the changing ethnic and cultural characteIlstics of American schools. Prerequi­ sit : acceptance into teacher education indud­ ing succe' ful completion of a 2Tl and 272 and concurrent enroll meni in CI 311 and 320 and CESP 334. 446. Student Teaching Seminar: Elementary. (1). tuden! tudy and di cu exp r iences emerging from student teaching indud ing the planning ui scl\ool programs and a Ulll ing the responsibHitie..o; of a teacher. Graded C,.INer only Prerequi ite : acceptance into teacher education; a 322, 402, 406; concurrent enroll­ ment in a 447 and 457, 447. Student Teaching in the Elementny School. (8-15). The primary purpose f tudcnt teach ing field experience is t provirlo: v i­ dence of the preservice teacher's readiness to engage in independent reflective practice as a certified teacher. Working with one or m re cooperating teachers in the schools. presemce teachers gradually assume responsibility for in~tructing a full complem nt of clas e • including a futl schedule for at lea t 10 days Prerequisites; acceptance into teacher educa­ tion; CI 322, 402, 406; concurrent enrollment in CI446 and 457 The student teaching semester is required of all students working toward (1 degree certifi­ cate In education. EVl!ry tudent wi hing to receive he certificate must flle an application, available in 151 C )rbin, with the certification office. Application tor the faIl semester must be filed by February 1 and for spring semester by September 1. The only \!xception to the required number of sem ster hours is the transfer student wh has taken tudent teacn­ ing elsewhere, or students who hold other cer­ tificates or who may hav\! taught a number of yeaTS. Any deViations from established grade point averages and utht1r regulati n must he approved by the CoUeg of Educati n's Stan­ danis Committee. 44S. Student Teaching in Early Childh.ood. (4­ 6). This field experience provides halHime participa tion in the preschool (Ulfee- and four­ year-{)Ids) under guidance of iI master teacher and a college ' up'rvis r. PrereqUi ites; 1322. 402 and 406 and nine semester hours of early hildhood education Prerequi ite may bE' v.'aived fo r equivalent experience with depaTt­ mental consent. See a 447 lor deadlines f r fil­ ing an application to enr 11 in student teach· ing. -lSI. Student Teaching in the Elementary School: Music. (4). PrereqUisites: acceptance i nto leacher education, CJ 328, CESP 433, methods in the sub ject area, and concurrent enroll men t in Cl 45 7 and studen t teaching emjn.ar. 452. Special Studies in Education. (1-3) . Pri · marily for ele.m~tary ilnd secondary educa­ tion majors. Repeatable with advisors consent 454. lruJtructional Strategies: Secondary. (3). ( [1) Engli h; (F) Foreign Language; (j) Social Studies; (M) Mathematics; (Sl Science. Student:!' examine the conten t and methods of in truc· tion in their subject area and teadl their subject in a variety f settings. La addih n, students -- COLLEGE OF EDUCATION / CURRICULUM AND INSTRUCTION 81 arl! provided with the understanding of the develupment oJ learning and reading .kills ilnd explore instructional approaches for guid­ ing sccondary students In those skills and their llse In content areas. Prerequisites: acceptance into leacher education, a 312 and 328, CESP 433, ;lnu conclll't'ent enrollment In 0 413. 455. Student Teaching Seminar: Secondary. (1). fE) English; (F) Foreign Language; \]) Social Studif.'S) (M) MaU1emabCS; (S) Science. Studen stul.ly and discuss experiences emergmg from , lU denl leaching including planning school programs and assuming the responsibilities of a t~cher. Prerequisites: acceptance into teach· er education; 0 312, 328, 413, 454, CESP 433; and concurrent enrollment in a 457 ilnd stu­ den t teaching. 457. Senior Seminar. (1) . Students engage in refl ective practic(' during their professional semester, reflecting on the sodil l, cultural, philosophical, and psychological foundations of education as they relali> to prachce. Students examine the role of the teacher as a pn)fessional: legal concepts related to employ­ ment, the role of the teacher in the educational SYstem. ethics of the profession, communica­ tion skills as a staff member, planning for and scheduling aide..~ and volunteers. Provides stu· denls with the opportunity to connect HeI experiences and reflective practice and th WSU College of Education Teacher Education Program. Prerequisites: acceptance into teacher education and concurrent enrollme.nt in stu­ dlmt lenchlng and student teach.illg seminar. 459. Student Teaching in lhe Elementary School; Art. (4). Prerequisites: acceptance into teacher education, 0 328 and CESP 433, 2.500 CPA In the major, and concurrent enrollment in 0 457 and student teac.h.ing seminar. ' Student Teaching-Second.uy School. The 'Iudenl teachi ng semester is required of all studenl!; working toward a secondary certifi­ cate and is a full-time assignment. Application for approval to enroll in the program must be made m the certification office by FebTUary 1 for the fall semester or by Seplember 1 for the spn ng semester. In addition , students must obtain .Ipproval from the representative of lhe subject area in which they wish tu ~tuden t teach before placement can be cOl\Sldered. . 11 i~ expe...'ied that students will student teach m their fi eld (If .major interest. However, mdi­ viduals who are well preptlred in more than one fielJ may apply to student teach in a sec­ ond fi(!ld, but they must take the speciAl meth­ ods course in the "econd field before entering the student teaching semester. !he assignment for student teaching begins \V l tll the opening of the public school semester, and enrollees must arrange to meet from !I a.m. to 5 p.m. daily and to be available for selected evening programs throughout the semester. . Prerequisites: acceptance into teacher educa­ hon. m.elhods in the subject area, and concur­ rent tmrollment in CI 457 and !>tudent teaching seminar. "For 'Pl'CiJ.l areas see a 462 through 466. 462. Student Teaching: Secondary Art. (4) . Prerequisites: acceptance into teacher educa­ tIon. methods in the 5ub,ect area, 2.500 CPA in the maj(}r, and concurrent enrollment in CI -!57 and student teaching seminar. 465. Student Teaching: Secondary English. (8­ 15). Prerequisites; i'lcceptance into teacher ~u· cation, a 413 and 454, 2.500 CPA in the major, and concurrent I!nrollment in a 457 and ~tu­ dent teaching seminar. 466. Student Teaching: Secondary Foreign Language. (81. Prerequisites: acceptance into teacher education; 0 312, 328; CPSI' 433; 2.500 GPA in tlw major; ~nd concurre.nt enrollment in instructional ,tratcgies, 0 457, and student teaching seminar. 468. Student Teaclting: Secondary Social Studies. (8-15). Prerequisites: acceptance int teacher education, a 413 ~nd 454,2.500 GPA in the major, and concurrenL enrollment in Cl 457 and student teadting seminar. 469. Student Teaching: Secondary Music. (4). Prerequisites; acceptance in to teacher educa­ tion, methods Il1 the subject area, a 312 and 328 asp 433, 2.500 GPA in the major, ..md concurrent enrollment in Cl 457 and student teaching seminilr 471M. Student Teaching: Secondary Mathe­ matics. (8-15) . Prerequisites: acceptance into teacher education, 0413 and 454, 2.500 GPA in t.he major, and concurrent enrollment in a 457 and studcnlteacl1ing seminar. 4715. Student Teaching: Secondary Science. (8-15). Prerequisites' acceptilnce Into teacher education, CI 413 and 454, 2.500 GPA in the major, and concurrent en.ollment in a 457 and student teaching seminar. 481. Cooperative Education. (1-8). Provides the student a work-related p lacement that inte­ grates theory with iI planned and supervised professional experience desi!!;T\ed to comple­ ment and enhance the student's acadeIIllc pro­ gram. Prerequis ites: .!>uccessful completion of 24 credit hours and a 2.500 GPA. Rl'peatablc for credit . Offered Cr/NCt . 49Q. Individual Studies In Educalio-n. (1-3). Courses for Graduate/Undergraduate Credit 541. Desktop Publishing L (3). Desktop pub­ lishers control the entire publishing process, fTom creation and typesetting to printing and distribution, witi} equipment from the desktop. Word processi ng on the pe.r~ona l computer an d laser printing are the two technological achlevements LJ1at make pOSSible a desktop publishing revolution. Stresses type design, harm()JlY, legibility, copy fitti .ng. and layout fundamentals . 542. Desktop Pu.blishing n. (3). An intermedi­ ate-level course which enhanees, enriches. nnd develops further skilL'! and techniques used in desktop publishing. Students select software packages in which they need additional depth toward master·level. Prerequ.lSite: 0 541 . 615. Learning and Reading Strategies. (3). Stu­ dents are provided WIth tl1e understanding of lhe development of learning and reading strategies and explore instructional approache for guiding secondary students in those strate­ gies and their use in content areas. 616. Literature for Adolescents. (3). Students participate in extenslVe reading of literature in all genres consistent with ... t'Udies of adoles­ cents; fl!Clding interests, abilities, ;md rl.!SJlon<;es to ltterature. Prerequisite!' acceptance into teacher eduralion. Currently and prevlOuslv certified teachers meet prerequl"ites. 621. l.nsttuctional Strategies: Middle Le\'el Education. (3). Students examine the middle b'Tadcs school as an organization that tilkes ilS design spccifical l)' (rom the analy~i5 IIf 10· 14 ear olds, their charactenstics, and their ne\!ds. Students examine many L-orriCUlar and instruc­ tionaJ alternlltives for middle grades ed uClltion and learn to manllge chan~es. 701. Foundations of Education. (3). Student~ survey the various foundalion!> areas, includ­ ing philosophical, hIstorical, social. and com­ parative. This course is prerequisite tL> subse­ quent foundation~ COurlOes. Prerequi.site grad· uate standing. 702. Introduction to Exceptional Children. (3). A survey of the characteristics (If el: admi~sjon to gr.ldunt" school, CESP}01. 707. introduction to Mildly Handicapped. (3). Examine the roles a.nd rcspon::;iblJities (If spe­ cial educators in curriculum development and implementation. A current issue will be covered under this course number. an umbrella number for ,l vari­ e ty of topics/innovations IJl curricuJum. Repcatal:>le 709. Current Topics in Instruction. (1-3) . Addresses a broad r.lnge of topical issues in current practices for effective instruction. A current issuf: will be covered under this cOur~e number, an umbrella number for il \',lriety of lopics/innovations in ill5tructiona I practices. Repeatable. 82 710. Current Topj in C1illisroom Manage­ ment. (1-3). Addre es a broad ran eo topi al issUi$ in current LW r (1m m. nag('mcnt pr e­ ti c . A run nt i ue wilt b~ vered un der this course number, an 1I01breJla number for a voril!ty )f topic I innovation5 in c1 room management . Repealable. 711. Multicultural Education. (3). mpha~iz • tudtmts understanding multiple perspective il\ a global society and developing multi Ie m(1dalit " [ulturil ily (twar curriculum expcri­ ell • , Pr vid s disciplined inquiry and critical experience "to b !Come morl! responSIve to the human onditia rly childhood special education fOT (a) legal foundations (IDEA. Part B), (b) characterbti of l~arner , (c) assess­ ment. dJagnosis, and evaluation, (d) report and IndIVIdualized -ducation Plan (lEP) deVelop­ ment, (e) instTuctional content and man age­ ment trategies. (f) instructiona l ntent and practice, (g) pLanning and mana 'ng the teach­ iug and learning environment, (h) mnnaging student bell vior and i I internti n kills, (i) collabor ting and forming partnerships with family members and other profes ionals. (j) professiona l and ethical practices, and Ck) strateg ies for work ing with studen t with exceptional learning n -cd in general and spe­ cial education preschool settiJlgS. PrereqUisites: Cl 320 or 702, Cl 7-10, aJmission to the Teacher Ed ucation Program or to the Special Ed gradu­ ate program as an n- degree st ude nl, or instruct r' onsent. 747L Practicum: ESUBilingual Education (K­ 12 or adult). (3). r ro 'des Cull-time participa­ tion in an ESL las supervh?d by a master teadler and a University professor. Focuses on th plicat ion of teach in g methods [or ESL/bilingual learners, the appropriate U\ie of formal and informal assessment procedures, the development of eros "cultural teaching strategi ,and the integration of language \ ith content-area in. tructi n. Prerequi ites I 430 or 711 , CI 755U, CDS 676 750. Workshops in Education. (1-4). 751, 752, 753, 754, or 755, Special Studie in Education. (1-3 ) . For ' lementary and se c­ ondary school teachers. Repeat.lbie with adVI' . r's con. 'nL PTCl'ei.luisite· teacher certificati n or departmental consent. 760, Pouent ducation. (3) . An introt.!lIclion t ) way llf w rking with parent& a f preschOl.l1 and elementary children. ad an analy is of for· lTIa l and informal approaches emphasizing the teacher' role in developing the e pre> edur . 76L Early Childhood Education. (3). Students e 'amine program , problems, and philo ophl of educating children in the pre chool years, 762. Instructional Strategies: Preschool Edu­ cation. (3). ludents examine the content and methods of instruction 111 preschool an bserv /teach in, variety of ettings. tudent<. , tudy teaching methods for prescho I hildTl'n and prepare materia ls to enhance the lelecommunic ­ ti ons, multimedia app lications, in tegra ted media, and new hardware and operating sytr tems . Prerequisite; CI 770M or CI 770r or instruct()r' consent. 172M. Macintosh in the Classroom. (3). A comprehen-lve intTodlKtion t iI wid\! range of in5tructioncll applications f the MaCintosh compu ter and re lated tec hno lo y. Covers teacher management tooL~ such as gradebooks, database milnagement, and test constru lion software; development of instructi nal materi­ iI in print, on screen, and with hyp rmedia; apprcJpnate appli ca tio n of CD-ROM theory with a planned and supervised profes­ sional experience del>igned to complement and enhance tilt! student'S academic program. 782. Internet [or Educators. (2). Learn how to ities appropriate for graduate- level 'tudy and applicable in an educational setting. Prerpq uisite : C1 770M or 770P and 0 782 or lnstructtlr'S consenL 786. Stfuchued BASIC_ (2). Designed to pre­ pare middle schO<.\1 and high school teachers to leach bl:ginning p rogramming courses Tech­ nlgu[!S include top-down programming. mod­ uj".rlZati (tn , subroutines, debugging. documen­ t"IIon preparation, and dUferen t data types Inc lUding string. integers, real numbeTs, and file manipulations. Pre.requisite: C1 770M or 7701' 790 . Special Prob lems in Bduca tion. (1-4) . Directed read ing, activity, or research under supervision of a graduate instructor. Prerequi­ site: departmental consent. 79L Practicum: Methods of Computer-Re lal­ ed Instruction (2). Investigate teachin g and learning stralegies related to the use of com­ puters in the classroom. Includes the design and ma nagement oi instructional activities related to software integration, programming, and the development and assessment of com­ p uter-related studen t competencies. Student!> will be supervised in the field while they apply methods and principles of computer-related instruction Prerequisite: Cl 772M or m p or department consent. 793. Mu ltimedia in the Classroom. (2). Pre­ pares educators to plan and create mullinledia presentations. lnc1udes digitiz.ing audio and video, storyboards, scripting, appropriate hardware, and authoring software. Courses for Graduate Students Only 802. Seminar on Current lssues in Special Educafion. (3). Analyze and critique research, integrote u nderstandings, eva luate current issues in light of historical events, and draw onclusions relating theory to practice. Stu­ dents make oral and written presentations . Prerequisite: with in 6 hours of graduation. CESP70L 804. Oilssroom Research in Curriculum i1nd Lnstruction . (6). This integrated class guides students .in using classroom research principles to collect, analyze, interpret, and report data to develop solutions fo r curriculum, instruction. and s tudent issues . Prerequisite: successful completion of a 731. 807. Philosophy, History, and Psychology of Secondary and Blemen tary Education. (3). Students survey of concepts of mind, learning, experience, and kI1owledge, and philosophicaJ, historical. and psychological systems aJ'd theo­ ries as they relate to current educational prob­ lems and practices. Prerequisite: Cl 70l. 809. Poundatiom; and Characteristics of Mild Exceptionalities. (3). Introduces students t the principles, concepts, and historical founda ­ tions underlying the provision l) f services fo r students with mild exceptionalities. Explains charocteristiC6 of students identified as having behavior disorders, learning disabili ties, OT mental retardation. Discusses legal and ethical pdnciples re lated to varIOU S delivery appToaches, and examines roles oJ the students with exceptional learning needs, their parents, and educatoTs as well as related services and comm u nity persolmel. Disc usses current developments in the field of special education. Prerequisites: CI 320 or 702, a 430 or 711, CJ 723 and 724. and ful l admission to the MEd program in spedaJ education; OT instructor's consent. 810. Methods U: Social Skills fOT Mild Excep­ tionaJities. (3). Provides the knowledge and skills necessary to teach social skills and J fie0­ tivc ed ucation to child ren and you th w ith exceptionality. Prerequisites! full admission to the graduate program, Cl 723, 724. 1309, and 887. Per:mission from the instructor for l\l8jors in other IlUlster's degree progrnms. 811. Family and Professional Collaboration . (3). Assists the special eduGltor in developing the skills to collaborate iUld '(lnsult with par­ ents, siblings. regular educators, support per­ sonnel. and community agencies to faci li tate the needs of children with exceptionality. Pre­ requisites: full admission to the graduate pro­ graxn, CI 723. 724, 809, and 887. Permission from the il1Structor for majors in other master's degree programs. 81 2. Transition Across the Life Span. (3). Examines aspects of transition programming for indivi d uals With exceptlOnalities across their life span. Addresses transitions fTom (a) early childhood special education sett ings to the school environment, (b) elementil ry to mid­ dle school, (c ) middle school to high school, (d ) one spl.'Cial education setting to ,lnother (e.g., self-contained classroom to resource room or genera l ed ucation classroom ), a nd (e) high ~chool to post-secondary settings and indepen­ dent functioning. Discusses role:. of mdlvidu­ il ls wi th excep ti onal learnu' g needs, parents, educators. and communiiy personnel. Prereq­ uisi.tes: a 809, full admission to the MEd pro­ gram in special education, or instructor's con­ sent. 821. Oassroom Reading Practicum. (3). Stu­ dent5 participate in a practicum experience, delivering developmentaJ iI11d corrective ~ad­ ing instruction in a classroom setting . Prereq­ uisire: a 705. 835. Instructional Models and Practices. (3). For teachers (l ) 10 explore the theories behind, the development o f, and the sy n taxes for viable instructjonal practic:es; (2 ) ttl apply instructional models to the analvsis and evalu­ ation of various learning enviro~ents; and (3) to develop a commJtmeot as a reflective practi­ tioner to more eiftoctive instruction through an expanded and integrated repertoire of leaching trategitls . Prerequisites: admission to MEent. 843. The Professional Educator and Portfolio. (6). This integrated course em phasizes apphca­ ti on of p rofeSSIOna l behav ior, cl assroom research skLl1s, \: 'mmunic hon/presentation skills, and reflection. A pr fe sional portfolio dOCllmentlng the a ttajnment o f the MEd in Curricu lum and Instruct ion program's goals will e completed lU1d resented to a fa culty ornmittee. 845. Cwriculum Models and Practices. (3). Examines th orie·, development processes, e aluation procedures, and current practices in curriculum. Empha ites multiple c nceptual framework for thinking ab ut curriculum and refiecti e inquiry iI,t(l lh implications 01 lho~e i ram wor k in today ' s d a r oms and scho Is. Pre.requi:; ites; admission t MEd in Curriculwn and instructIOn program, CESP 701.. 847A. Praclicum/inlemship in Early Child­ hood Special Education. /1-10). Provides 6 u­ dents with arti ipa tion in a cl ass for early childhood hancticapped (84.7Al, children/ ado­ lescents with I"" ming di"''lbilities (tyI1 ), edu­ cable ment 1 relardatlO n ( 471), (lr behavior dis rders (847K) 5upervi 'ed a master teach­ er a nJ Uni er ity pro fessor, emp ha:. izing applied teaching methods for studen t with mild exception ali ties, including formal-infor­ mal psycho-ed ucation, I sessme.n t devi es, curriculum strategies, behaVIO r mana em nt, a nd prescrip tiv remediR tion for academic deficits. Pr re,-!uisites: full ddmissi . n to rEd program in special educa tion, Cl 723, 724, 8 , and 87. 841£. Practicum/lntemsbip in Learning Dis­ abilities. (1-10). See 847 , including prereq­ uisi tes. 847H. PracUcum in Center-Ba edfHome­ Based l!arly Childhood Handicapped (ECH). (3). Provid S opp rtunitie for the student to develop clin ical compelencies with hand i­ capped ()u ng chjldren ,nd th.eJT pa.rents under the upervision of trained. pro es ionals in the fie ld and while working tn the center and the homes of th client chilur~·n. Prerequi­ sites: CJ 740, 847R, 891; CDS 815 or a 760; and departmental consent. 8471. Practicumllntemship in Educable Men­ tally Handicapped . (I -10). See CI 847A , induding prerequisit . 847K. Practicumllnte.mship in Behavior Dis­ orde£s. (1-10). See a 847A, indudin prerequ i­ sites. 847M. Prac ticum: Gifted. (3-6). Stresse" applied teachmg approach . Provides 0ppllT­ tunities to <1pply various tn or ti 1, t",ctura" and tedUlOlogical methodologies related to the education of the giJted learner. Prerequisites: CI 7 r and 883. 847R . Pra.cticum: Regular Early Childhood. (3). Pro\' ides opportunities in a tracti tional set­ ting or the s tuden t to develop competencies with oung children by working in 0 cia s­ room sell ing with train d pr f ional. Pre­ re<.luisite . CI761 and 762. 853. Improvement of instruction in Language Arts. (3). Students e amine recen t develop­ ments in the teaching of language arts in ele-· menl Jry and/or m iddl' 'chool grad .. ; prob­ lem. , concern , me thod s, materi b , an d researd l relnted to listening and to oral, writ­ t(!n , and v is ua l comm unication including "seho I" writing and reative writing. 5tu ­ denu; select particu lar concepts and re lated skills for special attention. 854. improvement of Instruction i.n Social Studies. (3). Studen ts examine recen t changes in social studies curriculum and instTu Hon to in tigate strengths and limita tions of various approaches. Stres es compete.ncy in teaching for cvncept development, dealing with value­ laden ius, and teaching f r inquiry . An 111quiry-c1?ntered learning environmen t empha­ sizes personalizing the social studies curri u­ lum for ' hi ldren. Alternative teaching strate­ gies and c mplcmentary evalua tive techniques are rcvi wed and practiced. 855. Models and Practices of Curriculum and In truchon. (6) . Examines theori behind, th development of, current practi es aJ\d trends in .. tlnd evaluation and assessment procedures perta ini ng to curriculum and instructi (ln. mphasizes mulhple con eptua l frameworks for thinking about curriculum and instTucti n, and reflec tive inquiry into th implications of lhose frameworks In taday's classrooms. Pre­ requiSite: a 706. 856. Improvement of Instruction in Mathe­ matics. (3) . Stud nts examine recen t trends in subject matter content and teaching gu.ides to improve understanding of meanings, vocabu­ lary, (lnd ma thematical concepts . In ludes instructional method and materials. 861. Seminar in Special Education ReJiearch. (3). Deveiopm t and presentation of research proposal. Prerequisite: adm i.ssion to MEd in Curriculum. and Instruction, CI 70 , CESP 701. 862. Profes ional Portfolio Development. (2). Students develop the professional p or tfollo proposed and accepted in a 860. 10 consulta­ tion with tbelr portfolio advisor and two other faculty members, students proceed with their approved agendas. Prerequisite: Cl86O. 863. Presentation of Professional Portfolio. (2). Students ompl te, present to thelr faculty portf lit) committee, and orally defend the pro­ f~sional portfolio proposed. in Cl 860. Prereq­ uisi tes: CI 860 , nd 862 (or oncurreru enroll­ ment in CI 8 2) 870. Trends in Early Childhood Education. (3). Students anal ze curr nt early ' hildhood education research w'ith an in-depth study of contemporary programs in fluenci ng the d u­ cati n of young ch ildr n. 875-876. Master's TI1csis. (2-2). Students (0111­ plde thei:r resean:h propo'al that was accepted by their thesis ommi ttee. Als.o requirbi i the ompleli 11 and oral ctefuns f the student's thesis. Students w r closely with theu advi ­ sor and committee. Students neecting an addi­ tiona l semester to satisfy these requirements hould enroll in Q 876. Students receive cred it for course(s) when their thesis has been com­ pleted. ilnd defended. Prerequisite; CI 860. 883. Methods in Teaching the Gifted . (3). Stu­ den ts examine slra tegies and techmques for plamting qualitatively differen tiated curricu­ lum to meel the u nique a ademic needs of the gifted learner. Students explore a variety of lrriculum approaches inducting acceleration, enrichment, compacting, grouping, and ombi­ nations oi these. Prerequisite: 735. 887. Assessment and Analysis of the Leamer. (3). Students Ie m the appliultion of standard­ ized nd i.nfo rma l eva lua tio n techniq ues including ritical evaluati n of sta nd ardized tests and th ir, ppropriatene s for special p p­ u lations (i ndud ing school-age individ uals with exceptionallH and reading disabilities as well as young chi1dren nd culturally and linguistically diverse learners), and altemative methods f as_l'ssment and intervention tech­ niques based n d iagno tic profiles. Pr requi­ sites: a 320 r 702, 430 or 711, 723 and 724, full admission to lhe MEd program in sped/ll edu­ cation, or instructor' 5 consent. 888. Method : Mildly Handicapped. (3). Stu­ dents master specified comp tencies in teach­ ing specia l stude nts incl uding use of data ba ed instruction; strategies for reading assess­ ment; techn iques to improve reading, ma th, and written language skills; and stra tegies for working with other teachers to facilitate mai n­ streaming of special stlldents. Prerequisites: CI 707 and acceptance in to the MEd, s p 'cial edu­ cation for mildly handicapped program. 894. Advanced Topics in Eady Childhood Special Education. (1-4). Studen ts participate in to pical s minars in earl y interve n ti on off red p riodically to facili tate opportunities for the in-depth study of cri ti cal issues or topi· cal research in this rapid ly developing field. Prer qu O it .: CI 740, 741, 842, 847R. 887, and 892 or in !ructo r' s consent. Repeatable for credit. Kinesiology and Sport Studies The mission f the Department of Kinesi­ ology and SpOft Studies is to prepare tu­ dents fOf careers in exercise science, phys­ ical education, and sport administra tion, as well as to provide the University com­ mu nity with physica l a tiv ity experi ­ ences. Students are pro idee! with quality instruction and practical experiences by faculty who engage in intellectual inquiry and service to the community and profes­ sion. The following degrees are offered: a BA degree in sp rt ad.m.i.nistration, B degree in physical educa tion: K-12, and a SA d gree in physical education: exercise science. Each degree area p rovides stu­ dents with a quali ty education leading t numerous career opportunities. COLLEGE OF EDUCATION / KINESIOLOGY AND SPORT STUDIES 85 Physical Education: K-U Wi'chita Slate's elementary and secondary physical education teacher preparation degree program offers it quali ty educa­ tion for students desiring a career teach­ ing physical educa tion. The curricuJum provides students with a scien tific and practical bac:kground u pon which to base teaching content and methods. The K-12 program addresses the importance of a developmentally appropriate curriculum based on tlle national physical educatiO)l standards. Students are provided a mini­ mum of 45 contact hours W Ith K-12 stu­ dents during pre-student teaching experi­ ences. Gradua tes qualify for the Kansas teacher certification in physical education K-12. Physical Education: Exercise Science wichita State's physical education: exer­ cise science degree program offers a qual­ ity curriculum with a variety of options including science, pre-physical therapy, sport admin istration, gerontology, and athletic train.ing. Students in lhe exercise science degree option comp lete both practicum a nd internship requiremen ts. The department also has a comprehen­ sive human performance laboratory tha t is available for students completing exer­ ciSE! science course work. Graduates of this program work in a variety of settings includ ing corporate fitness programs, schools, hospital wellness programs, for­ profi t health clubs, and community-based programs. Sport Administration Wich it" State ' s sport administration degree provides students with a quality curriculum includ ing courses such as sport marketing, sport law, sport man­ agement, and sport facili ty management. Students pursuing the sport administra­ tion degree program complete a two­ semester internship requirement (or its equivalen t). Graduates of th is program work in a variety of sport settings includ­ ing intercollegiate sports, minor Jeague professional sports, major league profes­ sional sports, park and recreation depart­ men b, and in the health club / fitness industry. Certifications State certification in Health Education is available through a program which pro­ vides an endorsement to teach K-12 health. This course of study includes the knowledge base and practical experiences necessary 50 the graduate call provide a Comprehensive health education program In the school setting. Minor in Exercise Science The exercise science minor consists of 23 cred it hours including the following courses: KSS 201£, KSS 328, KSS 331, KSS 440, KSS 470, KSS 530, HS 331Q and a prerequis ite course in Ana tomy and Physiology. This program prepares you for careers il1 tlle fitness industry and for cerU£ication exams. MinOT in Sport Administration The sport administration minor consists of 18 cred it hours incl uding the following courses: KSS 525, 560, 565; Mkt. 300; and two of the following three courses KSS 475, 520, and 544. This program prepares you for careers in the athletic / spor t industry . Service Program Physical educa tion activity courses carry one hour of credit. They fall into rune areas. Physical Education Activity Courses. 101. Team Activities. (1) . 102. Individual Activities. (1). 103. Combalives. (1). 105. Gynmaslics. (1). 106. Fitness Activities. (1). 107. Aquatics. (1-2). lOB. Combined Activities. (1). 110. Varsity Activities. (1) . Activity courses in the service program may be repeated for credit . Students should consult their college requirements to asce.rtain whether the activity credits will count in a specific program. Lower-Division Courses 111. Foundations in Physical Education, Sport, and Fitness. (3). Introduction to the his­ lory, principles, philosophy, a.nd founda tions of physical educa tion with concomi tan t out­ growths fo r modem society. 112. Introduction to Sport Administration. (3). Introduction to the diScipline of sport admillis­ tra tion and its vast array of career opportuni­ ties (since the sp ort industry represents the eleventh l(lrgest industry in the US). 115. Personal and Community Health. (3). Inl rod uctory course to study the m ultiple imensions of personal health and the outside (orces thai shape health, llfestyle, d isease, aging, death, and dying. Responsiliilil.ies for ne's health is fostered through the use of we[)ness inventories , lifestyle assessmen ts, nutritional analyses, and goal-setting. 117. Community First Aid and Community CPR. (2). Community first aid and commuruty cardiopulmonary resuscita tion w ith certifica­ tion by the American Red Cross. 125. Health/Wellness Concepts. (1). Teaches health and weJlness conct.'pts to promote living a positive, healthy life . Covets behavioT­ ch ange theory to maximize the chances that behavior changes s timulated during the class will be come permanent. 150. Workshop. (1-3). 152. Special Studies in Health, Physical Edu­ cation, and Recreation. (1-3). Group study activi ties in preselected area:; of heal th, physi­ cal educatioD, or recreation . Repea table for credit with departmen t.u consent. Prerequ.isite: departmental consent. 201A. Introduction to Activities. (2). Intro­ d uces the major student to the bask skills of badmin ton, tennis, and flag football. 2018 . Introduction to Activities. (2) . In tro­ d uces tile major student to the basic skills of golf, bowling, and archery. 20iC. Introduction to Activities. (2). Intro­ duces the majur s tudent to the basic skilli of softball, volleyball, and activities for rn iddle schooL 2010. Introduction to Activities. (2). In tru­ duces the major student to the basic skill" of soccer, basketball. and fitness activities. 20tE. Introduction to Fitness Activities. (2). In troduction to activities appm priate for fi t­ ness/weLlness programs. PrerequIsite: depart· mental. major or departmental consent. 20lF. Introduction to Gymnastics. (2). Basic skill development, teaching techniques, and progression appropriate fo r K-12 grades in gymnastic activities . 229. Applied Human Anatomy. (3). A study of the s tructure and function of the skeletal (lnd muscular systems of the human bl'dy w ith direct application to body movements in phys­ ical activities. 270. Motor Leaming. (3). The introduction and examination of the physiological and psych()­ log ical factors that affect the acq uisition of motor skills. 280G. Fitness for Life. (2). 1 R; 2L. The whys and hows behind activities designed to devel ­ op and maintain the muscular a.nd c parameters. Upper-Division Courses 306. Water Safety lnstrudor. (2). 1R; 21. Meets American Red Cross stand ards fol' cerHficatiol) in Emerge.ncy Water SaJety and Water Safety Instructor Training. Student must show profi­ cie.ncy at the American Red Cross Swimmer­ skill level wi thin th ree weeks after enro)] ing. Prerequisite: KSS 107 A or departmenta l con­ se.nt. 310. Methods in Physical Educ.ation. (3). Pre­ senta tio n an d particip ati on in me thods of 6 leaching phy, ka l educati n, mpha iz ing techn iques, skills, organizati. n of activi ties, and classroom procedures. PTerequisites; KSS 270 lind 2011\, n, C, D, adm issi n to teacher education bl()ck, and w mpletion of Preprofes­ ~ional BI -k. 31'1. Method and Tecl1niques 1. (3). Methods, f chniques, h!aching progression. analysis, aod skill d ve10pmenl of badmi.nton, telUlis, nag f tbilll. golf, bowli ng. nd archery. Requires 30 h urs f field experiences and observation in selected high schools. Prerequisite: Block t of te ch r education program. 312. Methods and Techniques. n. (3). Meth­ ds, techniques, te..'l,ching progression. anAly~is, and kill development of softba ll, volleyball. soccer, basketball, fittle activities, and acb vi­ lies f(H middle school. Requires 30 hO llY- of field experiences and observa ti(m in 1.'1 cted mlddll" schoob . Prerequisite; Block I of teacher education program, 326. Physica I Education in the Primary Grades_ (3). 3R; 2L Second in the serie for lin emphasiS in elem ntary -chuol physical educa­ tion . Focuses on devt!lopmenlal movement activitIes (or ch ildren in trades K-2. ln cludes lS It urs of laboratory e. p~riences with prima­ ry school chi ldren. PreTequisite: Block I of teacher I!ducation program, 327. Physical Education in the [ntennediale Grad.es. (3). 3R; 21. final courSE! in the senes for an mphasi$ in elementary dlOOl phy ieal education Assists students in develuping the neces ary 5kills to teach physi al education in grades 3-6 1:ncludes 15 hour in laboratory experienc with intermediate grade school children. Prerequisite: Block I of adler educa­ tion program. 328. Kinesiology and Biomechanics. (3). The understanding of the kinest.hetics an mechan­ ics of hurnan motion with respect t perfor­ manCe of sport activities. Prerequisite: £­ elected loc.,l health agencies. AdditionaJ pro­ j cts required for graduate tudents. Prerequi­ sites: Block rof teacher education program. 502. Applied Health I. (2) . lntroduction to public heallh problems and pra ticeb . Field excursions ilre arranged . Prerequisite; depru't ­ mental consent. 504. Applied Health O. (2). Intensive study of selected health probl ms with regard LO illness prevention and the presen t state \ f worl d health. Prerequi ite: KS 502 or departmental on:;enl 515. Rhythmic Activities. (2,). Teaches method­ ology and curricular content of rhythmic actlV' iti s appropr iate for el\!mcntary and middlt: school children. Prerequisites: Block I ,1f teach­ er education program. 520. Sport Tournament and Event Manage­ ment. (3). A detailed acc unt of the structural designs, math 'Iatieal calculations, scheduiing rindpl ,procedures, and th ught processes involved in the organizing and condu ling of sport tournaments and events. 525. Sport Facility Management. (3), Focuses on various aspects of fa iIIty management, suc.h as mission development, fu nd ing .1.nd budget, site selection/planning/design , fl OM surfaces, risk management, equipm n t pur­ chase and maintenance, and personnel ma n­ agement. 526. Sport Public Relations. (3). Fo uses on the applic, ti n ,)f p ublic r lalioru pein 'pl in a sport-related setting. Significant attention to m!.'<1 iJ. relations with spedlic topics !11 luding COLLEGE OF EDUCATION /KlNESIOLOGY AND SPORT STUDIES 87 men ia guides and p ublication s. handling st~ti.st!cs, and crisis management 528. Sport Finance. (3). Introduces the sport administration student to financial challenges, fi nancial statements. fin,)ndal plann ing. and reJ,1ted issues within sport organizatlon~ 530. Physiology 01 Exercise. (3). 3R; 1 L. Pro­ vides <1 working knowledge of human physiol­ ogy as it relntes to exercise. Prerequisite: 1<55 22Qor Ilqui V'.t1ent. 533. Measurement and Evaluation in Physical Education. (3). A study of !:he modern prac­ tices utilized In the total evaluation of physical "ducalion progril1Jls including (1) basic statisti­ il l procedures, (2) eval uating students. (3 ) evaluating tcachins. and (4) a survey of mea­ urement tools. Prerequisite: KSS 111 and 201 A or BorE. 540. Seminar in Sport Business. (3). Integrates thL' knowledge base of sport a.nd business as they apply in the practical setting. Prerequi­ sites: 2.5 GPA, admission to College of Educa­ tion, KSS 460, and senior standing. 544. Organization and Administration of Physical Education Programs. (3) . The orgllni­ I.a tional and i1dministrative problems of physi­ ca l education programs and the management 01 the phySical plant 541A. Internship in Sport Administration. (8). : ul mi nating act ivity for students in sport administration . Students spend the equivalent. 01 full- time employment in t.he appropriate agenC')' for a total of at leru;t 520 h()urs. Prereq­ tililtes: KS5 46ll (when applicable), 2.500 GPA llver,,11 and in major, senior standing in Col­ lege nCEducation, advisor's approval. 5478. Tntemship in Sport Administration. (8). Second ln temship experience for student!. in ,port administralion; takes place in a different &etf in g Ulan KSS 5<17A . Students spend the equi valent of fulJ-tjme employm~nt in the appropriate agency for a total of at least 52 hou rs . Pr~req uisites : KSS 547A , 2,500 GPA overall imd in major, sen ior ~tanJing in Col­ I~ge of Education, advisor's approval . 557. Internship in Fitness/Wellness (8). Cul­ minillmg activity for students in the fitness iield (lplion specialization. Students spend the equivalent of full-time employment in the appropriate agency (or one fu ll semester. Pre­ l1'qui~itt's: senior standing, departmental con­ ent, KSS 47(), 2.500 minimum CPA overall and for major, admission to College of Education 5&0. Legal Aspects of Sport and Physical ActiVity. (3). Focuses on the concepts oC tort law, Ltlostitutional law .:tnd stah.ltory law as they rel ~le to the sport professions. Empha­ Size. liability-related issues as they impact sport administrators, exercise professionals and teachers/coaches of physical activity. 565. Ma:rkeUng Sport and Physical Activity ProgriUJ\s. (3), Introduces concepts and tools Used to market SpOTt and physic-al activity . Emphasizes marketing strategies that are appl.i cnble to th~ sport administrator, teach­ er/coach and ~xercise professional. Prercqui­ itt.': Mkt. 300. 590. Independent Study. (1-3) . Prerequisite: departmental consent. 720. Teaching Strategies. (3). Non-traditional and in novative techniques and strategies for increil5ing student participation and motivil­ tion i11 the physic.,1 education lesson. Prerequi­ sites: senior standmg, graduate standing, or instructor's consent. 732. Introduction to BeG's. (3). Develops a foundation in electrocardiography. lncludes ECG leads, rate and rhythm, ECC complexes and intervals , conduction disturbances, arrhythmiil5, ECC identification of myocardial infarction location. and drug effects on an ECG. Prerequisites: KSS 530 and senior stand­ ing. full standing in the Graduate School, or instructor's consenl. 750. WOTkshop in Education. (1-4). 752. Special Studies in Health, Physical Edu­ calion, and Recreation. (1-3). Group study in a preselected area of health, physica I eel ucation, l)f recrea tion . Repeatable for credit w ith departmental consent. Prerequis ite: depart­ .mental consent. 760. Sport in Society. (3). I.mpact of sports on American culture, wiih focus nn competition. economics, mythology, education, religion, ethics, professional sports, sports and minori­ ties. 770 . Psychology of Sporl. (3). An in -depth analysis of the psychology of motor learning and its implications for the leacher-{:oach. 780. Physical Dimensions of Aging. (3) . Cov­ ers the complex phvsiological changes t.hal accompany advanCing age and how exercise Jffects the aging process. Includes an apprecia­ tIOn for how functional consequences affect mental and social dimens10ns of life, Empha­ ;izes factors associated ",iUl the preparation, implementation, and evaluation of re~earch projects involving elderly populations. 781. Cooperative Education Field Study. (1-8). Provide~ the graduate student with a field placement which integrates theory w il.h a planned ilnd supervised professional experi­ ence designed to complement and enhance the student' s academic: program. Individualized programs must be formulated in consultation with appropriate graduate faculty. The Plan of Study for a graduate degree-bound student must be moo before approval of enrollment for cooperative educatIOn graduate crectit. May be repeatable for credit with a limit of eight hours counting toward the graduate degree. Offered Cr{NCr only. 790. Applied Exercise Physiology. (3). Focuses on the applied aspect of exercise physiology. Includes the areas of environmental i.l\fluences n performance, optimizing performance through training, nutrition, and ergogemc aids, and train ing and performance of the adoles­ cent athlete (lDd of elderly, and the differences in performance and training between genders. Prerequisite: KSS 530 or 830. Courses for Graduate Students Only 800. Recent Literature in the Proie!f.'lion. (3). Survey and critiC'a] analYSis of reseilrch and other pertinent materials in lhe field. 801. Leadership and Management in Sport. (3). Initial introductinn into the ildminislrnhlln of sports in public schools, institutions of hj~h­ er l.'ducation, and commercial and professional sports organizations. Learn about the variow. components of sports admimstration by read­ ing appropriate materials and entering intn diai.ogue with pmcticing administrators 812. Advanced Techniques in Physical Educa­ tion. (3) . Comprellensive coverage of ~cl~ted physical activities, emphrusizing class procl.'­ dures. Includes laboratory experiences. 814. Analysis of Teaching.• (3) . An in-depth examination of teacller effectiveness. Includes ana lysis of research in physical education , identifying significant teacher and studen! behaviors involved in effective teaching, exam­ ining evaluation models designed for analyz.­ ing and measuring teaching effectiveness, and developing in tervention programs. 815. Fitness Asse.SS1lIentlEl(CJ:cise Recommen­ dations. (3). Introduces techniques appropriate [or screening, health appraisal , and fitness ru;ses,,"ll1ent as required for prescribing exercise prograIlUl for mdiv:iduals without disease llr ""ith controlled discil5e. RequiTes Oll t of dass laboratory experienccs. l'rereguisites: KS:i 5.30 or equivalent and graduate standing. 816 . Physical Education in Secondary Schools. (3) . For the physical educaLJon spe­ cialist. New concepts and recent trends in methodology, programming, and supervision at the secondary level. 825. Physical Edu.cation in Elementary Schools . (3) . New concepts, recent trends, .methodology, programming, and supervision. For the elementary teacller .:tnt! physical educa­ tion speciallst. 830. Advanced PhYSiology of Exercise. (3). 1n­ depth study into the physiological basis of exercise. Include!! energy metabolism, relipir.J­ lory dynamics, cardiova-cular function, ~nd regulation during rest, s teady ~tate a.nd exhaustJve phYSIca l activity. Emphasizes immediate and long tenn adaptat:lOn to exer­ cise and training. Prerequ.isile: KSS 530. 835 . Legal Issues in the Profession. (3). Acquaints the graduale student with legal research and the rule that law plays ill g,wem­ ing the sport and fitness jndu~lries . Actively r('Search various theories of law and how they affect the nature of sport, Alness al:livity, th!! participants, and cOlUiumers. Investigates the basic concept of negligence utilizing illustra­ tive cases from sports, physical education, and fitness activities. Also focuses 011 spcdfie situa­ tiOllS regarding injury and subsequent law­ suits 847. Internship. (6). Internship in selected areas of specializat ion ill exercise science or ports administration Prerequisite: depart­ mental collSt!nt. 88 857. Intern hip mExercise SciencelWe1lness. (6). Intem ship in selected area of specialization wi thin th exerci -e schmcelwellness program. Students pe nd the e uival nt of fu ll-tim~ employment in an appropria te agency for one fu ll seme teI. P rerequisite: departmen~al consent. 860. Research Methodli in the Profession. (3). Examination of research methodology as r&t­ ed to topi in health, PE, recreation, sports studie ', a nd exerci e science / wellness includes review and cri tical evaluation of the literature, r earch design and sta tistical pro­ cesses , methodo logy, data collection tech­ niques. amputer-based analysis (>f clata and the ' i I report writ ing Students design and cumpl te a mini-research proj ct. Prerequisite; KSS800. 875. Thesis Research. (1-2). Developm nl of a research problem and proposal with the direc­ tion ( f a graduate facul member. Rep alable but t tal edit hours counted toward degree requirements must not exceed two. Prerequi­ sHes: admi sion to graduate . ch 01 in go d standing, KSS 860, and departme tal c nsenl. 876. Thesis. (1-2). Repeatable bUI total credi t hour' tounted toward degree reqUi rement m ast not exceed two . Students m ust be enrolled in this course during the semester in which a ll requirements for the thesis are met. Prerequisites: KSS 875 and consen t of the stu­ dent's committee chair. 890. Problems in Health, Physical Education, and Recreation. (1-4). Directed reading and resea rch under supervision of a graduate instructor. Learning Resource Center A variety of services is offered Lo students through the programs of lh earning esource Center. Courses are offered to help students improve their reading COIll­ prehension and speed, critical thinking skill);, library skills, study strategies, and standardized test-taking skills. In addition to formal course work, the center offers free workshops and media programs covering a wide range of topics intended to enhance student learning and success. The center also offers programs for special tudent populations. Lower-Division Courses 10L Introduction to the University. (3). Helps students make connections with academic pro­ grams, faculty, staff, and other students; devel­ op r qui red academic and career competen­ cies; and make sense of the higher education environment. 110. Efficient Study Strategies. (U. Helps stu­ dents develop study strategi ' needed faT aca­ demIc uccess, since to be a successful student, method may be as important a ability. 160. College Reading and Study Skills. (3). Prepares students for academic challenges of college. lmpr-oves abili ty to learn and remem­ ber textbook and lecture information. to ask appropriate questions, and to read as.sjgned material in less time. Enhances reading speed, reading comprehension, and study slUlIs. Includes time management, text reading, learn­ ing styles, and note-taking and tet-taking trategies. 170. lntroduction to Library Research. (1). Stu­ d nts learn to locate and retrieve inform, tion in both print and electronic fom\ats, including the In ternet, and I am to distinguish between cholarly reJiearch and non-scholarly publica­ tions. 210. StandiIYdized Test Preparation. (1). Help students prepare for the rea i ng compreh ­ sion an verbal reasoning sections of standar I· ized tests s lIch as the GRE, MAT, PPST, !.SAT. GMAT, MCAT, OAT, and NET Offered S/ U only. 260. CriticaJ Reading and Reasoning. (3). Improves student's reasoning kills especially in the area of evaluating the logic and validity of written arguments. Focuses on critical think­ ing skills such as problem solving, reasoning and developing arguments, and vocabuJary development. Music Education See School of Music section, College of Pine Arts. The following abbreviations iU"e used In the course descripl1Ons; R stands for lecture and L for laborato­ ry For example. 4.R; 2L means four hour.; of lecture and two hounl of lab. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING 89 College of Engineering William J. Wilhelm, PhD, Dean 100 Wallace Hall • (316) WSU-3400 www.engr.twsu.edul Modern technological developmen ts in engineering have brought about consider­ able change in the College of Engineer­ ing'& curriculum at Wichita State Univer­ sity. The curriculum provides a vigorous, ch~llenging experience through a broad spectrum of fundamental technical knowledge as well as courses in humani­ ties, social sciences, communications, mathematics and physical sciences. This balance in the curricuJum prepares stu­ dents for professionaJ positions in the sci­ entific-industrial community after the bachelor's degree or allows them to con­ tin ue in graduate studies for a more acti ve participation in research and advanced study. TIle College of Engineering is organized into four degree-granting departments: aerospace, electricaJ and computer, ind ustr.ial and manufacturing, and mechanical. The programs in engineering ar offered in daytime and evening classes, and the courses are the same whether they are taught in the day or at night. Degrees Offered Undergraduate The Bachelor of Science degree programs in aerospace, electrical, mdustrial, and mechanical engineering are accredited by the Engineering Accreditation Commis­ sion of the Accreditation Board for engi­ neering and Technology (ABET). Two new programs leading to the Bachelor of Science ill manufacturing engineering and in computer engineering, which are not presently accredited by EAC/ ABET, are also offered. Graduate A Master o f Science (MS) is offered in aeros pace, e lectrica l, ind ustrial, and mechanical engineering. A new Master of Engmeering Management program is offered in the industrial and manufactur­ ing engineering department . A Doctor of PhIlosophy (PhD) also is offered by each of the four deparbnents of engineering. TYPical fields of specialization include aerOdynamics, fluid mechanics, propuJ­ Slon, structures, solid mechanics, compos­ :tes, dynamics, and contTol; communica­ IOn theorv, Signal processing, control theory , d igital systems, energy, and power systems; thermodynamics, hea t transfer, engineering materials, engineer­ ing design , kinematics; and operations research, management science, manufac­ turing processes, and human factors. See the Wichita Siale University Graduate Bu lletin for more information about the graduate programs. Policies Admission All entering students with a dedared interest in engineering will be ad mitted to the pre-degree program in the College of Engineering. The pre-degree program of study must include the following courses: (a) Eng!. 101 / 100, Engl. 102, and Comm. 11 1, (b) Math. 242Q, alld (c) Phys. 313Q or Chern. 111Q or their equivalents. Students will be admitted to an engi­ neering degree program when they have satisfied the following requirements: 1. Completion of at least 24 semester credit hours of college-level work with a WSU grade poin t average of 2.000 or higher, and an overall grade point aver­ age of 2.000 or higher (for transfer stu­ dents ). The 24 semester hours must include the above-specified courses in th pre-degree program, each with a grade of C orbetteri 2. Declaration of a specific engineering major. Students may not continue in the pre­ degree program after the semester in which they complete 48 semester hours. Probation Students are placed on academic proba­ tion if any of the following grade point averages is less than 2.000 and if they have attempted at least 6 hours in tha t grade point average at Wichita State Uni­ ersity: (1) cumuJative grade point aver­ age of all college/university work, (2) WSU grade point average and (3) engi­ neering major grade point a verage . Attempted hour.; are defined as aU hours appearing on the transcript with a grad of A, B, C, D, F, W, Cr, NCr , I, S, or U. Academic probation is not removed until all grade point averages are at least 2.000. Transfer students admitted on probation must complete at least 12 semester hours of credit work at Wichita State before pro­ bation may be removed . Students on academic probation may not enroll for mOTe than 12 semester hours in a 16-week term., six semester hours in an eight-week term , or three hours in a four-week term. Exceptions to these limitations may be made on the rec­ ommendation of the student' s depart­ ment advisor with the approval of the student's department chairperson. Academic Dismissal Students on academic probation are sub­ ject to academic dismissal from the Col­ lege of Engineering if they fail to a tt"d in a cumulative WSU grade point average of 2.000 in the next 12 hours attempted, or a cumuJative major grade point average of 2.000 in the next nine hours attempted in their major field , and the grade point average for the most recent semester or Summer Session is below 2.000. Academic Advising and Enrollment Students in the College of Engineering are invited to seek academic advice from their advisors or the department chairs any time during the school yea r. Engi­ neering students are strongly urged I preregister for courses during published preregistration dates to avoid cl osed classes. Late registration or addjng engi­ neering courses will be allowed only dur­ ing the firs t week of a regular semester or the first three days of a Summer Session. Students in the College of Engineering may nOl enroll in more than 20 hours per semester during the academic year. Sum­ mer Session enrollmen ts are limited to a maximum of five hours for each fo u r­ week session or ten hours d uring the eight-week session. Students who have completed at least 24 hours at WSU with a WSU grade point average of 3.000 or higher may petition their department chairperson for permission to enroll in excess hours. Students who are employed full or part time shou ld, in consultation with their acadern.ic ad visor, reduce their enroll­ ments to a level appropriate to their work load . Only students admitted to the College of Engineering or the Graduate School will be a llowed to enroll in engineering courses at the 300 level or above. Because there are legitima te reasons for qualified nonengineering students to enroll in an engineering course at the 300 leveJ or above, the academic dean will consider 90 p titions for e.'I(ceptions to the preceding tatement. Than fer Credit Students wi hing to receive transfcr cred­ its for engineering cour es tak n at other institutions prior t admis ion to WSU must submit transcr ipts and cour descriptions and syllabi to the College of Engineenng for evaluabon. Courses con­ sidered for transfer credit mu t have a grade of C or b tter. Degre -bound WSU students should p k with an advisor b fore enrolling in courses at another instituhon. Graduation Requirements An engineering students who are pursu­ ing bachelor' degrees must meet three ts of course requirements for gradua­ tion: (A) WSU General Education require­ men ts, (B) College of Engineering requirements, and C) th Accreditation BOlHd for Engin ering and Technology (ABET) requirement . Guidelines for these are given below: WSU General Education Requirements (J ) CommuOica tions skills courses: All WSU s tudents mu t complete th ree cour es in communication kills: English 101 or 100 (for non-native sp eakers), English 102, and Communication 111, each with a grade of C or better. All engi­ neering student must com lete these three curses before they can be tran ­ ferred to a degree program in engineer­ ing. (2) Four Introductory courses tn the dis­ ciplines, to include: one course each in the divisions f Fin~ Arts, Humanities, and Sl)cial and Behavioral Sciences, and an add1ti nal course in a different d ISCipline in either Humanities or Social and Behav­ ioral Sciences (3) Two additional courses that are not lntr ductory. One is t be a Further Study cour in one of the disciplines in the division in which two Introductory cours­ es are taken . The second additional course is to be an Issues and Perspectives course in a different division. All WSU students also must complete courses in th division of Natu ral Science and Mathematics; however, because the engineering curri ulum requires 32-34 hours of mathematics and natural sci­ ence , engineering students automatically atisfy the requirements in this division. Refer to the section on the General Edu­ c tion Program :i n this Catalog for a descnptlOn of the Introductory ourses, F1.1rther Study courses, and I sue and Perspectives ourses. College of Engineering Requirements (1) MaUlematics and atural Sciences: 32­ 34 hours of mathematics and natura l bci­ enccs must be completed, a prescribed by eacl1 department Included is a natural science elective of three or four hours to be rno en from an approved list available from the college. (2) Core requirements 03 hours): Engr. 310, Seminar in Engineering (0 Ius.); AE 223, Statics (3 hrs.); ECE 282, Grcuits L(4 hrs.); lEN 255, Engineering Economy (3 hrs.); and ME 398, Thermodynamics (3 hrs.) . These are courses that all engin er­ ing tudents must complete, regardless of major. (3) Departmen t requir ments: Each department has specific courses that must be compleled. These courses and their prerequisites are m th departmental sec­ tions of the Cafalog and are listed on the department check heets. (4) Technical e lectives : Additional courses required, but not specified, by the department. Each should be chosen in conswtation with a department advisor. ABET Requirements ABET expects the curricular .ontent of an engineering program to include the equiv­ alen t of at least three years of study in the areas of mathematics, basic sciences, humanities and social sciences, and engi ­ neering topics . The course work must include a t least: (1) one year of an appro­ priate combination of mathema t ics beyond trigonometry and basic ciences, (2) one-half year (17 hours) of humallities and social sciences, and (3) one and one half years (51 hours) of engineering topics. Studies in basic sciences must include both general chemistry and ca1culus ­ based general physiCS at appropriate lev­ els, with at least a two-semester sequence of study in ither area. The courses in humanities and social sciences must pro­ vide both breadth nd depth and not be limited to a selection of unrelated intro­ ductory courses. Engineering topics i.ndude subjects in the engineering sci­ ences and engineering design. All engineering students follow about the same general curriculum for the first two years. All engineering program of study are designed to meet ABET criteria as wel l a satisfy WSU general education requirements, and all courses should be selected with the assistance of a College of Engine ring advisor. he recommend ­ ed sequence of course for engineering tudent in all departments is outlined later in this section. Each sequence h.1.~ been planned so that students can com­ plete the program to meet all require­ ments in the minimum time. A' part of the in titutional e ff<'~ rt required to ensure continuous accredit ­ tion by ABET, student taking longer than five years to complete an undergrad· uate degree w ill be required to meet ABET engineering curricular criteria in effect at the tinle f their graduahon. Studen ts must file an application for d gree card in the engineering dean's office two semesters preceding their final semester. Grndrllltirm grade pni lr t average reqliire· menis: The candidate for a degree must attain a 2.000 grade poinl avera e in each of the following categorie": 1) All college and univerSity w rk attempted (cumulative grade point aver­ age) (2) All work a ltempted at WSU (WSU grade point average) 3) All work in the shldent's major. Students are not allowed credit towa rd graduation for D grade work in excess of one-quarter of U, ir total hours. Cooperative Education Program The College of Engineering offers a coop­ erative educalion program in conjuncli n with the University Cooperative Educa ­ tion program described in this Ciltalog The co-op plan is voluntary program in which the student works part-time (parallel program) or altemales paid pre­ professi na1 work p ri ds with classroom periods during the junior and seni r years. The two mo t typical p lans aTe illustrated in th following table. F S c c c c C fndicates in college W IndIcates a t work These plans make it possible for each industrial po ition to be filled by two stu­ dents, one from Plan A and one from Plan B. Other plans can be developed in cooperation with the coordinator. To be eligible for the co- p program, a student must demonstrate by academiC performance during the fre hman year the p tential to complete the degree pro­ gram satisfactorily. Generally this means. the earnin y of a grade point average ot 2.500 or higher . Also the student's charac­ ter and pers nality must be acceptable to the coopera ti ng employer. Transfer 5lU­ 5 COLLEGE OF ENGTNEERING / AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 91 dents with the above qua li fications should contact U1e cooperative education coordinator a t the beginning of their first semester il t WSU. To continue in the pro­ gram, a student must maintain a satisfac­ tory academic standing. tudents in terested in participating i.1l the program should contact the College of E.ngincering co-op coordinator who will provide U1e necessary application information. Upon acceptance into the program. th.e coordinator will assist the stu dent in arranging interviews with cooperating industries. Engineering­ General Education The foll owing courses explore generaJ engineering topics. Lower-Division Courses 101. An Introduction to Engineering. (3). A.."!>1sls engineering students in exploring engi ­ neeri ng careers and opportunitie~. Provides inlDrrMlion on academic and life skills essen­ tial to bc£ome a successful engi.neeri.ng stu ­ dent. Promotes connections to specific engi­ neering majors ~nd provides activities to assist and rein leS ovall­ abJe from the college s tudent records "fAce. ·~Rcfe.r to grilduat ion requirements nt the beg in­ ning of this sechon i l;lr d'-'tJils. Lower-Division Courses 115. Lntroduction to Ast.ronilutics. (1). An introduction and overview of astronilutics Hi.storical, technica l, and practical aspects of rocketry, space dynamics, spacecraft design. and the space environment. Intended for fre~h­ men and sophomore AE students who have not tlken AE 324, however, it may be taken by students at any level in other eng.ineering departments or colleges. U4.lntroduction to Aeronautics. (2). An intro­ duction and overview of oeronaubc.. I-listorl­ cal and modern case studies are used to survev the aerodyna mic, structural , stability, a nd propulsive aspects of atmospheriC Dighl vehI­ cles. Intended for freshman and sophomore AE student/; who have not taken AE ]24, how­ ever, it may be taken by students at any I.-...e) in other engineering departments or col.leges. 223. Statics. (3). The study of the condlti on of equiHbrium of ngid bodies u nder the action Ilf forces. Rigid bodies include beams, trusses. frames, and machines. Consider~ both two uf equations, integration, and deterrn irung rootr of polynOmials. Corequisite: Math. 243. 2BIA. Co-op Education. (1). Introduces iliestu­ dent to engineering practice by working in industry in an engineering-related job :tnu pro­ v ides a planned professional e~perjence esigned III complement and enhance the stu ­ dent's academic program. Individualized pro­ grams must be formulated in con~llltaUon wi th , and approved by, appropriate iaculty sponsors and cooperativl! education coordina­ tors . Intended for students who wiU lx· work­ ing full time on their co-op aSSignment and need not be enrolled in any other course. May be repeated . Offered CrINer vnly . Prerequi­ sites: 30 hours toward a bachelor of science in aerospace engineering degrl'e and approval by appropriate facul ly sponsor. 92 281P. Co-op Education. (l) . Introduces the stu­ J ent t engin eering pr cn e b working in i~dustry in an engineering-rela ted job and pro- Ides a pl an ned p ro fess io nal experi en_ce designed to com pi men t and nhrul th stu­ den t's academic program. Individualized pro­ gra ms m ust be fo rmulated in consulta tion wi th, and approved b , a ppropriate faculty spons rs and cooperative educati n coordina­ to rs. Students must enroll concurrentlv in a minimum of six hours of course work i~dud­ ing this course in addllion to a m inimum f 20 hours p r week a t their co-op aSSignment. Pre­ requi i te": successful completio n of 20 hours toward an engin ~ring degree and approval by appropriate faculty sponsor. May be repeated. Graded CrINCr. Upper-Division Courses 324. Fundamentals of Atmospheric Flight. (3). The study of the a tmosphere , airer ft , and aerod ynamiC nomenclature. Introd uction to aerodyn mic tll ary, aldoils, wings, aircraft p.l'rformance, st bility and control an propul-· SlOn. Prerequisite; AE 223. Corequisite: AE 227. 333. Mechanics of Materials. (3). The study of m chc nic I properties of materials, transf r­ mation of s Ire es and tra inb, stresses and deformations in structural clem -n of v n ous shapes, nd I ad ing, statically indetermina te s tmctures and backling. Prerequi ile; AE 223. orequisite: Math. 344. 373. Dynamics. (3). study uf the ki.J1ematics and k inetics of particles and rig id bo i s. In ludes force-mass-accelerati n, wa r -energy, and impulse-momentum methods. rcrequ i­ sit : AE 223 and Math . 344. 415. Introduction to Space Dynamics. (3). Fundament Is of rbital mechanic and rigid body dynamics; two-body problems; orbi tal maneuvers, orbital determination and in ter ­ plan >tacy trajectorie ; r igid body kinematics an d kinetics. Pr r qu isi tes; AE 227 and 373; corequisite: Math. 555. 424. Aerodynamic Theory. (4). A study f the dynamics 01 compressible and incompressible flO\ , two- and three-dinlensional airfoil the ­ ry, viscous flow, and drag; an introduction to perfOTIllilllce. Prerequisites: Math. 555, AE 324 and 373, Corequisite: ME 521. 48IA. Co-op Education. (1 ) . See AE 281A. Gra ed CrINe r unless s tudent has r ceiv d perm ission before enrolling for course to be used as a tech nica l electi e . Prereq uisites : junior standing a.nd approval by the appr pri­ ate facult sponsor. May be repealed. 481P. Co-op Education. (1) . See AE 281P. Grad d CrlNCr u nless s tudent has r ei ed permi!!! ion before enroll ing for cou rse to be used as a technica l elective. Prerequisites : junior tanding and approval by the appropri­ ate faculty sponsor. May be repeated . Conrses for GraduatelUndergraduate Credit 502. Aerospace Propulsion I. (3 )_ Survey of a rospa e propulsjon meth d . Pro uction f thrust and co nsumption of fuel. Rocket perfor­ mance analysis; liquid chemical and solid pro­ p IbM rocket engines. Jet engine cycle an ly­ sis; turboj t, ramjet, turbofan, and turboprop engines. Analysis of piston engines ;md pro­ pellers. Prerequi ites; AE 227 and 373, ME 398. COTequisite; AE 424 r MB 521. 508. Systems Dynamics. (3). Lumped PlITanle­ ter lOdeling; classical, numerical, tral form and state model metho of solu tion; introduc­ tion to y tems wi th feedback; analogies of various physical systems. Prerequisites: AE 373 and Math. 555. 512. Experimental Methods in Aerodynamics. (2). 4L. A tudy of experimental methods and test planning, error analy 'is and propagation, model design. instrumentation and flow visu­ aliza tion. Uses sub onie and supersonic wind tunnels. Prerequisit : A E 424. SUo Flight Dynamics and ControL (3). Sta ti s tabili t and con tr I of conventi na l aircraft and impli ations in ai rcrait design, six degrees of freedo m tim e depend ent equati ns of motion and their lin arized solu tions. Consid­ eration f stability versus maneuverab il ity, and the dynami modes of motion of the air­ craft. Prerequisite: AE 415. Corequ isit ; AE 424. 525. Flight Structures r. (3). Stress anal sis of fligh t v hide components. Pr r quisite: Ali 333. Corequisite: Math. 555. 527. Numerial Methods in Engineering. (3). Error ana lysis. Includes polynomial approxi­ m lions and power series, iterative solutions of equati n , matrices and SYlitems of linear ~qua­ tion " numerical differen tiation a nd integra­ tion, quival nt. COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING/AEROSPACE ENGINEERING 9.~ 714. Advanced Flight Dynamics I. (3). Review of the equations of motion for aircraft. Nonlin­ ear ",fleets and aircraft response. Stabili ty and control of elastic aircraft. Response to tu rbu­ len ce. Pre.requisite; AE 5 14 or instru ctor 's consent. 715. Inte.rmediate Space Dynamics . (3). Advanced topics in orbital mechanics--vector mechanics perspective of the two-body prob­ lem, interplanetary missions including gravity assist maneuver, rocket performance, ballistic trajectories, atmosph.eric entry, and space envi­ ronmen t. Prerequisite: AE 373. 71 6. Compressible F1wd Flow. (3). Analysis of compressible fluid fl ow for one- and two­ dimensional cases, moving ~hock waves, one­ dimensional flow with friction and hea t addi­ tion, linearized potential equation, method of characteristics, conical shocks a.nd subsonic similari ty laws. Prerequisites: AE 420, AE 424, ME 521 or equivalent. 719. hw:oduction to Computational Fluid Dynamics. (3 ). Classification of partial differ­ ential eq u a ti ons , nu merica l so lut ion of parabolir, ellip tic, and hyperbolic differential equa tions, stabi lity allalysis, boundary condi­ tions, sca lar representation of the Navier­ Stokes equatioI1s, incomp ressible Navier­ Stokes equations. Prerequisi te: AE 424 or ME 321. 722. Finite Element Analysis of Structures I. (3). Use of the finite element method for the analysis of simple structural co nfigurat ions including trusses, frames and plates. Utiliza­ tion (1f NASTRAN and the computing center facili ties. Prerequisite: AE 33 731. Theory of Elasticity. (3). Develops th equations of the theory of elasticity and uses them to determine stress and displacement field s in linear el astic isotropic bodies . Use Airv stress functions to obtain solutions. lntro­ du~es energy principles and varia tional meth­ ods. PrerequiSite: instructor's consent. 733. Advanced Mechanics of Materials. (3). An extension of AE 333. Typical topics include transformation of stress and strain in three dimensions, nonci rcular torsional members, curved beams, beams with unsvmmetric cross sections, energy methods ,wd' the finite ele­ ment meth.od of analysis, stress concentration, theories of failure and fracture mechanics. Pre­ reqUisite: AE 333, 737. Mechanics of Damage Tolerance. (3) . An Introduction to Ule mechanics of damage toler­ ance with emphasis on stress analysis-orientt'd fracture mechanics. Topics include stress inten­ ~ity , fracture tou ghness, residual strength, latigue crack growth rate, fatigue crack propa­ gation, and damage tolerance concepts. Pre­ requisi tes: AE 525 or instructor's COIl5ent. 750. Aerospace Engineering Workshop. (1-4). Various topiCS in aerospace engineering. Pre­ reqUisites: instructor's consent. 760. Selected Topics. (1-3). Prerequ isite: Instructor's consent. "3. Intennediate Dyruunics. (3). An extension of Undergraduate dynamics. Studies the kine­ maties and kinetics of pru- ticles and rigid bod­ ies for t WQ- and three-dimensiona l motion, lncludes an ill!roduclion to vibratory motion, dyna mic stability of I1npar systems, ,md La­ grange's equations. Prerequisite: AE 373. 777. Vibration Analysis, (3). A study of free, forced, damped and u ndamped vibrations for olle and' two degrees of freedom , as well as classical, numerical and energy sol utiuns of mul tidegree freedom systems. lntroduces con­ tinuous systems. Prerequisites: Math . 555, AE 373 and 333. Courses for Graduate Students Only 801. Structural Dynamics. (3). A study of the dynamic response of multiple degree of free­ dom systems and continuous syslems subject­ ed to external dynamic forcing functions. Clas­ sical, numerical and c.llergy solutions. Prereq­ uisite: AE 717. 807. Modem Flight Control Systems Design II. (3) . Continuation of AE 707, with emphasis on the effects of atmospheric turbulence and corrupted measuremellts. State estimation US ing the Kalman fil ter . Outpu t feedback design methods for flight controls. Robustn requirements in the desIgn. Extension to di~­ ta.! system... Prerequ.isites: AE 707 Rnd 714. 8U. Panel Methods in Aerodynamics. (3). An introdu c tion to pa nel method th eory and ap plica tio n for inv isc id incompressib le attadled flows. Utilization of some two and three dimensional computer codes . Prerequj­ sites: AE 71 1 and Math 757 or equivalent. 812, Aerodynamics of Viscous Fluids. (3). Vis­ cous tluids flow theory and boundary layers. PrerequiSite; AE 424 or ME 521. 814. Advanced Flight Dynamics U. (3). Sensi­ tivity analyses of fli gh t parameters; t:oI1trol surface s,izing; handling qualities; pilot in-the­ loop analysis; trajectory optimization. Prereq­ uisite: AE 714. 815. Spacecraft Attitude Dynamics, (3). An in­ depth study of advanced six degrees-oE-fre\.'­ dOD1 ki nematics, spinning motion, effect'll of gravitational fo rces, simple spacecraft dj'llam­ ics, and flexible spacecraft , Prerequisite: AE 714 or 773 or equivalent. 817. Transonic Aerodynamics. (3). ExperimeIl­ tal and analytical difficulties in Aow~ and fligh t near Mach one. Basic equations and solution methods: linearized potential equation; shock ccurrence criteria on wings; Transonic Area Rule; nozzle throa t design ; detached shock wave computa tions; computational methods. Prerequisites: AE 424 or equivalent; and AE 711 or 716. 818. Hypersonic Aerodynamics. (3). Classical hypersonic theory and approximations; New­ tonian flow. Flight corridors and trajectories. Hot gas effeds. Experimental difficulties; short time test facilities. Computational techniques. Propulsion methods; airframe-eI1gine integra­ tion; SCRam jets. Prerequisites: AE 711 and 71(, or equivalent. 822. Finite Element Analysis of Structure (3). Formulation of the finite element equations by variational methods; the use of isoparamet­ ric a.nd higher order elem ents for imalyzing tv.'o- al,d lhree-dimensional problems in solid mechanics; introduction to solutions of nonlin­ ear problem" PrerequiSites: AE 722 and 731. 831 . Continuum Mechanics. (3). ln troductory treatment of the fundamenta l, uni fying C0 11­ e'ept!> of lhe mechanics of C'on tinua with appli­ cations to classkal solid and fluid mechanics. Prerequisite: graduate standing. 832. Theory of Plates and Shells. (3) . Smal l defl ections of thin elastic plates; classical solu­ tio n s for rectangular a nd circul ar p lates; approximaie solutions fo r plates () f various shapes; introduction to the analys is of th in hells. PrereqUisite: AE 731 . 833. Theory of Elastic Stability. (3) . Buckling of columns, hames, beams, plates and ~hells. Prerequisite; AE 731 . 853. Advanced Mechanics of Laminated Com­ posites_ (3). An extension of AE 653. lncludes anisotropic elasticity, classlcaJ laminate theory, failure theories, lateral deflections, elastic sta­ bility, large deformation theory, and energy methods. Prerequisites: AE 653 and 731. 860 . Selected Topics. (1-3) . PreTequ isi te: iru; tr uctors consen t 876. MS Thesis. (1-6) Graded Stu only 878. MS Direct.cd Project. (1-3). A projec t con­ ducted U11der the supervision of an academic adv isor fo r the di rected pro ject option. Requires a written reportClnd an ora l presen ta­ tion on the projecL Graded SIll only. Prerequi­ sile: consent of acad~mic adv isor. 890. Independent Study. (1-3) Arranged indi­ vidual independent study in specialized areas of aermlpace el1g.ineering under the supervi ­ sion of a faculty membe.r. Repeatable fo r credit. Prerequisite: consent of rupervising f . Comm. 111, Pu blic Speaking ............ ...... ...3 Math. 555, Ordinary Differential Equations with Linear Algebra .............. 3 ECE 284, arcuits II .......... .. .................. ... .. .3 BCE 238, A mbly Language Pr gramming for Engineers .. ................ 3 Phys. 313Q and 314Q, University hysics 1 and IT ... ... ............... . , .. ..... .. ......... 8 General education cour • ..... .. ......... .. .....6 ECE394, Introduction to Computer Architecture .... .. ......................... ....... .... ....3 AE 223, Statics ...... ..... .. .. .. .. ...... .... .... ..... .. .. ...3 Junior Course Ilr". [EN 254, Engineering Probability and Statistics [.......... ........... .. ...... ... .. .. ... .......... 3 ECE 383, Signals and ystem ................... 3 ME 398, Thermodynamics 1 ........ ..............3 ECE 492 and 493, ElectTonic ircuits I and IT ........ .. ................. ............................. 7 CS 320, Discrete Structures in Computer Science ...... ...... .. .. ................... .. .. ................ 4 ECE477t Unix ... .. .... ............. ... .. ...... ........... 3 Chern. 111Q, General O\emistry ... ... .. .. .. ..5 General educalion courses· ................... ... . 3 Senior Course Hr;; . [EN 255, Engineering Economy ............... 3 ECE 594, Microproc s r Based System De ign .. ......................... .......... .. ........... ......3 ECE 585 and 59 ,Electrical Design roject 1and D.. .. .. .... . .... .. ... .................... ,4 ECE 644, Digital Design Lab ... ............... ... 2 CS 540, Operating Systems ....... ...... .. ... .....3 ECE 744, Introduction to VHDL ......... ......3 Genera l education ourses" ................... ....6 Technical electi ves"''' ... ............. .. .. .. .. .. .... ..S • Refer te. graduation requ.ir"'llImts 01 the beginnU1~ of this section for d etails ., MUlit be tho en with ad,'isor's apprc.va l from " uepartm enla l. ppro ed li~t. Lower-Division Courses 101. Introduction to Electrical Engineering. (1) . Gives tho e s tudents also enroUed in Engr. 101 the opportunity for a hands-on exp ricncc in each of the areas of spt.."Cializab n in electn' cal engineering: digital des ign, power, comtnlJ ­ niean n , and control. 150. Workshop on Electrical iUld Computer Engineering. (1-3). Worl designed in class, Prerequisites: ECE 231'\ and 294, or 394. 595. Electrical Design Project n. (2). 3L May not be counted to word a graduate eleclTi c.ll major. A continuation of ECE 585. Prercquls.ite: ECE 585. W ill no t coun t lowards a graduate electrical engineering degree. 598. Electric Power Systems Analysis. (3). An.alysis of electric u tility pi)wer syslems. Top­ ics include analysis and modeling of power transmission lines and transformers, power flow analysis and software, and an Introduc­ tion to symmetrical components. Prerequjsite: CE282. 636. TelecommunicatIons. (3). Topics in circuit and pac.kel switching, layered communication architectures, s tate dependent queues. traffic engineering, call pn}cessing, software organi­ zation, routing and ,-'Ommon channel signaling. Pr~requislte; ECE 586 or departmental consent. 639. Microcontrollen;. (3). A review of micro­ processor architectures and as:oembly languilge programming. A detailed stud y of m iO'Ocon­ troller architccture5, assembly languages and peripheral devices for applications in embed­ ded and real- time control systems. Prerequ i­ site: ECE 238. 644. Advanced Digital Lab. (3). An open l"bo­ ratery experience for computer engincerin; students. Gives the student an opportunily to use state-of-the-art de\<1ces and etluipmcnl in designing complex digital systems. Will no t count towards an electrical engineer ing degree. Prerequisites: ECE 394 and 594. 648. Network Switching and Routing. (3). An in -d~pth study of bridging and routing in com­ 96 puter networks. Covers bndftlng (Transparent, Soure '-rollt~, Remote Soun:c-ruute, DLSWJ, rouled proto 'llls (IP IT'X, Aprl talk, DecNet. I - IS), Lind Routlllg Protocols (lUP IGRP, ElGRI', ospr, and I3GP) Pr f'qui it ' . EO! 636 or depdrlmental ron ent. 684. lnlroduc.tory Control Sy tern Concepts. (3). An introduction tt) system modeling and imulntion, dyrumic reponbC, feedback tll 0­ ry, srnbiltty Tit ria, and comp 'nhd.tion de iflll. Prertlquisite: ECG 3K3. 688. Power Electronics, (4). 3R; 3£.. Deals with the appli 'a lion f olid- tate etectronic for thl; ~ontro l dnd con ersion of electric power Gives an 0\ erview 0 the role of lhe thynstor in p lwer cieclronics application and tablbh· e, the th • lry, characteristic. and prUlt:: tion of the thyristor. Presents controlled rectification, ~talic 'fr 'qu 'n y conver ion by means of lhe D l!Ok- onverler ,wei tht" cyda L:oOVl!rtl!r, ~mpha!jl2ing frequency. and voltage control ,lnd harmonic reduction tL'chniqu . Also pr se nt requirement of forced commutat ion meth"ds as appliL>d to DC-DC control dud fir­ ing circuit requirement and mcthllds. lnln> ' du.:e "pplicatiollb of power oj 'clronic; to .on­ trol AC and DC mo[or& using n~' methods such as microprocessor, PrereqUISite: ECE 492. 69L Integrated Electronic8. (3). A study f en , nd MOS iIJ1alog and digi ta l integraled cir­ cuits. IndudL'$ BJT, BiMOS, and MOS fabrica­ tion, iJpplicalion specific emi-cuslom VI.SI arrays, deVIce performance and characteristics amI intograt'd dr III d , .jgn and applicali n!., Pr~ull,it~: ECE 194 and 493. 698, Principles of Power Distribution, 131. ThtJ distributi n sy tt'Jl1 b 01 \~tal wntributor to tht" overall power &yslem (u nction 0 providmg quali ek'C/ricaJ service. ProVides an overall view ,,[ the engineering fundamenlals l)f distri­ bution ~}' h:m Djl>cusse" d istnbution sy~teU1 planning and automation, primary and sec­ Ilndary uistribulion nt!tworks. Pre cnlS voltage regulation, prntecti(m, and reliability Prereq­ uisite: ECE 598 or dcpan melltol consent. 726. Digital Communication System I. (3) . Presents the theoretica l and practical il5pects of Jigltal and data 'omrnu niclltion t'ms . Includes the modclmg and analy Is of informa­ bon sourCe!> as discrete processes; basIC source lind channel coding; multiple ing and framing; !.-peclral and time domain consideraLion relat­ ed to ASK, PSK. DPSK, QPSK, FSK, MSK and other leclmiques appropriaG' fOT communicat­ ing digital information in bolh bd.~band and band-pas sy-tems; intersymbol interference; e(lects oi noise on sy tern perfom1: ECE 636 or dep,lrtmcnta l consent 73 . Embedded ystems Programming. (3). A study 01 the requirements and design of embedueu software system~ App lication of the C pr"gT.1\IlT1u ng language in Lhe imple­ mentillion of embedded systeIrUI emphasizmg rea l- time op rating ystem , mlerfadng to a ~embly ,nd !\igh-!evel 1.1nl,"lLlg ,control of external devices, task control and interrupt proce ing. Prerequisite: ECE 2.38. 744. lntroduction to VHDL (3). An introduc­ tion to VHSIC hardware desaiption language. Include differ ent type 0 mode-li ng tech­ roques usmg state-of-the-art CAD tools. Cov­ el'5 el<.ten.ively beh.lvloral modeling, structural modeling, a nd data flow modeling Design a sif,nmCI1~ indLlde design and imulation of both combinational and sequentia l circuits usin g VHDL 748. Wide Areil Networks . (3). An in -depth study 01 Wide area networks, includ\J1g ATM, X.25, Fr, m Relay, and MDS. Prerequisite: ECBM8. 754. Probabilistic MeLhods in SystemB. (3). A course in random pro.;esses d~igned to pre­ pare the student for work III communications c nlrol ', computer tern, mformation theo­ ry, and signsJ processing. Cover~ basiL C011 ­ cepts and useful analytical tools for engineer­ ing probloffilS involving discrete and continu­ ou -time random pr ~ s DLcu e applica­ tions to system analysis and ident ification, analog and dIgital signal proCI!S ing. data COIll­ pression parameter eslin1ation, and related dis­ cipline . l'rercquisites: ECE 383 and Ither Stat. 471 or lEN 254. 764. Routing and Switching 1. (4). 3R; 3£.. An introductory courSe which studIes different hardware technologies, like et:hern t and t ken ring DI cusse~ VLSM. fntrl.'lduce d ifferent rou ting protocol-. Indude hands-on experi­ ence in the ECE departmen t's routing and SWitching 1.1b. Prerequisite; ECE 29-1-,229 , or departmental con ent. 777. Select d Topics in Electrical Engineering. (1..4). ew or special rourses presented on Sul­ fiClent demand. Repeatable for credit. Prereq­ uisite: departmental amsenl. 781. Analog Fillers. (3). A detailed study of analog filter de 'ign methods. Lncludes both pa slve and active (jlt~rs. Disru lies anait)g fiI­ te.r approximatio ns ; ~overs ensitivity an d nois analyse , Prerequisite: ECE 383 a nd 492. 782. Digital Signal Proces ing. (3). Presents the fundamenta l concepts and techrriques of digitnl signal processing. Time domain opera­ tioll5 Ilnd techniques in lude difference equa­ tions and convolution summat10n Covers Z­ transform methods, frequency-domain analy­ sis of discrete-time signals and systems, dis­ crete Pourier lrans{onn. and fa t Fourier trans­ form. Emphasizes the frequency response of discrete-lime systems and the relationsh.ip to analog yste.m · Prerequisites: ECE 383 or departmental wnsent. 790. Independent Study in ElectriClll Engi­ neering. (1-3). Arranged indivJdual, indcpen­ dent S1udy lJ1 spedalJ7ed content areas til elec­ trical engineering unuer the supervision {If a fuculty member Repeatable (or credit Preh.,<]­ wsite: departmental conscnt. 792. State Variable. (3). Review of mathemat· ics fundamental to state-space concepts. For­ mulat ion f ~tate -variable m del for line r and nonlinear continuous and discrete system~ and concepts of controllability and ob ervabili· ly. Stud ies alljoin! systetru In addition to l i.l­ punuv and lagrange stabi li ty and c mputa ­ Iional ,lpproxlmallon techniques. Prerequisite: ECE383. 797. Compater Application lo Power System Analysis. (3). Describes the use of power 5)', . tern component models an d efficient computl­ tionaI t 'chn illue:; in the development of a new generation rcomputer programs representlng the st auy and dy namiC sta tes of electri c pnwer system» Jnd inform f meth d cur­ rentlyemployed In the electric utility Industry. Empha iles algorithms uitable for computer 'olution of power y terns problem ~ucl,.J~ power flows and system voltages during nor· mal ,1nd em~rgency condition and U'nn i~ nt behavior of the ystem resu lting from fau H condition and 6witclung operations. Prerequi­ sites: fCE '229 and 598. 798. Advanced Electric Power Systems Analy· sis. (3). Advanced topiCS in analyslll and opcrn­ tion of ~Iectric utility power sy ten\ . Topic~ include faulted sy5tem analy..jb, economic dis· patch. gen rat~r mod ing. power syst'nl sta · bility, and system protection. Prerequisite: BCE 598, Courses for Graduate Students Only 826. Digital Communicalion Sy terns 11. (3). Presents in"depth theoretical and practical dig, ital communication ystems and cha nnel~. Includes the modeling and analysis of all dlgi· tal communications receIver with intermediate frequency (IF) sampling and AID converter; synchroni:ution tech niques; trellis-mded mud· ulation ITCM); Multiple Access; fading mull!· path channel; radio frequency ln terference (RFl) channel, and jamming channel. Applies to dlgitaI atelllte communication system; and digital cellular code division multiple access (CDMA) sy tern. Prerequisite: ECE 726 842. Modem FilleTS. (3). Concerned with esti· mating a signal of Interest or the stale of a sp­ te.m in the presence of addilive noise, making use of the statistica l characterislics of both the SIgnal and the nOlSe. Course in udes Wien~r filters, KaLm.an filters, llnear pr diction . ~nd aJ orithrru; for linear prediction parameter e" Li· matian . Prerequisit : fCE 754. 844. Advanced Computer Architecture 1. (31. Cover ildvanced arch.itectu ra l subjecb­ nucroprogramming, eCOltomics 0 ch ip design, in · truction set perf(mnance, and plpelining. Prerequi 'ites: ECE 394 and 594. 845. Adaptive Filters, (3) . Concerned with es ti· mating ,I igna l of inter t or the tate of a ~rs­ tern in the presence f additive noise, but \r~. Discu..%C5 software and hardware imple­ m!!l1 tations; introduces two-dimensional digi­ tal fil lers. Prerequisite: ECE 782 or departmen­ tal ,;oosen!. 884. Discrete-Time Control Syst.ems. (3). Fun­ damentals of input-output and state-space nalysjs. dlfIerence equatiOnB and state space representations; pole placement and observer design; dynamic programming and discrete mIn imum principle; linear state regulator design; equality-constrained control problems. Prerequisites: ECE 684 and 782 886. Error Control Coding. (3). Presents lunda­ mentnl topics from information theory which underlie so urce and error contro l coding. Reviews topics (rom fin ite field theory and vector spaces essential for the study of coding. Ptesents the concepts of code-space, sphere packing and perfect codes. Considers linear (n .K ) block codes in some detail including error detection and correction concepts, parity ch~ck matrices and syndromes. I-lamm ing codes, cycliC codes. error \.rapping decoding, OCH codes, bur6t-error-correcting codes. inter­ leaving and product codes. Presents convolu­ tional codes and topics su~ a$ the Viterbi algOrithm for decoding. PrerequisiQ'S: ECE 586 and 754. 893. Optimal Control. (3). A continuation of the study of state-space concepts in the areas of nonlinear system, and optimal ilnd suboptimal control systems w ith wide classes of perfor­ rna.nee measures. Prerequisite: ECE 792.. 894. Advanced Computer Archilecture n. (3) Vector processors, memory-hierarchy design, input and output. Prerequisite: BCE 844. 895. Nonlinear Control Theory. (3). An intro­ duction to the analysis and design of nonUflcar control sys tems emphasizing stability. Includes stability deiinjtions, phase-plane methods, lin­ earization, time and frequency domain stabili­ ty criteria, Umlt-cycle criteria and exact meth­ ods for relay control systems. Prerequisites: BCE 684 and 792. 897. Operation and Control of Power Sys­ tems. (3). Acquaints electric power engineering students with power generation systems, their operation in economic mode and lhclr contro\. Introduces mathematic..1optimization meth­ ods and applies them lo practical operating problems. Introduce!' methods used 111 modem control systems for power generation systems. Prerequisite: ECE 598. 960. Advanced Selected Topics in Electrical Engineering. (1-3). Presents new or special.i2ed advanced topics in engineering. Repeatable for credit. Prerequisite: instructor's consent. 976. PhD Dissertation. (1-16) . Graded StU only . Repeatable lOT credit. Prerequisite: admission to doctoral aspirant status. 982. Speech Recognition. (3) Reviews topic of speech digital signal processing and analysis as necessary for a study 0/ speech recognition such a& speech signal prodm:lion and percep­ tion; acoustic-phonetic characterization of speech signals; representing speech signals in time and frequency; and linear prediction of speech Signa ls. Studies tOpICS su~ as vector quantization, pattem compari.."Dn .md template matching metl1ods, dynamic time alignment or warping, s lochastic methods such as hidden Markov models, linear prL>diction or phonettcs as two methods lli segmenting speech signals, languilge or context-dependent models, and smal l \'5. large vocabulary model.!l. PrercqUl­ ite: ECE 882 or departmental consent 986. Wireless Spread Spectrum Communica­ tions. (3). ExpliliTUi w ha t spread-spectrum communications is ilnd why direct-sequence code-division multiple access CDS-CDMA) lipread-spectrum is used for wireless commu­ rocations. Studies the block dlQ~ams 01 the J.S.. 9<; forward WId reverse wireless communica­ tion links under mul ti-path mobile fading environment using analysis techniques ,md imulation. Analyzes pseudo-noise (PN) si811 ~1 generation, the billld-limited waveform ~hi1p­ ing niter, convo l ution~l coding, interleaver, Walsh code orthogonal modulation, Rake (in­ ger receivers, non-coherent Walsh or thogonal sub-ophma) demodulation, other simultane­ usly supportable subscribers, and third gen­ eration CDMA Prerequibile: ECR 726. 990. Ad,'anced Independent Study. (1-3). Arranged indIvidual, independent study in spedaJ.i.z.ed cuntent areas in engineering unde.r the supervision of a faculty advisor Repeat­ able toward the PhD dew-ee. Prerequisites: advanced standrng and departmental consent. 993. Large Scale Control Systems. (3). Sensi­ tivity analysis of determi.nistic and stochastic systems; sOllfces of uncertainty in control sys­ tem.s, e.g.. plant parameter variation, time delays, small nonlinearities, noiS(' disturbance and model reduction; quantitative ~tudy of the e£fecl<; uf uncertainties on system performance; low-sensitivity design strategies, state and out­ put leedback design; simsitivity function approach, Singular perturbation and model education techniqucs; adaptive systems illl near-<>ptimal control . Prerequlsitt!: ECE 893. Industrial and Manufacturing Engineering The industrial and manufacluring engi­ neertng(~gE)deparITnentatVVSUmkes responsibility for instruction and research in deSign, analysis, and operation of man­ ufacturing and other integra~ed systems of people. material, equipment, and capi­ taL The IMfgE department offers two undergraduate degree program.s, one in industrial engineering (BSIE) and another In manufacturing engineering (BSMfgE). The BSI.E degree program is accredited by the Engineering Accreditahon Conunis­ sion of the Accreditation Board for Engi­ neering and Technology (EAC/ABET) . The BSMfgE degree program is new and accreditation for it has not yel been ought. TIle department also offers three grad ua Ie degree programs: Master of Engineering Management (MEM), MS in IE, and PhD in IE. Both the MSlE and PhD programs allow specialization in engineering systems, ergonomics/human factors engineering, and manufacturing system.. engineering. TIle MEM program is geared toward helping engineers/tech­ nologists develop planning, decision making, and D1anagerlal skills while receiving advanced technical knowledge. Modern, well-equipped laboratones are available to supplement classroom theory ill ergonomics, manufacturing engineer­ ing, and computer analysis. TIle depart­ 98 mcnt' lab rata faciliti 5 indud e- a Manufacturing Pro es Lab, Graph- ICS Lab, M IT logy Lab, Computer Inle­ grated Manufacturing ab, Automation and on trois b, Ergonomics Lab, and Open Computing Lab. Students in the academi programs offer by the indus­ l r ia l and nufactu ing engineering d par ment g l a pie opporlunity to work on real-liCe pr bl~ in local indu ­ lIJes as part of course requirements. The IMfgE departmen t aims to offer curricu la and E'duc.ational xper ience d, ign d a t d c nti n uou Iy impr ,ed through involvement and contribution of s tud nts, facu lty, admini! crati n, taf, and industry. Objectives of the education­ al programs oHi red by the department are dri en by WSU's mis 'ion a a 'm tropoiamn university . Speci£i Hy, ur program edu ati nal bjectives ar : 1. Our graduates will be prepared for profe sional employment and graduale study. 2. Our graduat _ will b prepar d for likl ng learning and pr fessj naJ devel­ opmcn. 3. We will provide an education tha t is r ognized within th profession. Bachelor 01 Science Degree in Industrial Engineering Indu trial engineers rlpp ly scient if ic knowledge to solve problems in manufac­ turing and ~l th r industries, busin SSE'S, and institutions, f custog on produ tivity in1pr vem nl thr ugh II r us or human resomces, financial resources, nat­ urnl resources and man-made structures and quipmen t. lEs apply analytical, sim ulaLion, and experimental t oIs to de ' ign, planning, impl menlation, and operati nal problems in a wide variely of orgaruz.ations such as banks, hospitals, consulting firm , transportation, con­ structi n, proces ing, manuJactu r ing, electron iCS, social ervice-, and gOY rn­ men t at all level . The f cu of tndustrial engineering is on proc s improvement Sequence of Courses The BS in industrial engineering program req Uire the c mpletion of 128 erne ter h Ol rs plus ngr. 310 for graduation, minu hours ommen ura te w ith < dvanced p lacement credi t. Students may I ct 9 hours of techn ica l el ectives to empi a 'ize thelr tudy of engine r ing ys­ tern, erg norni " r m nufacturing engi­ neering. This allows students Lo special­ ize in a pedfi area of industria l engi­ neering. Students' programs a re deter­ mined by their own interests in consulta­ tion With th ir fa ulty advisors. Specific r qu lrement:! an a sugges ted ch dule ( r lhe industrial engin ering pr gram ar giv n in the accompanying table. M odel Program reshman Course Hrs. Eng!. 101/100 and 102, College English J and Il .........................................6 Comm.111 , ublic p aking .. .... ............... 3 Math. 242Q and 24 , Calculus [ and 1I ......................... .. ................... ... ... ....10 Phys. 313Q, Univer'ity Physics r... ........ .. ..4 Chem. 11lQ, General Chemistry ..............5 lEN 222, Engineering Graphics ........... .. ....3 MfgE 258, Manufacturing Method 1... .. .. .. 3 Sophomore Caurse HI'S. Math. 511, Linear Algebra............ .. .. .. ....... 3 AE 223, Statics ......... .. .................................. . EeE 229, Engineering Computing in C ..3 ECE 282, Circwts 1.................... ................... 4 lEN 254, Engineering ProbabiliLY and Statistics I ..... . ....... ... .. .... ....... ............ 3 £EN 255, Engineering Economy ................3 lEN 452, Work Analysis and Design ........3 lEN 524, Engineering ProbabiJity and Statistics 1I ...................... ................... 3 lEN 550, lotr duction to Operations Research ............ .... .. .... .... ....3 Humanities, social science or fine arts electives· ........................ ........... . 3 Junior COllrse Hrs . Math. 344, Calculus m......................... .......3 Phy . 3 L4Q University Physics II ..... .. ......4 Econ . 202Q, Principles fEconomJcs (micro)·.... .......................... 3 ME 250. Materials Engineering .................3 lEN 549, Industrial ErgonomiCS .. .. ... ... .... ..3 .lEN 553, Production and Inventory Control ... .... ............... .......................... ...... .3 lEN 554, Stati tical Quality Contro!... ..... . . lEN 563, Facilities Plann ing and D ign .. IE 565, Systems Simulation ........ .. ..........3 Technical electives· ..... ...... ........................... . 3 Humanities, social cience or fine arts electives· ......................... ........... 3 Senior Course HI' . ME 398, Thermodyru mics r............ ...........3 Engr. 310, Seminar in Engineering ........... 0 lEN 556, Information Systems .... ... .. ......... .3 LEN 590, Industrial Engineering Design 1 ................................... ................... 3 lEN f)qo, Industrial Engineering D ign 11 ....................... ... ................. .... .....3 Technica l electives ..• ...... .. .......... ........... .... ... 6 Natural science elective§ ... ... ... .. ... .. ........ .3 Humanities, social dence or fin arts cl&tives- ................................. '1 -RefeT to th' ollego! of Engin enng gradllilhon rt..'qUlr m nlS In lh WSU UII/logr.ldullf~ emlliL'g fo r delilils "I'D b<> chosen hum ,m ilppro\'ed list (a minImUm 01 6 houf'S must he taken within lhi! lMfgE d l'art· mllnt nolo §To hi> ch.,,;l'n ITOm on approved list avrulable Itrlm lhe College c>r En meerlng. Bachelor of Science Degree in Manufacturing Engineering Manuiaclurin ngineering ' concerned with converling raw materials ilnd inter­ mediat products into final and other intermediate products through !:he Wit! uf vari us design, pr c sing" sem Iy, and a u t mation techni ue a well as lhe design and manufacturing of tools, jigs, and machines u ed in these proces~~s . The strength r lhe BSMfgR program il t Wichita Stale i itA mpha -i n lh fl.l­ lOwing lhree manufacturing engineering areas: materials and processes; producl engineering and assembly; and, manufac·· turing quality and productivity. Manu facturing engineers can apply their broad and omprehen iv kilL in a wide sp c­ lrum of industries. Sequence of Courses The BS in manufacturing ngineering program requires the completion of 135 cmester hours plus Engr. 310 for gradua­ ti n, minus hour c mmen urate with advanced lacement credi t. Students m. y e lect 12 hour of technical lective to emphasize lheir study of advanced man­ ufactur in~ engineering oncept and related lopics in other enginee.ring di!.~:­ pline . S leetion of appr prial course'" would allow the sludent to tail r th Ir study to fit their mdividual in terests an.d need . Stud nts' pro r ms of tudy are determined in consultation with therr fac ­ ullyadvisors. Specific re.qwr ments and a uggete schedule for the manufa turing engineer­ ing program aT gwen below Note that the manufacturing engineering progrnm is undergoing a r vi w which may re;u\ in a revi j n f th current curriculum by the time lhis Cntalog is published. Model Program Fre hman Collrse Hr$. Engl. 101/100 and '102/ CoUege English T and II ...................................... ...n Mat.h. 242Q and 243, Calculus I and IT .. ... ... ... .. ........... .. ........... ....... ..... .. .... 10 COLLEGE OF ENGlNEERING/ INDUSTRlAL AND MANUFACTURING ENGINEERING 99 phys. 3130 and 3150, University Physics I andlab . ..... ... .. .. ... .. .. .... ... .... ... ..5 Chern. lllQ, General Chemistry ...... ...... ..5 ECE 229, Engineering Computing in C. ...3 .E 250 and 251, Materials Engineering and lab .................... .. .. ... .. .......... .. .. .. .......... 4 MfgE 258, Miu1Ufacluring Methods and Materials) ........... ............. .. ...... .......... 3 SopllOmore COI/I'se Hrs. Math. 344, Calculus m.............. .............. ...3 Camm. 111, Public Speaking .. . ....... ...... .... 3 AE 223, Statics ...................... ........... .......... ...3 ME 398, Thermodynamics 1.. .. ...................3 lEN 222, Engineering Graphks ........ ....... ..3 lEN 254, Engineering Probability and Statistics I ..... .................................... ..3 lEN 255, Engineering Economy .... .. ....... ...3 MfgE 558, Manufacturing Methods and Maleri.aJ.5 II .. .. ..... .... ... ......... .... ...... ....3 MfgE 575, Computer Aided Manufacturing ...... ........ ........ .......... .... .... ..3 Technical electivesu .......................... . .. .. .....3 Humanities, social science or fi ne arts electives-.. ..... .. .......... .... .. .. ....... ... Junior Math . 555, Ordinary Differential COlli'5/! Hrs. Equations with Linear Algebra ... .. ........ .4 AE 333, Mechanics of Materials ....... ....... ..3 lEN 524, Engineering Probability and Statistics TI .. .............. ..... .... .... ............. 3 lEN 554, Statistical Quality ControL .. .....3 lEN 664, Engineering Management.... .. .. .. 3 MfgE 502, Metrology .. ...... ...... .... .. ........ ...... 3 MfgE 045, Manufacturing Systems Engineering ........................... ..._.......... ..... .3 Technical e lectives·........... .......... .. ............... 3 Humanities, social science or fme arts electives" ............ .. .. .... .. ............ ... 6 Senior Course Hrs. Phys. 314Q University Physics IT ...........4 Engr. 310, Seminar in Engineering ......... ..0 ECE 282, Grcuits r...... ... .. ......... .... ............ ..4 ME 439, Medlalucal Engineering ign 1.................. ... ................ .. ... ......... .. .3 MfgE 590, Manufacturing Engineering Design 1 ....... ... ... ..... ....... ...... .... .... ... .. .. ..... ...3 MfgE 690, Manufacturing Engineering DeSign ll ....... ............ .. .. ....... ... .. ..................3 Techl1 ica] electives** ... ... ... ......... .. ..... .. ..... ....6 Natural science elective§ ............... ... ... ..... ..3 HUmanities, socia] science or ~ne ruts electives~......... .. ....... . .. ...... .. ..6 'Reier ttl the College of Engineering graduaHon fetjuin:ments in the WSU Uml must be tl.iren within the IMfgE d ...partm...nt and at least 3 hours must be from nl\oth~T engineering department; see a suggested list of lechnil'al ( to be solved analytica ily. Emphasizes general purpose computer simulation languages. Pre ­ requisites: lEN 553 and ECE 229. Corequjsite: IEN524 . 100 5QO. Indu trial Engineering Design 1 (3). An industry-based team design p ro'ect utili zing ind uSITia l engill.eerin principles; perf m1ed under faculty upervisi n May n t b c unted toward graduate cr dit. May not get credit in both fEN 590 and Mfg. E. 590. Prerequisi tes : lEN 549, 553, be within n year l)f graduation , and have departmental consent. 664. Engineering ManagemenL (3). An inb:o­ ducbon to Ihe de ign and ontrol of tech n log­ ical l y based projects, Coru;iders both the theo­ retical and practical aspects of _I' ·tem models, organizationa l development, project planning and control, resource dllo tion, team develop­ ment and per onal kill assessmen t. PrereqUI­ s ite: [EN 254 or Stat. 471. 670. lndustrial Robotics. (3) . A study oi princi­ p les Ild pp lic bon, of industria l robot in manulacturing y 'temti. In lude! rob t dassiti ­ CL lions, a tua to , sensors. conleol ystems and robo t pro ammlng. PT'requisite: ECE 239 or A 227 690. Industrial Engineering Design n. (3) . Con tinuation of the design project initiated in r 590 or the p ·rtom1ance of a second indus­ trial engineering design project. May not b counted toward a graduate indus tr ial e ngi­ neering major. May not get credi t in both TEN 690 and Mfg. E. 69{l Prerequisites: lEN 59 and epartment consent. 731. Foundations of Optimization. (3). An extensive treatment of the th ry and concepts of t he linear, non li near, cons trained a nd unconstrained optimization techn iques. Pre­ requisite: l EN 55!). 740. Analysi of Decision Processes. (3). Deci ­ 'ion analy'iis as it applies to capi tal equip ment selt'cti n and replacemen t, process design and polley development. Explicit comid!'ration of ri k, uncert,1 in ty a nd mult iple attribute i developed and applied u ing modem c mput­ e r aided anal. sis techn iques. Prerequisite : lEN 254 and 255, 749. Advanced Ergonomics. (3). A continua­ ion of lEN 549. Indud p rinciples and appli­ t l n of human factor~ to the d <;ign of the workp lace, d i-play , cont rol systems, hand tools and video display tem1inals. Prer quisite: lEN 54 . 750. Industrial Enginee.ring Workshop. (1-4). Various topics in industrial engineerin g, Pre­ requisite: departmental co nt. 754. Reliability and Maintainability Engi­ neering. (3). Studies probl ms of quantifying, a~ e s ing and verifying re liabili ty. Presents various factor that determine the capabilities of components emphasizing practi 1 applica­ tions. Example and p roblem5 cover a broad ra nge o f nglneen ng fi e lds . Prerequisite : IE 524. 755. De ign o f Experiments. (3) . AppLication of ana iy L o f va rian ce and e xpe ri m e n tal d sign for engineering ~tudies . Includes gen [­ a l design meth odOlOgy, single-factor designs, ran omized blocks, fac torial designs, fra lional rep lica t ion, and confoWld ing , Prereq u i ite: lEN 524 or instructor's consen t. 757. Modem Technique in Safety Engineer­ ing. (3). An advanced tudy of the poncipl and quantitative measux f indutrial saf ty ilnd the Occupational Safety and Health Act. Prerequisite: lEN 557. 764. Systems Engineering and Analysis. (3). Pr cntati n of y tem design proc from the identification of a need th rough conceptua l de ' ign, preliminary design. detail deSIgn and development, and system 1('St and evaluation. tudie operational feasib ili ty, re liab ili ty, maintainability, L1 ppm:tabi li ty and economic feaJ ib1lity. Prerequisites: lEN 254 nd 255. 770. Industrial Automation. (3). 2R; 3L Teach­ es the design and application or manulacturing aut()mated sy terns . Di5cLl~ses u toma ti n component, uch a sens rs, actuators and microp rocessors, along with the use of pro­ grammable logic controllers. In troduces other area of automation, such s roboti ,mach ine vision, D C machine tools, and their integra­ tion into utomated system. rerequisite: ECE 239 or kn wledge l1f a programming language. 775. Computer lntegrated Manufacturing. (3). A study of the c ncepts, component and tech­ nologies of OM sy tem , enterprise modeling for CIM, local area networks. CAD IC D inter­ faces, information flow for elM, hop flo r contro l and justification of OM systems. Pre­ requisite: fEN 239 or knowledge of a program­ ming language, IEN 558, 780. Topics in Industrial Engineering. (3). New or sp cial ou rses are presented L1nde.r this lis ti ng. Repeatable fo r credit wh n ubject m atter warrants. 781, Cooperative Edu.cation. (l-8). A work­ related p lacement with a supe.rvi I'd profes­ sional experience to complement and enhance th dent's academic program. Inte\ld d fo r ma ter ' s level or doct ra l students i n lEo Repe table for crediL. May not be used to sati ­ fy degree requiremen ts , Prerequi ite: depa rt­ m nta l consent and graduate GPA of .onor above. CRINCR only. 782. AssembJy Design and Phnning. (3). Studies various topics rela ted to design, plan­ ning, and fabrica ti n of m chanica! assemblies. indud joining processes, design for a embly (D FA) pri nciples. as 'embly design, product modeling, product data management, ails m ­ bly equen 'ng, and a 5 mbly tool design, Pre-­ requisite: Mfg. E. 258 and ECE 239 or know!­ dge of a programming language. 785. Tole.rancing in Design and Manufactur­ ing, (3) . Provides a basic unders tanding of the theory a nd appl ica ti on o f t 1 rancin' in de ign. ma nufacturing, and inspec ti o n . Reviews current literature in the are of toler­ ancing ilnd inspection. fndude detailed dis­ cussion of the ASME standards on geometric dimensioning and tolerancing (CD&T), GD&T verification pr cedurel>, tolerance analysis an allocation, sta tisticaJ tolerancing, and Tagu­ chi' approach to tolera n.cing. Courses for Graduate Students Only 835. Applied Forecasting Methods. (3) . A ·tudy of the forecastIng' meth ds, including . moothmg te nique5, tim e seriee analysiS and Box-Jenkins models. Prerequisite: lEN -24. 842. dvanced Simulation. (3). A stud y of advanced tecll11iques and meth ds or sta h'f i­ caHy selecting input d' ·trib tI tiol1.'\ fo r and ana ­ IYl ing outpu t fr m ~imulation model . Also studies variance redu bon and model valId ­ lion techni q ue.<.. Prerequi. it : I <;65 and 52.4. 854. Quality Engineering. (3). A broad \Tiew of qua li ty foois and thei r integrati n in to a com­ prehensiv{' qua lit management and improv ­ men! system. Covers the theory and approach­ es of the major quali t leaders such as Deming. Jura n. and Cro~by. Explore~ off-line and on­ line quality engineering techniques, induding cost of quality. the se ven "old" and seven "new" tools. Qua lity Function Deployment. nd stali tica l pro es con tr I method ,. Explores deSIgn of engineering experi ments. in cl uding Tagu h i' methods Prereq u i ~ it(· lEN 524. 857. Environmental Hygiene Engineering. (3). EvaluatJon and contro l of mechanica l, hysi I and hemical envir nmenls . Hnvironmen ta l Factoh contiide.red include heat, cold, noise, Vibra tion, light, pressure, acceleration, rad i ­ tion and ilir ontaminants. Pr r qui ite: IBN 549. 876. The is. (1-6). raded stu only Repeatab le for credit . Prerequisite: co nse n t 0 th ' ~ is advisor. 877. FoundaLions of Neu.ral Networks. (3). f or tudents from variety of dis iplines , Intro­ duces the theory and practical applications of artificia l neural network . Covers several net­ work paradigm. emph izin the use ()f neu­ ral networks as a solution tool for industr ial pr blems whicll requi re pa ttern recogn i ion, predictive and interpreHvt! models, pat lL' rn lass ificahon, optimization, and lu te n ng. Presents examples an di cu ses them (rom a variety of areas including quality c ntr 1. pro­ ce ' monit ring and contro , robotics control. imulation metamodeling, conomic analy: is model, diagnQ tic models, -ombinatori I opti­ mization.. and mad-line viSIOn. 878. MS Directed ProjecL (1-3). A project con­ ducted tInd r th upervisi.on of an a demie advisor for the di rected project opti n, ReqUi res a writte.n report and an or 1 presenta­ tion on the project. Graded Iu only , Prerequi­ site: onsent of academic advisor. 880. Topics in lnduslrial Engineering. (3) . New or specia l cour9CS are p re ented under this Ijsting on ulfident demand. R peatable fo r cred it when . ubject matter warrants. 890. lndependent Study in Industrial Engi~ neering. (3). Analysis, re earch and solution ot 11 selected problem. Prerequisite: Instructor's consent. 930. Multiple Criteria Decision Making. (3). An extensive trea tment of techni qu for dC(l­ 'on making where the multiple criteria na ture of the problem must be r",cognized explicitly. Prerequisite: lEN 550. 949. Work Physiology. (3). The tudy of car­ d iovascu lar. p u lmona r 7 and m u eLdar responses 10 industria! work including as pects of endurance, ~tr ngth, fatigue. recovery and the energy co t of work. Utiliza tion of physical COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING /MECHANlCAL ENGINERRING 101 work caracil): and job demand for task desIgn, persoonel a~~ lgnment and ossessment (~f work­ ~<:cheduling Prerequisite: lEN 54 950. occupational Biomechanics. (3). Theoreti­ cal fund.,menla\s of the link system of th bod" and kin"tic aspeds of body movement. Incl;j d~ application of biomechanics to work sy,tE'n1s. Prerequisites: lEN 549 Bnd AE 223. 956. Knowledge-Based Systems. (3). IntToduc­ tion to the concepts and techmqut!s In knowl­ edge-baCed sys tems or expert systems. Includ e!; des ign and deve.lopment of know1­ dge- based system~ using microcompu ter­ bas~d software. Prerequisite: ECE 239 or AE 227 or depClrlmental consent. 960. Advanced Selected Topics. (1-3). New or special courses on advanced topics presented under this listing on sufficient demand. Pre­ req wsite: instructors consent. 970. Machine Vision Applications. (3L A study o( machine vision techniques, such liS thresholding, edge detection. boundary follow­ ing. ubject identification and measurements u~i ng machine vision. Emphasizes the appl ica­ tion of machine vision techniques in automat­ ed inspection and object recognition . Prerequi­ s ile.~ . ECE 239 or knowledge of a programming language, lEN 670. or instructor's consent. 976. PhD Dissertation. (1-6). Graded 5/U only. Repeatable for creruL Prerequisi te: admIssion to doctoral aspiran t statu .~ . 990. Advanced Independent Study. (1-3). Arranged individu al. independent study in ~pecialiLed content area~. Repeatable (oward the PhD degree. Prerequisites: advanced stand­ ing and departmental consent Manufacturing Engineering Lower-Division Course 101 . Introduction to lnduslrial and Manufac­ turing Engineeri ng. (1). Cross-listed as lEN 101. An introduction and overview of the disci­ pline areas within ind ll-~t.rial and manufactur­ ing engmeering. Combines design, case study, and hands-on experience w ith lectures on th.e dif~rent emphasis areas. 258. Manufacturing Methods and "'laterials I. (3 ). 2R; 3L Provides an Introduction to the major ~manufaduring processes. The processes covered 8re, but not limited to, machining met­ als. IneW forming, extrusion, casting, and join ­ I11g praCe5lies. Students gain an extensive labo­ ratory experience on different manu facturing processes. Prerequisite : Math. 123 or equiva­ lent. Courses for Graduate/Undergraduate Credit 502. Metrology. (3). Covers new methods of manufacturing metrology and digital measure­ ment techniques. Introduces devices such as Coordinate Measuring Machines and non-con­ tac t "ptica l measurement devices Includes a l abor~tory to fa miliarize the studen ts wi th th~e devices. Prerequisites: fEN 254 and lvtlg. E. 258. 554. Manufacturing Tools and Processes. (3). Intruduces the co ncepts of COnCurTen\ engi­ neering, tool design. fixture design, jig design, presswork tool!> desIgn, and mold design . Also includes the fund amenta l soft gauge design and mea.suring, fabrication processe .., assem­ bly tooling and processes. Prerequisite: Mfg. E. 258 558. Manufacturing Methods and Male.rials lL (3). Covers the theoretical a~pects ('If manu ­ facturing processes; knowledge of material treatment and its effect on manufacturing pro­ cess~. In depth .,tudy of the material removal processes and non-madltional machining. Tool wear and tool wear morutoring and un ,lttend­ ed machining. Includes an introduction to geo­ metric dimensionmg and tolerancing. Includes laboratory experience and p lant tours. Prereq­ uisites: Mfg. E. 258 and ~1E 25U. 575. Computer Aided Manufacturing. (3). An introductory course in Computer Aided Manu­ facturing . Examines the basic princip les oi CAM, such as computer aided design.. NC pro­ gramming, CAD/CAM integration. (lIld prin­ ciples of group technology and par t fa mily for­ mation. Prerequisites: Mig. E. 258 and ECE 239 or equiva lent 590, Manufacturing Engineering Design I. (3). First of two capstone design project course 1I tili~ing manufa ctu ring engineering prin ci ­ ples, performed Wlder facul ty supervision, (or olving practical problems. May not be count­ ed toward a gradua te in dustrial engineering major. May not get credi t ill both lEN S90 and Mfg. I!. 590~ PrereqUisites: must be with.in one yeil r of graduation and departmental consent. 622. Computer Aided Design. (3). intended as an introduction to 3-D computer graphics. Dis­ cuss concepts of CAD/CAM/OM, design the­ ory and automation, know ledge-based CAD systems and the use of Al tools in CAD. Describes the des ign interdtange standards and the interface between CAD/CAM. Prereq­ uisites: fEN 221, ECE 239 or equivalent. and Ma th. 555. 639. Applications of Finite Element Analysis in Mechanic~ Engi~neering Systems. (3) . Introduces the finite element method as a pow­ rful and general computer tool for so lving problems related to mechanical engineering systems. Applies finite element techniques to one and two dimensional mechanical engineer­ ing problems in fluid med1anics, heat transIer, solid mechanics, il nd mechanical syste ms design. Introduces commercial fin ite elemen t mmputer tools sud! as ALGOR and ANSYS. Prerequisite: ME 439, M:E 522 or equivalent. 645. Manufacturing Systems Engineeri ng. (3). A study of the desigT\ planning, implementa­ ti on, and control of manufacturing systems. Discusses types of manufac turing systems, material requiremenl p lanning. capacity plan­ ning, facili ties planning, scheduling, and an introduction to computer aided process plan­ ning. Prerequisite; Mfg. E. 558. 654. Non-traditional Machining Processes. (3). A study of the role and economics of non-tra ­ ditional processes; use of laser and electron beams in inspection and measurement; heat treatment; material remova l; materia l joining; and coatul\!.. AJso covers the fu ndamentals of electro-discharge machining, electro-chemical mach rn ing, chemica l mi lli ng, and wilter-je t macl1ining. Prerequisite: Mfg. E. 5S1!. 658. Fonning Processes. (3). In troduces the fundamentals of deformation and the physical and mathemati cal modeling of forging, roll ing. extrusion. drawing, swaging. coin ing, ~heet ­ metal working, spinning. Also covers the fun ­ damentals of tool and die deSIgn. Prerequisite; A£333. 690. Manufacturing Engineering DeSign lL (3). Continu ation of the project initiated in MIg. E. 590 or a second llldustrv-based design project. May not blo' c.ounted toward a graduate ind~ustria l engin eering ma jor. May not get credit in both TEN 690 and Mfg. E. 690. Prereq­ uisites: Mfg. E. 590 and departmental consent. Mechanical Engineering Mechanical engjneering is one of the broadest engineering fields . Mechanical engineers are found in virtually all pro­ ductive industries, from aircraft and auto­ motive to consumer products and build­ ing equipment. In these jobs, mechanical enginee.rf; design products, machines, and processes for manufactu ring. They ana­ lyze, test, and develop these products, machines and manufacturing processes to attain the best performance and durabili ­ ty within cost and time limits. Exampl of speci fic mechanical engineering job .. include: • design, development, and manufactur­ ing of automotive engin es and vehicle systems. • deSign, development, and manufactur­ ing of gas turbine and other a ircraft ngine • design and construction oi electrical power plan t energy conversion and gen­ erating system • design, development, and manufactur­ ing of consumer products, ranging from appliances such as refrigerators, wash~s, and electric dri ll!>, to the manufactUIing systems for producing facial tissue an processed foods and packaging of these items • design and spesification of heating, air­ conditioning, and ventilating system used in aircraft, a u tomob il es, and buildings • analysis of the complex Uow of gases and fluids such as air flow in aircraft inle ducts and fluid flow in hydraulic and pwnping systems • study of heat flow, ranging from boilers and automotive radiators to heat manage­ ment problems in orbiting spacecraft. The mechanica l engineering program prepares students for these job possibili ­ ties, as well as possible entry to graduate schoo l for those so inclined . Thi s is 102 accompLished through a broad course of study that covers not only the technical aspects required, bu t the ethical, profes­ sional, and communkationskills needed to be a successful practicing engineer. The pr gram includes component in maLhe­ ma tics and natural science, written and oral communications skills, humanities and social ciences, a core of engineering science subjects, and a specified set of required Leclmical course covering the basic areas of mechanical ngineering. In addition, students select elective courses that allow them to develop specialized knowledge in areas suc h a robotics, manufacturing, entrep~eurshipJ biome­ chanics, malerials s truclure and behavior, heat transfer, a nd energy conversion. Modern laboratories and a wide variety of comput r faciliti provide students with hands-on experience in perimen ­ tal work and computer-aid d design and engineering. Bachelor of Science Degree in Mechanical Engineering Sequence of Courses The program require the c mpletion of 135 semester hours for graduation, minus hours comme nsurate with advanced placement credit plus Engr. 310. Specific requirements and a sugge ted cours of study for the mechanical engineering pro­ gram f llow. Model Program Freshman Course Hrs, Eng\. 101/100 and 102, College English I and n........ .. ... .. ..........................6 Chem. 111Q, General ChemiStry .... ......... .5 Math. 2420 and 243, Calculus I and n............ .................................... ........ 10 Phy . 313Q and 3150, University Physics I and lab .. .. .. .. ....... .. ... .. .................5 Comm. Ill, Public Speaking .. ............... ....3 Humanities and fine rts or social and behavioral sciences elective" ........... 3 Sophomore Course Hrs. Math. 344, Cal luslIl .... .. .. ............ .. ..........3 Math. 555, Ordinary DiHerential Equations w ith Linear Algebra ..............4 Phys. 3140, University Phy ics IT ........ ... ..4 AE 223, Statics .................... ..... .. ....... ............ 3 AE 227, Engineering Digita l Computati ns .... ...... ... ... .... .. ......... ... ... ......2 lEN 255, Engineering Economy ......... ...... .3 ECE 282, Circuits I.......................................4 ME 250, Materiabi Engineering ... .............. ME 251, Materials Engineering Lab .......... l lEN 222, Engineering Graphics ..... .. .. ....... .3 En\?]". 31 0, Seminar in Engineering ........... 0 Humanities and fine arts or social and behavioral science elective" .... ....... 3 Junior Coursl' Hrs . AE 333, Mechanics of Materials ........... .....3 AE 373, Dynamics .. .. ................................... 3 ME 339, Design of Machinery ........ .... ....... 3 ME 398, Thennodynamics 1... ................... . 3 ME 402, Mechanical Engineering Measurements... ..... ..... .... .. ... .. ....... .... ........3 ME 439, Mechanical Engineering Design 1..... .. .... .......... ...................... ......... ..3 ME 502, Thermodynamics II... ........... ...... ..3 ME 521, Fluid Mechanics ........ ................... 1 ME 522, Heat Transfer ............. .................. .3 ME 523, P1uid and Heat Flow Lab .......... ..1 Natura l science electives"" .. ...... ........ .. ....... 3 Humanities and fine arts or social and behavioral sciences elective" .... ....... 3 Se.nior Course Hrs. ME 503, Mechanical Engin ering Systems Lab ratory .... ........ ..... ................ 3 Mechanical Design elechve§.............. ........ 3 Thermal Design electivC§ ...... ....... ...... ....... .3 ME 659, Mechanical ControL.... ............... 3 ME 662, Mechankal Engineering Practice. ..................... ...... ............. ............. ..3 Engineering electives'll. .......... ................... 12 Humanities and fine arts r ocia1 and behavioral sciences electives" .... .... .9 • Refer to gmdualion l" ts on practical engineer­ ing designs For machinery Pr rl!quis ite: IE r 222. Corequisite: AE 373. 360. Selected Topics in Mechanical Engineer­ ing. (1-3). ew or special topi pre~tmtL'd " n suI 1 ·ient demand. Repeatable [or credit wht'n subject materia l warra" Prer qul!'>!t .; as publ' hed or di:!pilrtmentaJ COll ,;nt. 398. Thermodynamics L (3). An illlrodu linn to the t rminology and analysis technique · specfic to themlOdynarrucs centered il.foUl1d a study of the i: t and Second Laws of TI\e.rmo­ dynamics. Prerequisites. Math. 243 lmd Ph 313Q. 402. Mechanical Instrumenl.1tion. (3) . 2Ri 1 L. An introduction tu modem measurement tech· nillues tn mechanical engineering . Prerequi­ sites. ME 339, ECE 282, and Math. 555. 439. Mechan ical Engineering Design 1. (3). Principles of mechanical design, emphasizing practice in the dpplication of many mechani("dl design elements-shafts, bearings, gea r~, brakes, clutches, threau fa tener'S, etc. Includes machine ele.ments deSign, material. election, fatigue, stres concentration, statistical on­ cept:; and 0 l standardization. Innovative practical applicatiuns demanding integration of machine lements into il practical devi c~ . Prerequisites : ME 2.50 and 251, AE 333, and Math. 555. 450. Selected Topics in Mechanical Engineer­ ing. (1-3) . eW or special topics presented on uIficient uemand. Repeatable for credit when subject materia l warrants. Prerequisite: depart­ mental consent. 451. Technical Enl1'epreneurship. (3) . A junior/senior level C{Jurse which carries design credlt and integrates into the design proces tl1pics of technical entrepreneur hip. The eng 1­ n ering s tu den t gdln ' an app reciati on for issues fa ed by a busmess in bringing a new l r impr ved design to the marketplace. Also the roden t i encouraged to ' take the n xt ,tep' towards taking their own ngineer ing idt',\ · beyond the prototype stage and to the mark"t~ pia ~. Exp es the student to a wiJe range ot business topics, including market gap analysis, finanCial planning, incentive programs, pt: r­ sonnel d t:ci.sio ll m lng, anJ busi nesb plan preparation, ill addition to standard engin~er' COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING IMECHANICAL ENGINEERING 103 ing t(}p i c~ . Pr.rrequisite: juniorI senior standing in f'nginecnng or Instructor's consent. 469. Energy Conversion. (3) . Energy conver­ sion principles. and their implcIneJ,1talion in ~.i1g i neering devices inc lud in g th erm a l mech~niCB.I, nuclear, and direct energy conver­ Sion processes. Prerequisite: ME 398. 4SlA, Co-op Education. (3). Introduces the stu­ dent 10 engineenng prnctice by working in mdUBlry in an engineering-related Job and pro­ vid e:. planned professional experience dDlgned to complement and enhance the stu­ d(mt '~ ac:adcmuc program. lnruvidualized pr(}o gr,1m< must be formulated in consultation with. and approved by, appropriate faculty SPt)nso~ and cooperative education coordina­ tOb. Intended for student:; who will be work­ ing full -time on their co-op assignment and nL'Cd ntlt be enroUed in any other course. Pre­ requ isile$: j\J!1ior standing and approval by t11e appropriate faculty sponsor. May be repeated. Oflired CrINer only. 481P. C(}-Op Education. (1). lntroduces the stu­ den! to engineering pnctice by working in industry In an e.ngineering-re.lata! job and pro­ vid es planned professiona l experience d~igned to complement and enhance Il,e s tu­ den6 ilCildemic program . Individualized pro­ grams must be formuJated in consuJtation with, il nd approved by, appropriate [.lCully spmmlT" and cooperative education coordina­ lors. lntended for students who will be work ­ ing pJrt- time on thcir c(}oop assignment and be curr!;'n tl )" enrolJ o.:d in l:ourses leading to a mechanical engineering degree. Prerequisites: ju nior 5liinding and approval by the appropri­ ate faculty sponsor. May be repeated . OfferN Cr/'VCronly. Courses for GraduatelUndergraduate Credit The courses numbered 502 U1TOUgh 760 are not uutomaticilily applicable toward an advanced dCgTCI' in engineenng. They mU5t be approved by the student's odvisor, the graduate coordj­ nator ilnd Ille chairperson of the department. Cou rses required for t11e 5S degree normally aT\.' not permitted for use toward the graduate dt'gree in mechanical engineering. 502. Thermodynil.Dl.i.cs IT, (3).- Continuation of Thermodynamics 1. emphasizing cycle analy­ sis, thermodynamic property relationship!; and p,"vchwmetric:s, with an introduction to com­ bU 5h (1n processes and chemical thermodynam­ ICS . Prerequisites; ME 398 with grade of C or better. 503, Mechanical Engineering Systems Labora­ to ry. f3}. 2R, 3L..· Sl!lected e)(J>CTimcnts ilIus­ tr;1te the methodology of experimenlation as applied to mecllanical and thermal systems. Experi ments include tbe measurement of per­ tormance of typicaJ systems and evaluation of physical properties and parameters of systems. Group design and construction of an expen­ Tnent is an important part of the course Team and indiVidual efforts are stressed as are writ­ t\ n and ural communication skills. Prerequi­ sites: J\.1E 402, EngL 102. Corequi.-,ite; ME 522 521. Fluid Mechanics. (3).- Fluid statics. Ba.. well as computational methods and numeri­ cal solutions of governing equations. Open­ ended ludent projects on engtneering applica­ tions such as vehicle ride stability simulations for different terrains. Prerequisi tes: ME 339, AE 373 and Math. 555. 737. Robolics and Control. (3). A systems engineering approa to robotic science and technology. FundamentaLs of mampuLators, sensors, actuators, end-effectors and product d sign for automation Includes kinematics, trajectory planninty control. pTogramming of manipulators and simulation, along with intro­ duction 10 artificial intelligence and computer \-ision. Prerequisite: ME 659 r equivalent. 739. Advanced Machine De ign. (3). A broad coverage of principles of mechanical analysis and design of machine elements. Emphasizes dynamic system modellinty precliction of natu­ ra! fretluencies and forced response, Heel of upport fle)(ibility, failure theodes used in de ign, and iatigue lile prediction. Typical mechanic., \ system studied are gears, bear­ ings, shafts, rotating machinery, and many typ . of spring-mass syStems. Uses fundamen­ tals learned in mechaniCS, trength of materi­ als, and thermal sciences to u ndersta nd mechanical sys tem modelling, analysis, and design. Prerequ isite: ME 541 or instructor's consent. 747. Microcomputer-Based Mechanica.l Sys­ tems. (3). 2R; 3L. Microcomputer-based real­ time control of mechanical systems. Familia.r­ iZe5 students with design and methodology of software for real -time control. Includes an introduction to the C programmmg language which I most relevan t to in terfac::ing and implementation of control theory in com purer­ based systems. labora tory sessions involve interfacing microcomputers to mechanical sys­ te.m· and oEtw re development for control methods slich as PID. Prereqwsite: ME 402 or departmental cons nt. 750. Special Topics in Mechanic,lI Engineer­ ing. (1-3) . New or special topics are presented on ~ufficient demand. Repeatable for credit when subject matenal warran . PrerequiSite: departmental consent. 755. intennediate Thermodynamics. (3). Law of thermodynamics, introduction to tatistical concepts of thermodynamics, thermodynamic p roperl ies, chemical t hermodynamics , Maxwell's relahons. Prerequisite: ME 502 or departmental consent. 759. Neural Networks fOT Control. (3). intro­ duces specific euraJ network archItectures used for dynamic sy tem modeling and intelli­ gent control. Includes theory of feed · orward, recurrent and Hopfield networks; applications in robo tics, aircraft and vehicle guidance, chemical processes, and optimal control. Pre­ requisite: ME 659 or departmental consent. 760. Fatigue and Fracture. (3). Covers fracture mechanics in meLals, ceramics, p Iymers and composites. Suitable for graduate and under· graduate study in metallu rgy and materials, mecha nical engineerinty civil engineering ,nd aerospace ngineering where a combined materiaLs-fractu.re mec hanics approach is stressed. Prerequisite: ME 250 or departmental consent 762. Polymeric Composite Materials. (3). A basic understanding and knowledge about the structure and mechanical properties of poly­ meric composite materials in detail. Discusses both short fiber and continuum fiber compos­ ites. Emphasizes special design considerations fo r composite materials including fracture mechanics and peTformance of composites under adverse conditions (fatigue and impact). Prerequisi te: ME 250 or equivalent or depart­ mental consent. 764. Thermodynamics ot Solids. (3). Presents basic thermodynamic concepts wh ich w ill form U,e working tools throughout the COUISe. Emphasizes the interpretation of certai n types of phose diagram&--not upon th UBe of ther­ modynamics to assist phase diagram construc­ tion but upon the use of phase diagrams to obtain thermodynamiC quantities. Also, the thermodynamics of defects and defect interac­ tions in metals, ceramics, polymers, elemen!..! semiconductors , and compounds Prerequi ­ sites: ME 250 and 398 or departmental consent. 766. SEM and EDAX. (3) . Gives s tudents knowledge of Scanning Electron Microscopy (SEM), a p we.rful tool in materials scil!llce and engineering which can be used to analyze structural defects in m terials. Discusses both the theory and experimental methods, as well as the application of these methods. Prerequi­ site: ME 250 or departmental consent. 767. X-Ray Diffraction. (3). Theory f X-ray diffraction, experLmc-nta! methods and their applicati ns which can include determina tion of the crystal structure oi materials, chemical analysi . stre sand straln mea urements, study of phase uilibria, measurement of par­ ticle size, and dl!termlnation ot the orientation of a single crystal. Prerequisites: ME 250 and AE 333 or departmental consent. 781. Coope.rative Education. (1-8). A wor\-.­ related placement with a supervised profes­ sional experience to complement and enhance the student's academic progra m. lntended for master'o level or doctoral students in mechan i­ cal engineering. Repeatable for credit. May not be used to satisfy degree requirements. Prereq­ uisite: graduate standing, department's c n­ ent and graduate GPA of 3.00 or above . Offered CrfNCr only. • Nurmally not permi tted for use toward the graduJte degr in n\.Cch.u1i I enginl.'i!ring. Courses for Graduate Students Only 801 . Boundary Layer Theory. (3). Develop ' menl of the Navier- toke equation, laminar boundary layers, transiti{}n to turbulence, tur· bulent boundary Layer and an introducti n to homogeneous turbulence. Prerequisite: ME 521 or departmental consent. 802. Turbulence. (3). An overview of the theo­ ry, practi 1 Significance and computation of turbulent fluid flow. Prerequisites: ME 521 and 801. 829. Advanced Computer-Aided Analysis of Mechanical Systems. (3). Computat ion, 1 methods in modeling and analysis of spatial multibody mechanicaJ systems. Includes Eult'f parameters; automatic generation of governing equations of kinematics and dynamics; numer­ ical technique and computational meth ods; mpu.ter-{)riented projects on ground vehicles with suspen 'ion and steering mechanism, crashworth.iness and biodynamics. Prerequi­ site: ME 729 or instructor's consenL 832. Failure Analysis Applications in Mechanical Design. (3). Application of eogi­ n ering fundamental to the :itudy of mechani­ cn l failure brough t abou t by the stresses. ~trains and energy transfers in machine ele­ "tnents that result from the force , deflections and energy inputs applied. Emphasizes recog­ nition, identification, predi lion and preven­ lion of fajlure modes that are prevalent in machlne-element de5ign Prerequisite: ME 439 or departmental consent. 847. Applied Automation and Control Sys­ te.MS. (3). 2R; 3L Control theory condensed to engineering practice with the anaJysis, d ign and nstruction of operating control systems. Experiments with pneumatic, hydrauli and electro-mechanica l ervo- ystems. Implemen­ ta tion of feedback and feedfon vard control schemes for various industrial systems and machine tools. The experiments are project ori­ ented and intended to be representative of the current state-of-the-art in classica l and modern control practic . Prerequisite: ME 659 or equiV­ alent. 850. Special Topic in Mechanical Engineer­ ing. (3). New or special topics are presented on suifioent demand. Repeatable for credi t when COLLEGE OF ENGINEERING/MECHANICAL ENGINEERING 105 subject material warrants. Prerequisite; depart­ mcntJI consent. 851 . Pdndples and AppHcations of Conduc­ tion Heat Transfer. (3). Theory and measure­ ment, Fourier's equation, steady and unsteady state with and without heat sources and sinks and numerical methods. Prerequis.ites; ME 522, ~Iath . 757 or departmental consent. 852. Principles and Applications of Conve<­ tive Heat Transfer. (3). Free and fo rced con­ vecti on i n laminar and turbulent flow. Includes analysis and synthesis of heat transfer equipment. Prerequisite: ME 522 or depar t­ men tal consent. 853. Principles ;rnd Applications of Radiative Heat Transfer. (3). Radiative properties uf real surfaces, configuration factor analysis, radia­ tive transfer in participating media, exchange fa ctor analysis, Monte Carlo methods. Prereq­ ui5;te: ME 522 or departmental consent. 854, Two--Phase Flow Heat Transfer. (3). Ther­ modynanuc and m echanical aspects of Interfa­ cial phenomena, boi ling and condensation near imm ersed surface, pool boiling, internal flow convective boiling and condensation. Pre­ requisites: ME 522, Math. 555 or departm.ental consent. 858. Computational Heat-Fluid L (3). Basle fini te difference/finite volume methods. Finite difference/ volume representation of partial di fferential equations. Stability analysis. Finite difference/volume methods for solution of hea t and fluid flow equations. Grid generation dnd use of modern computer codes / software for analysis and visualization. Prerequisites: ME 521 and 522 or equivalent. 860. lntroduction to Ceramics. (3). lntroduct!S the fundamental principles of ceramic sdence and engineering with application on ceramics processes and fabrications. Presents the con­ cepts and properties utilizing the crystalstruc­ tu re background . Discusses nonequilibrium aspect of phase relation in ceramics systems and their influence on processing parameters. Covers the microstructure form by liquid, liq­ uid-solid, and solid-state reaction with some detail in combination with with heat treatment. Studen ts are expected to have backgrounds in Chemistry, physics. math, thennodynamicB, mechanics of solids, and introduction to mate­ fJ301. An Introduction to Entrepttneurship in the Arts. (3). General education further studies C()Ur~ . Ilclp~ "tudtmls fo= lm bU..m~5 and marketing 115peds of the om. An examinillion from the .lTtist'<; perspcdive of lecluuques {or launching a career in the aTl!.. Gives attenuCln to elementary concepts of marketing artistic talents, goal setting, financing, legal issues, and public demographics. 481 . Cooperative Education . (1-8). A fie ld placement which mtf?gratcs course work with a planned and supervised professional experi­ ence designed to complement and enhance Ih student's academic program. MilY be repeated for credit. Prerequisite: satisfactory academic tandine prior to the first job assignmen t. Course for Graduate/Undergraduate Credit 590. Special Topics in the Fine Arts. (1-4). For group instruction. May be repeated fOT credit. Involves interdisciplinary upper di vision/ graduate level topics with Ule fine arts (music, art, dance, and theatrel. Prerequislru : !>enior undergraduate or gradua te standing or instructor's consent. School of Art and Design Donald Byrum, Chnir The School of Art and Design offers four program areas: graphic design, studio arts, art history, and art education. These programs offer professional courses with­ in the BA and BFA degrees to train and educate art and design majors. Students in academic programs other than art are encouraged to enroll in art history and studio courses to gain an understanding of art and extend Lheir visual Jiteracy. The programs of study at the School of rt and Design are designed to demand from each student the self-discipline needed. to expand options while pursuing chosen direction. Many entering stu ­ dents have not yet identified the art disci­ pline in which they wish to develop tl1eir trength.. GUlers enter the school with a clear profeSSional direction. Through structured programs which prOVide ample opportwrity for experimentation, the school meets the needs of all its s tu­ dents. During the firsl year of study, the Foun­ dation curriculum will develop technical skills. These fundamental skills provi.de the basis for the development of under­ standing and creating art forms . The same professionaJ faculty members who teach advanced art courses teach these fundamental skills . Art students have excellent classroom and laboratory facilities in the McKnight Art Center and renovated Henrion Annex. The center provides extensive space for exhibiting student work. The Clayton Staples Gallery offers guest artis t and thematic exhibits il, addition to fea­ turing BFA and MFA graduation shows. At the Ed win A Ulrich Museum of Art in McKnight Art Center, students can view a wide range of exhibitions and hear a variety of visiting artis ts and guest lec­ turers. The Lewis and Selma Miller Fund prOVides p rograms of regiona l and national interest. Attendance The undergraduate art and design stu­ dent is expected to attend all schedule classes and examination periods. At the discretion of the faculty member, the stu­ dent may be failed in a course, or given a lowered grade, on the basis of excessive absences . In high enrollmen t demand classes, a student who misses the first two class meetings may be asked to drop tl1e course. In cases of serious iUness , or extended absence, the Chair of the School of Art and Design should be notified. Supplies Charge In add ition to University fees, the School of Art and Design requires that studen pay a supplies charge on a per-course basis for enrollment in certain course where materials such as clay, plaster, or printers ink must be provided for th class raUler fuan pUTchased inruvidualJy. Transfer Students The School of Art and Design accepts transfer students from accredited institu­ tions of higher educa tion and strives to keep the loss of credit to a minimum. The transfer s tudent must be prepa red to complete a minimum of 30 semester hours of undergraduate art course work on the Wichita State University campus. Student Art Work TIle School of Art and Design reserves the right to keep art work submitted for course credit. In prac tice, this right i exercised sparingly, but in certain studio areas the selection of one piece by each graduat ing student contributes to an important instructional collection which is of grea t value to other students. The faculty also reserves the right to tem ­ porarily withhold art work for exhibition, nd students are encouraged to exhibi t work in the school as a significant part of Ule educational experience. At the same time, the School and the University can­ not insure studen t art work for exhibition purposes or take responsibility for its loss r damage under any circumstances. At the end of each semester, all students are required to remove from classrooms, lab ­ oratories, and studios aU personal sup­ plies and valued art work. 108 Graduation Requirements MinOT in Art All tudents except art and design majors may complete 18 credit hours of art and be awarded the Minor in Art. Recom­ mended plans ot study for tudi art, art his lory, graphic deslgn, or art education are avajlable in the office of the chool. Certificate in Decorative and Ornamental Painting and Design The 18-credit hour Certificate in Decora­ tive and Ornamenta l Painting and Design offers introductory tudio courses in color theory, drawing, and pai nti ng which leads to advanced and terminal projecL course work in decorative and ornamen­ tal media. Students focus On the historical re leva nce, technical and tyli tic influ­ ences, aesthetic value, and e££ective uti­ lization of decorative and ornamenta l paintin and deSign .. Contemporary art, utilitarian art, theatre app lications, histor­ ical re to ratio n, and preservation of build ings will be studied. The certificate L<; recognized by the National Society of Tole and Decorative Painters, Inc. Bachelor of Arts in Art The Schoo! of rt and Design offer a Bachelor of Ar degree (BA) in Art witb a concentra tion in either studio art or graphic design This pr gram is de igned for tudents wh wa nt a strong lib ra l am educalion with a concentration in art. By reqwring two-thirds the number of art requirements of the BFA degree, lhe BA allows the student to attain a more devel­ oped academic education while stil l gain­ ing a breadth of art experiences. TIl core curriculum and the required introductory art courses prepare s tudent for the advanced level courses listed in the con­ cen tration . [n addition to the Univer i­ ty' cholastic, res idence, and general ducation requirements, candida te for the BA mus t complete the core cu.rticu­ lu m (1 2 hours ), art h.istory (6 hours ), introductory art (15 hours), fine art elec­ tives (12 hour .), and the concentration (15 hour ). The pecific course requirement for the BA with a concentration in studio art or graphic design are gjven in the tu­ dio art or gra phic deSign sections of the Cata log . M del programs of study are availab le in the School office. Bachelor of Arts in Art History The Bachelor of Arts degree in art history ha a liberal am, perspective and is the inHia l professional degree that prepares student. for gradua te Gtudy in art history. The introductory art history curri u lum and the t undation courses prepare stu­ dents for advanced-level courses in the cone ntTation . In add ition to the Univer­ s ity' holastic, residence, and general . education requirements, cand idates for the BA in art hLc;tory mu t comp\ere the introductory curriculum (9 hou rs), foun­ dation (6 hours), art history concentration (21 hours), and II reading proficiency in at least one fo reign language to suppor t research of primary so urce materia l . Model program of study is available in School office. Bachelor of Fine Arts The Bache.lor of Fine Art degree is the initial profec;s ional degree in art a nd de ign. Its primary empha is is on the development of skills, concepts, and sen­ itivities essential to the profe iona l artist or designer. The School of Art and Design offers the Bachelor of Fine Art., degree BFA ) In graphic design; studio arts-ceramics, painting/drnwing, pTintmaking, or sculp ­ ture; and art history. In addition to the Un iver ily' schola tic, re idence, and general education requiremen t , cand i­ dates tor the BFA must complete the foundation curriculum (21 hours), ar t his­ tory (6 hours), introductory art (21 hours), art electives (9 hours), and the concentra­ tion (24 hours). The specific requiremen for the BFA w it h a oncentralion in de~ign, tudio arts, or art history are de °cribed under the appropriate program sectiOn! of the Catalog. Model program of study are available in the School nUke. Bachelor of Art Education Com pe tence i n basic s tudio skil ls is emphasized in th Bachelor of Art Ed uca­ tion (BAE) degree. In adclition to the com­ mon core f tudio kill ' and genera l studies, the student electing a career in teaching develops competencies in pr - Cessional ed ucation and in specific studio area . The professional education compo­ nent is d alt with in a practical context, rela ting the learn ing f educa tional theo­ ries and tra tegies to the tudent' day­ by-day ar . tic experience . tud nts are proVided opportunities for various typ of teaching and directed o bservation th r ugh the period of undergraduate art education study. 10 addition to meeting the Un iversity' scholastic, residence, and general educa­ tion requirements for graduation, candi­ date fo r th e BAH mu t complete the foundation curriculum (21 hours), art hi ­ tory (6 hours), introductory art (12 h urs ), art specialization (9 hours), the a rt ~duca­ tion concentralion (21 hours), and prof ­ ional educa ti on course. (32 hour ). Courses within the art education cu rricu­ lum fu lfill both the Ul1lversity genera l education requirements for gradualion and tlle Kansas certification requiremen for teadting art al the secondary and ele­ mentary levels. The specific requiTements for the BAE are given in the Art Educa­ tion section of the Catalog. Model pro­ grams of tudy are avai lable. School Requirements and Course Listings Foundation The following cours s will b required of all undergraduate art major tude nl . Ei lher the Fo undation curr icul um (21 hours) or the Core curriculum (12 hours) as de ' ignated In respective BFA or BA programs must b completed by the time tudent have compl ted 60 credit hours or jun i r status or p rior to entry to lasses where individual cou~es erve as prereq­ ui ites. ran ter students with 60 h ours an d Foundation requ iremen t d efici ncies must co m plete cour e d eficie ncies n later than two eme ters following enlry. Lower-Division Courses 136. Foundation Dc ign 1. (3). An introduction to design for visual communication. A study of the elements of art and the prInciples oi de~ign relating to forma l, Ges talt, a nd concep tu,11 orgrulization of the tw()-d imensiond l surface. Includes elements of line, shape, space, texture, and value. Instructional pr cess includes tec­ ture, critlque, and superv ised studio practice. 137. Foundation Design 11. (3). A conti nuation f Art F. 136 emphasizlng the study 0 color incl uding vocabulary, pigment mixing, ct1inr clrganization, and a review of the psychologi­ cal effects of color as used in visua.l cornm ufl i­ cations. Instructiona.l process includes lecture, crilique, and upervised studio practice. Pre­ requisite: Art F. 136. 145. Foundation Drawing I. (3). lntrodu lion t visu I arts oncepts, vocabul ry, tool, mate· ri a ls, bas ic d raw ing Id ll>, and a tti t u de~ through the drawing experience. Teaches per­ ceptual sk ills and th t! abi lity to rep re ent Object I n pace and organ ize them into a coherent pictorial statemenl along with techni ­ cal and expressive competence with a limited range of media. Structu re d sk tchbook as ignments. 146. Foundation Drawing II. (3). Reinforce-· men t and elaboration of the con ept:s . tudied in Art F. 145 through intr ducHon of ab ' lTllC­ tio n, u e f co lor. visu ali za tion, and othe r strategies or manipula ting imagery. Students appl co n ept.'i t problem associated with comp ilion, imaginative reconstructions, and idea generation Structured ketchbook assign­ ments. Prerequiliite Art F. 145. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS I ART HISTORY lJJ9 189. foundation 3-D Design. (3). Lecture~, resea rch, and ~tudio methods (m the ~vol u ti on­ ar)' role uf three-dimensiona l desIgn in con­ temporary society utilizing a variety of combi­ nati ,ln of materia ls, techniques, furms, alld concept'> Also emphasizes learnmg to hand l ~ equipment and tools properly . 240. Foundation Life Drawing. (3) . Introduc­ ti on to drawing the human (onn emphasizing critica l inljuiry a nd anal ytical observat ion. Incl udes the study of skeletal and muscular structure. Students develop an understandmg of the ~t.ructure of the figure and demonstrate i1 d~gree of fad Ji ty in its rl!prcsentation from ob~efvat i on and from imagination. Structured sketchbook ass ign ments. Lab fee . Prerequ i­ sites: Art F 145 and 146. Art History The art hislory program offers the BA degree in art history and also offers sup­ port courses for graphic des ign, art edu­ cation, studio art, and general education. Student" develop a fundame ntal knowl­ edge of art and architecture within a cul­ tUfal and his torical framework, and an understanding of terms, concepts, and theory relevant to al l visual art<; studies . Advanced level courses prepare students for profess iona l pursu i t of art history, museum studies, conservation, criticism, and art education. Bachelor of Arts in Art History The Bachelor of Arts degree in art his tory has a liberal arts perspective and i<; the initial profes<;ional degree tha t prepares the student jor graduate study in art his­ tory. The primary emphal;is is on the monuments and artists of all major art periods of the past, a broad undersland­ ing of the art of the 20th century, an d acquain tance WIth the art history of non ­ Western cultures. This knowledge is aug­ mented by study in greater depth and precision of several periods in the hbtory of art and concentration in at least one area to the advanced seminar level. RC'luire1llel!/s . A major in art history reg uires the completion of a minimum of 124 credit hours, including the Universi­ ty's Genera l Education Program and 36 Cou rse hours in art a n d art history (9 hours in lower-ruvision courses, 6 hour: in the foundation curriculum, and 21 hou rs of upper-d ivision work ) w ith a mini mum grade point average of 2.000. Amung the upper-d ivision courses, the student must complete Art H . 426 (nor­ mally taken in the junior or senior year ) and a.t least one other course at the semi­ nar 1l1vel. Students are required to have a rea di ng proficiency in at least one foreign language to support research through the readjng of primary source materials. The language require ment is normally fuJ ­ filled in Frendl or German, but Spanish, latin, or Ancient Greek can be substituted with the advisor' :, permission . Each stu­ dent is required to prepare a p lan of tudy with their advisor leading to candi­ dacy for a degree no la te r than the i r junior year. Art history ma jors are a lso encouraged to complete a mi n or in a reLated area of the arts, humanities, or social sciences. A~ H~ Introductory Art History: three courses from the follo\o\.jng ......_...... .. ...... 9 Art H. 121G, Survey of Western Ar t: Ancient Art H. l22G, Survey of Western Art: Renaissance and Baroque Art H.. 123, Survey of Western Art: Medieval Art H . U4, Survey of Western Art: Modem Art H. 125, Non-Western Visual Traditions: North American Indian, Oceanic, and Africa Art Foundation Curriculum: two courses from the following ._ .. .. ... ........... .. .... _.. ... ._.6 Art F. 136 & 137, Design 1& n Art F. 145 & 146, Drawing 1& n Art F. J89, 3-D Design Art History Concentration: five upper-division or 500-level :OUfSes chosen in consultation wi th faculty advisor .. .. ...... .. .. .. ... .. .......21 Art H. 426, Seminar, Techniques of Art History Art H. 520, Seminar in Art History or 533, Seminar: Topics in Modern Art Minor in Art History A minor in art history complements other degree programs in the School of Art and Design, as well as degrees in anthropolo­ gy, classical studies, h istory, and women's studies in Fainnount College of Liberal Arts and Sciences. The require ­ ment is 18 semester hours in art history, with 9 hours in lower-division courses and 9 hours in upper-division work cho­ &en in consultation "'"ith the student' s art history advisor. Lower-Division Courses 100. In t roduction to Art in the Western World. (3). Provides general s tudents (not OTt majors) with some visual and intellectunl tools, enabli ng them to confront and experience 1 number of the more SIgnificant works of art in the history of Western Culture. :>121G. Survey of Western Art: Andent. (3). Ceneral education in troductory course. A his ­ torical su rvey of ilrt of Egypt, Grellce, and Rome. :>122G. Survey of Western Art: Renalss3I'lce. and Baroque. (3). General education introduc­ tory cou.rse. A historical survey of an from lh Renaissance 1'0 the 18th cen.tUly. 123. Survey of Westem Art: Medieval. (3) . A historical SUIVey of early Chnstian and Gothic art and architecture from the Slh through 14th centuries . >124. Survey of Western Art: Modern. (3) . General ed ucation introductory course. An introd uction to Ml through the study of a selected group of art objec t> produc£'d i n Europe and America from the 18th century the present. 125. Non-Western Visua.l Traditions: North American Indian, Oceanic, and African Art. (3). Explores the na ti ve art.s of Africa , the Americas, and of Ocea nia; the im portance of the cult ural. social, and political background of these arls and their function in sOdety. 281. Coopelative Education. (1-8). Allows stu ­ dents to participate in the cooperative ed uca­ tion program. Offered CrINer only. Upper-Division Courses >322. Medieval Art L (3). General educatiOJ1 further studi e~ course. A study of tbe aI''! of Europe and Byzantium from the time of Con­ stantine to Charlemagne. Emphasizes style and iconograp hy as it deve l op~ in mosa ics and illustrated manuscript!>. >323. Medieval Art n. (3). General education further studies course. A srudy of Romanesque and Gol hi c architecture a nd ~cu lplure with specia l atten ti on to the developments in France­ >325. Art of the Ancient Near East and Egypt. (3). General education furlher studies course. Su rvey of the arts of ancient Egypt. Mesopotamia, , and the Bronze Age cultUTes ()f the Aegean, concluding wi th a con!pmcnt of urban pla nning. and the use of traditi onal and industrial m Rterials and methods in the past and present. >421Q. Greek Art and Architecture. (3). Gen­ eral education further studies C01Jrse. A s h lrl v of Greek art and architecture beginning with the Bronze Age and concluding with the Hel­ lenistic period . Emphasizes understandin g Greek art in its context and the methods and sources used in its ana lysis . Prerequisite: Art H. 121G or instructor's consent. >42.2.. Roman Art and Alchitectu.re. (3). Gener­ al educat ion further studies course. A study of 110 Roman ar t and ard,i tec tllre begi nning wi th their predecessors, the truscans, and con dud· ing with ea rl y Christi n art . Em phasizes Ullder tanding Roman art in its contex t and the methods and sources used ill its analysis. Pre­ requisite: Art H . 121G or instructor's consent. 426. Seminar: Techniques of Art History. (3). A cu lmi na ting study for sen ior art h istory majors which considers the history of the disci­ p li n e, its research methods, and theory . Require extensive readings and reports. Pre­ requisite: instructor's consent. 481. Cooperative Education. 11-8), See Art H. 281 COUISes for Graduate/Undergraduale Credit 520. Seminar in Art History. (3). System atic­ stUdy in selected areas of art h.istory. ourse content van s bu t ind ividual areas are m)t repeatable for cred it. >521Q. Italian Renaissance. (3) . General edu­ cation further studies course. Painting, sculp· tu.re. and architecture in Italy £rom the 13th to the 16th centuries. Prerequisi te: Art H. 122G 0 " instructor's onsen t. >522. Southern Baroque. (3). General educa­ tion furthe r tudies course. Pain ting. sculp ture and architecture in Italy and Spain from 1600 It:> 1750. Prerequisite: Art H . 122G ll ~ instruc­ to r' 5 consent. > 523. 18th and 19th Century European Art. (3). Ceneral edu.cation further tudies coun;e. A h istory o f European art from Watteau through post-lmpress!oni~m. >524. 18th and 19th Century Americ.an Art. (3). General education further studies course. A history of American art from the colo nial peri lld through the 19th century. >525. 20th Century Art Before 1945. (3). Gen­ eral education further studies course. A history of Am 'rican and European art in the first half of the 20th century. >526. Ad Since 1945. (3) . General education further studi course. A study of the h istory of art in the United States from 1945 to the pre­ sent, stres ing the rela tionship between con­ te.mporary t rends in cri tici sm and artis tic practic 528. Museum Techniques I. (3). Primarily f r the graduate studen t in terested in museum work. Includes specialized research related to adminis trative responsibil ities of a museum: collection. exhibition, recording, preservation and financial activi ties. >530. The Art of Classical Greece. (3). General education fur ther studies course. A study of pa:inting, sculpture and architecture of Greece during the 5th and 4th centuries B.C. >531. The Art of Hellenistk Greece. (3). Gen­ eral education fur ther studies course. A study of the painting. sculpture and architecture oi Greece during the Hellenistic period. 4th to 1 t cl?T\turies S.c. 532. Independent Study in Art History. (1-3). Worl. in a specialized .nea of the study of art hi tory. Directed readings and projects. Prereq­ uislte: trlstructor's consent. 533. Seminar: Topics in Modern Art. (1-3). Selected readi ng:> and problem!. in ar t of the modt!m era. Course content varies but individ· ual areas are not repeatable for credit. 534. History of Photography. (3). History of photography stressing techniques, media . pro­ cesses, interrelations with other visual arts, style questions, genres. and criticism. >535. Northern Renaissance. (3). General edu· cation fu rther stud ies cou rse. Painting and printmaking Tn France, Germany. and the etherlands in the 14th. through 16th cen­ turies. Explores norlhem European pictoria l tTaditions and considers their relationship to Ttalian Renaissance art. Prerequ isite: Art. H. 122G or instructor's consent. >536. Northern Baroque. (3). General edur..a­ tion further studies course. Painting and print­ making in Flanders and Holland of the 17th century. induding the art of Rubens, Rem ­ br, ndt, and Vermeer. Prerequisite: Art H. 122G or instruc tor's consent. 732. Independent Study in Art History. (1-3). Work in specialized area of the tudy of art his· tory. DirecIPd readings and projects (OT gradu­ ate students in al! disciplines. Prerequis ite: instructor's consent. Courses for Graduate Student Only 828-829. The is. (2; 2). 832. Independen t Study. (1-3). Individually supervised work in a specialized area of the study of ar t history Directed reading , researcll and projects. Repeatable tor credit. Prerequisit s: suitable prep< ration for gradu­ ate wOTk in art history e.g., SA or BFA in art history) and instructor's consent. Graphic Design-Visual Communication Art Design programs a re often classified as the c mmunication arts, advertising arts, or visual communication. The protession­ al practitioners are concerned with ideas and pr blem solvin~ to effectively meet the communication needs of clients as diverse as corporations, pubJi hers, ad vertising agencies. public and private ins titutions, and te levision stations . Design maJors are trained to analyze visual communication problems as pre­ sented by client ase studies, define the most appropria te approach, and imple­ ment creative and aesthetic solutions. The broad range of media used to investigate so lutions to design problems include: prin ti advertising, packaging, pr senta­ tion, computer graphics, photography, video, illustration, and television. Bachelor of Fine Arts in Graphic Design The design area offers the Bachelor of Fin\:! Arts in Graphic Design which is tbe professional educa ti on and trainin g degree for the visual communication art· fi eld . The Foundation Cu rr icu lum and th e p repa ratory course work in the graphic. design program enables de ign ma jors to meet their vocational goal . Stu­ dents are re uired to pa rticipate in the P orHo lio Review during the second em ter of their junior year and enroll in AIL G. 434 and 435 during their final two emesters. The graphic design concentration pro­ vides student selected courses in typogra­ ph y, illustra ti on, p hotography . book deSign, advem ing, computer graphics, design. and drawing. ReqUIremen ts. A minimum total of 126 hours is required for the BFA in Graphic Design and includes 84 semester hours of art c urses listed below. Aren Hrs. Foundation Curriculum ....... .................... 21 Art F. 136 & 137. Design r& II Art F. 145 & 146, Drawing I & n Art F. 189, 3-D Design Art F. 240, life Drawing Studio lective Art History ...................... .. ..... , ..................... 6 Art H 124, Survey of W tern Art: Modem Art H. 300+ Introductory Art ...... ................... ...... ......... 21 Art G. 200, Introduction to Computer Graphics Art G. 216, Typography Art G. 234, Graphic Design StudJO 1 Art G. 235, Grnphic Dl:!Sigtl Studio 2 Art G. 238, Materials and Graphic Processes Art G. 316, Typography 2 Art G. 330, Still Photography for Graphic Design Art electives ...................... , ......................... 12 Graphic DeSign Concentration ................ 24 Art G. 334, Graphic Design Studio 3 Arl G. 335, Graphic Design Studio 4 Art G. 337, Drawing tor Visual Communication 1 Art G. 353, Junior Portfolio Review Art G. 434, Graphic Design Studio 5 Arl G. 435, Graphic Design Studio 6 Arl G. 437, Drawing for Visual Communication 2 Art G. 453, Graphic Design Senior Exh ibition Note: 40+ upper-division h urs a r!:' required for graduation. Courses eligible for the concentration and electives: Art G. 331, Film/ Video for Graphic Design COLLEGE OF FINE ART<:i/GRAPHlC DESIGN 111 Art G. 339, Package Design Arl G. 350, Graphic Design Workshop Arl G. 430,Television ior Graphic Design Art G. 411, Design Media Topics Art G. 431, Multimedia Art G. 439, EclitoriallllusLralion Art C. 481, Cooperative Education Art G. 493, Book Design Production Art G. 530, Advanced Television Art C. 530, Advanced Computer Graphics Ar t G. 550, Graphic Design Workshop Art S. 250, Introductory Oil Painting Art S. 251, Watercolor and Acrylic Painling Art S. 340, Life Drawing Studio Art S. 345, Intermediate Drawing Art S. 362, Printmaking ll-Intagli rt S. 364, Printmaking n-lilhography Art S. 365, Screenprint & Paperrnaking I Art S. 54.5, Ad vanced Drawing Studio r\ S. 549, Independent Study in Drawing Art S. 560, Advanced Pnntmaking Studio-Intagli, Art S. 561, Advanced Printmaking Studio-lithograph omm 324, Introduction to Advertising 'Comm. 570, Magazine Production "Comm. 626, Advertising Campaign *tvtkt. 300, Marketing "Theil . 345, Stage Lightin > rhea. 359. Directing I ·Thea. 544, Advanced Stagecraft ' No more than two courses can be used to fulfill the concentration requirement. Lower-Division Courses 201). Introduction to Computer Gfilphics. (3). lntrnduces computer graphic pmgrams in the Ivladn tosh compu ter environment. Prerequi ­ , It,,S: Art F. 136 and 14511T instructor's con~ent. 210. Viliual Communication. (3). Introductory sh1dy of visual images and their us\: as symbul in c\1mm unicating information in the mass nwdi'l 16. Typography 1. (3). Introduces typogra­ phy. including history. comping skill. charac­ ter counting and copyfitling, styl isbc COll5ider­ atiem!>, ilnd visual 3l1d iniormational hierarchal arrangement upon a single page. Prerequisites: f\rt I . 137 and 337. 230. Introduction to Photography. (31. Intra­ d u cl'~ beginning phOto studl>ntc:; to basic Glm­ ~r;} operations, film and paper characleristic:s, dod,Tttom procedures, and a historica l OVerview of the development of photOgrilphy. Studl'nls hilvc an opportunity to acquire skills and t~lhniques appropriate to photographic materia ls I!mphasizing the appliGltion of fun­ damentab of design. For student!. not majoring In graphic design . 1. Bas ic Photography (Motion Picturel. (3). I ntruduc~ film production Student; mav b r\X)uired to tumish their own CiIITII?rilS. 234. Graphic Design Studio 1. (3). Studi\! graphic design theory, plll losophy, lllstory, and approaches \(1 problem solving in vlsu.,1 communication. Prerequisites: Art P. 136 Dnd 137. 235. Graphic Design Studio 2. (3). An achro­ matic layout course using single page ~pplica­ lions that incorporate image and type. Prereq­ u.isite: Art G. 234. 238 . Graphic Materia ls and Processes. (3). In troduces a variety of graphiC processes and materials including printing processes. cut­ pilper technique, linoleum cutting, emboss ­ ment. foil + blind stamping. letterpress prin t­ ing, marbling, box building, and assorted bind­ ing and prcsentatiOJ1 tt!chniques. Prerequisite: Art F 137 or instructors consent 281. Cooperative Education. (1-8). Allows stu­ dents to partiCIpate in the cooperatiw educa­ tion program. Graded CrINer only. Upper-Division Courses 316. Typography 2. (3) . Stuclies type as form, ymbol, and communical1Dn V\'ith exploration ot letterforms and their applications u ti lizmg lradit iona l nnJ computer skills and media . rcrequisites: Art G. 200 and 216_ 330. StiIJ Photography for Graphic DeSign. (3). Introduces still photography with a design emphasis. Developmen t of ph!)tographic vision and skills (or graphic designers in tradi ­ tional black ami white photography \vith expo­ sure to digital scanning of traditional si lver­ based Images for computer w;age. Students may be required to furnish their own cameras. Prerequisite: Art F 137 or instructor's conSCl11. 331. Filmrvideo for Graphic Design. (3). Introduces film theory and video with .:I design emphasis. Examines thl! language Md theory of sequential and moving images in tradi tional fUm/television and computerized multi-media forms as applied to graphic design Prerequi­ site!;: Art F. 137. and Art G. 200 and 330. 334. Graphic Design Studio 3. (3). Continua­ tion of Art G. 235 emphasizmg the use of color WiU1 image and type. Prerequis.ite: Art G. 235. 335. Graphic Design Studio 4. (3). Sequential and multiple-page layout and production tech­ niques. Prerequisites: Art G 334. RepeiltabJc for credit. 337. Drawing for Visual Commun ication 1. (3). Appli ed drawing for thtl design field cmpnasizing shape Simplification, visualiza­ tion, , glaze formulation and firing proce­ du res. Lecture periods involve advanced stud­ ies or ceramic materials and glaze formuliltion Repeatable [or credit. Prerequisites: Art S. 370 and instructor's consent. 572. Advanced Handbuilding Techniques in Clay. (1·3). Advanced stuclio problems involv­ ing ~Ip!untl hlIndbuilding forming methods, glaze and surface formulation and firing pro· cedure..~. Lectures and research on advanced studil!S of the role of clay sculpture in contem­ POrary Society. PrereqUISite: Art 5.370. 574. Advanced Study of Kiln Methods. (3). Ad \'anced study of kiln design and construc­ hon with research III the area of refractory ll1aten.lls. Requires reading aSSignments, note­ bOOk .md laboratory .vorlc_ Prerequisite: Art S. 575. Study of Ceramic Materials IL (3). Lab fee. Lectures and research covering clays, glazes and refractory m"terials. Readi ng assignments concerning physical and chemIcal char(lcteristics of pottery materials. Prerequi­ sites: Art S. 275 and 37U. 576. Study of Ceramic Glazes U. (3). Lab fc". The study of glaze fomlulation and the color and crystaUine effects of oxides on base glazes. Requires notebook, formulation records and laboratory work. Prerequi~ite.: Art S. 575. 578. Independent Study in Ceramlcs (1-3). A professional emphasis on technJca I or aesthetic re:.earch in the ceramics field. Available only (or the advanced ceramics !.tudent with instructor's con.o;ent. Statement of intent must be submitted for faculty approval before regis­ tration. Prerequisite; departmental consent. Courses for Graduate Students Only 870 . Special Problems in Ceramics. (1-5). Research in advanced problems in ceramics. Repeatable for credit. 875. Advanced Research of Ceramic Materi ­ als. (3). Lectures and advanced research cover­ ing clays, glazes and refractory materials. Reading assignmcnts concerning physkal and chemical characteristics of pOHery materials. Requires notebook and outside lab wor 876. Advanced Study of Ceramic Glazes. (3). The study of glaze formulnt:i.on and the color and crystalline effects of oxides on base glazes. Requires notebook, advanced formulation records and laboratory work. Prerequisite: Art 5.875. 878-879. Terminal Project-Cenunics. (1-5; I ­ S). BFA in Studio Art- Painting/Drawing The Bachelor of Fine Arts in Studio Art with a concentration in painting/drawing offers intensive studio work organized within a pattern of courses designed to promote the development of concepts and their realization in vital material form. This approach requires a founda ­ tion in the fundamental aspects of paint­ ing media, as well as an understandi.ng of the historical and social contex t in which painting is encountered. Requirements: A minimum total ot 126 semester hours is required for a paint­ ing/drawing major with 81 credits dis­ tribut-ed as listed below. Aren Hrs. Foundation Curriculum .......... .................21 Art F. 136 & 137, Design I & n Art F. 145 & 146, Drawing t & IT Art F. 189, 3-D Design Art F. 240, We Drawing Studio elective Art History ........ , .......................................... 6 Art H. 124, Survey of Westem Art: Modem ArtH.300+ COLLEGE OF FfNE ARTS/STUDTO ART 113 In troductory Art ........................... .............21 Art S 250, Introductory Oil Painting Art S. 251, Introductory Watercolor Painting, Art S. 260, Printmaking Art S. 270, Basic Ceramics Studio or Art S. 272, Handbuilding Art S. 280, Sculpture Arl S. 340, Life Ora wing StudIO Art S. 362, Printmaking n or Art S. 364, Printmaking m Art Electives .... ............................ .................9 Courses which complement the Introductory Art courses and the Painting/Drawing Concentration Painting/Drawing Concentration .......... 24 Art S. 345, Intermediate Drawing Art S. 350, Painting (take 4 times) Art S. 351, Intennediate Watercolor Studio Art S. 354, Intermediate Painting Studio Art S. 545, Advanced Drawing Art S. 550, Advanced Painting (take 2 times) "repeatable courses Noll': 40+ upper-division hours are re­ quired for graduiltion. Drawing Courses Drawing is the integral discipline of the four major programs of the studio art area- painting, printnlaking, sculpture, and ceramIcs-as well as the areas of graphic design and art education. Upper-Division Courses 340. Life Drawing Studio. (3). Lab fee. Eropha­ izes individual developmcnl, figurative obser­ vation, and interpretation . Repeatable for cred­ it. Prerequisite: completion of foundation mgram. 345. lntennediate Drawing. (3). Drawing pro­ jects, figurative or nonfiguriltjve. IllcJudes problems of style, suites of related works an history of drawing techniques, and materiab. Prerequisite: completioIl of foundation pro­ gram. Courses for Gradua\e/Undergraduale Credit 545. Advanced Drawing Studio. (1-3). Draw­ ing wi lh a variety of meclia. Uses graphic prob­ lerru; rela tive to inclividual technical and aes­ thetic development. Critique!, are given. Repeatable for crooit.. PrerequisItes: Art S. 340 and 34S. 549_ lndependent Study in Drawing. (1-3). A pTofessional emphasis on technical or aesthetic research in the drawing area. Available onJy for tbe uuvanced draw ing student with instructor's consent. Statement of inlent must be submitted. fo r faculty approval before regis­ tration Prereq w sites: Art 5, 340, 345 and instructor's consen t. 374 114 Courses for Graduate Students Only MO. Special Problems in Wfe Drawing. (l-3). Drawing from lt fe . Rl!quires sk tchbook anllIor portfoli Repe.'ltable for credit. 845. Special Problems in Drawing. (l-3). Advanced drawing in various media empha­ i7Jng independent w rk and lht! development of personal expresliion. Repeatable {or credit. Painting Courses Lower-Division Courses 250. rnlroduclory Oil Painting. (3). Introduces oil and alkyd painting emphasizing studio practice.!, fundamental principles, and t ch ­ niques. 251. InltoductoT}' Watercolor Painting. (3). Tnt duct5 lr:lru>parent ilnd opaque w.ltercolor painting emphasizing studio practiCes, fUJJ.da­ mental prin ·ples, , nd techniques. 152. Introductory Acrylic Painting. (3). Intro­ duces acrylic pa ·nting emp ha i.t.ing s tudio practiCes, fundamental principle, iUld tech­ niques. Upper-Division Courses 351. Intermediate WaLercolor Studio. (3) . Emphasiz individual devl!l pment, personal interpretati n, and eativity. Repeatable fo r credit. PrereqUisites: complcli Jl of the founda­ tion program and Art S. 251, or dep rtmental c l'lSenl. 352. Decorative and Ornamental Painting and Design. (3). Au1ov rvie~ of histori [ and oon­ kmponuy decoraHve a.nd ornamental art uti­ lizing slide Ie ture, lasEirOom demon tra lion, and sluJjo activity tu study techniques includ­ ing trompe I'oe.t l, m"rbling, graining, faux fin­ ishes, ten iling, and ornamental methods for their adapla tion to inten 1', exteri r, anJ furni­ ture Jecofilu n and de~Jgn. Classroom projects can become part of a professjonal job porlfolio. Repealabl for credit. 354. Intermediate Painting Studio . (3). Emphasizes individual developm nt, personal interpretation, and c.reativity Repeatable for cred it. Prerequisites: completion of foundation program, ArL S. 250, Ar l S. 251 or 252, or departmental col'lSent. Cowses for GraduateiUndergraduate Credit 551. Advanced Watercolor Studio. (3). For the profes:;ionally oriented student. mphasizes independent study. Repeatable for credit. Pre­ requiliite : f nr semest rs of Art S. 351 nd interview with inlitructor. 552. Advanced Decorative and Ornamental Painting and Dl!sign. (3). Projec\.s in decora­ tive and ornamental pain ting and ign devcJop!!d ilnd completed by the tudent with faculty superVision. reparation tor more inde­ pendent work. A plan \ f tudy defining pro­ jects mmt be ~ubrnilt and approved b r Ihe instructor. rerc...\uisite: Art S. 352 or in true­ tor' oon 'nl. 553. Independent Study in Painting. (1-3). A professi nal emphasis on technical or aestheti. research in the painting area. Available only for the advanced paint ing stud n t with inslru tor's consent. Statement of intent must be submi tted for faculty approval b ore regis­ tra tion . Prereq uisite: deparhnental consent 554. Advanced Painting Studio. (1-3). For the professionally Qrienled studcnL Emphasizes independent study. Repeatable fo r credit. Pre­ requisites; fonr semesters of Art S. 354 and interview with instructor. 559. Terminal Project: Decorative and Orna­ mental Painting and Design. (3). Supervised independenl study. A plan of sludy for a pro­ ject in decora tive and ornament art must be submitted for faculty appr oval prior tu regis­ tration. Repeatable for credit. Prerequisite.: Art - . 52 Courses for Graduate Students Only 850. Special Problems in Painting. (1-5). Pro­ fes ional and experimental painting emphasiz­ ing the developmellt of maturity, ideas, inde­ penden t thinking and personal expression. Mediums i.ndude oil, watercolor lind synthetic medja. Repeatable for credi t with the consent of the drawing/painting faculty. 858·859. Terminal Project- Painting. (1-5; 1­ 5). BFA in Studio Art-Printmaking The B chelor of Fine Arts m Stuclio Art with a concen trati n in printmaking offers a broad range of tudio experiences in two primary printmaking disCiplines, intaglio and lithography. Supplementing these areas are relief, screen printing, col­ Jagraph, and papermaking. The pro;'Tnnl provides a wide e posure to traditional and contemporary techniques. Requirements: A minimum t tal of 126 semester hours is required for a print­ making m jor with 81 credits distributed as Ii ted below. A rea Hrs. FOlmdation Curriculum .... .... ... .. .. ............21 Art F. 136 & 137, Design I & IT Art . ]45 & 146, Drawing I & II Art F. 189, 3-D Design Art F. 240, Life Drawmg Studio elective Art History ..... ... .. ....... .... ...................... ... .. ...6 Art H . U4, Survey of Western Art: Modern Art H . 00+ Introductory Art ... .. ....... .... .... .............. ....21 Art S. 250, Introductory OU Painting Dr Art S. 251 , Introductory Watercolor Painting Art S. 260, Printmaking Art 5. 270, Ba ic Ceramics StudiO Dr Art S. 272, Handbui lding Art S. 280, Sculpture Art S. 340, ife Drawing Stuclio' Art 5.340 or 345, Intermedint Drawing Art S. 354, Intermediate Painting Studio· Art Eleclives ........ ......................... ................q Courses which complement the [ntroductory Art courses and the rintmakmg Concenlralion Printmaking Concentration .. .. ... ..... .... ... .._4 Art S. 362, Printmakmg n Art S. 364, Printmaking III~ Art S. 300+, prin tmaking elective ArtS. 54 , Advanced Drawing" Arl S. 560, Advanced Printmaking Studio--Intaglio (6 credits) or Art 5. 561, Advanced Printmaking Stud io-­ Lithography (6 credits) • repeatable courses Not : 40+ upper-divi 'ion huurs are 1'C ­ quired for graduation. Lower-Division Courses 161 . Printmaking for Non·Art Majors. (3) . Invo lve' bi! ie inta gliO meth J~ , l'tchlng, aquatint, soft ground, ilnd mi ·ed medi~ tll(h· niques.. as well as linoleum or w oJ bllKk techniques, embossment, and a simplified unit on papennaking. 260. Printmaking 1. (3). An introductio n tll printmaking Explorat ry work in inlilglio, c 1­ lagraph, wood.:u!, or relief technique, ano.l ~ simplifh..-d unil on papermaklOg. Upper-Division Courses 362. Printmaking II. (1-3). Basic intagli meth­ oeb (dching. engravmg, ft ground, aquOl!nt, and mixed tech niques) Second se mes ter includes lor printing Ul intagliO, collagrllph, or mixed lechniqu . Repeatable f r credit one seme ter. Prerequisite: Art S. 260. 364. Printmaking m-Ulhography. (3). ln trL) ' due lithography printing from the :;ton • in black and white TIle ·econd mester include, co lor printing in lithography and cortlbjned technique . Repealable for cr 'dit. PreTe~jU I ­ !>ites: completion f rounda tion program and Art .260. 365. Basic Screenprinting and Pape.nnaking L (3). Part r introduclls basic screenprin! teclmol· ogy (stencil-block out and resists, as well as basic photogra phic methods. Emph, size:. mu lti -color printi.ng. econd art invoh es ba~lc ap rmaking methods (sheet forming and paper ca t from a mold) rerequil. it l" : compi tlon of foundation program ,Ult.! Art 5. 260. Cowscs for GraduateiUndergraduate Credit 560. Advanced Printmaking Studio-Intaglio. (l-3). Intaglio, collugraph and mixeJ tech­ niques. Fo r student's inter tlld in professional printmaking, cour e offers peciali.zatill ll 10 c I r pnnt:in~ or black and white. Repcilt,l ble for credit. Prerequislles: rl S. 260, 262 and 364. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS / ART EDUCATION 115 561. Advanced Printmaking Studilr-Uthog­ raphy. (1-3). Li thogmpby, black and white ur coloT . For students jnteresled in professional prin tmaking; course offers specialization ill color printing. Repeatable (or credi t. Prerequi­ site; Art S. 364. 565. Independent Study in Printmaking. (1-3). A professional emphasis on technical and aes­ thetic research in the printmaking arei!. Only fo r the advanced printmaking student with instructor's consent. Statement of intent must be submitted for faculty approval before regis­ tration. Prerequi.~ite: departmental consent. Courses for Graduate Students Only 860. Special Problems in Pdntmaking­ loLlglio. (1-5). Advanced printmaking on an ind ividua l ba sis. Gives encouragement t investigation, COmbined WiUl a craftsman-like approach . Techniques include all in taglio, relief and combined methods, bl"ck and white ,md l'l)lor. Repea table for crediL 862 & 863. Special Problems in Printmak­ ing- Lithography. (l-5; 1-5). Advanced print­ mnkin~ on an individual basis. Gives encour· ,' gemcnt to investigation, combined with a craft<:tl1an-like approach. Includes lithography "nd ,, !l ied techniques, black and white and color. Repeatable for credit. 868-869. TennJnal Project-Printmaking. (l-5; l oS). BFA in Studio Art-Sculpture The B.1chelor of Fine Arts in Studio Art with a concentration in sculpture offers a vi1 ril.!d and rich learning experience in thre~-dimensional media. The sculpture studios in Henrion Annex, where day fig­ ure modeling, steel fabricating, wood and stone carving, and bronze or aluminum casting take place continually, exposes the student to the diverse sculpture-mak­ ing processes and how thev re.late to other artists' concepts. . Requiremen ts: A minimum total of 126 semester hours is required for a sculpture major with 81 credits distributed as lis ted below. A~ H~ Foundation Curriculum ............ ..............21 Art F. 136 & 137, Design I & n Art F. i45 & 146, Drawing 1 & II Art F. 189, 3-D Design rt F 240, Life Drawing StudiO elective Art 1 1 1~t(\ry ........................................... ........6 Art H. 124, Survey of Western Art MOdern rtH 300+ Introductory Art ............. .............. ......... ....21 Art S. 250, Oil and ALkyd Painting [)p' Art S. 251, Watercolor and Acrylic Pajnting Art S.2bO,PrinbrrutlcUlg Art S. 280, Sculpture Art S. 340, Life Drawing Studio· Art S. 340 or 345, Intermediate Drawing Art S. 362, Printmaking n or Art S. 364, Printn1aking m Art Electives .. .................... ....... ............. .. .. ...9 ourses which complement the Introductory Art courses and the Sculpture Concentration Sculpture Concentration ... .. .. .. ....... .........24 Art S. 380, Sculpture (take 2 times) Art S. 381, Cast Sculpture Art S. 545, Advanced Dra\ving> Art S. 580, Advanced Sculpture Art S. 300+, sculpture elective (take 2 times) .. repeatable courses Not/!: 40+ upper-division hours are re­ quired for gmduation Lower-Division Course 280. Scu1pt:un. (3). Lntroduces stulpturnl tech­ niques In welded steel. assemblage, kinetics, and optics. Prereguisites' Art F. 145 and 189. Upper-Division Courses 380. Sculptwe Studio. (1-3). Emphasizes th ma in approaches to sculptu re . Stresses the form , concept and construction of sculpture. lncludes carving techn iques in wood, stone and/or p lastic; construction and assemblage techniques selected from wood, plastic, metal (welded, brazed, riveted, etc.), and/or com­ bined materials. Repeatable once foc credit. Prerequisites: completion of foundation pro­ gram and Art S. 280. 381. Cast Sculpture Studio. (3). CastiJlg l-ech­ .nj ques for bronze and aluminum sculpture. Uses plaster investment, CO" set sand, foam vaporiza tion, and \'i trified s he]) molds t, develop individual and unique approaches to cast scu lpture. Prerequisites: completion of foundation progran' and Art S. 280. Courses for GraduatelUndergraduate Credit 580. Advanced ScuJpture Studio. (1-3). Sculp­ ture in any medium, emphasizing individual development and creativit)'. Repeatable for credit. Prerequisite: Art 5. 380. 585. Independent Study in Sculpture. (1-3). A professional emphasis on technical or aesthetic rcsean;h in the sculpture area Available c,nly for the advanced sculpture student with instructor's consent. Statement of intent must be submitted for faculty approval befOTe regis­ tration. PrereqUisite: departmental consent Courses for Graduate Students Only 880. Special Problems in ScuJpture. (1-5). Advanced sculpture emphasizing experimen­ ta tion aJld high quality work on an individual basis. Stresses special projects in casting archi­ tectural sculplure, mixed media or new materi­ ,]s and techniques. Repeatable for credi t. 88&-889. Terminal Project-Sculpture. (1-5; I ­ S). Art Education The art education area offers the Bachelor of Art Education degree fo r s tu dents interested in an art education teaching career. The goal o f the program is to develop a highly competent art teaciler who is intellectually informed, skilled in studio perfoTffiance, and able to commu­ nicate with and motivate students. All art education majors are reqttired to specia l­ ize in either studio art, design, or art his­ tory as an emphasis area . Students observe teaching techniques, teach in public schools, and attend seminars in ducation and art education topics. Bachelor of Art Education The Bachelor of Art Educa tion has the same Foundation and art history require ­ ments as the BFA in Studio Art. Th is degree serves the student who plans to teach art on the elementary, middJe, or secondary Jevel. l ts studio component emphasizes a breadth of studio art expe­ rience. Requirements: A minimum to tal of 143 semester hours is required for an art ed u­ cation major with 70 art credits and 31 education credits distributed as listed below. Area Hrs. Foundation Curriculum .. ........ ... ........ ......21 Art F. 136 & 137, Design I & II Art F. 145 & 146. Drawing I & II Art F. 189, 3-D Design Art F. 240, Life Drawing Studio elective Art History ........ ................. ............. .... ......... Art H. 124, Survey of Westem Art: Modem Art E. 514Q, Aesthetic mquiry Introductory Art ...................................... .. 12 Art S. 270, Basic Ceramics Studio Art E. 302, Jewelry Art E. 313, Fiber Exploration Plus one of the following; Art S. 250, Introductory Oil Painting Art S. 251, Introductory Watercolor Painting Art S. 260, Printmaking Art G. 330, Photography Art Specialization .... .. ......... .........................9 Three courses from one of the following media: ceramics; painting! drawing; printmaking; sculptu re; design-- graphic, illustration, 3-0, m ulti-media; or art history Art Education Concentration ............. .....18 Art E. 311, Art Education- Elementary School Art 410, Art Education-Middle School / Jr. H.i.gh Art 414, Art Education-High School 116 Art E. 419, Micro Computer Art E. 510Q Stim ulating Cr a tive Behavior Art E. 515, Developing Visua l Materi Is Profe iona l Education Requirements ...32 Speciti d courses in block equenc include Art E. 517, Student Teaching emi nar. Note: 40+ upper-division hours are re­ quired for graduation. Student Teaching Admission into the student tead1.ing year require· enior standing (90 hours or 200 credi t points ); a m ini m u m cu m ula tive grade point average of 2.500 and 2500 in art cour e a t lhe time o f application fo r studen t teaching; a grade of C or better in College Algebra; a grade of C o r better in English Com 0 ition (Eng!. 101 and 102 or its eq uiv len t); a grade of C or better in oral communication; comp letion f CUT­ riculu m and in truction and art education prerequ isites; satisfactory physical exami­ nati n; and recommend ation by the ar t educa tion rogram f \I wing a forma l in t rv iew. A mi sion to tea he r duea ­ tion is dete.rmined early in the tudents' p rogra m (see College of Educa tion­ Admission t Teacher Edu cat ion Pro ­ gram ). Studen ts must apply fo r tudent te d l ing by midterm of the fa ll semester pri o r to the s tud enl teach ing year . A g rade of C or be tt r in student teaching is necessary to receive a recommendation for a teaching certi neate. Graduates of the program applying for teacher cert ifi ca ti o n i n Kansa are required to complete the National Teach­ ers Examinati n as es ta blished by the Kansas Stc te Depa rtment of Education in order to qua lify fo r their init ial certificate. Review of cou rse co n ten t wi ll be required o r transfer of a rt education crew from o ther institutions. Lower~Djvj ion Courses 115. Human Experience and the Art . (3). Tete­ cour e. Surveys eu lpluTe, ar-h itecture, fi lm. drama, music, lite.rature, and painting. 'am­ ines each art f on from tour perspecti ves: hil;­ tor ica ! on lext, elemenls of the art. fo rm ! mean ing, and iti cism / evalua ti()n. onta ins 30 half-hour video programs which are coordj­ nated and integrated with the tex i and tudy guide. Requi res a ttendance at penodi Satur· day essions. 150. Art Workshop. (1-3). RepE'iltable for cr ..d­ i t. Area covered i determined a t th' time co lfISt? is offe red . 220. Art and the Child. (1-3) . St udy uf Lhe developm ntal stages of children' rl-making, K-C), the rela tions hip betwe n art and cognitive gr wth, the tole of the teacher, the significance f sensory experience, and ae~theti behavior. EmphasiLes th p,'ltential for creative beh< vior as a natu ra l meanS of a child to respond to en\~ronm.en ta.l stimuli. 281. Cooperative Education. (1-8). lIows stu ­ denb; to participate in the cooperative ed u ­ tion program. O ffered Cr/NCr onl /. Upper-Division Courses 302. Jewelry Design/Construction. (3) . Emphasizes metal working processes (f rging, forming, casting. awing, cutt ing, fusi ng, sol­ dering) with ubordinate em phasis on soft jew­ elry an d cerami processe a p p licab le to j welry. 310. Art Education in tile Elementary School. (3). A study of ph.lIosophy, psychology, and sensory growth of the elementary-age tudent, emphasizing the content obj clives, method , and evaluation of the elementry school art program. Studen tcach in the 01ildren's Ad Worksh p . Prerequi ' te: ar t educat ion major, upper-division eligibility. 311. Art Education Curriculum in the Elemen­ tary School (2). Studies developmental cllarnc­ ten ti ' of the elementary-age tuden! and the development of the art program with respcct to materials, skills , a nd know ledge content. 313. Piber Exploration . (3). F cu es on fiber experience appropriate for the etas room on the in termediate or secondary I~ve l. Explores on various kind f looms weaving, braidi ng. and twisting techniques tha t re ·ul t in a fabric or web. Explores simple ye techniques. 350. Art Workshop. (1-3). Repeatable for cred­ it. Ar covered is d ete.rmined at the time course i offered. 410. Arl Education in the Middle School/ JlUlior High SchooL (3). A study oC the ph ilo ­ ophy, psychOlogy, and arti ti developmli'.nt of th.. midd le school/junior high school student, emphasiLing the content, objectives, methods, and e a luation of the mid dle school/jun ior high chool art p rogram. Students participa te in a fie ld exp rience in a middle cho 1/ junior high school. Students enroll in tM course dur­ ing the Fa ll semeste r preced ing Sp ri ng semester student t ching. Prerequisite: Art E. 310, 31 1. 413. rndependent Study. (1-4). Directed inde­ pendent stud ' in art educa tion not nonnally overed in other our e work. Pr requisite: instructor's consent. 414. Art Eduution in. the Senior High SchooL (3). A tud 1n the ph il . oph , psychology, a nd art" Ii d evelopment of the senior high student, empha izing the content, objectives, m ' th ds, an d evaluation of the e nior high school art program. Students participa te in a fie ld experience in a s nior high 5chooL Pre­ requ i~i te: Art E. 310 or equi a lent. -n9. Micro-Computer Applications to Art Educa tion. no)~. A tudy of the curricular and in truction fl l uses ,f th · Ma intosh c mpute.r tu urt educati n, Studen ts learn a variety of procedure for nerating computer art images for ins truction and s If-expr s ·ion and use II variety of micro-computer software and hard ­ ware. Studen apply the Macintosh c mputer to art curriculum and instruction. Prerequisite: Art E. 10 or equivalent. 4S1. Cooperative Education. (l -S). Allows stu­ den ts to participate in lh 'ooperative educa­ tion program . Offe.red Cr/NCr only . Courses for Graduate/Undergraduate Credit 510Q. Stimulating Creative Behavior. (:I ). Includes theo ries f crea h vity; s tra tegies for problem-finding and problem-~olvi ng; identi­ fyi n various external and iJl terna i blocks 0 creativ ityj teo ling for creativity; the relation- hips of creativit , cognition and visual think· ing; creative challenge j and timuli. Empha. size~ meth od s to elicit crea t iv e be havio r. Repeatable once for credit. 514Q. Aesthetic Inquiry. (3). Focuses on con­ temporary tr nds in aesthetics relative to the i ual arts. Student· write critical observations and interpretations in response to art work. Prerequisite: upper-divi ion art major. 515. Developing Visual Materi.lls for Art Education. (3) . A productio n laborat ry tha t emphasize th integralioJ1 and election ~)f appropriate vi ua l m dia or art instru tion. Prerequisi te: Art E. 311. 550. Art Workshop. (1-3). Repeatable for cred­ it. Area covered is determined a t the time the cour is offered. 702, Metal Processes for Jewelry Construc­ tion. (3) . ,mphnstzes fa brication techniques, de ign ana lysi a nd fu nctio n of jewe lry designed and produced b students a nd acknowledged craftsmen. Repeatabl oncee for cred it. Prerequisite: Art E. 21 2, 302 ( r in tru~­ to[' ~ consent. 710. Creative Behavior and Visual Thinking. (3). Tdentifjcation and applica tion of th o.!oric~ tor creative and critical thinking. Emphasizes tre tegies fo r p rob lem sol v in a nd visu al thinking and pro edures to implem o t tho~e strategies. Student ldentifie an are fo r indi­ vidual inve ti gati n . Re peatnble once for credit. 711. Seminar in Art Education: Topic to be Announced. (t-3). Su perv ised st udy a nd research of contem porary issues in art educa' tion. Repeatable for credit with ad isorq con­ sent. 712. Development of Art Understanding in the Educational Program. (:I) . Incl udes read· ings, observation and evaluative techniqu ' in the development of concepts and materials flOr art tmderstanding. Repe ble on 'e for credit. Prerequi ite: instructor's consent. 713. Fiber and Fabric Processe . (2-3). Fiber p r ce ses using tradi ti nal nd experi mental techn iques in woven form and other struc­ tura l techniques using natural and man-made fibers. Repeatable once for cred it. Prerequis ite: instmctor' . consent. 714. Aesthetics {or the Classroom. (3). Focuses on applying the issues and theories of aesthet­ ics to the K-12 classroom. Students participate in discussions and demons trations of these theories through critical and reflective writing a5 well as curricular planning. Students con­ sider aesthe tic develop me nt and construct lessons to integrate strategies involvi ng aes ­ thetic concepts into their teaching. 715. Research Problems in Art Education. (3). Orientation to research methods, findings and designs related to the analyBl~ of studies and curren t problems in art education. Repeatable once for credit. Pre requ isite: instructor's consent. 719. Electronic Imaging. (1-3). Emphasizes Macin tosh and other computer processes and thei r application to art and art education. Stu ­ den ts genera te computer images using digitiz­ ing, scanning, and animation with a variety of software and hard ware. Makes application of this new tec.h nology to problem~ of design, art history, and art criticism. DeveJop~ curritll ium materi a ls ior a.r t instruction employ ing com­ puter graphic instruction. The graduate st u­ den t prepare.~ a research paper on a selected topic rel ated to computer graphics and art learning. 720. Art a.nd Early Childhood. (1-3). Empha­ sizes the cognitive and aesthetic dom a ins of young chil dren and develops the potential for creative and visua ll y expressive behavior as a natural means of a ch ild responding to envi­ ronnwnt. BM in Performance-Keyboard Emphasis Aren Hrs . IIIl Programs Applied Music Chief performing medium (see pecific major below) Second performing medium.. ........ ....... .. 4 Theory ..... .... ....... ....... ............ .......... .. ... .. .... .22 Mus. C. 127Q-129, 128-130,227-229, 228-230, 523,561 r 661, 345 or 641 Hi tory and Literature of Mu ie...... .. .... ...9 Mus. c.. 113Q, 334Q and 335Q Conducting........ ............ ... .... ..... ......... ..........4 Mus. P. 217 or218 and 651 or 691 Ensembles (see specific major bel w) Recital Attendance Mus. P. 050 (enrollmen t for four semesters in a specified number of recitals) Specific Ki.yboard Program Requireme/lts Piano Performance Empha is AppHed Piano.......... ............................. ..24 Mus. P . 250 and 251, Applied Concerto... .. .... .... .................. ..4 Mus. P. 107-407, Piano RepertOire .........6 Mus. P. 580, Piano Pedagogy.................2 Mu C. 7112 and 783, Piano Literature ....4 Ensembles (four sen1e t rs of accompanying required for all Bachelor of Musk piano majors and hours of appropriate ensemble. Keyboard cholarship recipient lire required to enroll in accompanying en 1 emester they hold a scholarship.) Mus. P. 300, Junior Recital (piano) .........1 Mus. P. 400, Senior Recital (piano) ... ....1 Electives... ................................. ................ .2 Piano Accompanying Emphasis Applied Piano ..... ........ .............. .. .. ..... ....16 Mus. P. 223,224, 423, and 424, Applied Plan Accompanying ....... ..l 2 Mus. P. 121, 122,221,222, ItaJ., Engl., Fren., Germ. Diction ...... ...........4 Mus. P. 107-407, Piano Repertoire ...... ...4 Mu.s. P. 580, Piano Pedagogy .............. ...2 Mu . C. 726, Voice Literature .................3 Mus. C. 685, String Literature ...... ... ...... .2 En en'ble· ........................ ... ............ ........ ...8 (four semesters of accompanyi.ng Tequired for all Bachelor of Music piano maj rs and 4 hours of appropriate ensemble. Keyboard scholarShip recipients are required to enroll in accompanying each semester lhey hold a scholarship .) Mus. P. 300, Junior Recital (piano) ........1 Mus. P 450 and 451, Senior Acc mpanying Recital ................... .... ..2 Piano Pedagogy Emphasis Applied Piano ................................... ..... 24 Mu . P. 107-4 7, lanO Repertoire ..... ..6 Mus. P. 580, Piano Pedagogy...... ......... ..2 Mus. P 58 l, ian Teaching Materials 2 Mu. .782 and 783, Piano Literature . 4 Mus. P. 790, S ecial Topics tdesignat d).A Ensemblcs ...... ..... ..... .................... .... ....... ...8 (four semesters of accompanying required for all Bachelor of Music piano majors and 4 hours of appropriate ensemble. Keyboard cholarsh.ip recipients are required to enroll in accompanying each etn ester they hold a schoian;mp. ) Mus. P . 400, Senior Recitl1 (piano) ....... 1 Elective .............. ..... .. ........... ................. .. .... 1 Organ Emphasis pplied Organ ......... ... ............................ 24 Mus. C 597 and 598, Organ Ulerature and Practice ......................... 2 Ensembles ......... .... ................... .. .. ... .........l0 (keyboard scholarship recipien re required to enroll in accompanying each semester they hold a scholarship.) Mus. P. 400, Senior Recital (organ) ......1 Electives ......... ....................................... .. .15 8M in Performance-Vocal Emphasis A~ H~. Applied Music ............... .. ...... ... ..... ... .. .... .26 Voice ........ .............. ....................... .... .24 Piano (hovo semesters) .... .. ................. 2 Study in another i.nstrumenl may be substituted if student meets piano proficiency requirement Theory .... ......... ....... ............ ....... .. ...... .. ..... ...18 Mus. C. 127Q-129, ]28-130, 227-229, 228-230 and 523 or 661 Hi&tory and Literature of Music................ 9 Mus. C. 113Q 334Q and 335Q onducting ....... .......... ... .... ..... .. .............. ...... 2 Mus. P. 218 Voice Pedagogy and Repertoi.re .. .. .... .. .... .. 9 Mus. P. 121, 122,221, 222, 625, antl Mus. C 726 Ensembles (see degree sheets for pecilied ense.mbles) ..... ......................... 10 Electives (in upper·division theory, conducting or choral literature) ........... 10 Senior Recital (Mus. P. 400) .... ................... 1 Recital attendance (specified number of redta ls per semester for four semesters, Mus. P. 050) Foreign languages (5 hours in each language or 10 hours in one of tv", languages) ................ ..... .. .. ...................... ] 0 Fren. 111-112, Germ. 111- l12 BM with Elective Studies in Business Arm Hrs. AnpJied Music .................... ...... .... .. ...........20 mef performing medium ............. 16 Second performing medium (four semesters) ........... .. ...... ... .. .. .. ..4 Theory ........... ...... ... .. ... ........ .. .... .. ... ..... ..... ...20 Mus. C. 127Q-129, 128-]30,227-229, 228-230,561 or 661, 641 or 753 or 345 History and Literature of Music.... ...... .. .... 9 Mus. c. 113Q 334Q, and 335Q Conducting........................ ..... ......... ............. 4 Mus. P. 217 or 218 and 651 or 691 Ensembles (see degree sheet for specified ensembJes ...... ........... 8 or 10 Electives ... .. ............. .... ... .... ................ ........ 3-5 Vocal majors require Mus. P . 121, 221,222. Piano majors require Mus. P.580 Senior Recital (Mus. P. 400) ........ .. ............. 1 Recital a ttendance (specified number of recitals per semester for four emesters, Mus. P. 050) Business Requirements................ ............. 30 Econ. 201Q 202Q (6); Acct. 210, 220 (6); and any Ulfee of the followmg four courses: Mgmt. 360 (3); Fin. 340 (3); Mkt. 300 (3); OS 350 (3). Also 9 hours of upper-diVision electives. BM with Elective Studies in Theatre Area Hrs. Applied Music ....... ... ... .. ...... ....... ... ............ 20 Chief performing medium.. ... ....... .16 Second performing mediu m (four semesters) .. .. ..........................4 Theory ....................... .................... ...... ...... _20 Mus. C. 127Q-129, ]28-130,227-229, 228-230,561 or 661 , 641 or 753 or 345 HiSlOry and Literature of Music ................ 9 Mus . c. 113Q, 334Q and 335Q Conducting..... ............. .............. .................. .4 Mus. P. 217 or 218 and 651 or 691 Ensembles (see degree sheets for specified ensembles .... ........ ... .. 8 or 10 Electives ..................... ...... .......................... 3-5 Vocal majors require Mus. P. 121, 22],222. Piano majors require Mus. P. 580 Senior Recilal (Mus. P. 400) ........ .. .............1 Recital attendance (specified number of recitals per semester for four semesters, Mus. P 050) Theatre Requirements.......... ..................... 24 hea. 243Q (3); 244 (3),253 (3); 2.."4 (2); 272 (3); 359 (3); 380 (1); 623Q (3); 624Q (3) BM with Elective Studies in Journalism (News Editorial Emphasis) Area Hrs. Applied Music ........................................... 20 Chief performing medium ............. 16 Second performing mediwn (four semesters) ..............................4 Theory ............... .................... .............. .. ......20 Mus C. 127Q-129, 128--130, 227-229, 228-230, 561 or661,641 or 753 or 345 History and Literature of Music............. ...9 Mus. c. 113Q 3340, and 335Q COnducting .......................... ......................... 4 COLLEGE OFFINE ARTS/MUSrC 119 Mus. P. 217 or 218 and 651 ur 691 Ensembles (see degree sheets for specified ensembles ................. 8 or 10 Jecti ves .................... .............. ................... 6·8 Vocal majors require Mus. P . 121, 221,222. Piano majors require Mus. P 580 Senior Recital (Mus. P. 400) ..... .. ................1 Recital attendance (specified number of recitals per semester (or four emesters, Mus. P. 050) Jouma1ism Requirements....... .................. 21 Comm. 130 (3); 230 (3); 300 (3); 500 (3); 550 (3); 630 (3); 690 (3 BM with Elective Studies in Journalism (AdvertisingIPublic Relations Emphasis) Artil Hrs. Apphed Music ...................................... .. ..20 Chief performing medium ............. 16 Second performing medium (four semesters) .............................. 4 Theory ............. .. ..... ...... ........... ..... .... ........... 20 Mus C. 127Q-129, 128-130, 227-229, 228--230,561 or 661, 641 or 753 or 345 History and Literature of Music................ 9 Mus. C 113Q 334Q and 335Q Conducting............................ ................... ...4 Mus. P. 217 or 218 and 651 or 691 Ensembles (see degree sheet for specified ensemble. .................8 or 1 0 Electives ... ..................................................3-<; Vocal ma jors require Mus. P. 121 , 221,222 Piano majors require Mus. P. 580 Senior Recital (Mus. P. 400) ...................... 1 Reci tal attendance (specified number f recilals per semester for four "emeslers, Mus. P 050) Joumalism Requlfements.......................24 Comm. 115Q (3); 200 (3); 325 (3); 350 (3); 502 or 525 (3); 550 (3); 60 (3); 690 (3) BM with Elective Studies in Journalism (Broadcasting Emphasis) Arro Hrs. Applied Music ........................................... 20 Chief performing medium..... ........ 16 Second performing medium (four semesters) ............................ 4 Theory .... ..... .. ... .... ....... ....... ........ ................. 20 Mus.C. 127Q-129, 1 28-130,227-229,~ 230,561 or 661,641 Or 753 or 345 History and Literature of Music. ............... 9 Mus. C. 113Q 334Q and 335Q Conducting......... .. .................... ....... ..... ........4 Mus. P. 217 or 218 and 651 or 691 nsembles (see degree sheets for specified ensembles ................. 8 or 10 EJectives........................ ...... .................... .6-8 Vocal majors require Mus. P. 121, 221,222. 120 Piano maj IS require Mus. P. 580 Seni r Recital (Mus. P. 400) .. ..... ................ 1 Recital attendance (speciiied number of recitals per Sl!Ulester for four semestl"rs, Mus. P. OSa) Journalism RE'CJuirements ...... .. ...... .. ... ..... 21 Comm. 130 (3); 230 (3); 300 (3); 322 (3); 332 (3); 630 (3); 690 (3) Bachelor of Music Education Req uirements Students receiving the BME must Oleet the state requirements for the secondary three-year certificate and three-year ele­ mentary certificate. Students may select from three options within this degree: 1. Instrwnental emphasis off red t at­ isIy the needs of student whose chjef performing medium is instrumen tal or keyboard and who plan t enter the field of in trumental mu ic t aching in the public scho Is 2. Vocal emphasis offered to sa . fy the needs 0 students whose chief perfonning medium is voice, piano, or guitar and who plan to enter the field of vocal and general music teaching in the public schools 3. Special musIc education emphasis offered to saUsfy the needs of students, either vocal or instrumental specialists, who plan to enter the field of music edu­ cation for special education children in the public 5 1 ols Student Teaching Admiss ion into the student teaching semester requires a minimum umulalive grade point average of 2500; a minimum grade point average of 2.500 in music cour es; senior standing (90 hours- 200 credit points); a grade of C or better in Eng! 101 or its equivalent and Eng!. 102, College English I and IT, Comm. 111, Pub­ l ic Speaking, and Math 111 . College Algebra; completion of prerequisite in educational psychology; foundations of education and mu ic education methods; succe sful completion of the piallo profi­ wmcy exam and all other music require­ ments (including senior recital); success­ ful completion of a physical examination; and a recommendation by the music edu­ cation area. Transfer student must satisfy educa­ Ll.Un requirements (or prerequisites not taken at Wichita State. All students must have an application on fil with the music education area and receive it approval. Students must file application with the Director of Muic Education. Graduation Requirements The following program fulfills both the Univer ity requirement for graduation and the Kall as ertification requirement and must be taken by all Bachelor f Music in Music Education candidates. In completing the BME program, the stu­ dent must meet the general education program requirements of the University given in the Academic Information ­ Requirements for Graduation section of the Catalog Professional Education Requireulents Area Hrs. Education ........... .............. .................. ......... 29 CESP334 ..................................... ........ 2 CESP433.... .. ......................... .............. 3 0271 .. ........ ..... .............. .. ...................2 Mus. E. 272 ....... ........... .. .... ............. .. 1 0311 ............................................ ......1 0312 .... ............................... .. ............ . 1 0328 ................. .. ............................... 5 0427"' ... ..... ......... .. .... .. .................. .. ....2 Cl430 ..... ............ .. .......... ... .. ................ 3 CI451* ....................................... .... ...... 4 0457".............. ... ..................... ........... 1 0469· ...... .... ... .... .............. .............. ....4 'ThC!Se courses are taken during the student teaching 5emester. Additional Courses Required fox Instrumental Emphasis Area Hrs . Applied Mu ic ...........................................16 Instrumental majors (chief medium) ...... ...... ...... .. .. .. .....14 (piano) ....... .......... .. ............. .. ........... 2 K yboard majors (chief medium) ............................. 14 (second in tTumen t) ... .. .................. 2 Electric bass majors (electric bass) .... .. ........ ......... ... ... .. ..10 (string bas ) ..................................... 4 (piano) .............. ....... ............ ............2 Students must be enrolled in applied music during the semester of thei r senior recital General Music...................................... 33-35 Mus. C. 113Q, 127Q-129, 128-130, 227-229,228-230, 334Q, 335Q 523, 641 or 753 or 754, Mus. P. 217 or 218, 651 or 691. Required for p iano majoIS, Mus. P. 307 and 407. Mus. E. 686 required. Ensembles ... ................ .................................. 7 (see degree sheets for specified ensembles) Recital attendance Mus. E. 171 and 172; two semesters of Mus. P. 050 PIllS Mus. P. 400, Senior Recital Music Education ... ................... .. .......... .....18 Mus. E. 204, 304, 404~ and 611 ......10 Mus.E. 235,236, 237,238,239, 240, and 342........ ............ .. .. .... .. ....... Additional Courses Required for Vocal (Keyboard) Emphasis Area Hrs . Applied Music ...................... ... . ... ...........16 Vocalmaj rs (voice) .. ...... .. ............ .1 4 (pianol ......................... 2 Keyboard majors (piano) ... ... ........ 14 (Mus. E. 342) .. .................................. ..2 Students must b enrolled in applied music during the semester of their senior recital. General ~lusic .... ....... ............................... .. Mus. C. 113Q, 127Q-129, 128-1 0, 227-229, 228-230, 334Q, 335Q 523, 641 or 753 or 754, Mus. P. 217 or 218, 651 or 691; 1 hr. of music electives for vocal majors; for piano majors, Mus. P. 580 or 581,307, and 407 required Ensembles ................. .............. ..............7 or Vocal ........................... ........................9 Harp, organ, guitar, electric bass majors, piano majors ..................... 7 (see degree sheets for specified ensembles Recital attendance Mus. E. 171 and 172; two semesters of Mus. P. 050 PillS Mus. P. 400, Senior Recital Piano pedagogy majors: Mus. P. 580 or 581, 790 .............................................. .4 Music Education .................................. ...... 14 Mus. E. 203, 241, 242,303,403", 611, 342 'These courses are take" during the tudent teaching sem£!lter. Additional Courses Required for Special Music Education Emphasis (Vocal or Instrumental) Music Requirements Area Hrs. Applied music ................................. ... ...... .. 16 VocaJ majors (voice) ................. .......14 (piano) ........................ 2 Keyboard and mstrumental majors (chief medium}.. ..... .... .................. 14 (piano) ............ .. ..... ............. . , .. ,.. .... .. 2 Guitar recommended Students mu t be enrolled in applied music during the emester of their senior recita I. General Music .......... ... ..... .............. ............ 33 Mus. C. 113Q, 127Q-129. 128-130, 227-229,228-230, 3340, 335Q, 523, 641 or 753 or 754, Mus. P . 217 or 218, 651 or 691. Piano majors: Mus. P. 580 or 581 alld Mus. P. 307 and 407 COLLEGE OF ANE ARTS/MUSIC EDUCAnON 121 Ensembles ........ . , ... , ............................... 7 or q Vocal majors .. , .......... .... .... .. ....... ... ..... 9 Instrumental and p iano majors .... .. .7 (see degree sheets for specified ensembles Reci tal attendance Mus. B. 171 and 172; two semesters of Mus. P. OSQ PllL~ Mus. P. 400, Senior Recital Education Requirements A~ H~ Recommended: one 60Q-Ievel 0 ",ceptionalities course.. ..." ...... , ....... ........3 Music Education Methods.................. 17-23 Vocal Emphasis: Mus. E. 203,303, 309,403,24'1, 242,342, 611 Instrumental Emphasis: Mus, E. 204, 304,309,404,235,236,237,238, 239,240,686, 342,611 Additional courses for piano pedagogy majors: Mus. p, 580 (2 hrs) and 790 (4 hrs) Bachelor of Arts in Music Stud ents who wish a Bachelor of Arts in music are required to complete courses in Fairmount College of Liberal Arts and tile College of Fine Arts as indicated in the music degree check sheets and to elect 50 music hours as specified 01 the following areas and course listings, Area Hrs, Group 1 Music Literature and History ................. 9 Mus. C. 113Q and six hours in additional music, history, and literature courses such as Mus. C. 334Q-335Q, 346Q, 624, 726, 753-754. May not use courses counted in General Education requirement. Grou p D Music Theory ..........................................20 Mus. C. 127Q-129, 128-130, 227­ 229, 228,523,561 or 661 , 641 Grou p III onducting ..... ", ...... .. .. , ......... , ................... 2 Mus. P . 217 or 218 GroupN Applied Music ..... " ..... .. .... " ... .. ................ 6 Voice, piano, organ, guitar or orchestral instrument Group V Ensembles" ..........." .... ,............., ............... ,4 Select ill consultation with advisor Group VI Electives from the areas of music literature, music theory, music applied, counterpoint, conducting, orchestration, and ensembles .............. 9 GroupVn Recital attendance Four semesters, Mus. P. 050 Music Minor A minor in music is available to any stu­ den t whose major field or area of empha­ is is outsid e the Sch ool of Music . A music minor consists of 20 hours as indi­ cated: Mus. C. 113Q 127Q 128, ]29, 130, and 9 additional hours se lected from among the following: Mus. C. 160G, 22.7, 228, 229, 230, 334Q, 335Q, 523, music applied (4-hour maximum ), and music ensembles (4-h OUI maximum). Music Education Lower-Division Course 171. Orientation 10 Music Education. (1). Look at the concepts of comprehensive musicianship and develop strategies for leading music activo ities in a variety of scenarios. Learn observa­ tion techniques appropriate for viewing a wide range of i.nstrumental and vocal performances. 172. Introduction to Music Education. (1). Demonstra te familiari ty with the scope and prOSTam of K-12 music education. Articulate n current music education ph il osophy while developing leadership skills for a variety of music activities and teaching scenarios. Prereq­ uisite: Mus. E. 171 . 203. Fundamentals of Vocal Music for Sec­ ondary Schools. (3). The teaching of music in the secondary school. consideration of objec­ tives and ~amination of materia ls, For stu­ dents primarily interested in teaching music in secondary 5chool5; includes observa tion in public schools. Includes classroom guitar. Pre­ requisite: music education major or ins truc ­ tor's consent. Grades 6-12. 204. Fundamentals of lnstrumental Music for Sccondill')' Schools. (3). Techniques and mate­ rials for teaching i.nstrumental music in junior and scnior higl' schools. Empha~izCb instru ­ mental organization and adminiSlTation, peda­ gogical practices, laboratory experiences, guid­ ing student behavior, evaluatiun, and profes ­ sional responsibilitles. For students primarily interested In teaching instrwncntnl music in the secondary schools. Includes teaching tech­ niques for jazz ensemble. Prerequ isite: music educaLion major or instructor's consen t. Grades 6-12. 235. Methods of Teaching Orchestral instru­ ments amed) in regular and alter­ native schools an la ses, id ntifh anon, obje ­ lives, appropriate activ ities, materia l , and planning and impL mentation techntqu . AI ' includes observation, demonstration-participa­ tion x 'cnces, od /or moo' pres nlations. Prera,uisites: Mw; E. 203 ar 204 with in~truc­ tor's con.sent. Grades -12. SoU.. Survey of Choral T choique and litera­ ture. (2). A study of basiC techniques 0 ensem­ bl~ and XL m nation of literature for large and sma ll en emble~. I ncludes bong I ~ading Required fOT all music edu tion majors. Pre­ requisite Mus. P . 217 or 218. Grades fi-12. 351. Music Fundamental COt the Classroom Teach.er. (2-3). Por students planning to teach in the elementary ~c.hool classroom. Includes basi c fundamentals oC mllllic emphasJ.Zing d~vel opmcnt of student's musIc ability in , ingin~ , playing the pi ano and cia ~room instruments. 403. Advanced Techniques of o1:al/General School Music. (1) . Emphasizes special prob­ lem.; related to preparation for tudenl leach­ ing: cOnJildeTation of the oca l and g neral music programs lit a ll levels l'rerequisLles: Mu§. E. 203 and 303; also 309 for special music cdu ation majors. Includes content area read­ ing modules . To be taken during s tudenL teaching serne ' ter. Grad K-l2.. 404A. Advanced Techniques of In trumental School Mllllic. (1). Consideration of specia l problems related to preparation for student teaching in instrumental muSic pr grams at all levt!b. Prerequisites: MUl>. E 204 and 304; also 309 for speCial music education major. Includes content area reading m dule..<;. To be la 'n du ring tudent teaching sem) te r. G rades 4-12. 481. Coopenlive Education. (1-8). See Mus E. 2111. Courses for Graduate/Undergraduate Credit 511. Jazz Pedagogy. (2). For both music educ ­ lion and music performance maj rs interested in teaching improvisation, jazz history and large and sm II jazz ensembles Tncludes a review of current jazz methods and materials, rehearsal techn iques for jazz ensembles. how to Ii~len to Jan, lectures by visiting jazz er ­ forme and effective jazz programming. Pre­ requisite: completion of Mu C. 228 or mstruc­ Illr'. c nsen t. 606. Music Methods for Ea..r1y Childhood Education. (2-3). Methods and materials for t aching music in the preschool and kinder­ garten cJ r om Include the development u( the child's musical gTowth through si ng ing, listening, rhythmic and creative activities; a survey of , vailable mater ials; and develop­ ment of playing, singing (lnd conduCbng skills. 611. Musjc for Special Education, (3). Open to upper-div' i n r graduate s tudents and intended for the potential practicing music teacher, classroom tea her or special education teacher Includes identifica tion of dy function ­ ing children and their problems and cu rre.n t theory and practices in special music educa­ tion. S tis fies the reqUirement , effective September 1, 1981, that applicants f r i.ni tial certification or renewal of secondary and/or elementary certificati n shall present urvey ours ,or equivalent content from other cours­ es, in the subject area of exceptional children. TIli provision applies to initial certification and recertification musi' teacher nly, grades K-l 2.. 686. Marching Band Techniques, (2). A sys­ tematic appr ath to the marching ba n lvith regard to rganization, show development. instrumentation, mu ic adaptation. dri ll con­ struction and script developmen t . Teache boU) trad itional drill and c rps ly le marching utilizing manual methods a.nd computeT gen­ erated graphiCS. Field observations, films, pho­ tographs and Live performances by marching bands complement the cla 5 syllabllll . Required for all instrumental majors. 732. Music in the Junior High School. (3) . fndudes adminislrative structures, the curricu­ lum, adolescell t deve lopmen t. teaciling as behavior and competencies needed f r success­ fu l teach ing of genera l and choral music in grades 6-q. 737A. Advanced Woodwind Techniques. (2). pedal problems lUld techn iques ill the tach­ ing f woodwind instruments Surveys current matenals. Prerequisites: Mus. E. 237 and 238 or cqui alent. 739A. Advanced Bras Technjques_ (2)_ Spe­ cial problems and techniques in the teaching of brass instrument. Survey current materials. Pr~quisite: Mus. . 239 r equivaJenL 740A. Advanced Perc1l5Sion Techniques. (2). Special pT blems and tecbniqu in th teach­ ing of percussion instruments. Surveys current materials . P rerequisite; Mus . E. 240 or quivalenl 150. Music Education Workshop. (1-4)_ Repealable for credit. 781. Cooperative Education. (1-8). A fiel placement which integrate c UT e work with a planned and supervised professional experi­ ence d igned to complement and cnhanc th s tudent's academic p rogram . Individua lized programs must e fonnulated in con ullatlon w ith and approved by appropriate fa u lty sponsors and cooperative education coord ina­ tors . Stud(!J'\ enr(IUed itl Co-op 781 may fol­ low one of lwo bcheduling patterns: paralleL nroll ing concunently in a mi nimum of six hollIS of course work in addition to th.rn co- op assignment; alt mating, working full tim one semester in a field study and returning to fu ll school enrollment the following 'em ter; sud \ studen need not b concurrently ~nralled in any other course. Prerequisite: atisfactory aca ­ demic tanding p ri or to the firs t job assign­ ment. May be repeated for credit. Offer!!.! CrlNCr only. 185. InstrumentaJ MU1lic Organizalion a n Administration. (2). Problems of deveJopin g school instrumenta l music programs. 790. Special Topics in Music. (1-4). For ind i­ Vidual or group instruction. IndIvidual stud enrollment requir departmental - n ent. Repeatable with departmental con~ent. Courses for Graduate Students Only 821. Admini tering Elementary MU1lic. (3). Investigates res arch and strategies in m u ic education relating t communication, class­ room managemenl, current trends an teach­ ing and I ".Hntng ty les . Include tea IHr assessments alld evaluation issues. 821. Advanced Techniques in Special Mu it' Education. (3). or th pedal mu ic education f\.1ME candidates only. Studies research lit ra­ tufe and Lren ds in speCl,1l music ed ucation. Includes an 'valua tion of materials an t Lh­ niques and sp -cia I project explor ng thl' development ot m usical understanding in the dy func tionj ng child . Course sa t isfies the requirement, effective Septemb r 1, 1981, th'! applicants fOT mitial certification r renewal of secondary and /or elementary certificatio n sha ll present a ~urvey our e, or equiva lent content from other cuurses, in the subject area of exceptional chiJdren. This pr vision applies to init ial certificati nand re erti icalian of music teachers onl v. Prerequisite: Mus. E. 403 or 404. 823. Specia] Music Education Practicum. (3). For the special music education MME candi­ date only . Supervised teaching in speciaJ ed u­ ca tion das rn ms . A compan ion curse to Mus. E. 822; gives the MME speaaJ educatioll can idate experience in teaChing m special education classrooms. Prerequisite: Mus. E. 822 or concurrent enrollment. 831. Developing the Child's Musical Under­ standing. (31. Definition 0 undl!Tstant.llngs neceSSl1ry fOT the attainment of music< I ilwar~ ness in the chi ld . Directs the explorallo n ot ciasliI'oom experiences toward the successful development tudent to pass the piano proficiency exam. Required of all music majors. Repea table for credit. Pre­ requisite: class p lacement interview. 114P. P iano Class . Level 2. (1). Non-piano music majors. Repeatable for credit. Pnerequi­ s ite: class placement interview. 1I5P. Piano Class. Level 3. (3) . Non-pian music majors. Repeatable for credit. PreTequi­ site: class placement interview. 116P. Pia~o Class. level 4. (1). Non-piano D1USic majors. Repeatable for credit. Prerequi­ site: class placemcnt interview. 117J. Guitar Class. (2). Beginners. Repeatable. 117P. Piano Class. (1). Non-p iano music majors. Prerequisile: class placemenl inter­ view. Repeatable. 117W. Violin Class for Adult Beginners. (2). Beg-i lm ing v iolin class: v iolin fundamenta ls, emphasizing tone and lI\tonatio n develop­ ment; basic techniques for reading (notes and rhythm). May not be applied to music major requirements. Repeatable for crecUt. 117Y. Popular Vocal Styles. (2) . Class voice instruction for adults emphasizing basic vocal technique and how it can be applied for USC in popular styles of singing, including vocaJ jazz, pop, mu sic theatre, etc. Gives students an opportunity to explore techniques for develop­ ing their o-..vn voices and to practice singing in a supportive environment, and includes infor­ mation via lecture, demonstration, listening to recordings related to stylistic differences in the popular idiom. lntended for nonmusic majors and w ilJ not be applicable to music degree requirements. Repeatable. 118f. Guitar Class. (2). Intermediate. Repeat­ able. 118P. Piano ClaS6. (1). Non-pia no music majors . Prerequisite: cJass placement irlter­ view. Repeatable. 119P. Piano Dass. (1). Piano majo1'5. PtefL'C)\Ii­ site: class placement mterview. Re~table. OP. Piano Clas-s. (2) . Nonmajors. Rcpeatabl 717W. Violin Class for Adult Beginners. (2). Beginnmg violin class : VIOlin fundamentals. emphasi ~ing tone and intonation develop­ ment; basic techniques for reading (notes anel rhythm). May not be applied to music major requirements. Repeatable for credit. 717),. Popular Vocal Styles. (2). C lass voice instruction for adults emphasizing basic vocal technique and how it can be applied lor use ill popular styles of !iinging, including vocal jazz, pop, music theatre, etc. Gives students an opportunity to explore techniques tor develop­ ing their own voices and to practice singing in a supportive environment; includes infllrmi'l­ lion via lecture, demon~tratiol1, listening to 'ordings related to stylistic differences in the populaJ idiom. Intended for nonmuSic maJOrs; not applicable to musIC degree requirements. Repeatable. General Performance Noncredit Courses 050. Recital. (1 ). Recital attendance and perfor­ mance. Laboratory observation oj perfomul11cc media, liter.ature, IU'Id recital techniques. lIIec­ tion is required for SA and BM majors accorn­ ing to the reqUIrements of the degree checklist at the time (Ii enrollment. Repealable.. 080. Topics in Music. (1-3). TopIcs exploring events, conditions, relatlOnships, styles, etc_ in music. See Schcdu ll' ttf Courses for current list­ ing. Not applicable to degree. Repeatable. Lower-Division Courses 107-207. Plano Repertoire. (1-1). Gives per­ forming il.lld listening experience to pian majors. Repeatable for credit. 121 . ltaBan Diction. (1). For the voca l per­ fomler, including a conlpreh~n!'ive study of Italian ronsonant and vowel sounds. 122. English Diction. (1). For the vocal per­ former , including a comprehensive study nf English consonant and vowel sounds. 148. Double Reed Making and Adjusting. (1). Making and adjusting oboe, English hom, and bassoon reeds. Repeatable (or CTt!dlt. Prerequi­ site: Mus. E. 238 liT instructor's consent. 150. Music Performance Workshop . (1-4). Repeatable for credit. 210-211-212-213-214. Ensembles. (]-]-1-1-l) . (A) Orchestra; (B) SympJlOnlC Wind Ensemble; (D) Gospel Ensemble; (F) A Cappella Choir; Universit y Sin gers; Concert Chorale; (H ) Band" Hispanica; lJ) Pi ano Accompaniment; (L) Madrigal Singers; Chamber Singer:.; {N Woodwind Ensemble; (0) Saxophone Quartet; (P) BrasS Chamber Ensemble, (R) Percussion ~mble; (5) Beginning String Ensemble and Strin g Chamber Ensemble ; (T) Jazz Arts U4 Ensembles 1 and II; (V) Guitar Ensemble; (W) [ntemanana! Choir; (Xl New Music Ensemble. Prerequisite: audition required. Repeatable for cred it. 211E. Opera Lab. (1). Provides opportunities for studellt to perform s taged a ri a~, "CelleS, aLld one act operas. Students who aud ition for Opera Theatre but are not ca ,t should enrol! in Opera Lab. Those i tere ted in tage manage­ ment directing, and backstage work may also enroll. Audition is required 2111<. Opera Theatre. (1). Provides the oppor­ ttmity f,;1r tudent!> to gain perf rmance e peri, ence 115 a chorus member in fully staged, high quali ty p roduction.~ of a divers repertory w ith orchest ra acmmpamment. Prerequisite : audi­ tion required . Repeatable for credit. 21lU. Musical Theatre Performance. (1) . Cross-listed as Dance 320 and Thea 180E. An interdisdphnacy practIcum class for tuden!!> cast in a musical theatre produ tion. Admis­ l>;on is b. audi tion . Gain rehearsal and per or­ mance experience in a Mai nstage production with r hestra, Reh rsats are In the eveningl> for6-1 weeks. Repeatabl Cor credit 212K. Opera Theatre. (2). Provides the oppor­ tunity fM tudenls to gain performance experi­ ence as a upporti ng COl , t ffi ", mber in fully staged, high quality productions of a diver e repertory with orche ' tra accompaniment. Pre­ reqUIsite: audition required . Repeatable fo r credi t. 217. Instrumental Condu.cting. (2). Fundamen­ tals of baton tedmi ue, elementary ~eore read­ ing and musical leadership . Practical experi ­ ence in conducti ng laboratory and classroom groups. Prerequi ites: Mus. C. 128 and 130. 218. Choral Conducting. (2). Fundamenta ls of cond ucting, core reading. and rehearsal tech­ niques. Practical experience onducti ng c1as.'>­ room groups. Prerequisites: Mus. C. 128 and 130. 221. German Diction. (1) . For the voca l per­ former, including a comprehenSive study of German consonant and vow I sounds. 222. French Diction. (1). For the voca l per­ former, i ncl udin~ a com prehensive study of French consonant and vowel ounds. 223-224. AppUed Plano Accompanying. (2-2). fndividual p rivate study of s tandard ace mpa­ nimen t literature. Prerequis ites: successfu l ompletion of two emesters of piano study and sophomore standing. 250-251. Applied Piano Concerto. (2-2). Gives students co n -er t'O pe rforman I' experience. Prerequi' ites: sophomore standing and admi t­ tance to the BM performance pr gram. 281. Cooperative Education. (1-8). A fie ld placement which integrates course work with a pi ann . d and supervised professional xperi· ence designed t complement and enhance the stude nt' s academic p rogram. lnd i i ualized programs must be form ulat d in consu ltation w ith nd ap pr ved by appropr iate faculty spOt1S0rs and cooperative education coordina­ tors. Studen may f How on of two schedul­ ing Item s: parallel, enf !ling c nCUTT tty In a m inim um of ix hours of course work in addition to their co-op assignment; alternating. workin full time one semester in a field tudy and returning to full school em Um nt the fol­ lowing semester; such tuden ts need not be concurrently enrolled in any other course, Pre­ requisite : sucee sfuJ completion of the fresh­ man year and satisfactory academic standing pr ior to the first job a ignment. May be repeated for credi t. Offered CrlNCr only. Upper-Division Courses 300. Junior Recilal (1). Required for BM piano maj , performance or accompanying empha­ sis. Prerequisite: departmental consent. 307-407. Piano Repertoire. (1-1). Give ' per­ formi..ng and Ii ten ing experience t piano major . Repeatable for credit. 330. Musical Theatre Worksh.op J. (2). Cross­ listed as Dance 150L and Thea. 330. An inter­ disdplinary p raeti urn class with opportunlties for student performers to refine rehearsal nd performance skil ls neces ary to mu i aJ the­ a tre. Students prepare songs and scenes and taging from the mu160G. The Heritage of Weslern Music. (3). Genera l ed uca tion in tr o d uctory co urse . Acquaints the nonmajor w ith the central tradi· tion of Western music. Emphasizes the devel­ op ment of Iistelung techniques by which the <; tudenl may perceive and wlderstand funda­ mental musica l processes as they exist in the mous styles with.in the W~tem heritage, >161. Music througb the Ages. (3). Gen era l educatiLH1 fu rther studies couTSe. Open to aU students, par ticular ly those involved in alter­ native sclled u.J es. Helps s tuden ts develop the capad ty for critica I music listening and an appreciation for al l musical s tyleb. Televi..'>ion courae. >162G. World Music. (3). Genera l education in lrod uctory course . A v iew o f music ali a global and cultural ar t form . Por the genera l tuden! to better understand th e i.m portance and b'ignificance of music in all world cultures. >165. The Blues: Art and Culture. (3). General ed ucation further studies course. Cross-Ilsted as Anthr. 165. The b lues is a lliliquely Ameri­ can musica l fo rm that has made an immense contribution to world popular culture. 11,e his­ tory of the blues a l,o reflects the hi.story of Black America from the late 19th century to the presen t d ay. Focuses on major blues artists, both rural and urban, to trace the history and develop ment of the blues ab a fo lk art form thaI expresses both the joy and the despair of the people w ho crea.ted it. 126 227. Theo~ m. (2). The study of contrapuntal forms and textures fTom music of al l periods. E 'p lores melodic, harmoni , and rhythm ic aspects of this music, as well as basic orches­ tration techniques related tc' these textures. Include sh.{dy of an appropriate score emg per~ rmed by a University ensewble. Prerequi­ 5i : Mus. e. 118. 227H. Theory 111 Honon. (2). See Mus. C. 227. Prerequi it ' : Mus C. 128 or 118H an depart­ mental consent. 228. Theory IV. (2). Study of the larger homo­ phonic ~ rm (sonata, TOnd ) using t chniques acquired i.n previous sem le~. Includes anal­ ysis of an appropriate score being perfom1 ya Universi ty ensembl Partialt , fulfills State Certifica tion and Teacher Education Reg· ulation gl- l-80: "the ability to leach reading skills appropriate to the level of the student ,U1d t the bj ct content." Prerequisite: Mus. e. 227 228M. Theol'}' IV Ronolli. (2). See Mus. . 228. Prerequi ite: Mus. C. 227 or 227H and depart­ mental consent. 229. Aural Skills m. (2). Recognition, inging, and d ic tation of contrapunta l textures w ith c ntinued harmonic practice emphasizing ele­ mentary chr maticism. 1nstruction as ist by computer. Partiall ' fu lfills Stat' Certi fication and Teacher -duca tion Regulation gl-1 -80: " the ability to teach reading kills appropriate to the levcl of the student an to the ubject content." Prerequisit : Mus. C. 130. 230 . Aural Skills IV . (2). Summa tion and expansion of previous skills furth r empha [z­ ing harmonic hromaticism and atonal c n­ texts. instruction assisted by computer. Partial­ ly fulfills State Certi fication and Teacher Edu­ cation Regulation gl-1-80: "the ability to teach reading skiUs appropriate to the level of the student and to the subject content." Prerequi­ ~ ite: tI . . 229. 245. Jazz Improvisation. (2). Mclodic, harmon­ ic od rhythmic creation emphasizing the rela­ tionship of -cale patterns and seventh ch rds. Repeatable for credit. Prerequisites: Mw. C. 128 and 130 or instructor'S consent. 259 & 260. Applied Composition. (2-2). Indi­ vidual study in fundamentals of musica l com­ position phas izing the development and 'pansion f music materials . May be taken as an clective. May be repented as all clective by th se no t maj ring in theory·composition. Pre­ requ i, ites: Mu . C. 127Q or equival ot and instructor's consent. Upper-Division Courses >3] 0. Interrelated Arts. (3). General education i ss u e~ an perspectl'es course. Presents an aesthetic analys i o f thre fine arts. Empha­ size ty le and com lllnali ty am ong the fine arts (art, music, drama). 315. Music of the 20th Century. (2). An aes­ thetic approach to mu ic of this century, its m ajnr comp sers, and styl istic and formal characteristics. Primarily for the nonmus ic major w i 0 has mu ical lnteres t and back­ ground. 320G. Movie Mu ical . (3). Covers the unique devclopment of the musical witlun the media genre of film. Traces historical J.ev lopment, emphasizing technlcal pr gress, music, cine­ matography, and the genre as a reflection of American life. >325. Periods of Music Histo~. (3). General education further studies ourse For non· majors . COll I n t cha nges fTom 'emestff to s m ter. FoC1l.Se5 on topics within the W tern Classical musical trad.ition, such as periods, places, and styles. Prerequisi te: Mus. C. 160G. >334Q. History of Music 1. (3). General educa­ tion further studjes course. A survey of the volution of musical styles and practic - in the Western world through ca 1750. Endudes lec­ tures, reference readings, and the study of rep­ resentative amples f music. rercqui~iles : Mus. C. 113Q and 228 or instructor' consent. >335Q. Hi tory of Music n. (3). General edu­ lion further studies course. A survey of tIle evolution of musical styles and practices in tll Western world from ca . l750 t the present. Indude lectures, reference readings, and the study of representa t-l e example of music. Pr requisites: Mus. C 113Q and 22B or instruc­ tors consent. 345. Jazz Arranging. (2). Arranging for small and large jazz ensembles emphasizing current big band styles. Prerequisites: Mus. C. 228 and 230 or instructor's l:Ollsent. >346Q. Style of JiI2.Z. (3). General educati n fur ther studies course. A survey of all eras in lhe evolu tion of the many styles in the jazz idiom from the end of the 19th century to the present. Open to maj rs and nonmajors. 400. Compo ilion Recital. (1). Presen tation ~ r public performance of a selection of composi­ tions representin large and small forms, total­ ing a minimum o f 20 minut . P fforma nce times. Must be concurrently enrolled in Mus. e. 559/560 or 59/660. Prer quisite: depart­ mental con ent. >493G. American Popular M.usic. (3). General education further studi s course. Focuse on music of the popular culture in this countr fr m oLonial times into the 20th century and representing a melding of social. po litical. art ist ic, and historical element~ of many diverse cultures. Courses for GraduatelUnde.rgraduate Credit 510. Interrelated Arts. 13) . Presents an;} thetic analysi of the fine arts . music, visual arts, drama, literature, ilnd dance. Emphasizes style and commonality am ng the arts disciplines. 523. Form and Analysis. (2). Extensive analy is of the r rms and formal processes of musi al literature. Prerequisite: Mus. C. 228. 531. Introduct ion 10 Electron ic Music. 12). Basi techniques of electronic music. Directed toward musicLans who wish to use the elec­ tronic m diu m in teaching, p rfor ming or communi ating th rough music in any way. 560. Applied Composition , (2) . Individual study in ad vanced musical co mposi t ion emphasizing writing for small ensembles In the m alle, arms. Fo theory-compositi on majors. Repealable. Prerequisitcs: Mus. C. 260 and onsen! f theory-composition ar a fa Dlty and coordmator, musicology-compo ition . to ontinue as il !.heory·composition maJOr. 561. 18th Century Counterpoint. (2). Contra· puntal devices of the 18th entury it found in the work.!. f J.S. Bach. Prerequisite: Mu ·. C 228. 564. Collegium Musician. (J). tudy and per­ formance of early IllUSIC (genera lly wTltten before 1700). Repeatable for credit. 597-598. Otgan Literature and Practice. (1-1). Pertormance nd discussi 11 of works for tl\e instrumen t of all periods; study of orga n design a nd construction; and practice in aspects scrvi e playing, such as hymn play· ing, modulation, accompanying and improvi­ sion. Requjred of all orgiln majors. Repea!~ble . Prerequisite: Mus. C . 228 or departmen tal consent. >616. Symphonic Literature. (3). Generil l edu­ cation further sludies cour c. An ndvancet! course in orchestral literature covering the development of the symphoruc music from Baroque to the present day. D 'gn primM\­ Iy for music major~ who have a lready hat! Mu . C. 334Q and 335Q. >623. Opera Literature. 13). General education further studie cour c . A comprehensive ur­ vey of ltaItan, German, 'rench, RUSS ian, English and American opera titernture fn)m the 17th century to the pI' ent. Mus. C. 113 is s trongly reco mmended before taking the course. Should be only upper divisinn or grad· u te tudents. Not limited to mU5ic maj rs. 624. Oratorio and Cantata Literature. (2). A study of the 010 vocal Literature of the I ~rge r sacred and secular forms from the 17th centur)' to the present No t limit d to music majors . 64]. Orchestration. (2). The study of in ·tru· mentation, emp hasizing idiomatic scoring fo r various instrumental combinations with <1n approach to the problem of full rchestrn and band SCOTes. Prerequisite: Mus. e. 227. 645. Choral Arranging . (2). Scor ing illr women's, men's and mixed choruses. I ndude~ performance and anAlysis of tudellt's arrange- m nt ill lass. Prerequisites: Mus. C. 22B nd 230. 660. Applied Composition. (2). Indiv id ual study in musical composition ernpha ir.ing writ ing {or both small en emble alld la rge groups in the larger fcmns. Repeatable. Prereq­ uisites: Mu . C. 560 and instructors comient. 661. 16th Century Counterpoint. (2). Analysl> and application of the contrapuntal compv' \' tion techni Illes of the 16th century. Prerequi' i . Mus. C. 228. 671 . Guomatic Harmony. (2). Advancedtudy of chromatic harmonic materials of all periodS wi th specia l a tten tion to the 19th cenlury· Emphasizes analysis and creative writing. l're' requi ite: Ml . C. 22R. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS/PERFORMING AR'IS 127 672. Conlemporary Techniques. (2).Advanced ,tuclY of music from impressionism to the pre­ en t (!mph;)sizing related litera ture and cre­~ ti \'c writing. Prerequisite' MU!l C. 228 685. SITing Literature and Materials. (2). A 5\ j[\'l'Y and stylistic ana lysis of mu!!ic for solo slrings and chamber combination~, beginning \l' it h lhc early Baroque period, 726. Voice Literature. (3). A comprcilensive ,u[\'C'V prearly Ita lian arias. french chansons. CC lln'~t1 lieder, clmtl'mpor,lTY English songs ,\l1d Russion and Spanish literature, 750. Musicology-Composil'ion Workshop (1­ ~). Rl'pealable f OT credit. Prerequisite: instruc­ t() r' ~ (ol\:.t!fIl 753. ChQral Literature I. (2). A historical and 5 t v li ~t J C survey of chora l literature of th R'~1dissance and Baroque eras. 754. Choral Literature II. (2). A historical and •tvli slie survey of clwral li terature of the Oas­ sica l, Romantic, and Contemporary eras 782·783. Plano Literature. (2·2). Survey of the historical erao; of professional pi:mo rep·ertoI)'. 790. Spedal Topics in Music. 0-4). For indi­ ddu il l M group instruction. Repealable with departmenta l consent. 791 ·792. Seminar in Music History. (3-3). Dc\'tlop~ areas of interest it' music history as tim~ pt.'rmits. Makel> no effort at a chronologi­ c,, 1 survey . Includes ideas eVOking the most i nl ('Tl'~t anJ can~idered by tl,e instructor 10 h of thl' greiltesl professil)nal benefit when inler­ est warrants. Courses for Graduate Students Only 830. Seminar in Musk Theory. (3). An analyti­ cal study of the motcrials used in musical com ­ r('~tion from antiquity to the present, employ­ ing nnalytkal approaches f;uc.h as Schenker, Hmdemi th and serial ted\r1iqucs. Develops cmalyti121 perspective rather lhan composition­ "I ~kill::,. 84QA.C. Seminar in the Techniques of Com­ POSItion. (2) . Examines the nature of composi­ li \ll1 a l te,hnlques through selected work!. til different media: (A) large ensembles, (6) smull ensembles and (Cl soja literature. Prerequi­ ,iles: \1u5. C. 671 , 672 and 641. or departmen­ t,,1C I)Il~en!. Ml-642. Special Project in Music; (1-3; 1-3). Indi vidllaJ.l y supervised study or researd1 emphnsizing the professional needs of the stu­ d~n t. R"reatab le fOT credit . Prereq u isite: llhtn K'trrr's consent 852. Introduction to Bibliography and Re~earch. (3) . Techniques o f research and d eveJopm~nt of bibliography in music and mUsic eduC60 or equi\'alen t 875. Thesis Researd\, (2). 876. Thesis. (2). 693. Music of Antiquity Through the Renais­ anee. (3). 694. Music of the Baroque 'Era. (3). 895. Music ofthl' 18th Century. (3). 896. Music of the 19th Century. (3). 897. Music of the 20th Century. (3). School of Performing Arts Leroy W. Clark, Chair The School of Performing Arts includes the areas of dance and theatre. The sellOol offers the Bachelor of Fine Arts in Per­ fOrming Arts/Dance and Bachelor of Fine Arts in Performing Arts/ Theatre. All canctidates for the BFA degree mtlst complete the fuHowing core courses: nle­ atre 253, Costuming tor the Slage; and Theatre 345, Stage Lighting. Dance Major emphasis iB placed on modern dance technique wi th strong supportive classes in ballet and jazz. Ma jor course offerings include study in modem, balleL, and jazz techniques; lap; choreography; dance history; dance kinesiology; reperto­ ry; music for dance; lighting; and cos­ tume, Additional classes are offered in music theatre dance, mime, ballroom, country-western, and other special forms. The Wichita State University Dance Ensemble (WSUDE), the residen t faculty­ student performrulce company, presents t least l WO fu lly produced CO ncert annually and acts to produce guest resi­ dencies with internationally recognized dance artists, lecture demonstrations for area schools, master classes, an annual undergraduate dance concert, informal howings, and senior choreography COn­ certs. Membership in WSUDE is by audi­ tion only. Any student who intends to pursue dance as a major should contact the direc­ tor of dance early in their educationaJ career for assignment 1. 0 an academic advisor. Graduation Requirements Dance majors mus t complete two semesters of Dance 501, Modern Dance IV, and one semester of Dance 410, Ballet ill, with a minimum grade of 8. A mini­ mum of 42 hours is required in technique with a least 24 hours in modern dance technique. Proficiency exams are ava il ­ able for those with a developed technical skill. Students art! encouraged to take concurrent ballet and modem dance tech­ n ique classes each semes ter they are enrolled . Contact the director of dance for consideration of exception. Advancement in ted1niquc is mlt auto­ matic and is possible only with faculty consent and approval. Students will be placed at the technical level the dance fac­ ulty feel is appropriate for U,eir individu­ al growth and development. Students with a developed skill in one dance ted,­ nique should not expect that ability l translate in to the same level of skil l in other techniques of dance. All dance majors are reqUired to per­ form in WSUDE and/or dance progrnm productions each st!mester, Junior and senior dance majors who are not accepted in WSUDE are reqUired to perCorm ill an approved dance-sponsored performance. 'Ibis requirement does not apply to senior dance majors dunng the semester in which they present their senior concert. Approval for dance majors to perform in off-campus produclions, which may con­ flict with dance program or WSUDr. events, is made on a case-by-case basis. While we encourage students to work professionally as part of their training, w do not feel this should be dOn(> at the re ular expense of student involvcmeJ1Lin dance programl WSUDE prod uctions . Students accepted in WSUDE may regi ter for Dance 320, Dan.ce Performanc<::, ch semester. All majors present a senior chore~)gra­ phy concert Lo include choreography and perfonnances detennined in consultation with your major advisor and the directoT of dance. The dance faculty work with ach student to create the best "fit" between student goals and intcreslc; in dlorcography I performflnce a nd faculty appraisal of each student's needs for true artistic development. We sl'ek to produce graduates who will be competttive wjth graduates of any other outstanding BFA training program in tl'le country. At least half of the concert must be chore­ ographed by the student. The totaJ length of the concert should be bern'eel' 25 and 30 minutes. A wrilten documentatit)n of the choreography (including major artis ­ tic influences, compositional constructs used and approaches to choreography/ performance) is supported by a creat ive notation of the project. These materials are submitted to the major advisor for approval. Following approval by th major advisor, students are scheduled for an oral defense of their work before the dance major faculty. Bachelor of fine Arts The general graduation requirements ()f the University must be met as described in the Academic Information-Require­ 128 mcmts for Graduati n section 0 th Cnla~ log . In addition, the following course requiremenls must be met. COllr. Hn; Dance 201, Modem Dance Technique 1; Dance 301, 401, 50 I, Modem Dance IT, m, IV. (Placement and advancement by auditi n a nd/or faculty consent nly.) .............. 24 Dance 210,310, 410, Ballet I, II, m. (P)acemenl and advancemcmt by audHion and/or faculty conseDt only.l .......... .. ......... ................................... 18 Dance 120, 220, Jazz 1, II ........ .................. ..4 Dance 105, 205, ~05, Choreography I. II, rII ...................................... .............. ........9 Dance 225Q Survey f Dan e History .... .3 Dance 130B, Tap 1 ........................................ 2 Dance 315, Music for DaIlce ........... ............3 Dance 320, P rformelnce.. ...... ........... ..... .. . 3 Dance 415. Dance Kinesiology .................. 3 Thea. 25 ,CQ turning f r the Stage .. ...... ..4 Thea 345, Stage Ughting ............................~ Total ............................................................. 78 In addition to the ab ve reqUired cour ­ es, a minimum of 6 h ur sh uld be elec ted from the following theatre, music, art, and dance courseswiUl at least 3 hours in two diSciplines. Thea. 143G, The Art of the The.1tre; 243Q, Acting Ii 244, Stagecraft; 254, Stage Makeup; 623Q, Dev topmen t of the Theatre 1; or b24Q Development of the Theatrell Mus. C. 160G, The Heritage of West m Music, 315, Music of the 2 th Century; or 346~ Styles of Jazz Arl H. 122G, Survey of Western Art: Renaissance and Baroque; U4, Survey of Western Art: M dem; 525, 20th Cen­ tury Art Before 1945; 52&, Art Since 1945; or Art. F. 136, Foundation De ign I Dance 130J Advanced Tap; 227 Mime, 230, Theatre Dance J; 330, Theatre Dance 11; 335, Jazz III; 545, Methods of Teaching Dance; 605, Char graphy for th Musical Theatre; 645, Practice in Teaching Dance The remaining hours should be selected to fulfill General Education program requirements. Dance Minor A minor in dance on ists f the follow­ ing: 105,120, 140, 201, 210,225Q,301, and 320. Lowey-Division Courses 105. Ch.oreography 1. (3). Focuses on the chore­ ographic' proa;ss. Studt:nls are required to do c mpositionnl tudies which may include time, space, energy, deSign, dynamics, rhythm, motivation, sequencing, phrasing. movem nt qual ities. and transi tions. Prerequisites: one semesl'T of modem dane and equivalent to intermediate teclmkal level. Concurrent em 11­ menl in appropriate-level modern dance or ballet ll!chnique class reqll ired. 120. jazz. (1-2). Tntroduces jazz technique, mplu izing wMk in body isolalions, rhyth­ miL pattern and directions, basic step • and history and development of jazz d nee in America. Repeatabl for credit. 130. Varieties of Dance. (1-2) . N I previous experience in dance required. A d iffer nt form f dance may be offered each semester. Repeat­ able for cred.!t. 130B. Tap l. (2). [nlroduces th princip les of tap dance including rhythm, clarity of soWld, syncopation, ami weight sh.i.fl. 1300. Tap U. (2). Continualion f Dancc 3UB. An advanced intermediate-levI!! cour I! emplu izmg appropriate techruque of interme­ diate tap skills and the continued devel pment of intricate rhythms, musicality, weight distri­ butl n, and arialion of s tyle. PrerC(juisite; Dance 130B and/or instructor's cons nt. >HO. Art of llie Dance. (3). General educati n introductory cours . An exploration overview of Am rica n dance between 1890 nd 1990. Emphasizes lecture. d' cussion, reading mate­ rials, dance videos and films. Very bttle physi­ cal applica tion in the dance studio. Open 10 eVCI')'one.. Not counted toward a dancc major. lSO. Dance Workshop. (1·4). Repeatable COT crediL lSOL. Musical Theatre Workshop J. (2). ross­ listed as Mus. P. 330 and Thea. 330. An inter­ disciplinary practicum class with opportunib.es Cor student pedonners to refine rehearsal and performance skills necessary to musical the­ atre. Students prepare songs and scenes and staging from the musical theatre repertory cul­ minating in a workshop performance Admis­ sion IS by aud1tion. 201. Modem Dan.ce Technique I. (2-3). intro­ duces study of basic po itions, body align ­ ment, stretches, and stTengthening exettises; empha ize.s simple movement phrases to develop und rstanding of direction, rhythm, and dynanucs. Repeatable for credit. 205. Choreography II. (3). Further work in Improvisation and composition. Study of fonn in compOSition. Culminates in a performance f solo works, duets, and small groups for an in vited audi nee Prerequ.i5ite : Dan e 105 and concunent enrollment in appropriate-level modem dance or ballet technique class. 210. BalJet 1. (2-3). Introduces basic technique, positions. ba:.ic steps, proper body illignment, clas room slruclure, and etiquette and ballet vocabu lary. Repeatable for credit. 220. Jazz n. (1-2). Continuation of Dance 120 at intennediat-e level. Repeatable f r credIt. Pre­ requisite: instructor' consent OT by 1I1ldition. >225Q. Survey of Dance History. (3). General ducaticlO further stud ies course. Overview ( dance history emphasizing the development of the we tem ITadition lU social, culturlll ,1nd concert dance forms fTom ancient Greece to the present, the o riglnS u f das.si al ballet, tianCl' in the Americas, the development of modern dance and current trends in "world dance" 227. MimelPhysicaJ Theatre r. (2). An in tro ­ ductor)' CoUIS~ in crafting non-verbal theatre to create concep tual s tatements, short play~, ~nd ab tra t movem nt art Stlldent experi· ences gestur . i~olations, flexibility, strength, em tiona! expression, genuine acting, and fUll ­ dament..Ll mime th atre skills lu see the range and possibilities in commwu , ting n n-verb"l­ Iy Enhane both nctin~ and dancing kills. 230. Musical Theatre Dance I. (2). lntroduces variou . rou ical theatre dane' styles from diJ­ ferent hlstorical p nods including ociaI danc~ styles from ll)()()s through 19 Os. includes the dance audition and h w to prepare and mar­ ket th~ dance.r for the tagI.'. Repeatable ~ r credit. Prerequisite; Dance 120 and/or inslruc­ t r' cunsent.. Upper-Division Courses 30L Modem Dance n. (2-3). Continu tion of Dance 201 emphasizing movement phras f2s. [ntermedi te level Repeatable for credit. ["reo requisite: instructor's con ent or by auditiull. 310. Ballet II. (2-3). Continuation of Dancc 210. Internlediate level. Repeatable for credit. Pre· requisite: inslructor'S consent or by audition. >315. Music for Dance. (3). General educatIOn further s tudies course. Study of tempo, ml!ter, and quality of sOWld as applied to movem~nt. Exploration of appropriate music repertoire for dance. Study of musical fonn and tyle periods and applications to periorm,mte and cit reog­ raph.y . 320. Dance Performan.ce. (1). Perfonn in Mi ­ America Dance Theatre, Senior and/or Ch re­ ography concerls, musical tl'eatre, or outside performanc approved by dance faculty. Pre­ requL~ite: audition. May be repeated for credi t. 330. Mu leal Theatre Dance TI. (2). Connnua· tion of Dance 230 and further refinement (l f musical th eatre dance styles . EmphasilcS knowledge of past and present renowned Broadway choreographers. Integrates original choreography into course work as well ru. per­ fonnance methods . Repeatable for credit Prl~ rellubite: Dance 230 and/or instructor' con­ sent. 335. Jazz Dance m. (2). Continuation of Dance 220 a t a higher I vel of technical skill Includes advanced kinetic memory, flexibility, is laban, sophisticated syncopation, and reflex. Prereq­ uisites: Dance 120. 220, and/or instructor' ­ oruent 401. Modem Dance m. (3). Continuation ll f Dance 301. Upper intermediate level Repe~t· able for credit. Prerequisite; instructors C(ln' sent or by audition. 410. Ballet ill. (3). Continualion of Dan e 310. Uppe.r intermediate level Repeatable (or cred­ it. Prerequisite; ins tructor's consen t (1C by audition . 415. Danc!! Kinesiology. (3). Introduces prind­ pIes of kinesiology for dance. Includes anato­ mY, physiology, and beginning concepts in the bc1d ' therapies and movement analysis. Stress­ 5 s'tTUdllral and neuromuscular analysis of th(' human body as it responds to the demands of dance. Courses for GraduatelUndergraduale Credit 501. Modem Dance TV. (3). ContinuatIOn of D"nre 40 1. Advanced level. Emphasizes pro­ fessional teclmigue and performance quality. Repeatable for credit. Prerequisite: instructor's nsent or by audition. 505. Choreography Ill. (3). Focuses on the choreographic process. Students create choreo­ ~raphic studies for more than one dancer uti­ lizing elements studied in Choreography I and II and exploring different choreographic ~pproachl!s. Further e:xplora tion may include envttonmenta!, chance, and coJJaborative choreographies and multimedia Ilpproaciles. Pr\!Iequisites: Dance 205 and concurrent enrollment in appropriate-level modem dance or baIlet technique class. 510. Ballet lV. (3). Continuation of Dance 41 0. Ad vancL>d level. EmphasiZes professional t.OO1­ l1iquc and perfOnTliUlce quality. Repealable for credit. Prerequisite: instructor's consent or by aud ition . 545. Methods of Teaching Dance. (3). Devel­ ops tcnciling skills for elementary Sclloo1s, high schouls, rl!c:reation centers, private and profes· sion~1 schools and universitit'S through lesson planning and ill 'class teaclling practice. Pre­ requi~ite . Dance 401 or410. 605. Choreography for the Musical Theatre. (3). lntrtlduces the process of choreography for the l11 uskal theatre from C45ting the chorus in a mu.sical to staging a solo to choreographing an ensemble of 30 dancer/singers. Tncludes interpreti.ng the score and script for ddllce, qaging non-dancers, a nd other projects to develop the craft of choreography for the musi cal stage. Prerequisites: Dallc.e 330 or instructor's consent 645. Practice in Teaching Dance. (3). Actual plat'emenl in tcaching situation wilh responsi­ biliiy of teaching ballet, modern and/or jazz in pri\'ute studios. elementary. h igh schools, Ys or recreatlDn centers. Prerequisite: Dance 545. 690. Special Topics in Dance. (l...(i). For indi­ Vidual or group instruction. Repeatabl e for CH~i t v.ith departmentnl consent. 750. Dance Workshop. (1-4). Repeatable for credi t. Theatre Theatre offers a broad academic program, balanced by the extensive production 'chedul~ (If the University U,eatre­ \ la instage; Second State; Readers The­ atre; and Summer Theatre, a semi-profes­ ICl na l company whose members are cho­ >en by audition only. The music theatre program is a collaborative one in which tudents participate in musicals present­ ed as part of the Theatre Series and the Opera Series, as well as in other perfor­ I11iInces in theatre, dance, and music. Graduation Requirement All theatre majors must partidpate in some area of the production of all Univer­ sity theatre plays, after consultation with faculty and staff. Students may choose one of four options: a BPA in performing arts/theatre performance, a BFA in per­ forming arts/design and technical the­ atre, a BA in theatre, and a BFA in music theatre. In addition to the general educa­ tion requirements, candidates for the BFA in performing arts must meet the follow­ ing requirements. Theatre Performance Track A minimum of 80 hours, lllcluding The­ atre 143G, 180, 221Q, 222, 225,230, 24], 243(2,244,253,254,272,345,359,380,450, 455,542, 62.3Q 624Q 643, 651 , 728; with 3 hours chosen from the followmg: Theal! 218, Dance 201, Dance 210; and 6 hours chosen from the folJowing: Theatre 516, 517,559,590, 675, or 725. Technical Theatre and Design Track A minimum of 80 hours, including Art 145, Theatre 143G, 180. 243Q, 244, 253, 254, 272,344, 345,359,380,444,450,451, 544, 546, 623Q, 624Q 647, 649, 653, 657, 728; with 3 hours chosen from the follow­ ing: Theatre 375 or 675; and with 5 hours chosen from theatre electives. Musical Theatre The BFA in musical theatre Tequires a a minimum of 92 hOUTS in three disciplines: 28 credits in theatre, 30 in music, 26 in dance, and 8 in interdisciplinary courses. Theatre courses include: Theatre 165, 243Q, 254, 320, 542, 643, 651; any two of the following: Theatre 244, 253, 345; and one of the fo llowing: Theatre 222, 272, 375, 610. Dance courses include: Dance 120,130B,201,210.220,230, 301,310,330; and ill least 4 hours [rom Ule following: Dance 130], 225Q, 335, 605. Musjc requirements include: Applied Music 232Y, 415Y, 432Y; Music Performance: 113P, 114P, 212F, 213F, 340; and Music Composition: 129, 130. Interdisciplinary courses include: Theatre 180E, 330, 380E, 530, 555, 630. In addition. musical theatre malors will be expected to complete the 42 genera) education credits including Theab'e 260 as their Introduction to Fine Arts course and Theatre 623(2 as a Fine Arts Further Studies course. Total credit needed for graduation is 134 COLLEGE OFFlNE ARTS/nffiATRE 129 Bachelor of Arts in Theatre A minimum of 42 hours in theatre, including the following required c.lasses: Theatre 221Q, 243Q,254, 359, 623Q, 624Q, 728, and 1 credit each of 180 and 380; 8 hours of Theatre 244, 253, and 345; and 12 hours of electives chosen from the remaining courses in. the theatre curricu­ lum, 6 of which must be upper-division. Theatre Minor A minor in theatre consists of the foUow­ lllg required classes: Theatre 243Q, 244, 272, 359, 253, or 345 and 3 hours from the follOwing: Theatre 450, 623Q, or 624Q. CommunicationfIheatre For the Master of Art in Communica ­ tion/Theatre, see Communication. Lowe.r-Division Course :>143G. The Art of the Theatre. (3). General education introductory course. An introduc­ tion to the U'eatre as an art form emphasizing critical appreciati(Jn from the viewpoint of the audience. 165. Stage CombaL (1). Teaches the techniques of safe unarmed combat on the stage, in clud­ ing the safe execution of falls, rolls, punches, kicks, and the knap. 1BO. Theatre Practicum. (1). Practical trainlng: in the organization Ilnd presentation of play~ in the University Theatre program. Mav be organized in the following areas.: design olnd construction of scenery, costume5. Ilf proper­ ties; the de5ign and execution 01 stage lightil,g OT makeup; thc organization ilnd pr~clice of theatre management; and perfomlance. May be repea ted for crediL lBOE. Musical Theatre Performance. (1). Cross-listed as Dance 320 and Mus. P 2l1U. An interdisCiplinary practicum class for stu­ d~t5 cas t in a musical lheatre productiun. AdmlbSion is by audition. Gain rehearsal and performance experience in a Mainstage pro­ duction with orchestra. Rehearsals are in the eVenlnS5 for 6-10 weeks. Repeatable fur credit 218. Stage Move.Utent. (31 . Deals wlth bllsic warm-up:., strengthening and stamina exercis· es, and corrective-maintenance exercise:; II) aid in the development of an expressive body for the actor >221Q. Oral Lnterpretation. (3) . Ceneml edu­ cation further s tudies course. Cross-listed as Comm. 221Q. The development of the mental, vocal and analylicallechniques essential to the oral interpretation of jjterature. 222. Improving Voice and Diction. (3). Cross­ listed ru; Comm 222. For students wishing to improve lheir speaking voices and gain greater ontrol over their pronunciation of spoken English . Performnnce oriented. however, the anatomy of the vocal mOO\anism a.nd the inter­ nationa l Phonetic Alphabel are studied for practical .lpplication in the improvement of voice and diction, 130 225.Expressive Voice for the Stage. (3) . De(,el­ ops the individual's ability to express thQught and emotion on the stage through the effective use of the voi e. Uses exercises, drills, and p tic nd dramatic readings to improve the quali ty. tlexibllity a nd effectiveness of the spe king voice. Prerequisi te: Thea./Comm. 222. 230. Dialect for the SlagI'. (3). Familiarizes the student w ith certain regional American and foreign dialects. Intended to be a p ractical guide for the -tuden t actor who is called upon to reprod uce" particular dialect for perfor­ mance. Prerequisite: n,ea./Comm. 222. >241. Improvisation and Theatre Game . (3). Genera l education further studies course. For th e be inning tude nt in theatre . TIu ough exercises, analyses, and readings, the course contributes t th tra in ing of the studen t aClo r' s imagination, his/ her sense of stage pr fi nee, and . bil ity to explt re b ic compo­ nents of p laytexts. >243Q. Acting I. (3). General education further stud ies course. Emphasizes the internal te h­ niques of acting. characterization, and the actor's anal sis of the play and the role. 244. Stagec.ra!t. (4) . Ri Lab au. Theory nd practice of m aki ng, p a inting, nd using scenery far th e stage. Practie 1 work on Uni­ versity Theatr Mainstage an Se a nd Stage productions. Includes a two-hour lab. 253. Costuming for the Stage. (41. R; Lab. au. Introd uces principles of costume design and const n lCtion. TOllc.hes on all aspects of the de ign prace s from cone ption of jdea~ to final product on stage. Includes approaches to rendering the co tume deSign, ba ic pattern making, fabric selection, and dying . Practical ex peri 1Ce with University Theatre Mainstage and Second Stage productions. illdudes a two­ horrr lab. 254_ Stage Makeup. (2). Study and practice of the oa ic applicatio n of stage makeup . Also in ludes character analysi , anat my, materi ­ als, and special makeup techniques and prob­ 11'0"15. >260. History of Musical Theatre. (3). General educa on introductory course. A survey f the dev I pment of musical theatre III America from the late 1880 to present day. Explores the !lab ration of composers, directors, choreog­ raphers, and perf rmers that make this a Uniquely American art form . 272. Stage and Theat£e Management. (3). Acquaints tudents with the fundamenlals of stage dnd th < tre management. Studen study a ll technical aspects of p rod uction (budgets, schedules, properties, etc.). tn addition to class­ room projects, tudents are required to work as a stage manager or an assistant stage manager for a theatre production. PrerequiSite: sopho­ more standing. Upper-Division Course 300. Drafting. (3). The iundan\en tals of draft­ ing far th " the, tre. Include. drafting equip­ ment, geometry, lettering, symbols, draWings (orthographic, isometric, obliqu\!, sectiona l) and standard drawing used in theatre, floor plans, sections, elevation " working drawings, perspective. P.rerequisite: Thea. 244 and Art. F. 145. 320. Musical Theatre Analysis. (2). Enables U1 m usical theatre ma jor to analyze b 111 cript and score in a variety of musical theatre styles th t w ill nhance performance skills. Deals wi th d ramatic structure in the musical, differ­ ent m u icaI styles, and performance practice ' and how t apply this awareness into harac­ terizati In. 330. Musical Theatre Workshop I. (2). Cross­ listed as Dance 150L and Mus. P. 330 An inter­ di ciplinary practicum class with opportunities for student performers to refine rehearsal and performance skills necessary to musical the­ atre. Students pT parl! songs and cene~ and staging from the musical theatre repertory cul­ minating in a workshop performan e. Admis­ sion is by audition. 342. Advanced Acting. (3). Continued devel­ opment of methods established in The, . 243Q with additional emp hasis on contempo rary vocal and moveme.nttechniques. Prerequisites: Thea 243Q and sophomore tanding. 344. Scene De ign. (3). Fundamentals of ·cene design. Emphasizes strong work in perspective rendering, d rafting ted111iques and cal>, and playscript and spatial ,malysis. 345. Stage lighting. (4). Lab. aIT. Light design and its r labon t the production process and other design elements. Emphasize working knowledge of lighting equipment towards cre­ ativ implementation. Includes practical work on University Theatre Mainstage and Second Stage produ.c;tions. 359. Di.recting l. (3). R; L alT. Basic theories and principles of stage d irecting and problems of producing the p lay \ ith practical experience gained by w;e of the project methods. PrereqUi­ site: Thea. 243Q 244, 272 or departmental con­ sent. 375. Directed Projects in Theatre. (2-4). Inde­ pendent research or practic,tl and creative pro· jects in the ariou.o; areas of theatre including performance, design, technical theatre, man­ agement, and dramatic literature. Repeatable f r credit to a maximum of four hours. Prereq­ uisite: departmental consent. 380. Theatre Practicum. (1) . Practical train ing in the organiza tion and presentation of plays in the niversity Theatre p rogram. May be organized tn the following areas: design and construction of cenery, costume, or proper­ tiE!$; the design and execution of stage lighting or makeup; the organization and practice of theatre manag ment; and p rf rmance. May be repeated once for credit. 380E. Mus ica l Theatre Perfo.rmance. (1 ), Cross-l.isted as Dance 320 and Mus. P. 4 11 See Th a.180E >385. Theatre as a Mino.r of Today's America. (3). General education issues and perspectives course. Explore how contempora ry drama reflects the issues and pe.r.;pectives of difierent cu1t:ur and ~roups w ~ thin Arn:nca, In~ Lldi ng Afncan Am means, AJ;laD Amencans, Hispa nic A m r lcans, fem inists, gay~ an d Ie b ia n ~ . Exnm.il\ how today's th"atre' portrays the e groups, how it views their jjves in this COuntry and how it reflects their difference, fears <1 0;1 concerns and Similarities . Focuses on iSsues arising because of diversity of IJrure, nation· a li ties, race, gender, ethnicity, class, age, n,li­ gion ilnd politics. >450. Contemporary Theatre and Dra ma: Topics. (3). General education further studies cuurse. Investigates t h~ major deVI'l pments and dirf' ti ns in theatr ' and drama since WW IT Lncludes studies in directing acting, theatre archjtecture, des ign and production method , as well as dramatic llterahJTe. Pr r quL ite: junior t nding (60 hours) or c bove. 451. Portfolio Review. (1). Senior level. Help the technical theatre and design s tudent pre­ pare a f Irm I portfoli in ne or a combination of the design areas, a Te5Ume, and a presenta­ tion as an application suitable for either gra u­ ate school or future employment. Prerequu,ite: must be taken in graduating year. 455. Senior Jury. (t>. For the graduatin stu· dent in the peri rmance track f the BFA in Performing Arts /Theatre program. Requires a perfo rmance of material In recita l ci rcum· stances. Prerequisit : senior tanding. 480. Theatre Intern hip. (3-15). Advanced the­ atre production work as arranged b students in direction, acting, cenery and lighting, cos­ tume design and construction, or theatre man­ agement with professional theatre company. Prerequisite: junior standing or departmental consent. Gralluate studen ts must take Thea. 780. Tot, I of intern hip ac tivity ap pli , ble toward graduation is 15 credits. Courses for GraduatelUndergraduate Credit 510. Design Project (1). Advanced work in the problems of stage lighting des ign, costume design or scenic deslgn. Wit h the permission and · npervis ion of the appropriate fa culty member, the student designs for speci ic pro­ duc.tions for either Mainstage or Experimental Th atre. Repeatable twice fo r credit if taken in different design areas . PrereqUisite: i n~ truc· tor's consent. >516 & >517. PlaywTiting I and n. (3 & 3). Genera l ed ucat ion further studies courses. Cross-listed as Engl. 51 7 and 518. Th writing of scripts for performance. Emphasizes both verbal and vil;ual aspects of p laywri ting. It possible, the scripts are given in class readings by actors. Prerequisite: instructor's consent. 530. Musical Theatre Workshop D. (2) . CroSs- Ii ted a Mus. P. 530 . An in terdi ciplinary practicum class .... a scenic artist. Prerequisite: Thea . 244 555. Senior Project. (1). Cross-listed as Mus. P. 555. All interdisciplinary course to showcase the tal(!llts of graduating seniors to profession­ al prodUcers, agents, and casting d irectors. Stu­ dents develop and p rodu ce a variety show demonstrating their talents in singing, danc­ ing, acting, directing. and choreography. For majors only Prerequisite: instructor' s consent. 559. Directing n. (3). R;L arT. Staging and rehearsal techniques emphasizing the p rob­ lems of the period and stylized play. Prerequi­ sites: Thea. 359 or departn1ental consent and junior standing. 590. Theatre: Special Topics. (2-3). DeSigned to expand and strengthen the experience of the student academ ica ll y and professional ly . Study of developments in theatre tha t go beyond, or are rela ted ro, courses already offered will give students a much rlmer prepa­ ration for their field of study Topics include new technOlogy, new materials, contemporary explorations in performance, and in-depth study of production methods. 590£ . Musical Theatre Performance. (1). Cross-listed a.s Dance 320 and Mus. P. 711U. See Thea. 180E. 610. Directing the Musical. (3). An interdisci­ plinary course u tilizing interdeparmlen tal expertise (theatre, dance, music) t() teach the student how to produce a musical. Prerequi­ site: in ~tructor's consent. 622. Academic Theatre Practicum. (2). The investigation and exploration of the theatrical ,let in Ihe classroom situation within the Ulli­ versity community. Reinforces the ce5earching. writ ing, d irect'ing an d performing sk ills. Enrolled students, functioning ill> a compan)', produce and perform for various disciplines on campus. Repeatable once for credil. >623 Q. Development of the Theatre L (3). General education further studies course. The history of theatrical activity as a social instilu ­ tlon and an art form l'rom its begiTUlings to the 17th cen tury. lncludes represen ta tive plays, methods of staging ilnd t.heatrical arch itectur of various periods. >624Q. Development of lhe Theatre ll. (3). General educat ion further studies course. H is­ tory of theatrical activity as a sodal institution and an art form fro m the 17th century to t]le present. Includes representative p lays, meth­ ods of ~taging and theat rical architecl'ure of various periods. 630. Ope.ra/Musica.1 Theatre Audition. (1). Cross-listed as Mus . P. 790E. A practkum course which develops techniques and audi­ tion repertory singers will need to gain profes­ sional employment and/or successfully com­ pete for pJaceJllen l in advanced training pro­ grams. Also covers the business skills neces­ sary to a professJOnal careeT, and brings stu· dents in to contact witl, professional guest artists who can provide additional insight and coniacts. Prerequisite: instructm's consent. 643. Styles in Acting. (3). Training in. and develop ment of, the specia l techn iques required for period or stylized plays with spe­ cial emphasis on Greek, Sha.kespearian, and Res toration styles. Prerequisites: Thea . 243Q, 342 and junior standing. 647. Scene Design LI . (3) . Contin uation of Thea. 344 wit.h more advanced work in design­ ing settings for the stage and including studies in scenographiC teclmiques an.d exercises in model building. Student designs settings for a prod uction having a single set, a prodUction requiTing a simultaneous setting and a produc­ tion using multiple b(!ttingS. Requires no labo­ ratory work in theatre production. Prerequi­ sites: Thea. 244 and 344. 649. Stage Lighting n and Theatre Sound. (3). Continues the study and application of the the­ ories and techniques 01 Thea. . 345, emphasizing advanced concepts of design, and provides an introduction to theatre sound production. Pre­ requisite: Thea. 345. 651.. Scene Study. (3). The synthesis of all pre­ vious acting courses. Studies scenes in depth as preparation for performance. Course goal is the presentation of fully realized characteriza­ tions in those scenes studied, integrating the elenlents of the actor'~ craft learned in the pre­ requisite courses. Prerequisites: Thea . 643 and junior stand ing. 653. History of Costume. (3). R; L arT. Histori­ cal survey and individual researcl1 of dress from ancient Egypt to present day emphasiz­ ing social, political, economic and religiou infl uences. Theory and practice of adapting period styles to the stage. Prerequisite: Thea . 253 or departmental consent. COLLEGE OF FINE ARTS/ THEATRE 131 657. Costume Design 1. (3). Covers the tech­ niqu e~ l lf costume design for the stage . Stu­ dents strengthen and expand their knowledge of tecl1niques i.n costume design for the stage, film and television Prerequisi tes: Art F. 145, 1l1ea. 2.53. 675 . Directed Study. (2-4). Cross-listed as CO l\1 m . 675 . l ndividual study or p ro ject s. Repeatable for credit with departmental con­ sent. Prerequisite: departmen t Bu lleH" . Policies Undergraduate Admission Stud~nts who have declared a major in one of the programs in health professions will be admitted direct! to the College of Health Professi n upon admissi n to WSU. Admission to the college does n t guar­ antee acceptance into any of the under­ graduate professional progr m5. To be admitted to a professional program, ·tl!­ dent must be accepted into Wichita State Unive ity and the College of Haith Pro­ fessi ,apply or admission to a particu­ lar progra m, a nd be accepted by the admission committee of tha t progrclm. See the individual programs for a plica­ tion proc dures. Progression T progress m course offered .ln the clini­ cal programs, students mus t earn an S, r . or C r be tter in program cour es r qu ir d for the m ajor a nd any othe r courses 0 designated by th program. Tn cou es which combine theory and clini­ cal practice, students must receive an S, f , or C or better in both segments of thl' ourse in order to pass the cow·se. Stu­ den who fail to meet these requi renlen ts may be dismissed from lhe program. If the tudent's overall grade point average remain.s a t 2. 0 or above, the tu dent may petition lhe Committee n dmis­ sion ,!TId Progression in his / her program 10 remain in tJle program. Studen ts should check the individual program sec­ tio ns of the Ulldergraduate Catalog for addi tional requirements. Probation and Dismissal students are placed on probation for the next term in which they enroll if their WSU grade point average falls below 2,000. Students remain on probation even though they earn a 2.000 grade point average in the term during which they are on probation if their WSU cumulative grade point average is not at least 2.000. Probation is removed when a student's WS u grade poin t ave rage mee ts the required academic level , Students all probation may not enroll ior more than 12 semester hours in the iaB or spring semester, or five hours in the Summer Session~ excluding one hour oi physical education _ Exception to this limitation may be made on the recom­ mendation of a student's advisor with the npproval of the dean of the college, Stu dents on probation are subjec t to academic d ismissal from the college if their grade point average for the semester during whicll they are on p robation falls below 2,000. Dismissal will not occur until students fai l to achieve a 2.000 grade point average for the last 12 hou r attempted while on probation. Students assigned to affiliating health faci lities f aT cl inical education will be subject to dismissal from the professional program for failure to comply with the rules. re~ulations, or professional stan ­ dards governing that facility , Exceptions Students may petition the program, col­ lege, or University for exception to any requ irement. Students are required to dis­ CUss all petitions with their college/pro­ gram advisor prior to submission of the petition Petitions mayor may not be approved by the body to whom the peti­ tion is Dlade, Graduation Requirements All hea lth professiOns students who are pUrsuing bachelor's degrees must meet ~enera1 University requirements and illl­ tl\l the course requirements specified iD the CUrriculum of the department offering the degrees , A minimum of 30 credit hours in course Work in residence at WSU is required for all students seeking bacllelofs degrees at IVSU, In addition, Ulese students must also complete all University, college, il.!1d departmental requiremen ts for th e degrees being sought. Completion of Uni­ versity courses is counted toward fulfill ­ men t of the residency requirem ent. Por specific requirements, consult the uldi­ vidual program sections of the Cat alog. Credit by Examination Some of the programs in the College of Health Professions offer equivalency or competency examinations. By taking these exams, students may eilITl credit or receive advanced placement. To qualify for such exams, students must 1, Be accepted in to the program (major) in which the course is offered as part of the profesSional curriculum. 2. Meet any other e ligibiLi ty require ­ ments stated by the particular program. (See the appropriate progran1's section in lhe Catalog ,) Exception to these requirements may be granted to nonmajors by the chairper­ son I director of the program offering the course with the approvaJ of the College of Health Professions Admissions-Excep­ tions Committee and the dean. Students should check with their pro­ gram advisors regarding eligibility and prerequisite requirements for thic; type of examination, Transcripts will identify the courses and credits received by students taking equivalency / competency exami­ nations. Fees are assessed, in advance, for the administration of the examinations, Cooperative Education The College of Health Professions is one of the participating colleges in the Uni­ versity Cooperative Education program , This program is designed to provide off­ campus paid employment experiences that integrate, complement, and enhance tlle student's regular academic program while providing academic credit. Stu­ dents are placed for field study experi­ ences in a variety of health settings, including hospitals and community agen­ cies, Individualized field studies are for ­ mulated in consultation with the student and the employer and a.re approved by the progra m faculty advisors and th.e cooperative education coordinator for the college . Part icipa tion tn the p rogram requires enrollment for credit in specific coopera tive education courses designated by the various academic programs in the college; these undergraduate courses may have prerequisites or other specific requirements for enrollmenL To emoU in the program or for more information, stu­ dents should contact the college coopera- COLLEGE OF HEALTH PROFESSIONS ]33 tive educa tion coordinator or the pr,, ­ gram adv isor. ainica! Affiliation The co llege, because of its location in Wichita, has affiliation agreemen ts with various excellent health facilities which assist in the cJinical education of students, The clinica l affiliates include a wide vari ­ ety of hospitals, long-term care facilities , public schools, private practitioners, and community agencies. Liability Insurance Requirements, Health Insurance, and Health Standards Most students are required to purchase professional liability insurance (the spe­ cific level is determined by the profes­ siona l program) as well as persona l health insurance at the beginning of the profeSSional phase of a College of Health Professions program , Additionally, other health standards are reqUired prior to entry into the- clinical agencies. Students :llould communicate ,'lith individual pro­ grams about specific requirements. Financial Assistance Scholarships and student loan funds are avaHable for s tudents in heal th profes­ sions . Information on these and other scholarships and 103ns is available from the Wichita Sta te University Office of Stu­ dent FUlanoal Planning and Assistance and the program from which the student is seeking a degree or certificate, Special Certificate Program The College of Health Professions offers a certificate program in basic emergency care training, It cooperates with the Col­ lege of Education in offering a certifica­ ti on program for school nurses (see ursing), Degree Requirements and Course Listings School of Health Sciences The School of Health Sciences oHers pro­ grams leading 10 the Bachelor of Science in Health Services Organization and Poli­ cy, the Bachelor of Science-Medical Tech­ nology, and the Bachelor of Science ­ Physician Assistant. In addition, the Associate of Science is awarded in dental hygiene and physical therapist assistant. The school also offers a certificate in basic Emergency Medical Training (EMT) and a program for the 134 training of Mobile Intensive Care Techni­ cians (MICT) or paramedics. The School of Health Sciences offers the Master o f Public Heal th and Master of Physical The ra py degr es , F r m re informa tion ab ul the master's degree programs, refer to the WSU Graduate BIII­ let ill , Sp eifie r q uirement f r each degree are described under the appropriate list­ ing below. Dental Hygiene Associate of Science The associate degree program in dental hygiene pr vide tuden ts with knowl­ edge of the social, d tal, and clinical sci ­ ences and competencies needed by the d n tal hygienist in contributing to the attainment of optimum oral health for all people. Up on c mpletion of the five ­ semester program (including one sum­ m r), stud nts are eligible to take the national, regional, and state examinations fo r licensure as d I1ta l hygienists , The Wichita State ni ver ity pr ogram is acer dited by the American Dental Asso­ cia tion's Commission on D ntal Accredi­ t tion, The Bachelor of Science in Health Ser­ vices Organizatjon and P licy degree is , vailable students who seek to expand their role in ducation or administration. Students interested in more information should conta t the college dean's office student advisor, Professional Curriculum A dIII iss ioll , In addition to fulf illing all requirements for ad mission to the Uni­ versi ty, students wishin :r to roll in the den tal hygiene program must pply for, and obtain approval of, the Admissions Committee of the Dental Hygiene Depart­ ment. Acceptance in to the Colle e of Hea lth Professions does not guarantee admission into the dental h gien pr ­ gram, Persons in teres t d in tl1e den tal hyg iene program s hould d irect thei r inquiries to the Chair person, De n tal Hygiene Department, Wichita State Uni ­ versity, Wichita, Kansas 67260-0144. To qualify fo r admission to the denta l hygiene p rogram, p pl1ca n ts mus t be high school graduates or have passed the General Educati n Development test. Stud en ts mus t mee t the follo wing admission criterja. They must 1, Have taken or be enr Iled in BioI. 223, Human Anatomy and Physiology; Chern. 103Q, General Ch mistry; EngL 101, College English I; Ps . 1l 1Q, General Psyc.holog ; BioI. 220Q, lntr duction to Microbiology; and PHS 331Q, Principles f Dietetics nd utrition 2. Mai ntain a minimum grade point average of 2.500 in all college work 3, Have d min imum grade of C in all pr r uisite courses 4. Complete Wichit State University and College of Healt.h Professions general admission requirements. Students must also ha e their admis­ sion approved by the program's commit­ tee on admissions. Curriculu m. The f liowing ourses, totaling 81 hours, must be taken by dental hygiene stu.dents. . C OIITS H" . Prereq uisite courses for admission to the den t I hyl!iene program: BioI. 223, Human Anatomy and Pilysiol gy ... ...... .. ... .......... ,....... .......... ".....5 Chern. 1 3Q, General Ch mistry .... ... ....... EngL 101 , College English I ........... ... ........3 Psy. l11Q, General Psychology ...... ... .....3 BioI. 220Q, Introduction to Micr biology.. ..... ... ................. .............. ...4 PHS 331Q, Principles of Dietetics and Nutri tion ...."'...,.......... .... ............... ',.. ,,'. ,...3 Plus the foll ing: Corom. 111, Publi Speaking ....... .......... .. .. Soc. 111Q, lntr d uction to Sod 1 gy .... ...3 DH 101, Preclinical Dental Hygiene ........5 DH 104, Clinical Radiology ............. .. ..... ,..4 DH 201, Dental Hygien Concepts ,.........3 DH 202, Clinical Dental Hygiene r ...........3 DH 206, General and Oral Pat1lOlogy ......3 DH 290, Oral Anatomy ,................... .. .... ... .1 DH 295, Oral Hist logy and Embryology.........."....... ,................... ...."..2 DH 301, Den tal Materials ... .. ........... ... ......2 DH 302, Clinical Dental Hygiene 0 .. ..... ...2 DH 303, Dental Hygiene Concepts II ......2 DH 304, Dental Hygiene Concepts rn ......2 DH 314, In troducti n t Periodontics, ,... .2 DH 315, Advanced Peridontics .... .. .. ".......1 DH 307, Ethics and Jurisprudence ....... .. ..2 DH 310, Community Dental Hygiene ... ,,3 DH 316, Pain Management ....."...... .. .. ... ... .2 DH 323, Clinical Dental Hygiene ID..... .. ..3 DH 324, Clinical Dental Hygiene rv ...... ..4 DH 409, Introduction to Researcll for the Health Prof ssions ... ... ... "... ......... l PHS 301, Pharmacology .. ......... ............. "...3 PHS 315, Head and Ned< Anatomy ........2 Special Requirements Students are required to purchase uni­ forms and instruments needed during clinical learning experiences. Students also are renCes the practic of dental hyglt'ne, PTerequl5ite: departmental consent. COLLEGE OF HEALTI-I PROFES5TONSIDENTAL HYGIENE 135 295. Oral His tology and Embryology. (2). Studies th e developmental and mkroscopi c anatomy of the oral cavity includillg hard and 50ft tissu es. Prerequisi te: departmen tal con­ sent. Upper-Division Courses 301 . Dental Materials. (.2). lR; 2L. Fundamen­ tal instruction in practical laboratory p hases of modern technique and the mnnipuli:l tinn of materials an d equipment used III dental prac­ tice and expanded auxiliary practice. Prerequi­ site: program consent. 302. Clinical Denta.l Hygiene 11. (2). Contin­ ued developmen t of profi ciency of clin ica l techniques emphasizing advanced periodontal instrumentation techniques. Oass meets dur­ ing Summer Session . Prerequisite: program consent. 303. Dental Hygiene Concepts fl. (2). Fa ll semester only. Seminar discussion of current and ad vanced clinical concepts as well as other topics related to the treatment of the medically compromjsed patient. Prerequisi tes; DH 201 and program consent. 304. Dental Hygiene Concepts Ill. (2). Spring semester only. Discussion of dental special ties and explanation of the rationale for treatment prescribed by the den tis t. Prerequisite: pro­ gram consen t. 307. Ethics and Jurisprudence. (2). Spri ng semester ol1.ly. Surveys laws govern ing the practice of dentistry and dental hygiene; types of profeSSional work for which studellts nl~y qualify; the economics ,md ethics of the profes­ sion. Prerequisite: progranl consent. 310. Community Dental Hygiene. (3). Covers dental public heal th il nd community denta l hygiene, fot:Usi ng on educa tion and preven­ tion. Covers the p ro fessiona l philosophy and found ations of dental hea lth educa tion in a commUJl ity health context, as well as in-depth study of certain aspects of dental public health such as fluorida ti on, epidemiOlogy, and pro­ gram development. Students develop derltal health education materials and give presenta­ tions in the comm Wlity. 314. Introduction to Periodontics. (21. Spring semester only. Lecture and visual aid presenta­ tion of the etiology and classification of peri· odontal disease. Studies the treatm ent of the period on tal ly involved pati ent emphasiz.i ng appropriate treatme nt plannin g for specific periodontal conditions. Prerequisite: program consent. 315. Advanced Periodontics. (1). A continua­ tion of DH 314. Discusses supplemental diag­ nostic me thods of assessmen t of peridon ta l diseases; trea tment of unusual peridontal dis­ eases iIlCluding HIV period ontitis; ad junctive periodontal therapies induding an tibiotics and antimicrobial agen ts; implant maintenance and Surgical therapies. EmphaSizes the evaluation of periodontal case studies resul ting in com­ prehensive treatment planning. Prerequisite: DH 314.. 316. P a in Management. (2). 1 R; 2L. Fa ll semester only. Enhances the den tal hygiene student' s knowledge of the m ech anism s of pam, the control of dental pain throu gh the admin is tra tiu)l of topical .anes thetics, infiltra ­ tion, and block anesthesia; and use of ni trous oxide. Empha<;izes a thorough understanding of the pharmacology of dental drugs and their interaction with the client' s CllITent conditions Il nd med icatIons. Prerequisites: PHS 301 and 315. 323. Clinkal Dental Hygiene Ill. (3). 12L. Fall s.ernester only. Continued development of clll1­ ical proficiency and utilization of various scal­ ing techniques ilnd ins truments. Prerequisite: program consent. 324. Clinical Dental Hygiene I V. (4) . 16L. Spring semester only. Final semester of clinical dental hygiene. Students utilize i.nforma tion and skills acquired in previous courses and cont inu e to dem ons tra te pro ficie ncy a n d illcrease their level of competen~y in all objec­ tives from DH 202, 302, 3J1d 323. Prerequisite: program consent. 348. Clinic.al Skills Update. (1-3). P rovides clinical remediation to graduate dental hygien­ ists who w ish to review and enha nce clinical sld ll s . Stu den ts develop (l self-s tudy p la n w hich will enrich their knowledge and skill above that offered i.n the den tal hygiene core curriculum. Emphasizes identifica tion of clini· cal skill level, developmen t of remedia ti on schedule, and sel f-evaluation skills . Student negotiates with dental hygiene program as to the hours of l.ecture and clinical practice need­ ed to reach studen t' s goals Graded CrINCr . Prerequisite: must be a gradua te oJ an accredi t­ ed dental hygiene program. 350. Pain Management. (;2.). Updates the prac­ ticing dental hygienist in t.he didactic and d.ini­ cal admjn ist ra tion of infil tration and b lock a nes tlles! " and the use of ni tr ous nxide . Emphasi z.e~ the mechanisms of pain, a thor­ ough und erstanding of the phannacology of dental drugs, and their interactions with the cl ient's current cond it ions and medications. and clinical experience in the administration oj inffitration and block anes thesia. Prerequisite: must be licensed dental hygienist and graduate of an accredited dental hygiene program. 40 5. Concept s and Principles of D ental Hygiene Administra tion. (3). Examination and semillil.r discussion of the following topics: adm inistrative theory, principles and concepts of organ iza t io ns , h is tory of manag ement thought, p lanning and effecting innovation, busi ne.ss administra tion 8l1d finance, opera­ tions, m 0tivCl tion, leaders hip , conflic t, and comn1ul1icahon. Prerequisite; program con­ sent. 409. Introduction to Research for the He.alth Professions. (1). An introduction to the scope, format, and use of researm in the health pro­ fessions. Develops the abili ty to be a critical consumer of professional literalure and the ini­ tia tor of research p rojects. Prerequisi te: pro­ gram consent. 420. Educational Method ology in Dental Hygiene. (3). Seminar dealing with the imple­ mentation of teaclling and learning theory and its application in the formation of a course of instruction. Students gain experience in teach­ ing undergrad uate students in laboratory / clin­ ical settings. Prerequisite: program consent. 425. Advanced Periodontics. (3). An in-depth study of advan.ced periodontal, diagnostic, and treatment modalities with applica ti on to th e clinic.al setting uti lizing evidence-based patient specific p rotocols. Expands student's abi lity in asseSSD1ent, djagnostic, and tTea tment plan­ ning skills. Prerequisite: DH 314 and 315 or equivalent. 430. Curriculum Deve lopment ill Dental Hygiene Education. (3). A continuation of D.H 420. Focuses on the development of an educa­ tional curricu lulD for a den ia l hygiene pro­ gram. Addi tional opportunities are available for in struc tion in the cl inical / labora tory set­ tinp; . PrerequiSite: progrDm consent. 452. Community Dental Health Management. (3). Focuses on the oral health care delivery system and the role of the dental hygie.nist in managing oral heal th care. Emphas.izes com­ munity and dental public health settings and popula tion groups underserved by the m rrent private practice setting. PrerequiJ,;te: DH 310 OT eqtlivalen t. 455. Personn el Manageme n t in Den ta l Hygiene. (3). Analysis of person.nel manage­ ment and completion of a pe7sonnel simula­ tion, incl uding job analysis .. rec.ruitment, inter­ viewing, testing, job evaluation, wage determi­ na tion, trai ning, employee evalua ti on , an d career development. Prerequisite: prog ram consent. · Mathematics and Science Bioi gy and laboratory r prerequisite to Anatomy .......... ........ .......................... 4-5 COLLEGE OF HEALTH PROFESSIONS/PHYSICAL THERAPY 13 l'hysiCS withou t laboratory ... ... .. ... ........ ....3 Human Anatomy and Physiology ....... .. 4-5 College Algebra .. ... ........... .. ...... .. ................. 3 Soc/al Sciellce Introduction to Sodology.. .......... ..... .......... 3 General Psychology ................. ...... .. ............ 3 Huma nities EthiCS or Introduction to Philosophy ...... .3 speech ... ............. .. ... .. .. ... .... ...... ....... ............. .3 lJasic Skill:; college English ... ........ ............ ............. .. .. ....3 Con tact the Wich ita State University Department of Physical Therapy for addi­ tional information. Ap plicat ion p ackets are available in october- and are accepted in February­ for consideration for the class starting the following June. The program accepts 24 students per year. Professional Curriculum The profess ional curriculum ta kes 14 mon UlS. AU physical therapy procedure and cl in ical courses must be taken sequentially. Professiona l course work taught in the classroom will be offered durin g evening hours . Clinical course work is a full -time activity (eight hours per day for two-, four-, or six-week peri ­ ods, 8 B.m.-5 p.rn.) Course Hf5. PE 328, Kinesiology and Biomechanics .... ..................... ....... .. .... .... ..3 PHS 400, Introduction to Pathophysiology ............... ... ......... ....... .. ...3 PTA 200, P'TA Procedures 1... ........ ............4 PTA 205, PTA Procedures fT ..... ............. .. ..4 PTA 210. PTA Proceduresill ............... .. ....4 PTA 215, PTA Procedures N .. ... ... ..........4 PTA 220, PTA Procedures V ...... ....... ... ... .. .3 PTA 225, PTA Clinical 1... ....... ....... ........... ..2 PTA 230, PTA Clinical ll...... ... .......... ...... 4 PTA 235, PTA Cfuucal ill ................... ........6 PTA 240. Independellt Study ...... .. .............2 Contact the Department of Physical Therapy for comple te course descrip · tions. Special Re'luiremen StUdents will be required to purchase lab jackets and other clinical apparel, profes­ Sional liability illSurance, health insur­ ance coverage, and specilied immuniza­ tions as well as submi t evidence of an annual physical examination while in the program . Students must also be certified in cardiopulmonary resuscitation (CPR) prior to entering the clinical rotations. Students are expected to provide their OWn trans portation to and from the health care faci li ties used for cl inical experiences. During clinical assignments outside Wichi ta, s tudents are required to ay aU living and travel expenses. Students are referTed to the Department of Physical Therapy Shldellt HmtLtbook for more details on special depa r tmen taJ policies and procedures. Lower-Division Course 200. PTA Procedures I. (4). Features theory and ~kiU development for basic physica.l thera­ py s~. Emphasizes range of motion, aseptic teclmique. posture, bed positioning, massage, goniometrlc measurements, manua l muscle testing, bandaging, wheelchairs, architectural barriers, ambu lation, safety .. and vita l signs. Includes psychosocial aspects of patient car and a :;clf-directed btudy of medical terminolo­ gy. All ski lls are reInforced and practiced in supervised scheduled laboratories. Discusses basic instruction in SOAP formal note writing. Prerequisite: admission to PTA program. 205. PTA Procedures n. (4). Emphasizes the theory and practi cal application of physical agents utilized in physical therapy. Covers instruction in modali ties ~uch as therapeutic heat and cold, pho totherapy, hydro therapy, electrotherapy, p neumotherapy, and traction . Includes an introduction to therapeutic exer­ cise and gail. Reinforces all skills through com' bined application during supervised laborato­ ry sessions. Prerequisite: PTA 200. 210. PTA Procedw:es Ill. (4) . Emphasizes L1ter­ apeuric exercise, or thotics, prostheticS, and rci1abilitat iolJ programs for various patien t opu lntions including amputees, spinal cord and spinal disorders, stroke, pediatri..:, neuro­ logical, orUlopedic, and cardiopulmonary con­ ditions. Prerequisite: PIA 200. 215. PTA Procedures IV. (4). Emphasizes ther­ apeu t-i c exercise and physical therapy treat­ ment p rograms for various patient populations ind uding ar th ritis , burn, cancer, s ports medicine, cardiopulmonary, geria triC, industri­ al medicine, and MDS. Summarizes psycho ­ logical, sex ual, and vocatio nal aspects of patient care as related to clinical conditions. Prerequisite: PIA 21 220. PTA Procedures V. (3). Emphasizes pro­ fessional aspects of the physical therapist assis· tant, including topics such as reimbursement, leg isllltiOn , continu ing education , code of ethics , professional re lati ons, research, employment. and C\lrrent developments in the fi eld. Broadens Students' understanding of professional responsibility and motivates li,em toward personal involvement, commitment, and conl inuing mmpetence in the physical therapy profession. ln cludes a special topics section coveri ng 1M] dysfunction, basic phar­ macology, and orthopedic radiography. Pre­ requiSite: PTA 210. 225. PTA Clinical I. (2). Involves observation of vi)rious types of patients in loc.,l clinical set­ tings \'lTith some practicum of skills learned in Procedures 1. Entails ongoing communication among the clinical coordinator, studen t., and academlc coordinator. Gives opportunities to observe and work with a variety of patients in II supervised capacity and to begin developing competence as a medica l team member. Pre· reauisite: admission to PTA Drogram . 230. PTA Clinical n. (4). A practicum of ,kiUs learned in Procedures 1 to m. Opporhmi.ties to be placed ill a diversi ty l1f health tare settings wi thin and outside the city ilnd to practice the applicabon of alJ skills in a directly supervised manner. Prerequisite: PTA 225. 235. PTA Oinical m. (6). Allows the student to be placed in health care facilities across th Uni ted States. Opportunities to practice appli­ cation of all skills with indirect supervision on a variety of patients. Prerequisite: PTA 230. 240. Independent Study. (1). In consultation wilil selected faculty member, student ~elects for intensive study a specific problem ()r area of concern related to p hysit.ll therapy, al low­ ing studen t to focus on specific subject matter f interes t to him/ her and to c;ollect and inves­ tigate materials related to tha t subject. Student deve lops an area or topiC of expert ise by exploring and compiJj ng information. Prereq­ uisite: PTA 2] 0. Master of Physical Therapy The program prepa res ind ividuals to enter beginning practice as a physical therapist. Tht! graduates are prepared to evaluate neuromuscular, m usculoskele­ tal, sensorimotor, and rela ted functions to determine the degree of muscle strength, motor development motion, respiratory ventilation, or peripheral circulatory effi ­ dency of individual.s. Following referra ls from phYSiCians, podiatrists, or dentis ts, the physical therapist plans and im ple­ ments appropl'iate treatment programs for their clients. Graduates are p repared to work in p reventive health care as wen as rehabilitative care. The program requires fuJl- tiroe study for a period of 26 consecutive months . Stud ents en ter the program in the summer semester only . Admission Requirements Admission to the program requires tha t the student: ] . Have a bachelor's degree from an accredited fou r-year institution accept­ able to the Graduate SchooL 2. Have a cumulative grade pOin t aver­ age of 3.000 in the last 60 hOllIS of graded undergraduate courses, in prerequ isite cou rses, and in all math and science courses. 3. Show evidence of completing U1e fol­ lowing: Biology-two semesters of introductory -iology (which would lead to a biology major) with a laboratory Anatomy and Physiology--e:ight to 10 semester hours with laboratory College Chemistry-two semesters with laboratory 140 College Phy ics-two sem~ters with laboratory English Comp sition-two semesters Exercise Physiol gy- ne emester Computers--one s ester computer appUcations course or the equivalent Speech--one S mester Mathemati~oUege trigonometry or equivalent Statistics-one semester Social Sciences-psychology , sOciology, p lus four more courses in any sodal cience area Humanities---ethics, plus four more courses in any humanities area 4. Show evidence o£ 20 hours of ob er­ vation or work in one or more p hysical therapy settings. To be revi wed for ad.mi sion, • pplicants sh uld do the following: 1. Seek an applicati n packet from Ule Departm .nl of Physical Therapy. 2. Submit the Je Ignated Applica tion for Admi. sion and supporti ng transcripts to the Graduate School. 3. Submit the designated Physica l Ther­ apy Application, a lung with three refer­ en es by th published deadJin~. Applications will be accepted for review on ly if they are postmarked in the last two weeks in Janua ry. Applications recei ed at anv othe r t ime will be returned to the send r unreviewed. Applicants w ill be notified of their adm is­ sion sta tus by the Gradu ate School. App lica nt h uld be aware that their records can only be reviewed when all materials have been submitt d and they have met eligibility rules. Once an appli­ cant has been admitted, he or she will be ked to submit a $100 nonrefundable tuition clepo it to reserve a sp ce for the summer admi ion . O nce the tuden t enrolls , thi s mon ev will be c u nted toward paymen t of n;ition. tudents iiI advi ed to ontac l the department for any changes in the pro­ gram course reqU irements or in prerequi­ site requirements. Degree Requirements The tudent must maintain a 3.000 grade p int average and a C or better in each of the allowing ourses: COll rse Hrs. Summer I .PT 715, Professional Issues and Ethics ....3 IT 705, OinicaI Medicine I .. .. .. .. . ... .. .........2 PT 707, Introduction to Basic Patient Managem 11l... ........ .. .. ....... ... .. ... ..... .. .... .. .. 2 7 Fall I PT 701 , Research Method and Statistics ...... .............. ... ........ ...... .... ...... ..... 2 PHS 700, Gross Human Anatomy ...... ...... 6 PT 71 0, Foundations for Evalua hon and Treatment of Musculoskel tal Conditions ....... ................ .... .. ... .. ..... ... ..... ...3 PHS 71 1, Clinical Biom manics ............. . . PT 726, Clinical Medicine rf... .. ... .... ...... :::.::2 16 SpriNg I PT 841, Directed R~earch ... .. .......... ....... 1-3 PHS 720, Neur scie.nce ......... ..................... 3 PT 745, Clinical Medicine 1ll ......... ...... ... ...2 PT 730, Therapeutic Exercise .......... ........ ..1 PT 747, Assessment and Intervention . in Acute Cond ition ... ......_.. .. .... ...... ..... ..2 PT 735, Physical Agents in Physical Therapy ...... ..... ... ... ...... .. ...... ..4 13-15 SlilIllllt:r [J PT 800, Clinical Education 1 ...... ... ..... ... ... .. 6 6 Fall [J PT 841, Directed R~earch ..... ................ .1-3 PT 816, Ad mirustration L.... .. ........ .... ..... ..2 PT 809, Orthopedic Assessment and Intervention I .... ....... ... .. ..... ..... ...... ... .3 PT 832, Neurological Asses ment and Intervention ................ .. ........... . ... .. . 3 PT 865, Liiespal1 Assessment, Intervention, and Prevention .... .... ... .... .2 PT 824, Education Methods in Physical Therapy . ... .......... ... ........ .... ... ... .1 PT 840, Directed ShJdy, elective .... .... ....1-3 13-17 Sprin